SewerCAD V8i User's Guide PDF

Chapter
Welcome to Bentley 1
SewerCAD V8i Help
“Getting Started” on page 1-1 “Loading” on page 7-349

Learn about Bentley SewerCAD V8i, how to install and uninstall the Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i data loading features to
product, and how to contact Bentley Systems. extend your model.
“Introducing the Workspace” on page 2-7 “Calculating Your Model” on page 8-421
Learn about the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace, including menus, Learn how to create and manage "what-if" scenarios.
toolbars and dockable managers.
“Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-71 “Using Scenarios and Alternatives” on page 9-447
Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley SewerCAD Learn how to define calculation options, calculate your model, and
V8i. review your results.
“Starting a Project” on page 4-129 “Presenting Your Results” on page 10-509

Learn how to set up a new project, manage existing project and set Learn how to present results in graphs, profiles and reports.
project and other global options.
“Using Modelbuilder” on page 5-157 “Working in AutoCAD Mode” on page 12-665

Learn how to use ModelBuilder to use your existing data in your Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode.
models.
“Creating Your Model” on page 6-203 “Theory” on page 13-675

Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i layout and editing tools to Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
build your model.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide 1-1

1-2 Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Welcome to Bentley SewerCAD V8i
Help1
Chapter 1: Getting Started1

What is Bentley SewerCAD V8i?1-1
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates1-2
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration1-2
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT1-3
Troubleshooting1-3
UPDATING YOUR SENTINELLM LICENSES IF YOU MOVE YOUR LI-
CENSE SERVER1-4
UPDATING YOUR BENTLEY SELECT SERVER LICENSES IF YOU
MOVE YOUR LICENSE SERVER1-4
Checking Your Current Registration Status1-4
Documentation1-4
Quick Start Lessons1-5
Chapter 2: Introducing the Workspace7

The Workspace2-7
Stand-Alone Editor2-7
Microstation Mode2-8
AutoCAD Mode2-9
CONTOUR LABELING2-9
Menus2-10
File Menu2-10
Edit Menu2-14
Analysis Menu2-16
Components Menu2-17
View Menu2-18
Tools Menu2-21
Report Menu2-23
Help Menu2-23
Toolbars2-24
Layout Toolbar2-26
Standard Toolbar2-27
Edit Toolbar2-29
View Toolbar2-29
Scenarios Toolbar2-31
Analysis Toolbar2-31
Compute Toolbar2-32
Tools Toolbar2-32
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-i

Help Toolbar2-35
Components Toolbar2-36
Reports Toolbar2-37
Select Toolbar2-37
Zoom Toolbar2-39
Customizing the Toolbars2-41
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons2-41
Controlling Toolbars2-41
Dynamic Manager Display2-42
Opening Managers2-43
Customizing Managers2-45
Using Customizations2-46
Customization Manager2-46
CUSTOMIZATION EDITOR DIALOG BOX2-48
Moving Models between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary/
SewerCAD2-49
Using Named Views2-58
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables2-59
Moving Models between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary/
SewerCAD2-63
Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons71

Lesson 1 - Creating a Schematic Network3-71
Part 1 - Creating a New Schematic Project File3-72
Part 2 - Entering Data3-76
ENTERING DATA THROUGH THE PROPERTIES EDITOR3-77
ENTERING DATA THROUGH FLEXTABLES3-79
ENTERING INFILTRATION DATA FOR GRAVITY PIPES3-81
STEADY STATE LOADING3-81
EXTREME FLOW FACTORS3-86
Part 3- Calculating the Model3-89
Lesson 2 - Automatic Design3-91
Part 1: Specifying Design Constraints3-91
Part 2: Design3-95
Lesson 3 - Scenario Management3-96
Part 1 - Opening the Project File3-96
Part 2 - Creating Alternatives3-96
Part 3 - Editing Base Scenarios3-101
Part 4 - Creating Child Scenarios3-102
Part 5 - Calculate and Compare3-104
Lesson 4 - Presentation of Results3-106
Part 1 - Reports3-106
Contents-ii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Part 2 - FlexTables3-109
Part 3 - Element Annotation3-113
Part 4 - Create a Profile3-115
Part 5 - Color Coding3-117
Lesson 5 - Running an Extended Period Simulation3-118
Part 1 - Entering and Applying Loading Patterns3-119
Part 2 - Entering Hydrographs3-121
Part 3 - Running the Extended Period Simulation3-123
Part 4 - Time Based Graphs and Tables3-123
Part 5 - Animations3-125
Chapter 4: Starting a Project129

Welcome Dialog Box4-129
Projects4-130
Setting Project Properties4-130
Setting Options4-131
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab4-131
Stored Prompt Responses Dialog Box4-135
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab4-135
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab4-137
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab4-138
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab4-141
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab4-142
Considerations for ProjectWise Users4-144
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise 4-144
Performing ProjectWise Operations4-145
Importing Data From Other Models4-148
Importing Data from a SewerCAD V8 Database4-149
Importing a Submodel4-149
Importing from LandXML4-150
Importing StormCAD V84-151
Importing from SewerGEMS V84-152
Converting SewerCAD 5.x Models to the Latest Version4-152
Exporting Data4-154
Exporting a .DXF File4-155
Exporting a Submodel4-155
Exporting to LandXML4-155
4-156
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-iii

Chapter 5: Using Modelbuilder157
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder5-157
ModelBuilder Connections Manager5-160
ModelBuilder Wizard5-163
Step 1—Specify Data Source5-164
Step 2—Specify Spatial Options5-166
Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options5-168
Step 4—Additional Options5-170
Step 5—Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class5-173
Step 6—Build operation Confirmation5-177
Reviewing Your Results5-178
Multi-select Data Source Types5-178
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages5-178
Warnings5-179
Error Messages5-180
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder5-181
Sample Spreadsheet Data Source5-182
The GIS-ID Property5-183
GIS-ID Collection Dialog Box5-185
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder5-185
Importing Pump Definitions Using ModelBuilder5-187
Using ModelBuilder to Import Pump Curves5-192
Using ModelBuilder to Import Patterns5-196
Chapter 6: Creating Your Model203

Elements and Element Attributes6-203
Link Elements6-204
ENTERING ADDITIONAL DATA TO LINK ELEMENTS6-204
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe6-204
Diversion Rating Curve Dialog Box6-206
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element6-206
Irregular Channel Editor Dialog Box6-207
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element6-208
THE IS REVERSED? PROPERTY6-208
SPLIT (BIFURCATED) IRREGULAR CHANNELS6-209
CONDUIT CONTROL STRUCTURES DIALOG BOX6-210
Depth-Flow Curve Dialog Box6-213
Side Weir6-213
Manholes6-214
FLOW (DOWNSTREAM CONDUIT)6-214
FLOW HEADLOSS CURVES DIALOG BOX6-214
DROP MANHOLES6-216
Contents-iv Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Transitions6-217
Wet Wells6-217
PERCENT FULL6-218
INFLOW (WET) COLLECTION DIALOG BOX6-218
Outfalls6-218
ADDING ELEVATION VS. FLOW DATA TO AN OUTFALL6-219
Pressure Junctions6-220
Pumps6-221
PUMP DEFINITIONS DIALOG BOX6-221
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS6-227
PUMP ELEMENTS - MOVING BETWEEN MULTIPLE ENGINES6-227
Variable Speed Pump Batteries6-230

Air Valves6-231
Other Tools6-232
Adding Elements to Your Model6-233
Modeling Curved Pipes6-234
Connecting Elements6-235
What Is A Virtual Conduit?6-235
Manipulating Elements6-235
Splitting Pipes6-237
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Pipes6-238
Merge Nodes in Close Proximity6-238
Editing Element Attributes6-239
Property Editor6-240
RELABELING ELEMENTS6-241
SET FIELD OPTIONS DIALOG BOX6-242
What Length is Used for Conduits and Pressure Pipes When I Don't
Enter a User-defined Length?6-243
Automatic Design6-244
Default Design Constraints6-245
Minor Loss Coefficients6-248
Using the Totalizing Flow Meters6-250
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog6-250
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog6-251
System Head Curves6-253
System Head Curves Manager Dialog6-253
Element Property Inferencing6-255
Element Property Inferencing Dialog6-257
EXISTING PATH INTERPOLATION RESULTS SUMMARY DIALOG6-263
NEW ELEMENT LAYOUT SUMMARY DIALOG6-263
Changing the Drawing View6-264
Panning6-264
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-v

Zooming6-264
USING THE ZOOM CENTER COMMAND6-266
Using Selection Sets6-267
Selection Sets Manager6-268
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets6-270
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection6-271
Creating a Selection Set from a Query6-271
Adding Elements to a Selection Set6-273
Removing Elements from a Selection Set6-274
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets6-274
Network Navigator6-276
Using Prototypes6-279
Creating Prototypes6-279
Engineering Libraries6-281
Working with Engineering Libraries6-282
SHARING ENGINEERING LIBRARIES ON A NETWORK6-285
Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files6-285
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box6-287
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements6-291
Hyperlinks Dialog Box6-291
Using Queries6-294
Queries Manager6-295
QUERY PARAMETERS DIALOG BOX6-296
Creating Queries6-297
USING THE LIKE OPERATOR6-301
QUERYING BY USER-DEFINED DATE6-302
Controls6-303
Controls Tab6-305
Conditions Tab6-310
Actions Tab6-316
Control Sets Tab6-320
LOGICAL CONTROL SETS DIALOG BOX6-321
User Data Extensions6-321
User Data Extensions Dialog Box6-324
FORMULA DIALOG BOX6-327
User Data Extensions Import Dialog Box6-329
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types6-329
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box6-330
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box6-331
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box6-332
External Tools6-333
Contents-vi Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

External Tools Workflow6-334
TRex Wizard6-335
Element Property Inferencing6-338
Element Property Inferencing Dialog6-341
NEW ELEMENT LAYOUT SUMMARY DIALOG6-347
Chapter 7: Loading349
Loading7-349
Methods for Entering Loads7-350
Types of Loads7-351
Adding Fixed Loads7-353
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads7-353
Adding User Defined Hydrographs7-354
Pattern Loads7-355
WORKING WITH PATTERNS7-355
Pattern Manager7-357
DEFINING PATTERN SETUPS7-359
PATTERN CURVE DIALOG BOX7-361
Unit Sanitary Loading7-362
TYPES OF UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS7-362
ADDING UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS7-364
Composite Hydrographs7-370
Composite Hydrograph Window7-370
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window7-370
Inflows7-371
Defining Inflow Collections7-374
Inflow Control Center7-377
APPLY SANITARY INFLOW TYPE TO SELECTION DIALOG7-381
Sanitary Load Control Center7-381
APPLY SANITARY LOAD TO SELECTION DIALOG7-384
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections7-384
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data7-387
Allocation7-388
Billing Meter Aggregation7-390
Distribution7-391
Projection7-393
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data7-394
LoadBuilder Manager7-394
LoadBuilder Wizard7-395
LoadBuilder Run Summary7-406
Generating Thiessen Polygons7-406
Thiessen Polygon Creator Dialog Box7-409
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-vii

Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes7-411
Pipeline Infiltration7-412
Hydrograph Curve Dialog Box7-412
Extreme Flows7-413
Extreme Flows Dialog7-413
Extreme Flow Setups Dialog7-418
BASE LOAD TABLE DIALOG BOX7-419
Chapter 8: Calculating Your Model421

Steady State/Extended Period Simulation8-421
Steady State Simulation8-421
Extended Period Simulation8-421
EPS RESULTS BROWSER8-422
TIME BROWSER OPTIONS DIALOG BOX8-423
Calculation Options Manager8-424
Creating Calculation Options8-425
Calculation Option Attributes8-427
FLOW PROFILE METHOD8-433
Controlling Results Output8-433
REPORTING TIME STEPS DIALOG BOX8-434
Check Data/ Validate8-434
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box8-435
Executive Summary Tab8-435
Calculation Options Tab8-436
Pressure Summary Tab8-442
Pipe Report Tab8-443
Node Report Tab8-443
User Notifications8-444
User Notifications Manager8-444
USER NOTIFICATION DETAILS DIALOG BOX8-446
Chapter 9: Using Scenarios and Alternatives447

Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives9-447
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management9-448
A History of What-If Analyses9-448
BEFORE HAESTAD METHODS - DISTRIBUTED SCENARIOS9-448
WITH HAESTAD METHODS: SELF-CONTAINED SCENARIOS9-450
The Scenario Cycle9-450
Scenario Attributes and Alternatives9-452
A Familiar Parallel9-452
Inheritance9-453
Contents-viii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

OVERRIDING INHERITANCE9-454
DYNAMIC INHERITANCE9-454
Local and Inherited Values9-455
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance9-455
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance9-456
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System9-457
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions)9-458
Analyzing Different loads (Maximum Day Conditions)9-458
Another Set of loads (Peak Hour Conditions)9-459
Correcting an Error9-459
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions9-460
Finalizing the Project9-461
Summary9-461
Scenarios9-462
Base and Child Scenarios9-463
Creating Scenarios9-463
Editing Scenarios9-463
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)9-464
Scenario Manager9-465
Alternatives9-467
Types of Alternatives9-467
Base and Child Alternatives9-468
Creating Alternatives9-468
Editing Alternatives9-469
Alternative Manager9-469
Alternative Editor Dialog Box9-470
Active Topology Alternative9-471
CREATING AN ACTIVE TOPOLOGY CHILD ALTERNATIVE9-472
ACTIVE TOPOLOGY SELECTION DIALOG BOX9-473
Physical Alternatives9-474
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS9-474
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES9-481
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR TRANSITIONS9-482
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS9-482
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS9-485
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE PIPES9-486
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS9-488
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PUMPS9-488
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR VARIABLE SPEED PUMP BATTERIES9-
489
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR AIR VALVES9-490
Design Alternative9-491
Headloss Alternative9-494
Boundary Condition Alternatives9-495
Initial Settings Alternative9-496
Sanitary Loading Alternative9-498
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-ix

SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES9-499
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS9-499
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS9-
499
Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives9-500
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS9-500
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES9-501
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS9-501
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNC-
TIONS9-502
System Flows Alternative9-502
Operational Alternative9-503
User Data Extensions Alternative9-503
Calculation Options9-504
Scenario Comparison9-504
Scenario Comparison Options Dialog Box9-508
Scenario Comparison Collection Dialog Box9-508
Chapter 10: Presenting Your Results509

Using Background Layers10-509
Background Layer Manager10-510
Working with Background Layer Folders10-512
Adding Background Layers10-513
Deleting Background Layers10-513
Editing Background Layers10-514
Renaming Background Layers10-514
Turning Background Layers On and Off10-514
Image Properties Dialog Box10-514
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box10-516
DXF Properties Dialog Box10-517
Annotating Your Model10-518
Element Symbology Manager10-519
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager10-521
Adding Annotations10-522
Deleting Annotations10-523
Editing Annotations10-523
Renaming Annotations10-523
Annotation Properties Dialog Box10-524
FREE FORM ANNOTATION DIALOG BOX10-525
Symbology Definitions Manager10-526
Zoom Dependent Visibility10-526
Color Coding Your Model10-527
Adding Color-Coding10-527
Deleting Color-Coding10-528
Contents-x Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Editing Color-Coding10-528
Renaming Color-Coding10-529
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box10-529
Using Profiles10-531
Profiles Manager10-532
Viewing Profiles10-532
Creating a New Profile10-533
CREATING A PROFILE FROM THE DRAWING PANE10-534
Editing Profiles10-535
Deleting Profiles10-535
Renaming Profiles10-535
Profile Setup Dialog Box10-536
Profile Viewer Dialog Box10-537
AXIS OPTIONS DIALOG BOX10-539
Engineering Profile Viewer Dialog Box10-539
ENGINEERING PROFILE OPTIONS10-541
GROUND PROFILE OPTIONS10-542
ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX10-542
LINK ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX10-543
TEXT PROPERTIES10-543
ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX10-544
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables10-545
FlexTables Manager10-546
Working with FlexTable Folders10-548
FlexTable Dialog Box10-549
STATISTICS DIALOG BOX10-551
Opening FlexTables10-551
Creating a New FlexTable10-552
Deleting FlexTables10-552
Naming and Renaming FlexTables10-552
Editing FlexTables10-553
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data10-555
CUSTOM SORT DIALOG BOX10-558
Customizing Your FlexTable10-558
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box10-559
Element Relabeling Dialog Box10-561
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data10-562
Using Predefined Tables10-564
Reporting10-564
Using Standard Reports10-564
CREATING A PROJECT INVENTORY REPORT10-564
CREATING A SCENARIO SUMMARY REPORT10-565
CREATING A CONDUIT AND PRESSURE PIPE INVENTORY10-565
Reporting on Element Data10-565
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xi

Report Options10-565
Graphing10-566
Graph Manager10-567
Add to Graph Dialog Box10-568
Creating a Graph10-568
Printing a Graph10-569
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying10-569
Graph Dialog Box10-569
GRAPH SERIES OPTIONS DIALOG BOX10-573
FILTER DIALOG BOX10-574
OBSERVED DATA DIALOG BOX10-574
Sample Observed Data Source10-576
Chart Options Dialog Box10-577
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab10-578
SERIES TAB10-579
PANEL TAB10-579
AXES TAB10-582
GENERAL TAB10-589
TITLES TAB10-590
WALLS TAB10-595
PAGING TAB10-596
LEGEND TAB10-597
3D TAB10-603
Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab10-604
FORMAT TAB10-604
POINT TAB10-605
GENERAL TAB10-606
DATA SOURCE TAB10-607
MARKS TAB10-608
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab10-612
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab10-613
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab10-615
Border Editor Dialog Box10-616
Gradient Editor Dialog Box10-617
Color Editor Dialog Box10-618
Color Dialog Box10-618
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box10-619
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - SOLID TAB10-619
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - HATCH TAB10-620
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - GRADIENT TAB10-620
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - IMAGE TAB10-621
Pointer Dialog Box10-622
Change Series Title Dialog Box10-623
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box10-623
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - SERIES TAB10-623
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - AXIS TAB10-627
Contents-xii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - OTHER TAB10-630
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box10-635
SERIES10-635
FUNCTIONS10-635
Customizing a Graph10-636
Print Preview Window10-644
Contours10-645
Contour Definition10-647
Contour Plot10-648
Contour Browser Dialog Box10-649
Using Named Views10-649
Using Aerial View10-650
Time Series Field Data10-651
Select Associated Modeling Attribute Dialog Box10-653
ESRI Shapefile Field Name Editor10-653
Results Table Dialog Box10-655
Chapter 11: Features of the MicroStation Version

657
MicroStation Environment11-658
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout11-658
MicroStation Project Files11-659
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties11-659
Element Properties11-660
Levels11-660
ELEMENT LEVELS DIALOG11-660
Text Styles11-661
Working with Elements11-661
Edit Elements11-661
Deleting Elements11-662
Modifying Elements11-662
CHANGE PIPE WIDTHS11-662
EDIT ELEMENTS11-662
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands11-662
BENTLEY SEWERCAD V8I CUSTOM MICROSTATION ENTITIES11-
663
MICROSTATION COMMANDS11-663
MOVING ELEMENTS11-663
MOVING ELEMENT LABELS11-663
Snap Menu11-664
Special Considerations11-664
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xiii

Import Bentley SewerCAD V8i11-664
Annotation Display11-664
Use SewerCAD V8i Z Order Command11-664
Chapter 12: Working in AutoCAD Mode665

The AutoCAD Workspace12-666
AutoCAD Integration with SewerCAD V8i12-666
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout12-667
Menus12-667
Toolbars12-667
Drawing Setup12-668
Symbol Visibility12-668
Layout Options Dialog12-668
AutoCAD Project Files12-669
AutoCAD Project Files12-669
Drawing Synchronization12-670
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands12-671
SewerCAD V8i Custom AutoCAD Entities12-671
Custom AutoCAD Entities12-672
AutoCAD Commands12-672
Explode Elements12-672
Moving Elements12-673
Moving Element Labels12-673
Snap Menu12-673
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data12-674
Working with Proxies12-674
Chapter 13: Theory675

Loading13-676
Common Load Types13-676
HYDROGRAPHS13-676
PATTERN LOADS13-677
HYDROGRAPHS VS. PATTERN LOADS13-677
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loading13-677
UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS13-678
EXTREME FLOW FACTOR13-678
COMMON VARIABLE PEAKING FACTORS13-679
Wet Weather Loading13-680
INFILTRATION13-680
INFLOW13-681
Contents-xiv Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Known Flow13-681
Gravity Pipe Hydraulics13-682
The Energy Principle13-682
THE ENERGY EQUATION13-683
Hydraulic and Energy Grades13-683
HYDRAULIC GRADE13-684
ENERGY GRADE13-684
Friction Loss Methods13-684
CHEZY’S EQUATION13-685
COLEBROOK-WHITE EQUATION13-685
HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQUATION13-686
DARCY-WEISBACH EQUATION13-686
Swamee and Jain Equation13-687
MANNING’S EQUATION13-688
Flow Regime13-688
PRESSURE FLOW13-689
UNIFORM FLOW AND NORMAL DEPTH13-689
CRITICAL FLOW, CRITICAL DEPTH, AND CRITICAL SLOPE13-689
SUBCRITICAL FLOW13-690
SUPERCRITICAL FLOW13-690
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis13-690
SLOPE CLASSIFICATION13-691
ZONE CLASSIFICATION13-692
PROFILE CLASSIFICATION13-693
Energy Balance13-694
STANDARD STEP METHOD13-695
DIRECT STEP METHOD13-695
Mixed Flow Profiles13-695
SEALING (SURCHARGING) CONDITIONS13-696
RAPIDLY VARIED FLOW13-696
Backwater Analysis13-696
FREE OUTFALL13-697
STRUCTURE FLOODING13-697
Frontwater Analysis13-697
Pipe Average Velocity13-698
UNIFORM FLOW VELOCITY13-698
FULL FLOW VELOCITY13-698
SIMPLE AVERAGE VELOCITY13-698
WEIGHTED AVERAGE VELOCITY13-699
PIPE AVERAGE VELOCITY AND TRAVEL TIME13-699
Capacity Analysis (Approximate Profiles)13-699
FULL CAPACITY PROFILES13-700
EXCESS CAPACITY PROFILES13-700
COMPOSITE EXCESS CAPACITY PROFILES13-702
Junction Headlosses and Minor Losses13-702
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview)13-703
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xv

Junction Headlosses13-703
STRUCTURE HEADLOSS13-703
SPECIAL ASSUMPTIONS13-706
Pressure Flow, Free Surface Flow, and Transitional Flow13-706
Initial Headloss Coefficient13-706
Correction for Pipe Diameter13-707
Correction for Flow Depth13-707
Correction for Relative Flow13-708
Correction for Plunging Flow13-708
Correction for Benching13-709
Headloss - AASHTO Method13-710
AASHTO Contraction Loss13-711
AASHTO Bend Loss13-711
AASHTO Bend Loss Original Equation13-712
AASHTO Expansion Loss13-713
AASHTO Correction For Non-Piped Flow13-714
AASHTO Correction for Shaping13-714
Minor Losses13-714
FITTING LOSS COEFFICIENTS13-715
Pump Theory13-716
Variable Speed Pumps13-717
Constant Horsepower Pumps13-720
Conservation of Mass and Energy13-721
CONSERVATION OF MASS13-721
CONSERVATION OF ENERGY13-722
The Gradient Algorithm13-722
Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm13-723
The Linear System Equation Solver13-725
Extended Period Simulations13-727
Extended Period Simulations Overview13-727
Routing Overview13-727
Convex Routing13-728
Weighted Translation Routing13-729
Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps13-730
Transitioning Between Gravity and Pressure Networks13-730
Identifying Gravity Pipes and Force Mains13-730
Direction of Flow in Gravity and Pressure Systems13-731
Transitioning From Gravity Pipes to Force Mains13-731
Transitioning From Force Mains to Gravity Elements13-732
Subnetworks13-736
Conduit Shapes13-737
Circular Channel13-738
Trapezoidal Channel13-738
Basket Handle13-739
Ellipse13-740
Horseshoe13-740
Egg13-741
Contents-xvi Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Semi-ellipse13-742
Pipe-Arch13-743
Semi-Circle13-744
Catenary13-745
Gothic13-745
Modified Basket Handle13-746
Triangle13-746
Rectangular Channel13-747
Irregular Open Channel13-747
Irregular Closed Section13-748
Rectangular-Rounded13-748
Rectangular-Triangular13-749
Power13-749
Parabola13-750
Constraint Based Automatic Design13-750
Gravity Pipes and Structures Design13-750
Part Full Design13-751
Allow Multiple Sections13-752
Limit Section Size13-753
Pipe Matching13-753
Offset Matching13-753
Drop Structures13-754
Structure invert Elevations13-754
Design Priorities13-754
Automatic Design with Hydrograph and Pattern Loads13-757
Constraint Based Warning Messages13-758
Open and Closed Channel Weighting Methods13-758
Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO Users13-761
Energy Discontinuity13-762
Structure Energy Grade13-762
Design Considerations13-762
Reporting Flow Attributes13-763
Negative Pressures13-763
Manning’s n Coefficients13-764
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions13-766
Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation13-768
Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)
13-769
Appendix 14: References771
Chapter 15: About Bentley Systems773

Software15-774
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xvii

CivilStorm15-774
SewerGEMS15-775
SewerGEMS15-776
WaterGEMS15-776
WaterCAD15-777
StormCAD15-777
SewerGEMS15-777
PondPack15-778
FlowMaster15-778
CulvertMaster15-778
HAMMER15-779
Bentley Institute Press15-779
docs.bentley.com15-780
Bentley Services15-781
Bentley Discussion Groups15-781
Bentley on the Web15-782
TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions15-782
BE Magazine15-782
BE Newsletter15-782
Client Server15-782
BE Careers Network15-783
Contact Bentley Systems15-783
Contents-xviii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Chapter
Getting Started 1
Thank you for purchasing Bentley SewerCAD V8i. At Bentley Systems, we pride
ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to
make software that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it antic-
ipates your needs without getting in your way.
When you first use Bentley SewerCAD V8i, use the intuitive interface and interactive
dialog boxes to guide you. If you need more information, use the online help by
pressing the F1 key or selecting Bentley SewerCAD V8i Help from the Help menu.
A help topic describing the area of the program in which you are working appears.
•
• “Documentation” on page 1-4
• “Quick Start Lessons” on page 1-5
What is Bentley SewerCAD V8i?

SewerCAD V8i is an extremely powerful program for the design and analysis of
gravity flow and pressure flow through pipe networks and pumping stations. The
program can be run in Microstation, AutoCAD, and ArcGIS modes, giving you all the
power of Microstation and AutoCAD’s capabilities, or in Stand-Alone mode utilizing
our own graphical interface.
SewerCAD V8i allows you to construct a graphical representation of a pipe network

containing information such as pipe data, pump data, loading, and infiltration. You
have a choice of conveyance elements including circular pipes, arches, boxes and
more.

Installation, Upgrades, and Updates
The gravity network is calculated using the built-in numerical model, which utilizes
both the direct step and standard step gradually varied flow methods. Flow calcula-
tions are valid for both surcharged and varied flow situations, including hydraulic
jumps, backwater, and drawdown curves. You also have the flexibility to mix gravity
and pressure components freely, building your systems in parallel or in series as they
exist in the field. Pressure elements can be controlled based on system hydraulics,
turning pumps on and off due to changes in flows and pressures.
SewerCAD V8i’s flexible reporting feature allows you to customize and print the
model results in both a report format and as a graphical plot.
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

For instructions on installing, registering, activating, and updating the software please
refer to the Readme.pdf in the Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8 directory.
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration
At the conclusion of the installation process, the Municipal License Administrator will
be executed, to automatically detect and set the default configuration for your product,
if possible. However, if multiple license configurations are detected on the license
server, you will need to select which one to use by default, each time the product
starts. If this is the case, you will see the screen below. Simply press OK to clear the
Warning dialog, then press Refresh Configurations to display the list of available
configurations. Select one and press Make Default, then exit the License Adminis-
trator. (You only need to repeat this step if you decide to make a different configura-
tion the default in the future.)

Getting Started
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT
Note: Your PC must be connected to the Internet to use the Check for
Updates button.
Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program

that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads, around-the-clock
technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training and consulting
services, as well as technical information and support channels. It’s easy to stay up-to-
date with the latest advances in our software. Software updates can be downloaded
from our Web site, and your version of Bentley SewerCAD V8i can then be upgraded
to the current version quickly and easily. Just click the Check for Updates button on
the toolbar to launch your preferred Web browser and open our Web site. The Web site
automatically checks to see if your installed version is the latest available, and if not, it
provides you with the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring it up-to-
date. You can also access our Knowledgebase for answers to your Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQs).
For more information, see “Contact Bentley Systems” on page 15-783.
Troubleshooting
Because of the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications

running in the background that make it difficult for software setup and installations to
determine the configuration of your current system. If you have difficulties during the
installation or uninstallation process, please try these steps before contacting our tech-
nical support staff:
1. Shut down and restart your computer.

2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Esc in Windows XP. Exit any applications
that are running.
3. Disable any antivirus software that you are running.
Caution: After you install Bentley SewerCAD V8i, make certain that
you restart any antivirus software you have disabled. Failure
to restart your antivirus software leaves you exposed to
potentially destructive computer viruses.
4. Try running the installation or uninstallation again (without running any other
program first).
If these three steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact our
Technical Support staff. For more information, see “Contact Bentley Systems” on
page 15-783.

Documentation
Updating Your SentinelLM Licenses if You Move Your License

Server
If you move your SentinelLM license manager to a different server, following these
steps to update the licenses:
1. Install the license file on the new server.

2. Replace the server name in the license.ini file on all client workstations with the
new server name (on the line containing “Server=”). Don’t forget to save the file
on each workstation. The license.ini file is usually located in the Haestad Method
product directory.
Updating Your Bentley SELECT Server Licenses if you Move Your

License Server
If you move your Bentley SELECT Server license manager to a different server,
following these steps to update the licenses:
1. Obtain a new license file (license string) from Bentley Systems, then update the
license.lic file on the new server with the new license string.
2. Replace the server name in the license.lic file on all client workstations with the
new server name. Don’t forget to save the file on each workstation. The license.lic
file is usually located in the Haestad Method product directory.
Checking Your Current Registration Status
After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status
by opening the About... box from within the software itself.
To view your registration information
1. Select Help > About Bentley SewerCAD V8i Edition.

2. The version and build number for Bentley SewerCAD V8i Edition display in the
lower-left corner of the About Bentley Bentley SewerCAD V8i dialog box.
The current registration status is also displayed, including: user name and
company, serial number, license type and check-in status, feature level, expiration
date, and SELECT Server information.
Documentation
Bentley SewerCAD V8i documentation is available in two parts:

Getting Started
Online help: The online help is accessible from the Help menu or
by pressing F1. Additionally, when you are using
Bentley SewerCAD V8i, you can call the online help
at any time by clicking a help button in any dialog
box or window.
The context-sensitive online help is designed to make
it easy for you to quickly find specific information
about a feature you are using in Bentley SewerCAD
V8i. The online help makes extensive use of
hyperlinks and provides a table of contents, index,
and keyword search to help you locate the
information you need.
Online PDF Book: The content in the online help is also available in .pdf
format and is available at docs.bentley.com. This pdf
contains the same content as the online help, but
includes hypertext and is designed to be printed by
you from a local printing device. As well as being
more easily printable than the online help, the online
book also uses hypertext and is searchable.
Note: On-screen display of graphics in .pdf files is dependent on the

zoom level you use. For more optimal viewing of graphics in
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader, try using 167% and 208% zoom.
Quick Start Lessons

The lessons quickly introduce you to specific features of Bentley SewerCAD V8i. To
access the lessons, select Quick Start Lessons from the Help menu. Run a lesson by
selecting one of the entries in the list.

Quick Start Lessons

Chapter
Introducing the 2
Workspace
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
workspace.
• “The Workspace” on page 2-7

• “Menus” on page 2-10
• “Toolbars” on page 2-24
• “Customizing the Toolbars” on page 2-41
• “Dynamic Manager Display” on page 2-42
The Workspace
You use Bentley SewerCAD V8i in one of these modes:
• “Stand-Alone Editor” on page 2-7

• “Microstation Mode” on page 2-8
• “AutoCAD Mode” on page 2-9
Stand-Alone Editor
The Stand-Alone Editor is the workspace that contains the various managers, toolbars,
and menus, along with the drawing pane, that make up the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
interface. The Bentley SewerCAD V8i interface uses dockable windows and toolbars,
so the position of the various interface elements can be manually adjusted to suit your
preference.

The Workspace
By default, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i environment looks like this:
Microstation Mode
Microstation mode lets you create and model your network directly within your
primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of Microstation‘s drafting
and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerCAD V8i
modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between
Bentley SewerCAD V8i and Microstation enables extremely detailed and accurate
mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation
features available in Microstation. This facility provides the most flexibility and the
highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data
maintained at your organization.
Note: For more information about runnning Bentley SewerCAD V8i in

Microstation mode, see “MicroStation Environment” on page 12-
884.

Introducing the Workspace
AutoCAD Mode
AutoCAD mode lets you create and model your network directly within your primary
drafting environment. This gives you access to all of AutoCAD’s drafting and presen-
tation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerCAD V8i modeling
tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between Bentley
SewerCAD V8i and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of
model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation features avail-
able in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of
compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data maintained at your
organization.
Note: For more information about runnning Bentley SewerCAD V8i in

AutoCAD mode, see “Working in AutoCAD Mode” on page 13-893.
Contour Labeling
You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD
drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following
options are available:
• End—Allows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of
selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will
prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label,
AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place
labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point,
clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest the contour
endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area
where you clicked. Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion
point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.
• Interior—This option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be
prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the points along the
contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be
placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will
move the label along the contour line.
• Group End—Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn
thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Incre-
ment that was selected.

Menus
• Group Interior—Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line.
• Change Settings—Allows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font
Height of the contour labels.
• Delete Label—Prompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted,
then prompts to select the labels to be removed.
• Delete All Labels—Prompts to select which contours the labels will be removed
from, then removes all labels for the specified contours.
Menus
Menus are located at the top of Bentley SewerCAD V8i stand-alone editor window
and provide access to program commands, which are broken down by type of func-
tionality.
The following menus are available:
• “File Menu” on page 2-10

• “Edit Menu” on page 2-14
• “Analysis Menu” on page 2-16
• “Components Menu” on page 2-17
• “View Menu” on page 2-18
• “Tools Menu” on page 2-21
• “Report Menu” on page 2-23
• “Help Menu” on page 2-23
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands:
New Creates a new project. When you select this

command, a new untitled project is created.
Open Opens an existing project. When you select this

command, the Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.

Close Closes the current project without exiting the

program.
Close All Closes all currently open projects.
Save Saves the current project.
Save As Saves the current project under a new project name

and/or to a different directory location.
Save All Saves all currently open projects.

Menus
ProjectWise Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Open—Open an existing SewerCAD V8i
project from ProjectWise. You are prompted to
log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not
already logged in.
Note: Only projects that were

originally saved into
ProjectWise from the SewerCAD
V8i application can be opened
• Save As—Saves the current project to a

ProjectWise datasource. You are prompted to
log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not
already logged in.
• Change Datasource—Lets you connect to a
different ProjectWise datasource for future
Open and Save As operations.
• Import—Lets you import the following file types
into the ProjectWise project:
• SewerCAD V8 Database—Lets you import
a Bentley SewerCAD V8i project database
file.
• Submodel—Lets you import a SewerCAD
submodel file.
• LandXML—Lets you import a LandXML
file.
• StormCAD V8 —Lets you import a
StormCAD V8 file.
• SewerGEMS V8 —Lets you import a
SewerGEMS V8 file.
Note: For more information about

using SewerCAD V8i with
ProjectWise, see “Considerations
for ProjectWise Users” on page 4-
184

Import Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Bentley SewerCAD V8i Database—Lets you
import a Bentley SewerCAD V8i project data-
base file.
• Submodel—Lets you import a SewerCAD
submodel file.
• LandXML—Lets you import a LandXML
file.
• StormCAD V8—Lets you import a
StormCAD V8 file.
• SewerGEMS V8 —Lets you import a
SewerGEMS V8 file.
Export Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• DXF—Lets you export the current network
layout as a DXF drawing.
• Submodel—Exports the currently selected
area of the network as a SewerCAD submodel
file.
• LandXML—Exports the current project as a
LandXML file.
Page Setup Defines the print settings that will be used when the
current view is printed.
Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed. You can
select whether you want the print preview to be Fit
to Page or Scaled:
• Fit to Page—The view will be zoomed in or out
so that the current view fits to a single page of
the default page size.
• Scaled—The view will be scaled so that it
matches the user-defined drawing scale (this is
defined on the Drawing Tab of the Options
dialog: Tools > Options).

Menus
Print Prints the current view. You can select whether you
want the print preview to be Fit to Page or Scaled:
• Fit to Page—The view will be zoomed in or out
so that the current view fits to a single page of
the default page size.
• Scaled—The view will be scaled so that it
matches the user-defined drawing scale (this is
defined on the Drawing Tab of the Options
dialog: Tools > Options).
Project Properties Opens the Project Properties dialog box, allowing

you to specify project-level settings.
Recent Files When the Recent Files Visible option is selected in

the Options dialog box, the most recently opened
files will appear in the File menu. See “Options
Dialog Box - Global Tab” on page 4-173 for more
information.
Exit Closes the program.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
Undo Cancels the last data input action on the currently

active dialog box. Clicking Undo again cancels
the second-to-last data input action, and so on.
Redo Cancels the last undo command.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted element.

Select By Polygon Lets you select elements in your model by

drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon. After the polygon has been drawn, right-
click to select from the following options:
• As Selected - All elements contained within
the polygon will be selected. Elements that
were selected before the Select By Polygon
opperation will be de-selected.
• Add to Selection - All elements contained
within the polygon will be selected in addition
to any elements that were selected before the
Select By Polygon operation were performed.
• Invert Selection - All elements contained
within the polygon that were selected before
the operation will be de-selected; all elements
contained within the polygon that were not
selected before the operation will be selected
• Remove From Selection - All elements
contained within the polygon that were
selected before the operation will be de-
selected.
Select All Selects all of the elements in the network.
Invert Selection Selects all currently unselected elements and

deselects all currently selected ones.
Select by Element Opens a submenu listing all available element

types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model.
Select by Attribute Opens a menu listing all available attribute types.

Select one of the attribute types from the menu
and the Query Builder dialog box opens.
Clear Selection Deselects the currently selected element(s).
Clear Highlight Removes Network Navigator highlighting for all

elements.
Find Element Lets you find a specific element by entering the

element’s label.

Menus
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains the following commands:
Scenarios Opens the Scenario Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives Opens the Alternative Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage alternatives.
Calculation Options Opens the Calculation Options Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage calculation
settings for the project.
Totalizing Flow Opens the Totalizing Flow Meters manager where

Meters you can create new meters.
System Head Curves Opens the System Head Curves manager.
EPS Results Browser Opens the EPS Results Browser dialog box, which
lets you manipulate the currently displayed time
step and to animate the drawing pane.
Calculation Summary Opens the calculation summary report, which

reports the details of the calculations performed
on your model.
User Notifications Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

you to view warnings and errors uncovered by the
validation process.
Validate Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the manual
validation command, and it checks for input data
errors. It differs in this respect from the automatic
validation that SewerCAD V8i runs when the
compute command is initiated, which checks for
network connectivity errors as well as many other
things beyond what the manual validation checks.
Pressing CTRL+F7 also selects this command.

Compute Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity errors
and performs other validation. For more
information, see “Calculating Your Model” on
page 8-575. Pressing F9 also selects this
command.
Components Menu
The Components menu contains the following commands:
Default Design Opens the Default Design Constraints dialog,

Constraints whiach allows you to specify constraints for pipes,
nodes, and inlets to be used during an automatic
design and while checking constraints for an
analysis calculation.
Controls Opens the Controls manager where you can set

controls, conditions, actions, and logical control
sets.
Conduit Catalog Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which lets
you create, edit, and view catalog conduits.
Catalog conduits are an efficient way to reuse
common physical conduit definitions.
Pump Definitions Opens the Pump Definitions dialog box, which

lets you view, edit, and create pump curve
definitions. For more information, see “Pump
Curve Definitions Dialog Box” on page 6-317.
Conduit Control Opens the Conduit Control Structures dialog.

Structures
Flow Headloss Curves Opens the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.
Minor Loss Opens the Minor Loss Coefficients Manager

Coefficients dialog.
Extreme Flows Opens the Extreme Flows dialog.
Extreme Flow Setups Opens the Extreme Flow Setups dialog.

Menus
Unit Sanitary (Dry Opens the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads
Weather) Loads dialog box, which lets you create, edit, and delete
unit sanitary loads. For more information, see
“Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads” on
page 7-490.
Patterns Opens the Pattern Manager where you can create

and edit diurnal loading patterns for use with
extended period simulations. For more
information, see “Defining Patterns” on page 7-
478.
Pattern Setups Opens the Pattern Setup Manager where you can
associate diurnal patterns with the appropriate unit
sanitary loads for a given scenario. For more
information, see “Defining Pattern Setups” on
page 7-482.
Time Series Field Opens the Time Series Field Data dialog.
Data
Engineering Libraries Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager.
View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Element Symbology Opens the Element Symbology Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage annotation and
color-coding in your project.
Background Layers Opens the Background Layers Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage the background
layers associated with the project.
Network Navigator Opens the Network Navigator.
Selection Sets Opens the Selection Sets Manager, which lets you
create, view, and manage selection sets associated
with the project.
Queries Opens the Query Manager, which lets you create

SQL expressions for use with selection sets and
FlexTables. For more information, see

Prototypes Opens the Prototypes Manager, which lets you

enter default values for elements in your model.
Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements
dramatically if a group of network elements share
common data. For more information, see
FlexTables Opens the FlexTables Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Graphs Opens the Graph Manager, which lets you create,

view, and manage graphs for the project.
Profiles Opens the Profile Manager, which lets you create,

view, and manage the profiles for the project.
Contours Opens the Contours manager where you can create

and edit contour definitions.
Named Views Opens the Named Views manager where you can
create, edit, and use Named Views.
Aerial View Opens the Aerial View navigation window.
Properties Turns the Properties Editor display on or off.
Customizations Opens the Customization Manager dialog.
Auto-Refresh Turns automatic updates to the main window view

on or off whenever changes are made to the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i datastore. When selected,
a check mark appears next to this menu command,
indicating that automatic updates are turned on.
Refresh Drawing Updates the main window view according to the

latest information contained in the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i datastore.

Menus
Zoom Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Zoom Extents—Sets the view so that the
entire network is visible in the drawing pane.
• Zoom Window—Activates the manual zoom
tool, which lets you specify a portion of the
drawing to enlarge.
• Zoom In—Enlarges the size of the model in
the drawing pane.
• Zoom Out—Reduces the size of the model in
the drawing pane.
• Zoom Realtime—Enables the realtime zoom
tool, which lets you zoom in and out by
moving the mouse while holding down the left
mouse button.
• Zoom Center—Opens the Zoom Center
dialog box, which lets you enter drawing coor-
dinates that will be centered in the drawing
pane.
• Zoom to Selection—Zooms to the element(s)
that are currently selected in the drawing
pane.
• Zoom Previous—Resets the zoom level to
the last setting.
• Zoom Next—Resets the zoom level to the
setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed.
Pan Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the
model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Toolbars Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

toolbars. Select one of the toolbars in the submenu
to turn that toolbar on or off. For more
information, see “Toolbars” on page 2-24.
Reset Workspace Resets the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace so

that the dockable managers appear in their default
factory-set positions.

Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
Active Topology Opens a Select dialog to select elements in the

Selection drawing to make them Inactive or Active.
ModelBuilder Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager, which

lets you create, edit, and manage ModelBuilder
connections to be used in the model-building/model-
synchronizing process. For more information, see
“ModelBuilder Connections Manager” on page 5-225.
TRex Opens the TRex node elevation assignment tool.
LoadBuilder Opens the LoadBuilder manager where you can assign

loads to model nodes using data from outside sources.
Thiessen Polygon Opens the Wizard used to create Thiessen polygons

for use with LoadBuilder.
Inflow Control Center Opens the Inflow Control Center, allowing you to
create, edit, and delete sanitary inflow definitions.
Element Property Opens the Element Property Inferencing dialog.

Inferencing
Hyperlinks Lets you associate external files, such as pictures or

movie files, with elements. For more information, see
“Adding Hyperlinks to Elements” on page 6-426.
User Data Extensions User Data Extensions—Opens the User Data

Extension dialog box, which lets you add and define
custom data fields. For example, you can add new
fields such as the pipe installation date. For more
information, see “User Data Extensions” on page 6-
439.
Sanitary Load Control Opens the Sanitary Load Control Center, allowing you
Center to create, edit, and delete sanitary load definitions.

Menus
Database Utilities Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Compact Database—When you delete data from
a Bentley SewerCAD V8i project, such as
elements or alternatives, the database store that
Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses can become frag-
mented, causing unnecessarily large data files,
which impact performance substantially.
Compacting the database eliminates the empty
data records, thereby defragmenting the datastore
and improving the performance of the file.
Note: Every tenth time a file is saved,

Bentley SewerCAD V8i will
automatically prompt you to
compact the database. If you open
a file without saving it, the count
does not go up. If you open and
save a file multiple times in the
same session, the count only goes
up on the first save. If you open,
save, and close the file, the count
goes up. Click Yes to compact the
database, or no to close the prompt
dialog box without compacting.
Since compacting the database can
take time, especially for larger
models, you may want to postpone
the compact procedure until a later
time. You can modify how Bentley
SewerCAD V8i compacts the
database in the Options dialog box.
• Synchronize Drawing—Synchronizes the current

model drawing with the project database.
• Update Database cache—Updates the current
model to reflect any changes made in the database.
• Update Results from Project Directory—This
command copies the model result files (if any) from the
project directory (the directory where the project .mdb
file is saved) to the custom result file directory. The
custom result directory is specified in
Tools>Options>Project tab. This allows you to make a
copy of the results that may exist in the model's save
directory and replace the current results being worked
on with them.
• Copy Results to Project Directory—This
command copies the result files that are currently being
used by the model to the project directory (where the
project .mdb is stored).
• Batch Update Conduit Descriptions—Updates
the Conduit Description field to reflect any changes
2-22 Bentley SewerCAD
made to the underlying attributes. V8i User’s Guide
Layout Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

element types. Select one of the element types in the
submenu to place that element in your model.
External Tools Run an existing external tool or create a new one by

opening up the External Tools manager.
Options Opens the Options dialog box, which lets you change
global settings such as display pane settings, drawing
scale, units, display precision and format used, and
element labeling.
Report Menu
The Report menu contains the following commands:
Element Tables Opens a submenu that lets you display FlexTables

for any link or node element. These predefined
FlexTables contain most of the input data and
results for each instance of the selected element in
the model.
Element Details Allows you to select one or more elements from

the drawing view. A report is generated containing
the details of the selected element(s).
Scenario Summary Opens the Scenario Summary Report.
Project Inventory Opens the Project Inventory Report, which

contains the number of each of the various
element types that are in the network.
Conduit and Pressure Opens the Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory
Pipe Inventory report.
Report Options Opens the Report Options box where you can set
Headers and Footers for the predefined reports.
Help Menu
The Help menu contains the following commands:

Toolbars
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Opens the online help Table of Contents.

Help
Quick Start Lessons Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons
Overview topic.
Welcome Dialog Opens the Welcome dialog box.
Check for Updates Opens your Web browser to the our Web site,
allowing you to check for Bentley SewerCAD V8i
updates.
Bentley Institute Opens your browser to the Bentley Institute

Training Training web site.
Bentley Professional Opens your browser to the Bentley Professional

Services Services web site.
Online Support Opens your browser to SELECTservices area of

the Bentley web site.
Discussion Groups Opens your browser to Bentley’s Haestad

Discussion Groups.
Bentley.com Opens the home page on the Bentley web site.
About Bentley Opens the About Bentley SewerCAD V8i dialog

SewerCAD V8i box, which displays copyright information about
the product, registration information, and the
current version number of this release.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide access to frequently used menu commands and are organized by the
type of functionality offered. Many of the toolbars have additional buttons available
that are not displayed by default. You can display these additional buttons by
following the procedure in “Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-41.
The following toolbars are available:
• “Layout Toolbar” on page 2-26

• “Standard Toolbar” on page 2-27
• “Edit Toolbar” on page 2-29
• “View Toolbar” on page 2-29

• “Scenarios Toolbar” on page 2-31

• “Analysis Toolbar” on page 2-31
• “Compute Toolbar” on page 2-32
• “Tools Toolbar” on page 2-32
• “Help Toolbar” on page 2-35
• “Components Toolbar” on page 2-36
• “Reports Toolbar” on page 2-37
• “Select Toolbar” on page 2-37
• “Zoom Toolbar” on page 2-39

Toolbars
Layout Toolbar
You use the Layout toolbar to lay out your model in the drawing pane. The Layout
toolbar contains the following buttons:
Select Changes your mouse cursor into a selection

tool. The selection tool behavior varies
depending on the direction in which the mouse
is dragged after defining the first corner of the
selection box, as follows:
If the selection is made from left-to-right, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box that is defined will be selected.
If the selection is made from right-to-left, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box and that cross one or more of the
lines of the selection box will be selected.
Layout Changes your mouse cursor into a network
layout tool. Right-click to change the type of
element and the type of link.
• Pressure Pipe—Lets you place an
element through which water moves under
pressure. Pressure pipes typically
discharge from a pumping station located
upstream in the sewer collection system.
• Conduit—Lets you place a closed section
element through which water moves. A
conduit has a constant roughness and
cross section shape along its entire length.
Available conduit shapes consist of both
open and closed cross sections.
Manhole Changes your mouse cursor into a manhole
element symbol. Clicking the left mouse button
while this tool is active causes a manhole
element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
Transition Changes your mouse cursor into a transition
mouse cursor.
Wet Well Changes your mouse cursor into a wet well
while this tool is active causes a wet well
mouse cursor.

Outfall Changes your mouse cursor into an outfall

while this tool is active causes an outfall
mouse cursor.
Pressure Changes your mouse cursor into a pressure
Junction junction element symbol. Clicking the left
mouse button while this tool is active causes a
manhole element to be placed at the location of
the mouse cursor.
Pump Changes your mouse cursor into a pump
while this tool is active causes a pump element
to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Variable Speed Changes your mouse cursor into a variable
Pump Battery speed pump battery element symbol. Clicking
the left mouse button while this tool is active
causes a manhole element to be placed at the
location of the mouse cursor.
Air Valve Changes your mouse cursor into an air valve
mouse cursor.
Border Changes your mouse cursor into a border
symbol. When the border tool is active, you can
draw a simple box in the drawing pane using
the mouse. For example, you might want to
draw a border around the entire model.
Text Changes your mouse cursor into a text symbol.
When the text tool is active, you can add
simple text to your model. Click anywhere in
the drawing pane to display the Text Editor
dialog box, which lets you enter text to be
displayed in your model.
Line Changes your mouse cursor into a line symbol.
When this tool is active, you can draw lines and
polygons in your model using the mouse.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains the following buttons:

Toolbars
New Creates a new Bentley SewerCAD V8i project.

When you select this command, the Select File to
Create dialog box appears, allowing you to
define a name and directory location for the new
project.
Open Opens an existing Bentley SewerCAD V8i

project. When this command is initialized, the
Select Bentley SewerCAD V8i Project to Open
dialog box appears, allowing you to browse to the
project to be opened.
Close Closes the current project.
Close All Closes all open projects.
Save Saves the current project.
Save All Saves all open projects.
Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed.
Print Prints the current view of the network as

displayed in the drawing pane.

Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains the following buttons:
Undo Cancels your most recent action.
Redo Lets you redo the last cancelled action.
Delete Deletes the element or elements that are currently

highlighted in the drawing pane.
Clear Removes highlight visibility. Highlighting is

Highlight created through the Network Navigator.
Find Element Lets you find a specific element by choosing it

from a menu containing all elements in the
current model.
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains the following buttons, which give you easy access to many
of the managers in Bentley SewerCAD V8i.:
Element Opens the Element Symbology manager,

Symbology allowing you to create, view, and manage the
element symbol settings for the project.
Background Opens the Background Layers manager,

Layers allowing you to create, view, and manage the
background layers associated with the project.
Network Opens the Network Navigator dialog box.

Navigator
Selection Sets Opens the Selection Sets Manager, allowing you

to create, view, and modify the selection sets
associated with the project.

Toolbars
Queries Opens and closes the Query Manager.
Prototypes Opens and closes the Prototypes Manager.
FlexTables Opens the FlexTables manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Graphs Opens the Graph manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the graphs for the
project.
Profiles Opens the Profile manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the profiles for the
project.
Contours Opens the Contours manager, where you can

create and edit contour definitions.
Named Views Opens the Named Views manager, where you

can create and edit named views.
Aerial View Opens the Aerial View navigation window.
Properties Opens and closes the Property Editor.
Customizations Opens the Customizations Manager.

Scenarios Toolbar
The Scenario toolbar contains the following buttons:
Scenario List Lets you quickly change the current scenario.

Box
Scenarios Opens the Scenario manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives Opens the Alternative manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project alternatives.
Calculation Opens the Calculation Options manager, which

Options lets you create different profiles for different
calculation settings.
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar contains the following buttons:
Totalizing Opens the Totalizing Flow Meters manager

Flow Meters where you can create new meters.
System Head Opens the System Head Curves manager.

Curves
Calculation Opens the Calculation Summary to view results.

Summary

Toolbars
Compute Toolbar
The Compute toolbar contains the following buttons:
Validate Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the
manual validation command, and it checks for
input data errors. It differs in this respect from
the automatic validation that SewerCAD V8i
runs when the compute command is initiated,
which checks for network connectivity errors as
well as many other things beyond what the
manual validation checks.
Compute Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity
errors and performs other validation. For more
information, see “Calculating Your Model” on
page 8-575.
Time Browser Opens the EPS Results Browser, allowing you

to control the current time step and use the
animation feature.
User Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

Notifications you to view warnings and errors uncovered by
the validation process. This button does not
appear in the toolbar by default, but can be
added. For more information, see “Adding and
Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-41.
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar contains the following buttons:

Active Opens a Select dialog to select elements in the

Topology drawing to make them Inactive or Active.
Selection
ModelBuilder Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager,

where you can create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the
model-building/model-synchronizing process.
TRex Opens the TRex node elevation assignment tool.
LoadBuilder Opens the LoadBuilder manager where you can

assign loads to model nodes using data from
outside sources.
Thiessen Opens the Wizard used to create Thiessen

Polygon polygons for use with LoadBuilder.
Element Opens the Element Property Inferencing dialog.

Property
Inferencing
Inflow Opens the Inflow Control Center, allowing you

Control to create, edit, and delete inflow definitions.
Center
Sanitary Load Opens the Sanitary Load Control Center,

Control allowing you to create, edit, and delete sanitary
Center load definitions.
Scenario Opens the Scenario Comparison manager.

Comparison
Hyperlinks Lets you associate external files, such as

pictures or movie files, with elements.
User Data Opens the User Data Extension dialog box,

Extensions which lets you add and define custom data
fields. For example, you can add new fields such
as the pipe installation date.

Toolbars
Batch Pipe Opens the Batch Pipe Split dialog, which allows
Split you to split pipes with neighboring nodes that
are found within the specified tolerance.
Compact When you delete data from a Bentley

Database SewerCAD V8i project, such as elements or
alternatives, the database store that Bentley
SewerCAD V8i uses can become fragmented,
causing unnecessarily large data files, which
impact performance substantially. Compacting
the database eliminates the empty data records,
thereby defragmenting the datastore and
improving the performance of the file.
Synchronize Synchronizes the current model drawing with

Drawing the project database.
Update Updates the current model to reflect any

Database changes made in the database.
Cache
Update This command copies the model result files (if

Results From any) from the project directory (the directory
Project where the project .mdb file is saved) to the
Directory custom result file directory. The custom result
directory is specified in Tools>Options>Project
tab. This allows you to make a copy of the
results that may exist in the model's save
directory and replace the current results being
worked on with them.

Copy Results This command copies the result files that are
To Project currently being used by the model to the project
Directory directory (where the project .mdb is stored).
Batch Update Updates the Conduit Description field to reflect

Conduit any changes made to the underlying attributes.
Descriptions
Customize Run an existing external tool or create a new one

by opening up the External Tools manager
Options Opens the Options (see Setting Options) dialog

box, which lets you change global settings such
as display pane settings, drawing scale, units,
display precision and format used, and element
labeling.
Help Toolbar
The Help toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Help menu. The Help toolbar contains the following buttons.
Check for Opens your Web browser to our Web site,

Updates allowing you to check for Bentley SewerCAD
V8i updates.
Training Opens your browser to the Bentley Institute

page of the Bentley web site.
Bentley Opens your browser to the SELECTservices

SELECT Support area of the Bentley web site.
Support
Bentley.com Opens your browser to Bentley's main web site.
SewerGEMS Opens the Bentley SewerCAD V8i online help.

Sanitary Help

Toolbars
Components Toolbar
The Components toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are avail-
able in the Components menu. The Components toolbar contains the following
buttons.
Controls Opens the Controls manager where you can set

controls, conditions, actions, and logical control
sets.
Default Design Opens the Default Design Constraints dialog,

Contraints whiach allows you to specify constraints for
pipes, nodes, and inlets to be used during an
automatic design and while checking constraints
for an analysis calculation.
Conduit Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which

Catalog lets you create, edit, and view catalog conduits.
Catalog conduits are an efficient way to reuse
common physical conduit definitions.
Flow-Headloss Opens the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.

Curves
Minor Loss Opens the Minor Loss Coefficients Manager

Coefficients dialog.
Unit Sanitary Opens the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

(Dry Weather) dialog box, which lets you create, edit, and
Loads delete unit sanitary loads.
Patterns Opens the Pattern Manager where you can

create and edit diurnal loading patterns for use
with extended period simulations.
Pattern Setup Opens the Pattern Setup Manager where you can
associate diurnal patterns with the appropriate
unit sanitary loads for a given scenario.
Extreme Opens the Extreme Flows dialog.

Flows
Extreme Flow Opens the Extreme Flow Setups dialog.

Setup

Pump Opens the Pump Definitions dialog box, which

Definitions lets you view, edit, and create pump curve
definitions.
Conduit Opens the Conduit Control Structures dialog.

Control
Structures
Time Series Opens the Time Series Field Data dialog.

Field Data
Engineering Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager.

Libraries
Reports Toolbar
The Reports toolbar contains the following buttons:
Scenario Opens the Scenario Summary Report.

Summary
Project Opens the Project Inventory Report, which

Inventory contains the number of each of the various
element types that are in the network.
Report Opens the Report Builder

Options
Select Toolbar
The Select toolbar contains the following buttons:

Toolbars
Select By Lets you select elements in your model by

Polygon drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon, then right-click and select Done when
the polygon is complete. All elements contained
within the polygon will be selected.
Select All Selects all of the elements in the network.
Select By Opens a submenu listing all available element

Element types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model.
Select By Opens a submenu listing all available element

Attribute types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to open a query builder that allows you
to choose the attribute criteria that will
determine what elements will be selected.
Clear Deselects the currently highlighted element(s).

Selection
Invert Selects all currently unselected elements and

Selection deselects all currently selected elements

Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar provides access to the zooming and panning tools. It contains the
following buttons:
Zoom Extents Sets the view so that the entire model is visible in
the drawing pane.
Zoom Window Activates the manual zoom tool, which lets you
specify a portion of the drawing to enlarge
Zoom In Magnifies the current view in the drawing pane.
Zoom Out Reduces the current view in the drawing pane.
Zoom Enables the realtime zoom tool, which lets you

Realtime zoom in and out by moving the mouse while the
left mouse button is depressed.
Zoom Center Opens the Zoom Center dialog box, which lets
you enter drawing coordinates that will be
centered in the drawing pane.
Zoom to Zooms to the currently selected element.

Selection

Toolbars
Zoom Previous Resets the zoom level to the last setting.
Zoom Next Resets the zoom level to the setting that was
active before a Zoom Previous command was
executed.
drawing.
Refresh Updates the main window view according to the

Drawing latest information contained in the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i datastore. If you click the arrow
a submenu will open offering the following
commands:
• Auto-refresh: When this control is toggled on,
the drawing will automatically refresh.
• Refresh Drawing: Updates the main window
view according to the latest information
contained in the datastore.

Customizing the Toolbars

You can customize Bentley SewerCAD V8i toolbars in any of the following ways:
• “Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-41

• “Controlling Toolbars” on page 2-41
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons
Toolbar buttons represent Bentley SewerCAD V8i menu commands. You can remove
buttons from any toolbar, and add commands to any toolbar on the Commands tab of
the Customize dialog box.
To add or remove a button from a toolbar:
1. Click the down arrow on the end of the toolbar you want to customize. A series of
submenus appear, allowing you to select or deselect any button in that toolbar.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons then move the mouse cursor to the right until all
of the submenus appear, as shown in the following figure:
3. Click the space to left of the toolbar button you want to add. A check mark
appears in the submenu and the button appears in the toolbar.
or
Click the check mark next to the toolbar button you want to remove. The button
will no longer appear in the toolbar.
Controlling Toolbars
You can control toolbars in Bentley SewerCAD V8i on the Toolbars tab of the
Customize dialog box. You can turn toolbars on and off, or move the toolbar to a
different location in the workspace.

Dynamic Manager Display
To turn toolbars off:
Click View > Toolbars, then click the check mark next to the toolbar you want to turn
off.
To turn toolbars on:
Click View > Toolbars, then click in the space to the left of the toolbar you want to
turn on.
To move a toolbar to a different location in the workspace:
Move your mouse to the vertical dotted line on the left side of any toolbar, then drag
the toolbar to the desired location. If you move a toolbar away from the other toolbar,
the toolbar becomes a floating dialog box.
Related Topic
• “Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-41

You access most of the features in Bentley SewerCAD V8i through a system of
dynamic windows called managers. For example, the look of the elements is
controlled in the Element Symbology manager while animation is controlled in
the EPS Results Browser manager.
When you first start Bentley SewerCAD V8i, only two managers are displayed: the
Element Symbology and Background Layers managers. This is the default workspace.
You can display as many managers as you want and move them to any location in the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace.
To return to the default workspace:
Click View > Reset Workspace.
• If you return to the default workspace, the next time you start Bentley SewerCAD
V8i, you will lose any customizations you might have made to the dynamic
manager display.

Opening Managers
To open a manager:
1. Do one of the following:

– Select the desired manager from the View menu.
– Click a manager’s button on one of the toolbars.
– Press the keyboard shortcut for the desired manager.
2. If the manager is not already docked, you can drag it to the top, left- or right-side,
or bottom of the SewerCAD V8i window to dock it. For more information on
docking managers, see “Customizing Managers” on page 2-45.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Managers
The following table lists all the Bentley SewerCAD V8i managers, their toolbar
buttons, and keyboard shortcuts.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Manager Shortcut
Scenarios—lets you build a model run ALT+1

from alternatives. For more information,
see “Scenario Manager” on page 9-465.
Alternatives—lets you create and manage ALT+2

alternatives. For more information, see
“Alternative Manager” on page 9-469.
Calculation Options—lets you set ALT+3

parameters for the numerical engine. For
more information, see “Calculation
Options” on page 9-504.
Element Symbology—controls how CTRL+1

elements look and what attributes are
displayed. For more information, see
“Element Symbology Manager” on
page 10-519.
Background Layers—lets you control the CTRL+2

display of background layers. For more
information, see “Using Background
Layers” on page 10-509.

Toolbar Keyboard
Button Manager Shortcut
Selection Sets—lets you create and CTRL+3

manage selection sets. For more
information, see “Selection Sets Manager”
on page 6-268.
Network Navigator—helps you find nodes CTRL+4

in your model. For more information, see
“Network Navigator” on page 6-276.
Queries—lets you create SQL expressions CTRL+5

for use with selection sets and FlexTables.
For more information, see “Using Queries”
on page 6-294.
Prototypes—lets you create and manage CTRL+6

prototypes. For more information, see
“Using Prototypes” on page 6-279.
FlexTables—lets you display and edit CTRL+7

tables of elements. For more information,
see “FlexTables Manager” on page 10-
546.
Graphs—lets you create and manage CTRL+8

graphs. For more information, see “Graph
Manager” on page 10-567.
Profiles —lets you draw profiles of parts of CTRL+9

your network. For more information, see
“Profiles Manager” on page 10-532.
Property Editor—displays properties of F4

individual elements or managers. For more
information, see “Property Editor” on
page 6-240.
User Notifications—presents error and F8

warning messages resulting from a
calculation.
Note: Although the toolbar

button for this manager
does not appear by
default, you can add it to
the Compute toolbar.

Customizing Managers
When you first start Bentley SewerCAD V8i, you will see the default workspace, in
which a limited set of dockable managers are visible. You can decide which managers
will be displayed at any time and where they will be displayed. You can also return to
the default workspace any time.
There are four states for each manager:
Floating—A floating manager sits above the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace like
a dialog box. You can drag a floating manager anywhere and continue to work.
You can also:
• Resize a floating manager by dragging its edges.

• Close a floating manager by clicking on the x in the top right-hand corner of the
title bar.
• Change the properties of the manager by right-clicking on the title bar.
• Switch between multiple floating managers in the same location by clicking the
manager’s tab.
• Dock the manager by double-clicking the title bar.
Docked static—A docked static manager attaches to any of the four sides of the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i window. If you drag a floating manager to any of the four
sides of the Bentley SewerCAD V8i window, the manager will attach or dock itself to
that side of the window. The manager will stay in that location unless you close it or
make it dynamic. A vertical pushpin in the manager’s title bar indicates its static state;
click the pushpin to change the manager’s state to dynamic. When the push pin is
pointing downward (vertical push pin), the manager is docked.
You can also:
• Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
• Change a docked manager into a floating manager by double-clicking the title bar,
or by dragging the manager to the desired location (for example, away from the
side of the Bentley SewerCAD V8i window).
• Change a static docked manager into a dynamically docked manager by clicking
the push pin in the title bar.
• Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by clicking the
manager’s tab.

Using Customizations
Docked dynamic—A docked dynamic manager also docks to any of the four sides of
the Bentley SewerCAD V8i window, but remains hidden except for a single tab. Show
a docked dynamic manager by moving the mouse over the tab, or by clicking the tab.
When the manager is showing (not hidden), a horizontal pushpin in its title bar indi-
cates its dynamic state.
You can also:
• Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
• Change a docked dynamic manager into a docked static manager by clicking the
push pin (converting it from vertical to horizontal).
• Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by moving the
mouse over the manager’s tab or by clicking the manager’s tab.
Closed—When a manager is closed, you cannot view it. Close a manager by clicking
the x in the right corner of the manager’s title bar. Open a manager by selecting the
manager from the View menu (for example, View > Element Symbology), or by
selecting the button for that manager on the appropriate toolbar.
The Customization Manager allows you to turn on/off the visibility of properties in the
Properties Editor.
Customizations are created, removed, and modified in the Customization Manager

(see “Customization Manager” on page 2-46).
Customization Manager
The property grid Customization Manager allows you to turn on/off the visibility of
properties in the Properties Editor. The customization manager can be accessed by
selecting View > Customizations.
Customization Profiles can be created for a single project or shared across projects.
There are also a number of predefined profiles.
The Customization Manager consists of the following controls:

New This button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
• Folder: This command creates a new
folder under the currently highlighted
node in the list pane.
• Customization: This command creates a
new customization profile under the
currently highlighted node in the list
pane.
Delete This button deletes the currently highlighted

folder or customization profile.
Rename This button allows you to rename the

currently highlighted folder or customization
profile.
Edit Opens the Customization Editor dialog

allowing you to edit the currently highlighted
customization profile.
Help Opens the online help.
Create a customization by highlighting Project (specific to this file), or Shared (avail-

able for other projects on your computer) customizations.
Pick New and name the new Customization (default name = Customization 1). Select
the elements for which you want to create customizations. (you cannot edit Predefined
customizations).
After you have selected the type of element for which you want to customize the prop-
erty grid, you will see a tree view of all of the available properties. Uncheck those
which you do not want to see appearing in the grid. You may also hide entire catego-
ries. (The Calculation Options cannot be customized.)
A defined customization is applied after the automatic filter is applied. For example,
if you have a customization to show all design-related properties but a conduit does
not have the "Design Conduit?" property set to true then you will not see all the prop-
erties. You must first set the "Design Conduit?" property to true and then you will see
the design properties.

To use a customization, open a property grid, and select the drop down list near the
top. The default customization is <Default View> which displays every property. Any
customization created by the user is displayed in the drop down list, plus a predefined
customization called <minimal> which is intended for beginner users who do not need
to see more advanced items. It hides the following:
• Tractive stress
• Hyper links
• Known flows
• Design
• User defined properties
• Parsing
If you want to create a specific view of the property grid you can either start from
<Default View> and remove items, or from a previous customization using the Dupli-
cate button.
Customizations are stored in xml files at the locations described below:
In Windows XP:
Predefined customizations are stored in C:\Documents and Setting \All users\ Appli-
cation Data/Bentley\SewerCAD\<versionnumber>\Predefinedworkspaces.xml.
Shared customizations are stored in your C:\Document and Settings\<user

name>\Local Settings\Application Data/Bentley\SewerCAD\<version no>\Shared-
workspaces.xml.
In Vista:
Predefined customizations are stored in C:\ProgramData\Bentley\SewerCAD\

versionnumber/Predefinedworkspaces.xml
Shared customizations are stored in your C:\Users\<user-

name>\AppData\Local\Bentley\SewerCAD\<versionumber> Sharedworkspaces.xml
Customization Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to edit the customization profiles that are created in the
Customization Manager. In the Customization editor you can turn off the visibility of
various properties in the Property Grid.
You can turn off any number of properties and/or entire categories of properties in a
single customization profile.

To remove a property from the property grid:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.

2. Find the property you want to turn off by expanding the node of the category the
property is under.
3. Uncheck the box next to the property to be turned off.
4. Click OK.
To turn off all of the properties under a category:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.

2. Uncheck the box next to the category to be turned off.
3. Click OK.
Moving Models between SewerGEMS and

SewerGEMS Sanitary/SewerCAD
This version of SewerGEMS combines the functionality of prior versions of Sewer-
GEMS, plus that of SewerCAD V8i. When a user installs SewerGEMS, two indi-
vidual programs are installed on the computer
• SewerGEMS V8i which is an upgrade to the fall 2008 version of SewerGEMS

V8i. It also contains numerous user interface improvements plus some improve-
ments in speed and stability of the implicit dynamic wave engine.
• SewerGEMS Sanitary V8i which is essentially the SewerCAD V8i program with
the addition of ArcGIS platform support.
The file format for SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary are different. Sewer-
GEMS uses .swg files, SewerGEMS Sanitary uses .swc files.
While it is possible to move a model between the two files types (swc and swg), it is
best to keep a master copy of the model in one format. If a file is imported into a
different format, the changes made should be those required to make the model run in
the new engine. It is best to avoid making round trips with the model since this
increases the size of the file and can be confusing.
Whenever SewerGEMS Sanitary is mentioned in this help topic, whatever is

discussed for SewerGEMS Sanitary is also true for SewerCAD
Choosing which program to use

Moving Models between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary/SewerCAD
The SewerGEMS program should be used when catchment rainfall-runoff calcula-

tions are required or dynamic wave solutions are needed.
The SewerGEMS Sanitary program should be used in systems that have complicated
pumping, pressure sewers, need steady state solutions and only need to use extended
period simulation convex (EPS) routing.
SewerCAD and SewerGEMS Sanitary elements have a great deal of their properties in
common. For simple models, it is possible to move the files between the two formats
with no loss of data. However, there are still a number of cases for which Sewer-
GEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary behave differently. Therefore, some manual inter-
vention may be required to move files between the two models.
To simplify the exchange of files between the two programs, it is important to be

aware of the differences between the programs described below.
Exchanging Files
Use "File Import" to exchange models between the two applications. The original
model will not be modified during the import process.
To import a SewerGEMS file into SewerGEMS Sanitary, use File > Import > Sewer-
GEMS V8.
To import a SewerGEMS Sanitary (or SewerCAD) (.swc)file into SewerGEMS, use

File > Import > SewerCAD V8.
If issues are encountered during import, warning and informational User Notification
messages may be provided. Choose Analysis > User notifications to review these
messages.
Overview -- Converting between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS

Sanitary
In general, hydraulic models can be imported between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS

Sanitary readily. However, there are special elements, behaviors and components that
differ between the programs that the user needs to be aware of.
SewerGEMS features not in SewerGEMS Sanitary
• Catchment hydrology (rainfall-runoff)

• Dynamic wave (implicit) solver and SWMM (explicit) solver
• Pond and gutter elements
• Flow splits based on hydraulics

SewerGEMS Sanitary features not in SewerGEMS
• Complex pump controls

• Steady state analysis
• Automated design
• Diversion links
• Pressure sewers
To simplify the process of moving models between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS

Sanitary, you are advised to avoid elements and features that can complicate this
process. Some of those special considerations are described below.
Mapping of Alternatives
There is not a one-to-one mapping of alternative types between SewerGEMS and

SewerGEMS Sanitary.
SewerGEMS Sanitary has:
• Active Topology Alternative

• Physical Alternatives
• Design Alternative
• Headloss Alternative
• Boundary Condition Alternatives
• Initial Settings Alternative
• Sanitary Loading Alternative
• Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives
• System Flows Alternative
• Operational Alternative
• User Data Extensions Alternative
While SewerGEMS has:

• Initial Conditions Alternative
• Hydrology Alternatives

• Output Alternatives
• Inflow Alternatives
• Rainfall Runoff Alternative
• Water Quality Alternative
The Design and System Flows Alternative in SewerGEMS Sanitary do not have a
corresponding alternative in SewerGEMS and are not imported. Conversely, the
Hydrology, Output, Rainfall-Runoff and Water Quality Alternatives in SewerGEMS
do not have a corresponding alternative in SewerGEMS Sanitary and are not
imported.
The Physical and Headloss Alternatives in SewerGEMS Sanitary are combined into
the Physical Alternative in SewerGEMS on import. Conversely, the SewerGEMS
Physical Alternative is divided into the Physical and Headloss Alternatives.
When a .swc (source) file is imported from SewerGEMS Sanitary into SewerGEMS
(target file), a parent physical alternative is initially created with the physical data
from the source but no data from the headloss alternatives in the source file. Then one
child physical alternative is created from that parent for each headloss alternative. To
help distinguish alternatives, the internal id of the alternative is appended to the name.
For example, if the source file contains the alternatives
• Physical A
– Physical B
– Physical C
• Headloss 1
– Headloss 2
After import, the target file will contain
• Physical A
– Physical A-217 (containing Physical A and Headloss 1 with id 217)
– Physical A-344 (containing Physical A and Headloss 2 with id 344)
– Physical B
- Physical B-195 (containing Physical B and Headloss 1 with id 195)

- Physical B-233 (containing Physical B and Headloss 2 with id 233)

– Physical C
- Physical C-78 (containing Physical C and Headloss 1 with id 78)
- Physical C-218 (containing Physical C and Headloss 2 with id 218)
Some of these combinations of alternatives are not used in scenarios. The user may
delete those when possible, although the user cannot delete a parent when the child is
used in a scenario. For example, if Physical A is never used with Headloss 2, the alter-
native with id 344 can be deleted.
To view the id number of an alternative, highlight the alternative in the alternative

manager and the property grid will open for that alternative. This will show the id
number.
Because of the increasing number of alternatives on each import, users are discour-
aged from making multiple round trips between .swc and .swg files.
If the user wants to view the ID numbers of an alternative in the scenario manager, he
should go to Tools > Options > Project and select ID:Label for Element Identifier
Format.
Treatment of Time Steps
SewerGEMS, using either the Bentley dynamic wave or SWMM engine, uses a
constant time step through out the run. SewerGEMS Sanitary has the ability to use
different size time steps for hydrologic routing, gravity hydraulics and pressure
hydraulics. This enables it to take larger default time steps and allows the pressure
solver to insert time steps corresponding to pump switches on a subnetwork basis.
As a dynamic wave solver, SewerGEMS does not perform steady state solutions. On
the other hand, SewerGEMS Sanitary can perform steady state calculations. Because
steady state solutions are not run in SewerGEMS, extreme flow setups are not
imported.
Pumping
A fundamental difference between the way that SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sani-
tary treat pumps is that SewerGEMS must have a suction node (like a submersible
pump) while SewerGEMS Sanitary must have a pressure pipe as a the suction element
(like a dry well pump). When importing a pump from SewerGEMS to SewerGEMS
Sanitary, a suction side pressure pipe element is added to the model with a label
"[pump label]-Pipe". Suction pipes from SewerGEMS Sanitary are imported into
SewerGEMS but the upstream end of that pressure pipe must be a wet well, manhole
or pond and not a pressure junction.

Pump definitions are handled differently in SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary.

The Offline Volume-Flow Curve (SWMM Type 1), Inline Depth-Flow Curve
(SWMM Type 2) and Inline Variable Speed Pump (SWMM Type 4) pumps in Sewer-
GEMS do not have a counterpart in SewerGEMS Sanitary. Those pumps should be
converted into Inline Head-Flow Curves (SWMM Type 3) to be successfully imported
into SewerGEMS Sanitary as Multiple Point pump curves.
SewerGEMS Sanitary pumps will be imported into SewerGEMS as Inline Head-Flow

Curves (Type 3) pumps. The number of points in the curve definition depends on the
type of pump definition in SewerGEMS Sanitary.
In SewerGEMS, it is possible to specify multiple constant speed pumps in a single

pump element. In SewerGEMS Sanitary, each pump must correspond to a single
pump. Separate pump elements will be set up in SewerGEMS Sanitary when a Sewer-
GEMS pump element with multiple pumps is imported.
While SewerGEMS Sanitary actually calculates the pump speed for variable speed
pumps, SewerGEMS imports those pumps as Inline Head-Flow pumps which are
inherently constant speed. The achieve variable speed pumping in SewerGEMS, you
must manually convert those pumps into Inline Variable Speed pumps. SewerGEMS
Sanitary variable speed pump batteries are imported into SewerGEMS as a constant
speed pump element with n+1 pumps where n is the number of lag pumps in the
battery. One pump is assumed to be initially "on".
Controls
In SewerGEMS, pumps can be turned on or off based on the hydraulic grade line of
the suction element. In SewerGEMS Sanitary, there is a much more powerful set of
tools to operate any pressure element based on virtually any element property or time.
When importing SewerGEMS controls into SewerGEMS Sanitary, a pair of on/off

control statements is created for each pump. When importing SewerGEMS Sanitary
controls into SewerGEMS, only pump on/off controls based on elevations in suction
elements are imported. All other control statements are ignored.
Gravity Flow Control Structures
SewerGEMS conduits and channels can contain flow control structures which can
include weirs, orifices, flow vs. depth (relative to invert on upstream side) curves and
function curve. These are not imported into SewerGEMS Sanitary. Some of these
features can be approximated in SewerGEMS Sanitary by modeling them as a
manhole element with a flow-headloss curve.

The following table shows the manhole (and transition node) head loss methods avail-
able in SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary. When there is a method used in one
model for which there is not an equivalent method in the other, the method is set to
Absolute with a headloss of 0 on import.
Table 2-1: Manhole Headloss Methods Available by Product
Method SewerGEMS SewerGEMS

Sanitary
Absolute X X
Standard X X
Generic X X
HEC-22 X X
AASHTO X
Flow-headloss X
Conduits
SewerGEMS uses different elements for conduits and open channels while Sewer-
GEMS Sanitary simply treats open channels are a special case of a conduit. The table
below shows what type of user defined conduits are available in each program..
Table 2-2: Types of User-Defined Conduits Available by Product
Shape SewerGEMS SewerGEMS

Sanitary
Circular X Conduit
Arch X Consuit
Basket Handle X
Box X Conduit
Catenary* X
Egg X
Gothic* X
Irregular Closed X Conduit


Sanitary
Irregular Open X Channel
Parabolic X
Power X
Rectangular X Channel
Semi-Elliptical* X
Trapezoidal X Channel
Triangular* X Channel
* SWMM Engine Only
Open Channels
SewerGEMS has two types of gravity flow links, conduits and open channels. Sewer-
GEMS Sanitary has only conduit elements. In SewerGEMS Sanitary, open channels
are simply a special type of conduit as described in the table above.
In SewerGEMS the open channel properties are set at channel cross sections and vary
between cross section nodes. In SewerGEMS Sanitary, the channels are prismatic with
constant properties along the link element. SewerGEMS uses cross section elements
between open channel links while SewerGEMS Sanitary uses transition elements.
When importing from SewerGEMS to SewerGEMS Sanitary, the shape of the
upstream cross section is used as the cross section of the prismatic channel.
Wet Wells
SewerGEMS Sanitary Circular and Non-Circular section wet-wells are converted to

SewerGEMS Wet-well Constant Area type. For Variable Area section type, Depth
Ratio-Volume Ratio curves are converted to Depth-Area curve.
If the depth or volume data is not valid (due to negative values or data not in
ascending order), the wet-well data will not be imported, and user notification will be
created. If the area value for a depth cannot be calculated from the SewerGEMS Sani-
tary wet-well depth ratio-volume ratio curve, not all wet-well section areas will be
calculated; a user notification will provided to indicate this.

SewerGEMS Constant Area wet wells are converted into SewerGEMS Sanitary Non-
circular section wet wells.
Ponds
SewerGEMS ponds are not imported into SewerGEMS Sanitary. The user can simu-
late the behavior of some storage elements in the real system using SewerGEMS Sani-
tary wet well elements.
Head Loss Methods
SewerGEMS only uses Manning's equation for head loss calculations. When
importing conduits and channels from SewerGEMS Sanitary to SewerGEMS that do
not use Manning equation, the pipe roughness is converted into the equivalent n coef-
ficients.
Flow Splits
Sewer systems are generally tree shaped in layout with flows combining as they move
to the outfall. However, in some cases flow can split. SewerGEMS Sanitary handles
these splits by requiring the user to specify a diversion rating curve, which is the flow
that enters the "diversion link" as a function of the flow into the splitter node. These
diversion rating curves are not imported into SewerGEMS.
The flow splits in SewerGEMS are determined hydraulically based on the elevations
of the links leaving the splitter node and their capacities at different water depths. If a
SewerGEMS model is imported into SewerGEMS Sanitary, the user must specify the
diversion rating curve or an error will be issued at run time.
Air Valves
Air valves at high points are unique to SewerGEMS Sanitary and are imported as
pressure junctions. However, the downhill side of a high point that may or may not
flow full may be modeled in SewerGEMS as gravity conduits that have bolted
manholes.
Catchments
SewerGEMS Sanitary does not perform Catchment Rainfall-Runoff Hydrology calcu-

lations. To load a SewerGEMS model with hydrograph flow from hydrology calcula-
tions, first run the calculations in SewerGEMS, then export the hydrographs to an
intermediate spreadsheet or data base and import them into SewerGEMS Sanitary as
hydrograph loads.
Gutters

Using Named Views
Because SewerGEMS Sanitary is not intended for stormwater use, gutters are not
imported into the program. They can be modeled as open channel irregular conduits.
SewerGEMS Catalog Pipes
If a user imports a swg model file into an swc file and that swg file has conduits with
Section type Catalog Pipe, it is necessary to specify which type of conduit each pipe is
after the import. This can be done by globally editing the Section Type field to Catalog
pipe and the Conduit Shape field to Circular (or whatever shape is involved). If
several different shape pipes are involved, then it is usually more desirable to directly
specify the conduit's type in SewerGEMS rather than using Catalog Pipe
Using Named Views

The Named View dialog box is where you can store the current views X and Y coordi-
nates. When you set a view in the drawing pane and add a named view, the current
view is saved as the named view. You can then center the drawing pane on the named
view with the Go To View command.
Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.

The toolbar contains the following controls:
New Contains the following commands:

• Named View—Opens a Named View
Properties box to create a new named
view.
• Folder—Opens a Named Views Folder
Properties box to enter a label for the
new folder.
Delete Deletes the named view or folder that is

currently selected.
Rename Rename the currently selected named view

or folder.
Go to View Centers the drawing pane on the named

view.
Shift Up and Shift Moves the selected named view or folder up

Down or down.
Expand All or Expands or collapses the named views and

Collapse All folders.
Help Displays online help for Named Views.
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables

This topic describes the best practices used to copy and paste data from and to the
various tables.
Copying data from a table

There are generally 3 ways to copy data from tables.
1. The first is to highlight (or select) the data by clicking in the top-left corner of the
table.
This will highlight all the data in the table including the column headers:
When you use the windows short combination, CTRL-C, it will copy the high-
lighted data to the windows clipboard. The data copied will include the column
headers (in this case Time (hours) and Flow (ft^3/s)) and the rows below it. This
also includes the last row which is blank.
It will not copy the row headers (numbered 1 - 5 in this case).

2. The second approach is to highlight the two columns (in this case).
This is similar to the first approach except it does not highlight the row headers.
When you use the CTRL-C combination it will again copy the header data along
with the row data including the last blank row.
3. The best approach for copying the data is to highlight just the rows you want to
copy without highlighting the column headers. To do this you can just click on
the first row (#1 here) and drag your mouse down while holding the left mouse
button. This will highlight the table as follows:

When you use the CTRL-C combination in this case it will copy only the data that
you want. The column and row headers will not be copied. You can also use the
CTRL-<left click> approach to copy non-consecutive rows.
Pasting data into a table
When you paste data into one of our tables you want to make sure you do not include
any header data. If you include any non-numerical data a row will be inserted and the
default values for the columns will be used in place of any text or non-numerical data
that was pasted.
For example, if you copy using the first approach described above, you will get the
following results:
The first row is the row that represents the column headers that were pasted into the
table. The last row of 0's is the blank row at the end of the table.

Note: We advise that you delete any rows containing “0” values that
may be inadvertently created during a copy-paste operation.
If you used the 3rd approach described above by just highlighting the rows you want
to copy and then paste, you will get a more desirable result as follows:
As a result, the first row is exactly what you wanted along with the last row. There are
no unexpected values pasted into the grid.
Moving Models between SewerGEMS and

SewerGEMS Sanitary/SewerCAD
This version of SewerGEMS combines the functionality of prior versions of Sewer-
GEMS, plus that of SewerCAD V8i. When a user installs SewerGEMS, two indi-
vidual programs are installed on the computer
• SewerGEMS V8i which is an upgrade to the fall 2008 version of SewerGEMS

V8i SELECTseries 2. It also contains numerous user interface improvements plus
some improvements in speed and stability of the implicit dynamic wave engine.
• SewerGEMS Sanitary V8i which is essentially the SewerCAD V8i SELECTseries
2 program with the addition of ArcGIS platform support.
The file format for SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary are different. Sewer-
GEMS uses .swg files, SewerGEMS Sanitary uses .swc files.
While it is possible to move a model between the two files types (swc and swg), it is
best to keep a master copy of the model in one format. If a file is imported into a
different format, the changes made should be those required to make the model run in
the new engine. It is best to avoid making round trips with the model since this
increases the size of the file and can be confusing.

Whenever SewerGEMS Sanitary is mentioned in this help topic, whatever is

discussed for SewerGEMS Sanitary is also true for SewerCAD
Choosing which program to use
The SewerGEMS program should be used when catchment rainfall-runoff calcula-

tions are required or dynamic wave solutions are needed.
The SewerGEMS Sanitary program should be used in systems that have complicated
pumping, pressure sewers, need steady state solutions and only need to use extended
period simulation convex (EPS) routing.
SewerCAD and SewerGEMS Sanitary elements have a great deal of their properties in
common. For simple models, it is possible to move the files between the two formats
with no loss of data. However, there are still a number of cases for which Sewer-
GEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary behave differently. Therefore, some manual inter-
vention may be required to move files between the two models.
To simplify the exchange of files between the two programs, it is important to be

aware of the differences between the programs described below.
Exchanging Files
Use "File Import" to exchange models between the two applications. The original
model will not be modified during the import process.
To import a SewerGEMS file into SewerGEMS Sanitary, use File > Import > Sewer-
GEMS V8.
To import a SewerGEMS Sanitary (or SewerCAD) (.swc)file into SewerGEMS, use

File > Import > SewerCAD V8.
If issues are encountered during import, warning and informational User Notification
messages may be provided. Choose Analysis > User notifications to review these
messages.
Overview -- Converting between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS

Sanitary
In general, hydraulic models can be imported between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS

Sanitary readily. However, there are special elements, behaviors and components that
differ between the programs that the user needs to be aware of.
SewerGEMS features not in SewerGEMS Sanitary
• Catchment hydrology (rainfall-runoff)

• Dynamic wave (implicit) solver and SWMM (explicit) solver

• Pond and gutter elements
• Flow splits based on hydraulics
• Channels and Cross Sections
SewerGEMS Sanitary features not in SewerGEMS
• Complex pump controls

• Steady state analysis
• Automated design
• Diversion links
• Pressure sewers
To simplify the process of moving models between SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS

Sanitary, you are advised to avoid elements and features that can complicate this
process. Some of those special considerations are described below.
Mapping of Alternatives
There is not a one-to-one mapping of alternative types between SewerGEMS and

SewerGEMS Sanitary.
SewerGEMS Sanitary has:

• Design Alternative
• System Flows Alternative
While SewerGEMS has:

• Hydrology Alternatives
• Output Alternatives
• Rainfall Runoff Alternative
• Water Quality Alternative
The Design and System Flows Alternative in SewerGEMS Sanitary do not have a
corresponding alternative in SewerGEMS and are not imported. Conversely, the
Hydrology, Output, Rainfall-Runoff and Water Quality Alternatives in SewerGEMS
do not have a corresponding alternative in SewerGEMS Sanitary and are not
imported.
Treatment of Time Steps
SewerGEMS, using either the Bentley dynamic wave or SWMM engine, uses a
constant time step through out the run. SewerGEMS Sanitary has the ability to use
different size time steps for hydrologic routing, gravity hydraulics and pressure
hydraulics. This enables it to take larger default time steps and allows the pressure
solver to insert time steps corresponding to pump switches on a subnetwork basis.
As a dynamic wave solver, SewerGEMS does not perform steady state solutions. On
the other hand, SewerGEMS Sanitary can perform steady state calculations. Because
steady state solutions are not run in SewerGEMS, extreme flow setups are not
imported.
Pumping
SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary share the same Pump Definition Library, but
not all pump types and functionality are usable in both products.
SewerGEMS Sanitary supports all Pump Definition Types except:
• Volume vs. Flow

• Depth vs. Flow

• Depth Flow (Simulated Variable Speed)
If you select one of these pump definition types in SewerGEMS Sanitary the model
will not compute.
SewerGEMS supports all pump definition types although, Constant Power, Design
Point, Standard, Standard Extended, and Custom Extended are not directly supported.
They are converted into a multiple point pump curves and then loaded into the compu-
tation engine. If you wish to have finer grain control of the pump curve it is recom-
mend you use the Multiple Point pump curve.
While SewerGEMS Sanitary actually calculates the pump speed for variable speed
pumps, SewerGEMS imports those pumps as Multiple Point pumps which are inher-
ently constant speed. To achieve variable speed pumping in SewerGEMS, the user
must manually convert those pumps into Depth Flow (Simulated Variable Speed)
pumps. SewerGEMS Sanitary variable speed pump batteries are imported into Sewer-
GEMS as a single constant speed pump. You will need to manually adjust the pumps
at those points to meet your needs.
Controls
In SewerGEMS, pumps can be turned on or off based on the hydraulic grade line of
the suction element (the node immediately upstream of the pump). In SewerGEMS
Sanitary, there is a much more powerful set of tools to operate any pressure element
based on virtually any element property or time.
When importing SewerGEMS controls into SewerGEMS Sanitary, a pair of on/off

control statements is created for each pump. When importing SewerGEMS Sanitary
controls into SewerGEMS, only pump on/off controls based on elevations in suction
elements are imported. All other control statements are ignored.
Gravity Flow Control Structures
SewerGEMS conduits and channels can contain flow control structures which can
include weirs, orifices, flow vs. depth (relative to invert on upstream side) curves and
function curve. These are not imported into SewerGEMS Sanitary. Some of these
features can be approximated in SewerGEMS Sanitary by modeling them as a
manhole element with a flow-headloss curve.

The following table shows the manhole (and transition node) head loss methods avail-
able in SewerGEMS and SewerGEMS Sanitary. When there is a method used in one
model for which there is not an equivalent method in the other, the method is set to
Absolute with a headloss of 0 on import.
Table 2-3: Manhole Headloss Methods Available by Product
Method SewerGEMS SewerGEMS

Sanitary
Absolute X X
Standard X X
Generic X X
HEC-22 X X
AASHTO X
Flow-headloss X
Conduits
SewerGEMS uses different elements for conduits and open channels while Sewer-
GEMS Sanitary simply treats open channels are a special case of a conduit. The table
below shows what type of user defined conduits are available in each program..

Sanitary
Circular X Conduit
Arch X Conduit
Basket Handle X
Box X Conduit
Catenary* X
Egg X
Gothic* X
Irregular Closed X Conduit


Sanitary
Irregular Open X Channel
Parabolic X
Power X
Rectangular X Channel
Semi-Elliptical* X
Trapezoidal X Channel
Triangular* X Channel
* SWMM Engine Only
Open Channels
SewerGEMS has two types of gravity flow links, conduits and open channels. Sewer-
GEMS Sanitary has only conduit elements. In SewerGEMS Sanitary, open channels
are simply a special type of conduit as described in the table above.
In SewerGEMS the open channel properties are set at channel cross sections and vary
between cross section nodes. In SewerGEMS Sanitary, the channels are prismatic with
constant properties along the link element. SewerGEMS uses cross section elements
between open channel links while SewerGEMS Sanitary uses transition elements.
When importing from SewerGEMS to SewerGEMS Sanitary, the shape of the
upstream cross section is used as the cross section of the prismatic channel.
Wet Wells
SewerGEMS Sanitary Circular and Non-Circular section wet-wells are converted to

SewerGEMS Wet-well Constant Area type.
SewerGEMS Constant Area wet wells are converted into SewerGEMS Sanitary Non-
circular section wet wells.
Ponds
SewerGEMS ponds are not imported into SewerGEMS Sanitary. The user can simu-
late the behavior of some storage elements in the real system using SewerGEMS Sani-
tary wet well elements.

Head Loss Methods
SewerGEMS only uses Manning's equation for head loss calculations. When
importing conduits and channels from SewerGEMS Sanitary to SewerGEMS that do
not use Manning equation, the pipe roughness is converted into the equivalent n coef-
ficients. SewerGEMS Sanitary can use the Manning, Darcy-Weisbach and Hazen
Williams equations for pressure pipe while for gravity pipes, it can use all of the above
plus Kutter's equation.
Flow Splits
Sewer systems are generally tree shaped in layout with flows combining as they move
to the outlet. However, in some cases flow can split. SewerGEMS Sanitary handles
these splits by requiring the user to specify a diversion rating curve, which is the flow
that enters the "diversion link" as a function of the flow into the splitter node. These
diversion rating curves are not imported into SewerGEMS.
The flow splits in SewerGEMS are determined hydraulically based on the elevations
of the links leaving the splitter node and their capacities at different water depths. If a
SewerGEMS model is imported into SewerGEMS Sanitary, the user must specify the
diversion rating curve or an error will be issued at run time.
Air Valves
Air valves at high points are unique to SewerGEMS Sanitary and are imported as
pressure junctions. However, the downhill side of a high point that may or may not
flow full may be modeled in SewerGEMS as gravity conduits that have bolted
manholes.
Catchments
SewerGEMS Sanitary does not perform Catchment Rainfall-Runoff Hydrology calcu-

lations. To load a SewerGEMS model with hydrograph flow from hydrology calcula-
tions, first run the calculations in SewerGEMS, then export the hydrographs to an
intermediate spreadsheet or data base and import them into SewerGEMS Sanitary as
hydrograph loads.
Gutters
Because SewerGEMS Sanitary is not intended for stormwater use, gutters are not
imported into the program. They can be modeled as open channel irregular conduits.

Chapter
Quick Start Lessons 3

The purpose of this chapter is to provide step-by-step lessons to get you familiar with
some of the features and capabilities of SewerCAD V8i. The lessons serve as a means
to get you started exploring and using the software. We have included sample files
located in your Samples directory (under the main product directory) for you to
explore and experiment with. If you need help, press F1 (or right click) to access the
context sensitive on-line help.
In order to follow these tutorials, you can either do them in sequence, since each tuto-
rial uses the results of the previous ones, or start lesson 2, 3, 4, and 5 with the files
located in the Lessons directory.
Lesson 1 - Creating a Schematic Network

SewerCAD V8i is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a sanitary sewer model. It
is easy to prepare a schematic model and let SewerCAD V8i take care of the link-node
connectivity.
You do not need to be concerned with assigning labels to pipes and nodes, because
SewerCAD V8i will handle this internally. When creating a scaled drawing, pipe
lengths are automatically calculated from the position of the pipes' start and stop
nodes on the drawing pane. Since this example is a schematic (not scaled) layout, you
will need to enter the pipe lengths.

In this lesson we will layout and analyze the following schematic network.
Part 1 - Creating a New Schematic Project File
1. Start SewerCAD V8i Stand-Alone. If the Welcome to SewerCAD V8i dialog

appears, click the Create New Project button. If it does not appear, choose New
from the File pull-down menu. Enter a file name such as 'Lesson.swc' for your
project and click Save.
2. Enter information about the project in the project propeties dialog (optional). To
access Project Properties click the File menu and select Project properties. In this
dialog you can enter a Title, Filename, Engineer’s name, Company name, date,
and descriptive notes. When you are finished click OK

Quick Start Lessons
3. Choose your desired project options. To access project Options click the Tools
menu and select Options.

4. Click the Drawing tab in the Options dialog. The Drawing Mode should be set to
Schematic.

Quick Start Lessons
5. For this project we will use metric units. Click the Units tab. Change the Default
Unit System for New project value to SI. Click the OK button to accept the rest of
the default project options.
6. To draw the skeletonized sewer network shown previously, click the Layout tool
in the Layout toolbar and select Conduit from the submenu that appears.
7. Move the cursor onto the drawing space and click once to place a manhole to
represent the manhole labeled MH-1.
8. Right-click and select Wet Well from the context menu. Move the cursor to the
approximate location of the wet well, W-1, and click once to place it. We will
change the default labels later so that your drawing reflects the one shown at the
beginning of this lesson.
Wet wells represent the transition point between the gravity system and the pres-
sure system. Similarly, manholes and transitions can represent the transition from
a pressure system to the gravity system. Conduits are used to connect gravity

elements, while Pressure Pipes are used to connect pressure elements. W-1 marks
the transition between the gravity and pressure systems; the rest of the elements in
the network will be connected using Pressure Pipes.
9. Right-click and select Pressure pipe. Right-click again and select Pump. Place
PMP-1.
10. Place the pressure junction and the outfall by right clicking, selecting the appro-
priate element from the context menu, and then clicking once to place each
element.
11. Place manhole MH-2. Right-click and select Transition from the context menu.
SewerCAD V8i allows you to split any pipe in two. To insert the Transition, click
the middle of pipe P-1. A dialog will pop up asking whether you wish to split the
pipe. Click Yes.
12. Right-click and select Done from the pop-up menu to terminate the pipe layout
command. Click JC-1 and drag it into position so your network matches the layout
shown below.
Part 2 - Entering Data
Element data can be entered in any of the following ways:
• Properties Editor—You can use the Select tool and double-click an element to
bring up its Properties editor. In AutoCAD, click the element once with the Select
tool to open the element’s editor.

Quick Start Lessons
• FlexTables—You can use FlexTables to bring up dynamic tables that allow you to
edit and display the model data in a tabular format. You can edit the data as you
would in a spreadsheet.
• Alternative Editors—Alternatives are used to enter data for different “What If?”
situations used in Scenario Management.
• User Data Extensions—The User Data Extensions feature allows you to import
and export element data directly from XML files.
Entering Data Through the Properties Editor

To access an element’s dialog box in SewerCAD V8i mode, double-click the element.
In AutoCAD, first click the Select tool on the toolbar, then click the element whose
attributes you wish to modify.
1. Double-click the outfall, O-1. Enter the data including ground elevation, rim
elevation, and sump elevation as outlined in the following outfall Data table.
Change the label to match the model schematic as necessary. If the Set Rim to
Ground Elevation box is checked, SewerCAD V8i will automatically set the rim
elevation to the ground elevation. Finally, select Free Outfall from the Tailwater
Conditions menu.
Table 3-1: outfall Input Data
Label Elevation Elevation Elevation Boundary

(Ground) (Rim) (m) (Invert) (m) Condition
(m) Type
O-1 16 16 14 Free Outfall
2. Enter the data for the manholes, transition, and wet well as outlined in the
Manhole data, Transition data, and Wet Well data tables below. Select Standard
from the list of available headloss methods in the Headloss Method field. Then
enter the headloss coefficient for each structure.
Table 3-2: Manhole Input Data
Label Elevation Elevation Elevation Diameter Headloss Headloss

(Ground) (Rim) (m) (Invert) (m) Method Coefficien
(m) (m) t
MH-1 11.1 11 9 1 Standard 0.25
MH-2 11.1 11.1 9 1 Standard 0.25

Table 3-3: Transition Input Data
Label Elevation Elevation Elevation Transition Headloss Headloss

(Ground) (Top)(m) (Invert) Length Method Coefficie
(m) (m) (m) nt
JC-1 12 11 9.2 1 Standard 0.5
Table 3-4: Wet Well Input Dialog
Label Elevation Elevation Elevation Elevation Section Diameter Elevation

(Base) (Minimu (Initial) (Maximu (m) (Ground)
(m) m) (m) (m) m) (m) (m)
W-1 6 6 8 10 Circular 3 10.5
3. Pump curves are defined in the Pump Definitions dialog. Click the Components
menu and select Pump Definitions.

Quick Start Lessons
4. In the Pump Definitions dialog, click the New button. Change the label of the
newly created definition to PMP-1. Right-click the Flow column and select units
and Formatting. Change the unit to m3/s. Leave the Pump Definition Type set to
Standard (3 Point) and enter the following values: Close the Pump Definitions
Table 3-5: Pump Definition
Flow (m3/s) Head (m)
Shutoff 0.00 53.33
Design 0.25 40
Max 0.5 0.00

Operating
dialog.
5. Double-click PMP-1 to enter data in the Properties editor. Enter the following
data:
Table 3-6: Pump Input Data
Label Elevation Elevation Pump

(Ground) (Invert) (m) Definition
(m)
PMP-1 7.8 7.8 PMP-1
Note that the pump has an upstream pipe and a downstream pipe to define the
direction. The downstream pipe is indicated in the Downstream Link field of the
Properties editor. If the pump is going in the wrong direction, click the Reverse
command in this field to switch it. In this example the downstream link should be
FM-2.
6. Enter an Elevation of 13m and Elevation (Ground) of 14.2m for Pressure Junction
J-1.
Entering Data Through FlexTables

Often it is more convenient to enter data for similar elements into a tabular form rather
than to individually click every element, enter the data into the dialog, and then click
the next element.
1. Double-click P-1 and change the Set Invert to Start and Set Invert to Stop fields to
False. Change the Has User Defined length? field value to True. Repeat for P-2
and P-3. This will allow you to change these values in the Flextable.
2. To access the FlexTables click the View menu and select FlexTables.

3. In the Flextables manager dialog double-click Conduit table under the Tables-
Predefined category. Enter data as you would into a spreadsheet. The yellow fields
are not editable and the white fields are. For each of the three gravity pipes enter
the upstream and downstream inverts, the section size, the section type, and the
pipe material as outlined in the Gravity Pipe Data table below. Leave other data to
default values. The gravity pipes may not be in alphanumeric order in the table.
To sort the table by pipe label, right-click the Label column heading. Select Sort /
Ascending from the pop-up menu that appears. Use the data in the table below to
enter input data:
Table 3-7: Conduit Input Data
Label Invert (Start) Invert (Stop) Conduit Conduit Manning’s n Diameter Length
(m) (m) Shape Material (mm) (User
Defined)
(m)
P-1 10 9.5 Circular Concrete 0.013 200 100

Pipe
P-2 9.5 9.1 Circular Concrete 0.013 200 70

Pipe
P-3 10 9.5 Circular Concrete 0.013 200 100

Pipe
4. In the FlexTable Manager double-click the Pressure Pipe Table.

5. There are two things to keep in mind when entering information about pressure
pipes. First, invert elevations are calculated based on the elevations of upstream
and downstream nodes, so they are already pre-entered. Invert elevations are only
editable if the upstream or downstream node is a wet well or a gravity node.
Secondly, all pressure pipes in SewerCAD V8i are circular, so only a diameter is
entered. Enter the data from the table below, then close the Pressure Pipe table.
Table 3-8: Pressure Pipe Input Data
Label Invert (Start) Invert (Stop) Length Diameter Material

(m) (m) (User (mm)
Defined) (m)
FM-1 6 7.8 1 200 Ductile iron
FM-2 7.8 13 200 200 Ductile iron
FM-3 13 14 100 200 Ductile iron

Quick Start Lessons
6. Double-click P-1 to open the Properties editor. Change Has User Defined Length?
to True. Enter a value of 100 m in the Length (User Defined) field. Repeat this
process for conduits P-2 and P-3, as well as pressure pipes FM-1, FM-2, and FM-
3 using the length values as specified in Tables 3-7 and 3-8.
Entering Infiltration Data for Gravity Pipes

To account for infiltration into the gravity pipe P-1, double-click P-1. Change the
Infiltration Load Type to Link Length. Change the Infiltration Loading Unit to m.
Change the Infiltration Rate per Loading Unit to 0.25. Repeat for P-2 and P-3 using
the data in the following table:
Table 3-9: Conduit Infiltration Data
Label Infiltration Infiltration Infiltration

Type Loading Rate per
Unit Loading
Unit (L/d)
P-1 Link Length m 0.25
Steady State Loading

In SewerCAD V8i, loading is categorized as either a sanitary load or a wet weather
load. Sanitary (dry weather) loads occur independent of the weather, such as waste-
water from a subdivision. Wet weather loads such as pipe infiltration and inflow at
nodes are directly related to the rainfall in the area. This part of the lesson deals with
sanitary loads.
SewerCAD V8i defines loads by Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load and the Loading
Unit Count. The Unit Load represents the amount of load per a given unit. For
example, in average income housing, each resident contributes 280 l/d to the sanitary
sewer. The Loading Unit Count would be the number of units. Say 40 residents live in
a subdivision of average income housing. The total load would be the Unit Load
multiplied by the Loading Unit Count. Thus, the total load is 40 residents * 280 (l/d)/
resident which equals 11,200 l/d.

Loads can be applied to manholes, wet wells, and pressure junctions. Unit sanitary
loads are defined in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog and then assigned
to individual nodes in the Sanitary Load Control Center.
1. Click the Components menu and select Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.
2. There are a number of predefined unit loads in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library. Click the Synchronization Options button and select
Import from Library.
3. Expand the Unit Sanitary (dry Weather) Load Library and the Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Loads.xml nodes. Check the following boxes, then click Select.:

Quick Start Lessons
– Apartment
– Home (Average)
– Home (Better)
– Hotel (Residential)
– Resort
– School (Medium)
– Shopping Center Per Employee
– Theater

4. Note that the new loads are created and the Population Unit and Unit Load fields
are filled in with the imported data. Close the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads
dialog.
5. Now that the unit loads have been defined, we can assign them to the nodes in the
model. Click the Tools menu and select Sanitary Load Control Center.
6. On the Manhole tab click the new button and select Initialize Unit Loads for All
Elements.

Quick Start Lessons
7. For MH-1, select Apartment in the Unit Sanitary Load menu. Enter 2,000 in the
Loading Unit Count column. For MH-2 select Resort in the Unit Sanitary Load
menu and enter 2,000 in the Loading Unit Count column.
8. Highlight the MH-1 row, click the New button, and select Add Unit Load to
Element (MH-1). Select Home (Average) in the Unit Sanitary Load menu. Enter
3,000 in the Loading Unit Count column. Assign Unit loads to the rest of the
elements using the data in the following table:
Table 3-10: Sanitary Load Assignments
Label Unit Sanitary Loading Unit

Load Count
MH-1 Home (Better) 2,000
MH-2 Hotel (Residential) 1,000
W-1 Theater 200
W-1 Shopping Center Per 60

Employee
J-1 School (Medium) 500
9. Close the Sanitary Control Center dialog.

Extreme Flow Factors

After all loads have been applied you can specify how those average loads relate to the
peak load. Extreme flows are defined in the Extreme Flows dialog and then applied to
the loads in the model through the Extreme Flow Setups dialog.
1. Click the Components menu and select Extreme Flows.

2. In the Extreme Flows dialog, click the New button and select Insert Equation-
Population Factor.
3. Rename the factor to Babbit. Change the Population Unit in Equation to Capita x
103. Fill in the rest of the fields using the data below:
– Cutoff Value: 5.000
– c1: 0.000
– c2: 5.000
– c3: 0.000
– e1: 1.000
– e2: 0.200

Quick Start Lessons
– m1: 0.000
– m2: 1.000
4. Close the Extreme Flows dialog. Click the Components menu and select Extreme
Flow Setups. In the Extreme Flow Setup dialog you specify which Extreme Flow
method is applied and any associated constants and adjustment multipliers.
5. Click the New button. Rename the setup Base Extreme Flow Setup.

6. To apply an extreme flow method to a unit load check the associated Use box to
make the other fields editable. Right-click the Use column and select Global Edit.
In the Global Edit dialog put a check in the Value box and click OK.
7. Right-click the Extreme Flow Method column and select Global Edit. Change the
Value field to Babbit and click OK.
8. Close the Extreme Flow Setups dialog
9. In calculation options, pick the Extreme Flow Setup you would like to use from
the drop down list of Extreme Flow Setups.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 3- Calculating the Model
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options. Double-click Base
Calculation Options. The Properties editor will display the settings used by this
calculation option.
2. Make sure the Time Analysis Type is set to Steady-State and that the Calculation
Type is set to Analysis.
3. Choose Base Extreme Flow Setup from the Extreme Flow Setups menu.
4. Close the Calculation Options dialog.
5. Click the Validate button to catch any data input errors.
6. Click the Compute button.

7. The Detailed Calculation Summary appears.
8. Although Convergence was acheived and the calculation was completed success-
fully, the yellow indicator in the bottom left shows that warnings were generated.
These warnings can be viewed in the User Notifications manager. Click the Anal-
ysis menu and select User Notifications.
9. You can double-click a warning in the User Notifications manager to zoom to the
element that generated the warning.
10. Close the user Notifications dialog.

Quick Start Lessons
Lesson 2 - Automatic Design

This lesson will illustrate how SewerCAD V8i can automatically design all or parts of
the gravity portion of a sanitary sewer system within the design constraints set by the
user. After specifying parameters such as lengths, ground elevations, and boundary
conditions, SewerCAD V8i will work to find a satisfactory design. In this lesson, we
will use this feature to develop a new design to replace the undersized sanitary sewer
system created in Lesson 1.
This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 1. If you have not completed
Lesson 1, open the Lesson2.swc project located in the Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Sani-
tary\Lessons directory.
Part 1: Specifying Design Constraints
SewerCAD V8i requires parameters by which to measure the validity of a possible

design. These parameters, or design constraints, can either be set locally for each indi-
vidual element or they can be entered as default design constraints.

Default design constraints are specified in the Default Design Constraints dialog.
1. Click the Components menu and select Default Design Constraints.
2. On the Gravity Pipe tab, enter the minimum and maximum flow velocities, slopes,
and covers that the newly designed pipe's characteristics should fall between in
the Velocity, Cover, and Slope tabs respectively. These values are listed in the
table below.
Table 3-11: Design Constraint Data
Minimum Maximum
Velocity 0.60 m/s 4.00 m/s
Cover 0.70 m 4.00 m
Slope 0.005 m/m 0.10 m/m
You could further hone the design with the Extended Design features on the right
side of the dialog by checking the box for one or more of the three extended
design criteria in their tabs and entering a constraining value to have SewerCAD
V8i utilize the feature.
3. Click the Node tab to set constraints for gravity structures. Set the Pipe Matching
constraint to Inverts and the Matchline Offset to 0.0 m. From this, SewerCAD
V8i knows to set the inverts of the incoming pipe at the same elevation as the
invert of the outgoing pipe for the same structure. Click Close to exit the dialog.
4. Consider that the downstream invert of conduit P-2, entering into the wet well, W-
1, is at a known elevation and should not be adjusted by SewerCAD V8i's auto-
matic design process. In this situation, you can locally specify that SewerCAD

Quick Start Lessons
V8i not design the downstream invert of P-2. Double-click P-2 to open the Prop-
erties editor for that element. Change the value of the Design Stop Invert? field to
False.
If you were to set the Specify Local Pipe Constraints? field to True, you would
then be able to fill in pipe design constraints specific to the currently highlighted
element.
5. When designing gravity pipes, SewerCAD V8i will choose from among only the
pipes that are specified as available for design in the Conduit Catalog. Click the
Components menu and select Conduit Catalog.
6. A large number of predefined pipes are stored in the Conduit Engineering Library.
Click the Synchronization Options button and select Import from library. Expand
the Conduit Catalog and Conduits Library - Metric.xml nodes.

7. Check the box next to Circular - Concrete to import all of the defined concrete
circular conduits. Click the Select button.
8. The Conduit Catalog is now populated with the imported conduits. Note that the
Available for Design? box is checked for each of them, indicating that SewerCAD
V8i can consider these conduits as replacements for the existing ones during the
Design run. Close the Conduit Catalog.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 2: Design
To run an automatic design the Calculation Type calculation option must be changed
from Analysis to Design.
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options. Highlight Base Calcula-
tion Options. The Properties editor will display the settings used by this calcula-
tion option. Change the Calculation Type to Design.
2. Close the Calculation Options manager.
3. Click the Compute button.

4. A prompt appears, asking whether you would like to create a new Physical alter-
native to capture any modifications made by the design run.
Alternatives are groups of data that describe a specific part of your model such as
physical data, loading data, and infiltration data. Alternatives will be discussed
further in Lesson 3. By clicking Yes, the model remembers the initial design as
well as the new design for the sake of comparison. In this case click No and allow
the model to overwrite the current physical alternative.
5. Close the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog.
6. Note that SewerCAD V8i has replaced the 200mm pipes for P-1, P-2, and P-3
with larger diameter ones.
7. Save the project before proceeding to the next lesson.
This lesson introduced one possible application of the automatic design feature. This
is a powerful tool that will save you time and effort. Spend some time to learn more
about this feature by experimenting with the software, and if you have any questions
press the F1 key to access our context sensitive on-line help. See Lesson 3 for more
information on SewerCAD V8i's scenario management feature.

Lesson 3 - Scenario Management

One of SewerCAD V8i's many powerful and versatile project tools is Scenario
Management. Scenarios allow you to calculate multiple "What If?" situations in a
single project file. You may wish to try several designs and compare the results, or
analyze an existing system using several different loading possibilities and compare
the resulting profiles. A scenario consists of a group of alternatives, which are groups
of actual model data. Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a parent/child rela-
tionship where child scenarios and alternatives inherit data from the parent scenarios
and alternatives.
In this lesson we will use Scenario Management to set up the scenarios needed to test
four "What If?" situations for the purpose of analyzing a new sanitary sewer system
design. At the end of the lesson, we will compare all of the results using the Scenario
Comparison tool.
Part 1 - Opening the Project File
For this lesson we will use the system designed in Lesson 2. Click the Open Existing
File button in the Welcome dialog, or select File / Open from the pull-down menus to
bring up the Open Project File dialog. Open the project you saved from Lesson 2, or
find Lesson3.swc in the Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Sanitary\Lessons directory.
In Lesson 2 we designed the gravity portion of this system using the automatic design
tool. In this lesson, we will use scenario management to model different force main
designs.
Part 2 - Creating Alternatives
First, we need to set up the required data sets (alternatives). An alternative is a group
of data describing a specific part of the model. There are eleven alternatives: Active
Topology, Physical, Design, Headloss, Boundary Condition, Initial Settings, Sanitary
Loading, Infiltration and Inflow, System Flows, Operational, and User Data Exten-
sions. In this example, we need to set up a different physical alternative for each
design trial we want to evaluate. Each physical alternative will contain different pres-
sure pipe data.
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Alternatives to open the Alternatives manager.
Expand the Physical Alternative node.
In SewerCAD V8i, we create families of alternatives. There are parent alterna-
tives (base alternatives) and there are child alternatives. A child alternative
inherits data from its parent. You can, however, override data inherited from the
parent, making it local to the child.

Quick Start Lessons
2. Currently, there is only one Physical Alternative listed. The Base Physical alter-
native contains the properties for the current undersized force mains. We would
like to add a child of the Base-Physical alternative so we can inherit most of the
data but change only the properties that we want to modify. Right-click the Base
Physical alternative and select New > Child Alternative. Rename the new alterna-
tive to have a descriptive name such as "Larger Pressure Pipes".
3. Double-click the Larger Pressure Pipes alternative to open the Physical alternative
editor.
4. Select the Pressure Pipe tab at the top of the dialog. Notice the legend at the
bottom describing the check boxes. It indicates, all of our data is inherited. If you
change any piece of data, the check box will automatically become checked
because that record is now local to this alternative and not inherited from the

parent. Set up this design trial by making the changes shown in the table below.
Click Close to exit the Physical Alternative Editor and return to the Alternatives
manager.
Table 3-12: Pressure Pipe Alternative Data
Change To:
From:
Diameter Diameter
(mm) (mm)
FM-1 200 300
FM-2 200 300
FM-3 200 300
5. Next, we will add another physical alternative for another design trial. Right-click
the Base Physical alternative and select New > Child Alternative. Rename the
new alternative to Smaller Pump. Double-click the Smaller Pump Alternative to
open the alternative editor.
6. Select the Pump tab. For this trial, we will leave the existing system the same but
with a different size pump. To change the pump curve click the ellipsis (...) button
in the Pump Definition field.

Quick Start Lessons
7. In the Pump Definition dialog click the New button. Rename the new definition
Smaller Pump. Enter the pump data using the following information:
Table 3-13: Smaller Pump Alternative Data
Change From: To:
Discharge Head (m) Discharge Head (m)

(m3/s) (m3/s)
Shutoff 0.00 53.33 0.00 48.00
Design 0.25 40.00 0.20 35.00
Max 0.50 0.00 0.40 0.00

Operating
8. Close the Pump Definition dialog. In the alternative editor, change the Pump Defi-
nition to Smaller Pump. Close the alternative editor.

9. Last, we will add a Physical alternative that combines the first two design trials in
the same alternative for a third design trial. Right-click the Larger Pressure Pipes
alternative and select New > Child Alternative. Rename the new alternative to
Larger FM-3. Double click Larger FM-3 to open the alternative editor.
10. Click the Pressure Pipe tab. As a child alternative, this alternative has inherited the
new pressure pipe data that we entered in the Larger Pressure Pipes alternative.
Change the diameter of FM-3 from 300 mm to 400 mm. Close the alternative
editor.
11. You now have four Physical Properties alternatives. The base alternative contains
the existing system's data, while the other three contain several changes for
different design trials. However, the rest of the data is the same. Close the Alter-
natives manager.
We must now create the scenarios that will contain the Physical Properties alternatives
we just created.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 3 - Editing Base Scenarios
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Scenarios to open the Scenarios manager.
2. There is always a default Base scenario that is comprised of the eleven base alter-
natives, currently listed in the Properties editor.
Only the Base is available initially, because we have not created any new
scenarios. Alternatives are the building blocks of a scenario. A scenario is a group
of the eleven alternatives and all of the calculation information needed to solve a
model.
For our example, if we wish to analyze the three different design trials for the
force main portion of our system, we must create a new scenario for each of the
Physical Properties alternatives we created.
3. The first step in this process is to rename the Base scenario to a more appropriate
name and set the correct calculation options. Select Base Scenario, click the
Rename button, and type Existing System as the new name for the Base scenario.
4. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options. Highlight Base Calcula-
tion Options. In the Properties editor, change the Calculation Type from Design to
Analysis. Close the Calculation Options dialog.

Part 4 - Creating Child Scenarios
The last step in setting up our scenarios is to create child scenarios. The new child
scenarios will contain the Physical Properties alternatives created earlier.
1. Highlight the base scenario entitled Existing System and click the New button,
then select Child Scenario. Rename the new scenario Design Trial #1.
Scenarios work in families just like alternatives, except scenarios do not inherit
data directly. A scenario is a group of alternatives, so a child scenario will inherit
the parent's alternatives. To change the new scenario you need to change one or
more of the alternatives.
Our new child scenario initially consists of the same alternatives as its parent
scenario. We want to set the Physical Properties alternative to the first alternative
we created, Larger Pressure Pipes.

Quick Start Lessons
2. With Design trial #1 highlighted in the Scenario manager, change the Physical
alternative to Larger Pressure Pipes in the Properties editor.
3. Making sure that the Existing System scenario is highlighted, create 2 more child
scenarios, one using the Smaller Pump Physical alternative, and one using the
Larger FM-3 Physical alternative. Name these new child scenarios Design Trial
#2 and Design trial #3 respectively.
Now we have four scenarios. The base scenario is our existing system. Each
child scenario contains a different physical alternative. The first design trial
resizes the pressure pipes, the second design trial resizes the pump, and the third
design trial considers a different combination of pipe sizes. In the next part of the
lesson we will calculate them.

Part 5 - Calculate and Compare
We are going to calculate all of the scenarios at the same time using the Batch Run
feature.
1. In the Scenarios manager click the drop down button attached to the Compute
Scenario button and select Batch Run.
2. In the Batch Run dialog, click the Select button and choose Select All.
3. Click the Batch button. In the confirmation prompt that appears click Yes. When
the Completed batch run... message appears click OK.
4. The current scenario is indicated by the red checkmark in the Scenarios manager
and in the Current Scenario menu of the Scenarios toolbar:
5. You can see results for individual elements for the current scenario in the Proper-
ties editor. You can compare results across scenarios by annotating them. Close
the Scenarios manager. Click the view menu and select Element Symbology.

Quick Start Lessons
6. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click on Pressure Pipe and select New,
then select Annotation from the context menu. In the Field name menu, select
velocity. In the Prefix field type Vel: . Click OK.
7. The calculated velocity is now displayed for all pressure pipes.

Lesson 4 - Presentation of Results
Change the current scenario and note how the values change.
8. Save this project before proceeding to Lesson 4.

An important feature in all modeling software is the ability to present results clearly.
This lesson outlines several of SewerCAD V8i's reporting features, including:
• Reports - Displays and prints values for any or all elements in the system.
• Element Annotation - Dynamically presents the values of user-selected variables
on the drawing.
• Profiles - Graphically shows how HGL and elevation vary throughout the gravity
portions of the sanitary sewer.
• Color Coding - Assigns colors to values for a variable and applies them to the
appropriate locations on the plan view for a quick diagnostic on how the system is
working.
Part 1 - Reports
For this lesson we will use the system designed in Lesson 3.
1. Click the Open Existing File button in the Welcome dialog, or select File / Open
from the pull-down menus to bring up the Open Project File dialog. Open the
project you saved from Lesson 3, or find Lesson4.swc in the
Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Sanitary\Lessons directory.
2. After opening the file, select the "Design Trial #2" scenario from the Scenario
toolbar. Click the Compute button to run a regular analysis.

Quick Start Lessons
3. When the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog appears, note that there is a
Report button in the upper left corner of the dialog. Click the Report button
4. The report that opens contains all of the information in the various tabs of the
Detailed Calculation Summary dialog, preformatted in a print-ready document.
Close the Preview dialog.

5. Close the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog. Note that the Detailed Calcula-
tion Summary is available at any time by clicking the Analysis menu and selecting
Calculation Summary.
6. Right-click on MH-1 and select Report. This produces an element detailed report.
Every element has a report with the same general format, which includes the name
of the calculated scenario and a series of tables describing the element's properties
and results in detail. Close the MH-1 detailed report.
7. To view the detailed reports for several elements at one time, click the Report
menu and select Element Details. A Selection toolbar appears. Using the toolbar,
select any number of elements, then click the Done button.
8. The Element Details dialog appears after you click Done. this dialog lists the
elements that will be in the report, and allows you to preview and/or print the
detailed report for each element in the list.
9. Close the Element Details dialog and any open report dialogs.

Quick Start Lessons
10. Click the Report menu and select Project Inventory.
11. The Project Inventory shows you the total number of each type of element and the
total length of pipe in the system. Close the project inventory report.
Part 2 - FlexTables
FlexTables are extremely powerful tools in SewerCAD V8i. These reports are not
only good presentation tools; they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis.
When data must be entered for a large number of elements, clicking each element and
entering the data can be very tedious and time consuming. Using the tabular reports,

elements can be changed using the global edit tool, or filtered to display only the
desired elements. Values that are entered into the table will be automatically updated
in the model. The tables can also be customized. Columns can be added or removed,
or you can display duplicates of the same column with different units.
1. Open the FlexTables manager by clicking the View menu and selecting FlexTa-
bles.
2. Double-click the Conduit Table located under the Tables - Predefined node.
Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results. White
columns are input values and yellow columns are non-editable calculated values.
When data is entered into a table directly, the value in the model will be automati-
cally updated. These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program.
Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Edits and Filtering.
Suppose we find that the downstream inverts of all 375 mm pipes needs to be 10
cm higher. It would be tedious to go through and re-enter every pipe invert eleva-
tion, particularly when dealing with a large system. Instead, we will use the filter
tool in this example to filter out the 375 mm pipes, and the global edit tool to add
10 cm of elevation to just those pipes.
3. Right-click the Section Size column and choose Filter / Custom from the context
menu. We want to filter to display only the 375 mm conduits. To do so, double-
click Section Size in the Fields list to add it to the query. Click the = Operator

Quick Start Lessons
button. Click the Unique Values button above the Unique Values list to populate
the list with all of the available section sizes used in the model. Double-click the
value with a Referenced Label of 375 mm.
4. Click the OK button. As you can see, only conduits with a section size of 375 mm
are now displayed in the table. The indicators along the bottom of the table show
that the results are filtered: In the lower left is the message “2 of 3 elements
displayed” and in the lower right is the FILTERED indicator.

5. We can now perform a Global Edit on just the filtered elements. Right-click the
Invert (Stop) column and select Global Edit. Select the Add Operation. Enter 0.1
in the Value field. Click OK.
6. Note that 0.1m has been added to the Invert (Stop) value for each of the 375 mm
conduits.
7. To reset the filter, right-click on any of the column headings and select Filter /
Reset. Click Yes in the confirmation that appears. Close the conduit table.
8. You may also wish to create a table that displays different or additional attribute
columns than those in the predefined Flextables. This can be done using the
FlexTables manager. Right-click the Conduit Table under Tables-Predefined and
select Duplicate / Project FlexTable.

Quick Start Lessons
9. Highlight the newly created table and click the Edit button to open the FlexTable
setup dialog.
10. The Available Columns list on the left displays all of the available attributes that
can be added to the FlexTable. The Selected Columns list on the right shows the
attributes that currently make up the FlexTable. Clicking the [<] and [>] buttons
allows you to move a single highlighted attribute between the Available and
Selected lists; clicking [<<] and [>>] will move all of them. The Up and Down
arrows below the Selected Columns list allow you to move attributes up and down
the list, affecting the order in which they are displayed in the FlexTable. Highlight
Depth (Normal) in the Available Columns list and click the [>] button to add it to
the Selected Columns list. Click OK.
11. Close the FlexTables manager dialog.
Part 3 - Element Annotation
1. Click the Compute button to update the results to reflect the changes in invert
elevations.
2. Click the View menu and select Element Symbology.
3. In this example, we will add annotation to the manholes and pressure pipes.

4. Right-click the Manhole node and select New / Annotation.
5. The Field Name is the attribute that the annotation will display. In this example
we will add annotation for the hydraulic grade line entering and exiting the
manhole. Select Hydraulic Grade Line (In) from the Field name list.
6. The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to add text to the annotation. Enter HGL In:
in the Prefix field. The Suffix is already set to %u, which will display the unit. the
X and Y offset control the placement of the annotation. The Height Multiplier
controls the size of the text. Click OK.
7. Right-click the Manhole node and select New / Annotation. Select Hydraulic
Grade Line (Out) from the Field Name list. Enter HGL Out: in the Prefix field.
Change the Y Offset Value to -5.4. This will prevent the annotations from overlap-
ping one another. Click OK.
8. You can rearrange the labels by clicking on them to highlight the annotation and
then dragging the annotation to the desired loaction by the handle (the handle is
the square near the annotation).

Quick Start Lessons
9. Velocity annotation has already been added to pressure pipes in Lesson 3. Right-
click the Pressure Pipe node and select New / Annotation.
10. Choose Flow as the attribute, add a prefix of Flow: , and change the Y offset to -
5.4. Click OK.
11. You can try changing the properties of an element and recalculating. The annota-
tions will update automatically to reflect any changes in the system.
Part 4 - Create a Profile
1. To create a profile view click the View menu and select Profiles.
2. In the Profiles manager click the new button.
3. In the Profile Setup dialog click the Select From Drawing button.

4. Click P-3 and P-2. Note that the nodes at the end of the pipes are also selected.
Click the Done button.
5. In the Profile Setup dialog click the Open Profile button.

6. In the profile view you can zoom in and out, copy the profile view to the clip-
board, and print the profile view. You can export the profile view as a DXF file by
clicking Chart Settings / Export to DXF. You can change the scale and direction of
the profile view by clicking Chart Settings and then Axis Options.
7. You can add a legend describing the various colored lines in the profile by
clicking Chart Settings / Legend.
8. You can add Annotation lablels by clicking Chart Settings and selecting Display
Annotation Labels. You can add a table displaying the values of various attributes
below the profile view by clicking Chart Settings / Profile Annotation Table.
Experiment with the various settings, then close the profile view and the Profiles
Manager.
9. Save the project before continuing.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 5 - Color Coding
Color coding allows you to assign colors to values for a variable and applies them to
the appropriate locations on the plan view for a quick diagnostic on how the system is
working.
Color coding is applied using the Element Symbology manager. You can set color
coding for links, nodes, or both. In this example we will color code links only.
1. Click the View menu and select Element Symbology.

2. Right-click the Conduit node and select New / Color Coding.
3. Change the Field Name to Flow. Click the Calculate Range button and select Full
Range. This will populate the Minimum and Maximum fields automatically with
the highest and lowest value for the selected Field Name. The Steps value is the
number of divisions in the range.
4. In the Color maps section of the dialog, click the Initialize button. Click the 3rd
row Color field and select yellow. Click the Ramp button. Click OK.

Lesson 5 - Running an Extended Period Simulation
5. You can also color code by size. Right-click the Conduit node and select New /
Color Coding.
6. Change the Field Name to Diameter. Click the Calculate Range button and select
Full Range. Change the Options setting to Size. Click the Initialize button. Click
OK.
7. Now the consuits are color coded according to both flow and diameter.
8. Save the project before continuing to the next lesson.

SewerCAD V8i has the ability to analyze time-based or extended period simulations
(EPS). This lesson illustrates different aspects of setting-up and running an EPS
including:
• Developing loading patterns and hydrographs

• Calculating the model
• Viewing time-based output
For this lesson we will use the system designed in Lesson 4.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 1 - Entering and Applying Loading Patterns
Loading patterns are a series of time-based multipliers that are applied to average
loads, which describe how the load varies over time. In this lesson, we are going to
create a loading pattern and apply it to the unit sanitary loads established with the
model in an earlier lesson, and to a new Pattern Load.
1. Click the Open Existing File button in the Welcome dialog, or select File / Open
from the pull-down menus to bring up the Open Project File dialog. Open the
project you saved from Lesson 4, or find Lesson5.swc in the
Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Sanitary\Lessons directory.
2. To create a new loading pattern click the Components menu and select Patterns.
3. Highlight the Hydraulic node and click the New button.
4. Rename the pattern Lesson 5 Pattern. Leave the Start Time set to 12:00:00 AM
but change the Starting Multiplier to 0.4. Change the Pattern Format to Contin-
uous. Fill in the pattern using the following data:
Table 3-14: Loading Pattern Data
Time from Multiplier

Start
(hours)
3 0.8
6 1.2
9 1.7
12 1.4
15 1.2
18 1.3
21 0.6
24 0.4

5. Close the Patterns dialog.

6. To apply this pattern to the various unit dry weather labels used in the model, click
the Components menu and select Pattern Setups.
7. The Pattern Setup Manager works in a similar manner to the Extreme Flow Setup
Manger, as described in Lesson 1. In this case different patterns are applied to
unit sanitary loads as opposed to extreme flow methods. As with extreme flow
setups, you can create different pattern setups and associate them with different
scenarios. In the Pattern Setups dialog click the New button. Change the name of
the setup to Lesson 5.

Quick Start Lessons
8. In this lesson, for the sake of simplicity, we will apply the same pattern to all the
unit loads. To do so, right click on the Setup Pattern heading and select Global
Edit. In the Global Edit dialog change the value to Lesson 5 Pattern. Click OK.
9. Close the Pattern Setups dialog.

10. You can also apply loading patterns to base loads set at individual hydraulic
elements. Click the Tools menu and select Sanitary Load Control Center.
11. Highlight a MH-1 row, click the New button, and select Add Pattern load to
Element (MH-1). Change the Base Load of the new Pattern Load to 2,000 L/d.
Close the Sanitary Load Control Center.
12. Save the project.
Part 2 - Entering Hydrographs
SewerCAD V8i also allows you to enter in hydrographs as a sanitary load (at
manholes, wet wells, and pressure junctions), or as inflows and infiltration (at
manholes, pressure junctions, wet wells and gravity pipes).
To illustrate the concept, we will enter in a single hydrograph as a wet-weather load at

manhole MH-2.
1. Click the Tools menu and select Sanitary Load Control Center.
2. Highlight one of the MH-2 rows and click the New button, then select Add Sani-
tary hydrograph to Element (MH-2).

3. Fill in the Time vs Flow table on the right side of the dialog using the data in the
following table (note the unit used in the table; you may have to change it by
right-clicking the Flow heading and selecting Units and Formatting):
Table 3-15: Hydrograph Data
Time Flow (L/d)

(Hours)
0 0
3 2500
6 4800
9 7300
12 19500
15 7300
18 4900
21 2400
24 0
4. Close the Sanitary Load Control Center.
5. Save the project.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 3 - Running the Extended Period Simulation
To run an extended period simulation, you need to change the analysis type from
Steady State to EPS.
1. Change the current scenario to Design Trial #3.
2. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options.

3. Highlight Base Calculation Options.
4. In the Properties editor change the Time Analysis Type from Steady State to EPS.
Leave the Duration, Hydraulic Time Step, and Hydrologic Time Step set to
24.000, 1.000, and 0.100 respectively. Change the Pattern Setups field to Lesson
5.
5. Close the Calculation Options dialog.
6. Click the Compute button. Close the Detailed Calculation Summary.
Part 4 - Time Based Graphs and Tables
In SewerCAD V8i you have the capability of creating time based graphs and tables for
the comparison of hydrographs at multiple elements within the system.
For this example we will compare the hydrographs generated at manholes MH-1 and
MH-2, and see the combination of the two routed hydrographs as they exit JC-1.
1. Click the View menu and select Graphs.

2. In the Graph manager click the New button and select Line Series Graph. Use the
Selct toolbar to select MH-1, MH-2, and JC-1. Click Done.

3. in the Graph Series Options dialog uncheck Depth (Out) for transitions and
Manholes in the Fields list. Check Flow (Total Out) for Transitions and Manholes.
Click OK to open the graph.
4. In the Graph viewer you can print the graph, copy it to the clipboard, zoom in, and
use the time step controls to see the values at specific times.

Quick Start Lessons
5. Click the data tab to see the underlying data points that make up the graph. You
can copy the tabluar data to the clipboard or print it
6. Close the Graph viewer and the Graph manager.
Part 5 - Animations
SewerCAD V8i's animation tool is a dramatic, effective way of presenting and

analyzing output data.

In this example, we will animate the color-coding on the main drawing pane, and the
hydraulic grade line on the profile plot.
1. Before we animate the drawing pane, we need to color code by attribute that
varies with time. In this case color code the links based on Total Flow attribute.
Use the same procedure described in Lesson 4 (you will need to delete the old
color coding and create a color coding definition for both conduits and pressure
pipes).
2. To animate the drawing pane click the Analysis menu and select EPS Results
Browser.
3. Click the Play button in the EPS Results Browser. The links change color over
time as flow increases and decreases. To stop the animation click the stop button
4. To increase or decrease the speed of the animation click Options and change the
Increment slider setting.
5. Open the Profile we created in Lesson 4. the profile viewer has its own animation
controls. Click the Play button.

Quick Start Lessons
From these five lessons, you have had a brief introduction to the capabilities of
SewerCAD V8i. Feel free to continue to play with the program. Use this model to
explore and become familiar with all of the features. For additional help, click F1 to
open the context sensitive online help.


Chapter
Starting a Project 4
Welcome Dialog Box
When you first start Bentley SewerCAD V8i, the Welcome dialog box appears. The
Welcome dialog box contains the following controls:
Quick Start Lessons Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons
Overview topic.
Create New Project Creates a new Bentley SewerCAD V8i project.

When you click this button, an untitled Bentley
SewerCAD V8i project is created.
Open Existing Project Opens an existing project. When you click this
button, the Windows Select Bentley SewerCAD
V8i Project to Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.
Open from Open an existing Bentley SewerCAD V8i project

ProjectWise from ProjectWise. You are prompted to log into a
ProjectWise datasource if you are not already
logged in.
Show This Dialog at When selected, the Welcome dialog box appears
Start whenever you start Bentley SewerCAD V8i. Clear
this box if you do not want the Welcome dialog
box to appear whenever you start Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
You can access the Welcome dialog box at any time from the Help menu in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.

Projects
Projects
All data for a model are stored in Bentley SewerCAD V8i as a project. Bentley
SewerCAD V8i project files have the file name extension .swc. Bentley SewerCAD
V8i lets you open more than one project at a time. You can assign a title, date, notes
and other identifying information about each project using the Project Properties
dialog box. You can have up to five Bentley SewerCAD V8i projects open at one time.
Starting a New Project
To start a new project, select File > New or press Ctrl+N. An untitled project is
opened in the drawing pane.
Opening an Existing Project
To open an existing project, select File > Open or press Ctrl+O. A dialog box appears
allowing you to browse for the project you want to open.
Displaying Multiple Projects
To switch between multiple open projects, click the appropriate tab at the top of the
drawing pane. The file name of the project is displayed on the tab.
Setting Project Properties

The Project Properties dialog box let you enter project-specific information to help
identify the project. Project properties are stored with the project.
To set project properties:
Select File > Project Properties, enter information in the Project Properties dialog
box and click OK.
Project Properties Dialog Box
The dialog box contains the following text fields and controls:
Title Lets you type a title for the project.
File Name Displays the file name for the current project. If
you have not saved the project yet, the file name is
listed as “Untitled.swc.”
Engineer Lets you type name of the project engineer.

Starting a Project
Company Lets you type the name of your company.
Date Click this field to display a calendar, which lets

you use your mouse to set a date for the project.
Notes Lets you type additional information about the

project.
Setting Options
You can change global settings for Bentley SewerCAD V8i in the Options dialog box.
The Options dialog box contains six tabs, each of which lets you change a different
group of global settings.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Options dialog box:
• “Options Dialog Box - Global Tab” on page 4-131

• “Options Dialog Box - Project Tab” on page 4-135
• “Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab” on page 4-137
• “Options Dialog Box - Units Tab” on page 4-138
• “Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab” on page 4-141
• “Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab” on page 4-142
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab
The Global tab lets you change general program settings for the Bentley SewerCAD
V8i stand-alone editor, including whether or not to display the status pane, as well as
window color and layout settings.

Setting Options
The Global tab contains the following controls:
General Settings
Backup Levels Indicates the number of backup copies that

are retained when a project is saved. The
default value is 1.
Note: The higher this number, the

more .BAK files (backup
files) are created, thereby
using more hard disk space
on your computer.
Show recently used The checkbox turns the list of recently opened
files files on and off. The File menu has the ability
to display a list of recently opened files,
providing shortcuts that let you quickly access
projects. When this check box is cleared,
these shortcuts are not available from the File
menu. When the box is checked, you can
specify a number of files between 1 and 15 to
show by typing the number in the adjacent
field.
Compact Database When selected, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i

After database is automatically compacted when
you save a particular file the specified number
of times.
Show Status Pane When selected, activates the Status Pane

display at the bottom of the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i stand-alone editor. This check
box is selected by default.
Show Welcome When selected, activates the Welcome dialog

Page on Startup that appears when you first start Bentley
SewerCAD V8i. This check box is selected by
default.
Zoom Extents on When this box is checked a Zoom Extents

Open operation is performed upon file open, so that
the entire network is displayed in the drawing
pane.

Starting a Project
Use accelerated Some video cards use “triple buffering”, which

redraw we do not support at this time. If you see
anomalies in the drawing (such as trails being
left behind from the selection rectangle), then
you can shut this option off to attempt to fix the
problem. However, when this option is off, you
could see some performance degradation in
the drawing.
Window Color Settings
Background Color Displays the color that is currently assigned to

the drawing pane background. You can
change the color by clicking the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Color dialog box.
Foreground Color Displays the color that is currently assigned to

elements and labels in the drawing pane. You
can change the color by clicking the ellipsis
button (...) to open the Color dialog box.
Read Only Displays the color that is currently assigned to

Background Color data field backgrounds. You can change the
color by clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open
the Color dialog box.
Read Only Displays the color that is currently assigned to

Foreground Color data field text. You can change the color by
clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open the
Color dialog box.
Selection Displays the color that is currently assigned to

elements that are selected in the drawing
pane. You can change the color by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to open the Color dialog
box.
Layout Settings
Display Inactive When selected, activates the display of

Topology inactive elements in the drawing pane in the
color defined in the adjacent color box. When
not selected, inactive elements will not be
visible in the drawing pane. This check box is
selected by default.

Setting Options
Auto Refresh Activates Auto Refresh. When Auto-Refresh is

active, the drawing pane automatically
updates whenever changes are made to the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i datastore. This check
box is selected by default.
Sticky Tool Palette When selected, activates the Sticky Tools

feature. When Sticky Tools is activated, the
drawing pane cursor does not reset to the
Select tool after you create a node or finish a
pipe run in your model, allowing you to
continue dropping new elements into the
drawing without re-selecting the tool. When
Sticky Tools is not activated, the drawing pane
cursor resets to the Select tool after you
create a node. This check box is selected by
default.
Select Polygons by When selected, lets you select polygons in

Edge your model at their edges instead of anywhere
inside the polygon. This check box is cleared
by default.
Selection Handle Specifies, in pixels, the size of the handles

Size In Pixels that appear on selected elements. Enter a
number from 1 to 10.
Selection Line Increases or decreases the size of pipes that

Width Multiplier are selected in the drawing view by the factor
indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2 would
result in the line width being doubled.
Default Drawing Choose the style in which elements are

Style for New displayed in the drawing pane. Under GIS
Projects style, the size of element symbols in the
drawing pane will remain the same regardless
of zoom level. Under CAD style, element
symbols will appear larger or smaller
depending on zoom level.

Starting a Project
Stored Prompt Responses Dialog Box
This dialog allows you to change the behavior of command prompts back to their
default settings. Some commands trigger a command prompt that can be suppressed
by using the Do Not Prompt Again check box. You can turn the prompt back on by
accessing this dialog and unchecking the box for that prompt type.
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab
Geospatial Settings
Spatial Reference Used for integration with Projectwise Geospatial.

You can leave the field blank if there is no spatial
information.
Element Labeling Options
Element Identifier Specifies the format in which reference fields are

Format used. Reference fields are fields that link to
another element or support object (pump
definitions, patterns, controls, zones, etc.).
Result Files
Specify Custom When checked, allows you to edit the results file
Results File Path? path and format by enabling the other controls in
this section.

Setting Options
Root Path Allows you to specify the root path where results
files are stored. You can type the path manually or
choose the path from a Browse dialog by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button.
Path Format Allows you to specify the path format. You can
type the path manually and use predefined
attributes from the menu accessed with the [>]
button..
Path Displays a dynamically updated view of the

custom result file path based on the settings in the
Root Path and Path Format fields.
Pipe Length
Round Pipe Length to The program will round to the nearest unit
Nearest specified in this field when calculating scaled pipe
length
Calculate Pipe Lengths When this box is checked, differences in Z

Using Node Elevations (elevation) between nodes is considered when
(3D Length) calculating conduit lengths.
Hydraulic Analysis
Friction Method Select the friction method that will be used for the
gravity portion of the network during hydraulic
analysis.
Pressure Friction Select the friction method that will be used for the
Method pressure portion of the network during hydraulic
analysis.
Conduit Description
Options
Conduit Shape Select the conduit shape you wish to modify in the
Conduit Description Format field.

Starting a Project
Conduit Description This field displays the format of the conduit

Format description for the conduit shape currently
selected in the Conduit Shape list. The arrow
button next to this field provides access to the
preformatted variables available for the associated
conduit shape.
The text box below this control displays the

conduit description format string in a localized
format, primarily for non-English versions of the
software.
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab
This tab contains drawing layout and display settings. You can set the scale that you
want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output. Drawing scale is
based upon engineering judgment and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final
presentation. The Drawing tab contains the following controls:
Drawing Scale Settings
Drawing Mode Drop-down list that lets you select either Scaled or
Schematic mode for models in the drawing pane.
Plot Scale Factor 1 in. Controls the scale of the plan view. This value
=: affects the text height when printing-to-scale and
does not affect the scaled length or area results.
Annotation Multipliers Settings
Symbol Size Mulitplier Increases or decreases the size of your symbols by

the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2
would result in the symbol size being doubled.
The program selects a default symbol height that
corresponds to 4.0 ft. (approximately 1.2 m) in
actual-world units, regardless of scale.

Setting Options
Text Height Multiplier Increases or decreases the default size of the text
associated with element labeling by the factor
indicated. The program automatically selects a
default text height that displays at approximately
2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing
scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example,
results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m.
Likewise, a 1 in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text
height of around 4.0 ft.
Text Options
Align Text with Pipes Turns text alignment on and off. When this check
box is selected, labels are aligned to their
associated pipes. When the check box is cleared,
labels are displayed horizontally near the center of
the associated pipe.
Color Element When this box is checked, color coding settings

Annotations are applied to the element annotation.
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab
The Units tab lets you modify the unit settings for the current project. The Units tab
contains the following controls:
Save As Lets you save the current unit settings as a separate

.xml file. This file allows you to reuse your Units
settings in another project. When the button is clicked,
a Windows Save As dialog box appears, allowing you
to enter a name and specify the directory location of
the .xml file.
Load Lets you load a previously created Units project .xml

file, thereby transferring the unit and format settings
that were defined in the previous project. When the
button is clicked, a Windows Load dialog box appears,
allowing you to browse to the location of the desired
.xml file.
Reset Defaults - SI Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original
factory defaults for the System International (Metric)
system.

Starting a Project
Reset Defaults - US Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original
factory defaults for the Imperial (U.S.) system.
Default Unit System Lets you specify the unit system that is used globally
for New Project across the project. Note that you can locally change
any number of attributes to use system other than the
one specified here.

Setting Options
Units Table The units table contains the following columns:

• Label—Displays the parameter measured by the
unit.
• Unit—Displays the type of measurement. To
change the unit of an attribute type, click the
choice list and click the unit you want. This option
also allows you to use both U.S. customary and SI
units in the same worksheet.
• Display Precision—Sets the rounding of
numbers and number of digits displayed after the
decimal point. Enter a negative number for
rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1) rounds to
10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so
on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to indicate the
number of digits after the decimal point.
• Format Menu—Lets you select the display format
used by the current field. Choices include:
• Scientific—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "-
d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a
digit (0-9). The string starts with a minus sign
if the number is negative.
• Fixed Point—Abides by the display precision
setting, and automatically enters zeros after
the decimal place to do so. With a display
precision of 3, an entered value of 3.5
displays as 3.500.
• General—Truncates any zeros after the
decimal point, regardless of the display preci-
sion value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed
Point format displays as 5.2 when using
General format. The number is also rounded.
So, an entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4,
regardless of the display precision.
• Number—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string
starts with a minus sign if the number is nega-
tive. Thousand separators are inserted
between each group of three digits to the left
of the decimal point.

Starting a Project
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab
The Element Labeling tab is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new
elements as they are added to the network. You can save your settings to an .xml file
for later use. The Element Labeling tab contains the following controls:
Save As Lets you save your element labeling settings to an

element label project file, which is an. xml file.
Load Lets you open an existing element label project

file.
Reset Fills in the Next column for each element based

on the labels already used in the model and the
increment value that has been set. So, for example,
if the model contains conduits CO-1, CO-2, and
CO-3 and the Increment value is 1, clicking Reset
will fill in the Next column with CO-4 for the
Conduit row.

Setting Options
Labeling Table The labeling table contains the following columns:

• Element—Shows the type of element to
which the label applies.
• On—Lets you turn automatic element labeling
on and off for the associated element type.
• Next—Lets you enter the integer you want to
use as the starting value for the ID number
portion of the label. Bentley SewerCAD V8i
generates labels beginning with this number
and chooses the first available unique label.
• Increment—Lets you enter the integer that is
added to the ID number after each element is
created to yield the number for the next
element.
• Prefix—Lets you enter the letters or numbers
that appear in front of the ID number for the
elements in your network.
• Digits—Lets you enter the minimum number
of digits that the ID number has. For instance,
1, 10, and 100 with a digit setting of two would
be 01, 10, and 100.
• Suffix—Lets you enter the letters or numbers
that appear after the ID number for the
elements in your network.
• Preview—Lets you see what the label looks
like, based on the information you have
entered in the previous fields.
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab
Note: These settings affect ProjectWise users only.
The ProjectWise tab contains options for using SewerCAD V8i with ProjectWise.

Starting a Project
This tab contains the following controls:
Default Datasource Displays the current ProjectWise datasource. If

you have not yet logged into a datasource, this
field will display <login>. To change the
datasource, click the Ellipses (...) button to open
the Change Datasource dialog box. If you click
Cancel after you have changed the default
datasource, the new default datasource is retained.
Update Server When When this is checked, any time you save your
Saving SewerCAD V8i project locally using the File >
Save menu command, the files on your
ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become
visible to other ProjectWise users. This option is
turned off by default.
Note: This option, when turned on,

can significantly affect
performance, especially for
large, complex projects.
For more information about using SewerCAD V8i with ProjectWise, see “Consider-
ations for ProjectWise Users” on page 4-144.

Considerations for ProjectWise Users

Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to SewerCAD V8i content within a
workgroup, across a distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals.
When ProjectWise is integrated with SewerCAD V8i, project files can be accessed
quickly, checked out for use, and checked back in directly from within SewerCAD
V8i.
If ProjectWise is installed on your system, SewerCAD V8i automatically installs all

the components necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share your
SewerCAD V8i projects.
To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help.

To learn more about using ProjectWise with SewerCAD V8i, see the following topics:
• “General Guidelines for using ProjectWise” on page 4-144

• “Performing ProjectWise Operations” on page 4-145
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise
Follow these guidelines when using SewerCAD V8i with ProjectWise:
• Use the File > ProjectWise commands to perform ProjectWise file operations,
such as Save, Open, and Change Datasource.
• The first time you choose one of the File > ProjectWise menu commands in your
current SewerCAD V8i session, you are prompted to log into a ProjectWise data-
source. The datasource you log into remains the current datasource until you
change it using the File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource command.
• Use SewerCAD V8i’s File > New command to create a new project. The project is
not stored in ProjectWise until you select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
• Use SewerCAD V8i’s File > Open command to open a local copy of the current
project.
• Use SewerCAD V8i’s File > Save command to save a copy of the current project
to your local computer.
• When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you
are prompted to select one of the following options:
– Check In—Updates the project in ProjectWise with your latest changes and
unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it.
– Unlock—Unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it but does
not update the project in ProjectWise. Note that this will abandon any changes
you have made since the last server update.

Starting a Project
– Leave Out—Leaves the project checked out so others cannot edit it and
retains any changes you have made since the last server update to the files on
your local computer. Select this option if you want to exit Bentley SewerCAD
V8i but continue working on the project later.
• In the SewerCAD V8i Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise tab with the
Update server on Save check box. This option, when turned on, can significantly
affect performance, especially for large, complex projects. When this is checked,
any time you save your SewerCAD V8i project locally using the File > Save menu
command, the files on your ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users.
This option is turned off by default.
• In this release of SewerCAD V8i, calculation result files are not managed inside
ProjectWise. A local copy of results is maintained on your computer, but to ensure
accurate results you should recalculate projects when you first open them from
ProjectWise.
• SewerCAD V8i projects associated with ProjectWise appear in the Most Recently
Used Files list (at the bottom of the File menu) in the following format:
pwname://PointServer:_TestDatasource/Documents/TestFolder/Test1.prj
Performing ProjectWise Operations
You can quickly tell whether or not the current SewerCAD V8i project is in Project-
Wise or not by looking at the title bar and the status bar of the SewerCAD V8i
window. If the current project is in ProjectWise, “pwname://” will appear in front of
the file name in the title bar, and a ProjectWise icon will appear on the far right side of
the status bar, as shown below.
You can perform the following ProjectWise operations from within SewerCAD V8i:
To save an open SewerCAD V8i project to ProjectWise:
1. In SewerCAD V8i, select File > ProjectWise > Save As.

2. If you haven’t already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.

3. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, enter the following information:
a. Click Change next to the Folder field, then select a folder in the current
ProjectWise datasource in which to store your project.
b. Type the name of your SewerCAD V8i project in the Name field. We recom-
mend that you keep the ProjectWise name the same as or as close to the
SewerCAD V8i project name as possible.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click OK.
To open a SewerCAD V8i project from a ProjectWise datasource:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.

click Log in.
3. In the ProjectWise Select Document dialog box, perform these steps:
a. From the Folder drop-down menu, select a folder that contains SewerCAD
V8i projects.
b. In the Document list box, select a SewerCAD V8i project.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click Open.
To copy an open SewerCAD V8i project from one ProjectWise datasource to

another:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open to open a project stored in ProjectWise.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, select a different ProjectWise datasource,
then click Log in.
4. Select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
5. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, change information about the
project as required, then click OK.
To make a local copy of a SewerCAD V8i project stored in a ProjectWise data-

source:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.

click Log in.

Starting a Project
3. Select File > Save As.

4. Save the SewerCAD V8i project to a folder on your local computer.
To change the default ProjectWise datasource:
1. Start SewerCAD V8i.

2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, type the name of ProjectWise datasource
you want to log into, then click Log in.
To use background layer files with ProjectWise:
• Using File > ProjectWise > Save As—If there are background files, you are
prompted with two options: you can copy the background layer files to the project
folder for use by the project, or you can remove the background references and
manually reassign them once the project is in ProjectWise to other existing
ProjectWise documents.
• Using File > ProjectWise > Open—This works the same as the normal Project-
Wise > Open command, except that background layer files are not locked in
ProjectWise for the current user to edit. The files are intended to be shared with
other users at the same time.
• To add a background layer file reference to a project that exists in Project Wise—
The ProjectWise Select Document dialog box opens, and you can choose any
existing ProjectWise document. You must have previously added these back-
ground layer files as described in the first bullet above, or by using the Project-
Wise Explorer.
• When you remove a background layer file reference from a project that exists in
ProjectWise, the reference to the file is removed but the file itself is not deleted
from ProjectWise.
• Using File > Save As—When you use File > Save As on a project that is already
in ProjectWise and there are background layer files, you are prompted with two
options: you can copy all the files to the local project folder for use by the project,
or you can remove the background references and manually reassign them after
you have saved the project locally.
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerCAD V8i for AutoCAD

Bentley SewerCAD V8i for AutoCAD maintains a one to one relationship between
the AutoCAD drawing (.dwg) and the Bentley SewerCAD V8i project file. When
using ProjectWise with this data, we recommend that you create a Set in the Project-
Wise Explorer. Included in this set should be the AutoCAD drawing (example.dwg),
the Bentley SewerCAD V8i database (example.swc.mdb), the Bentley SewerCAD
V8i project file (example.swc), and optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone
drawing setting file (example.swc.dwh).

Importing Data From Other Models
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in AutoCAD, as this will only work
with the .dwg file.
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerCAD V8i for MicroStation

When using ProjectWise with a MicroStation SewerCAD V8i project, we recommend
that you create a Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be the
MicroStation drawing (example.dgn), the Bentley SewerCAD V8i database
(example.swc.mdb), the Bentley SewerCAD V8i project file (example.swc), and
optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone drawing setting file (example.swc.dwh).
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship.

Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets you import data from a variety of data sources, including
Bentley SewerCAD V8i, LandXML, SewerCAD, and StormCAD.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets you import data from EPA SWMM, CivilStorm, and
StormCAD.
Click one of the following links to learn more:
• “Importing Data from a SewerCAD V8 Database” on page 4-149

• “Importing a Submodel” on page 4-149
• “Importing from LandXML” on page 4-150
• “Importing StormCAD V8” on page 4-151
• “Importing from SewerGEMS V8” on page 4-152
• “Converting SewerCAD 5.x Models to the Latest Version” on page 4-152

Starting a Project
Importing Data from a SewerCAD V8 Database
You can import data from SewerCAD V8 project by importing the SewerCAD data-
base (.MDB) file. You might want to do this if you need to rebuild your model, or if
you want to open a SewerCAD project sent to you by another SewerCAD user.
When you import a SewerCAD V8i database (.MDB) file, the model will notice that
the model does not have any element symbology definitions (annotations and color-
coding), project-level options, text customizations, or border and line customizations
that may have been associated with the project. These are stored in the project’s .swc
and .DWH files, which are not imported.
Note: SewerCAD V8i can only import SewerCAD databases created in

SewerCAD version 08.11.00.48 or later. If the database you want
to import was created in an older version, you will need to open
the file in a newer version of SewerCAD before the import into
SewerCAD V8i will work.
To import data from a SewerCAD v8 project:
1. Select File > Import > SewerCAD V8 Database.

2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog box, select the SewerCAD .mdb file
(database file). The data will display as a new project in SewerCAD V8i.
Importing a Submodel
Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion
thereof, into your project. Input data stored in the Alternatives as well as any
supporting data (i.e. Patterns, etc) will also be imported. It is important to notice that
existing elements in the model you want to import the submodel into (i.e. the target
model) will be matched with incoming elements by using their label. Incoming input
data will override existing data in the target model for any element matched by its
label. That also applies to scenarios, alternatives, calculation options and supporting
data. Furthermore, any element in the incoming submodel that could not be matched
with any existing element by their label, will be created in the target model.
For example, the submodel you want to import contains input data that you would like
to transfer in two Physical Alternatives named "Smaller Conduits" and "Larger
Conduits". The target model contains only one Physical Alternative named "Larger
Conduits". In that case, the input data in the alternative labeled "Larger Conduits" in
the submodel will replace the alternative with the same name in the target model.
Moreover, the alternative labeled "Smaller Conduits" as well as its input data will be
added to the target model without replacing any existing data on it because there is no
existing alternative with the same label. Notice that imported elements will be
assigned default values in those existing alternatives in the target model that could not
be matched.

Notice that regular models can be imported as a submodel of a larger model as their
file format and extension are the same.
For more information about input data transfer, see Exporting a Submodel.
The label-matching strategy used during submodel import will be applied to any set of
alternatives, including Active Topology alternatives. Therefore, if no Active Topology
alternative stored in the submodel matches the existing ones in the target model, the
imported elements will preserve their active topology values in the alternatives
created from the submodel, but they will be left as "Inactive" in those previously
existing alternatives in the target model. That is because the default value for the "Is
Active" attribute in active topology alternatives other than the one that is current is
"False".
Note: User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and

export operations.
To import a submodel
1. Click the File menu and select Import...Submodel.

2. In the Select Submodel File to Import dialog box, select the submodel file to be
imported. Click the Open button.
Importing from LandXML
You can import a model from a LandXML format .xml file. LandXML is a non-
proprietary data standard for the persistence of civil engineering and survey measure-
ment data commonly used in the Land Development and Transportation Industries.
SewerCAD V8i utilizes the PipeNetworks functionality of the LandXML file.

SewerCAD V8i is primarily concerned with the overall physical structure and connec-
tivity of the pipe network; hence some of the available hydrologic and hydraulic data
necessary for a hydraulic analysis is not transferred during export/import.
To import a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Import > LandXML.

2. In the Select LandXML File to Import dialog, browse to the LandXML file to be
imported, highlight it, and click Open.

Starting a Project
Importing StormCAD V8
You can import a model created in StormCAD V8 into SewerCAD V8i. Note that,
unlike the StormCAD Exchange Database import, the StormCAD V8 import does not
require you to create an exchange database file in StormCAD first - SewerCAD V8i
handles the StormCAD V8 edition model files natively.
After importing the StormCAD model database, the model will notice that the model
does not have any element symbology definitions (annotations and color-coding),
project-level options, text customizations, or border and line customizations that may
have been associated with the project. These are stored in the project's .swc and .dwh
files, which are not imported.
Because of differences between StormCAD and SewerCAD V8i, some data will either
not be imported or will be imported using near-equivalent substitutes, including the
following:
• Only Mannings roughness values will be imported.

• AASHTO and Headloss Flow Curves from StormCAD will not be imported into
SewerCAD V8i.
• For StormCAD gutters, SewerCAD V8i will set the shape as trapezoidal, set the
appropriate side slopes, leave the bottom width = 0 and set an appropriate
Manning's N. The depth value must be entered by the user. Additionally, gutters
are set to inactive automatically upon import. You will need to make the gutters
active and fill in missing data before the gutter can be included in the calculations.
When a StormCAD model is imported, an Inlet Flow Settings dialog will appear. The
data entered here is required to define the inlet flow-capture curves. The two pieces of
data required in this dialog are as follows:
• Flow Increment: The flow increment value should be a value that will give the
flow-capture curves satisfactory resolution.
• Maximum Flow: The value entered here should exceed the highest flow expected
at any inlet.
Note: The flow-capture curves are only for on-grade inlets Sag inlets
are set to "full capture".
To import a StormCAD V8 model
1. Click the File menu and select Import > StormCAD V8.
2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog, browse to the stc.mdb file for the
StormCAD model you are importing. Highlight the file and click the Open button.
3. In the Inlet Flow Settings dialog, enter vlaues for the Flow Increment and
Maximum Flow, then click OK.

Importing from SewerGEMS V8
You can import a SewerGEMS V8 model database (swg.mdb) file. Please note the
following:
• Pumps: When importing a SewerGEMs pump into SewerCAD V8i, each compo-
nent of the SewerGEMs pump collection is turned into a SewerCAD V8i pump,
with appropriate connectivity. The on and off elevations of the SewerGEMs
pump are translated into two controls (pump on if node x HGL is greater than y,
etc…) on the SewerCAD V8i side.
SewerGEMs supports two pump definition types that are not supported by
SewerCAD V8i, Volume-Flow and Depth Flow. This data will be imported but
you will have to either change these pump definitions to a supported type, or
change the references to these pump definitions to ones of a supported type for the
model to calculate.
• Control Structures: SewerCAD V8i does not support control structures on
conduits like SewerGEMS. This information is lost on import. You can approxi-
mate control structures in SewerCAD V8i by using diversions and creating an
appropriate rating curve which describes the relationship between inflow and flow
diverted.
To import a SewerGEMS V8 model
1. Click the File menu and select Import > SewerGEMS V8.
2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog, browse to the swc.mdb file for the
SewerGEMS model you are importing. Highlight the file and click the Open
button.
Note: User defined (UDX) fields are not imported.
Converting SewerCAD 5.x Models to the Latest Version
The following is the workflow for converting models from SewerCAD 5.X to
SewerCAD V8i while retaining engineering library synchronization:
1. Convert your SewerCAD model.

First, open your SewerCAD 5.X model in SewerCAD V8i and save it.

Starting a Project
2. Convert your engineering libraries

a. Close the model that you just converted and browse to your SewerCAD V8i
installation folder. By default, this will be C:\Program
Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Sanitary
b. Double click the file named WaterObjects.Net.EngineeringLibraryCon-
verter.exe - this will open the Engineering Library Converter tool.
c. Select "SewerCAD" as the "Product" along with the type of library you'd like
to convert, for the "library type".
d. Click the browse button next to "HLB library file" and locate the .hlb engi-
neering library file used in SewerCAD 5.X. When converting a section size
library, you must also select the material library .hlb file.
e. Click the browse button next to "destination root" and select a folder to export
the converted engineering library .xml file to
f. Click convert to generate a .xml library file, usable in SewerCAD V8i.
Note that for section size libraries, ensure that at least one selection has been made
for the "available in materials" tab (inside SewerCAD 5.6), for all section sizes.
Otherwise, the conversion process will not work properly.
Repeat this step for any library types that you need to use (section size, material,
minor loss, unit load and extreme flow factor.)
3. Match the libraries to your model
a. A .xml file will now be present in the folder you selected, for each library type
that you converted.
b. Next, click the "Match" button in the main window of the engineering library
converter tool. This new option allows you to automatically link library
entries (in the .xml file) to library entries in the various catalogs of the model
file that was converted to SewerCAD V8i. This way, instead of the library
entries being "orphaned", they will be associated (by label) to the library files
that you just converted.
c. Click the browse button next to "engineering library filename" and select the
.xml library file that you'd like to match up
d. Choose the corresponding library type from the "Component" dropdown
menu.
e. Click the browse button next to "model filename" and select the SewerCAD
V8i model file that you just converted
f. Click "Match". A summary window will show you how many items were
linked.

Exporting Data
Similar to step 2 above, repeat this step for each library type that you need to
match up to the model. Note that if the "match" tool could not link library items
due to mismatched labels, you can manually associate them once in the program
(see step 5 below)
4. Add your converted libraries to SewerCAD V8i
a. Close the engineering library converter tool and open your converted model
in SewerCADV8i.
b. Go to Components > Engineering Libraries.
c. Right click on the library type you'd like to import and choose "Add existing
project".
d. Browse to and select the corresponding .xml file that you converted in step 2.
e. Repeat for any library types you need to import.
5. Connect remaining library items
a. Click the Components menu and select the catalog type you'd like to check
(for example, Conduit Catalog.)
b. Click the "library" tab and click each engineering library component. You'll
notice that the items that exist in the converted engineering library will show
up as "Synchronized". Items that did not exist in the converted engineering
library (that could not be "matched" by label) will still show as "orphaned".
This can sometimes occur, such as if you used a particular section size in a
conduit in SewerCAD 5.6 and then deleted the engineering library entry.
c. If you need to associate an "orphaned" entry in your catalog to an entry on
your engineering libraries, click that catalog entry, click the purple book icon
and select "connect to library".
d. Select the engineering library entry that you'd like to associate the catalog
entry with and click "select".
At this point, if you'd like, you can click the purple book icon again and select
"synchronize from library". This will synchronize the catalog entry to reflect the
record in the engineering library that you "connected" it to. You could also choose
to "synchronize to library" if you wanted the engineering library item to reflect the
catalog entry.
Exporting Data
You can export your SewerCAD V8i data as a submodel, export to LandXML, or
export the graphical representation of your model as a .DXF file.

Starting a Project
• “Exporting a .DXF File” on page 4-155

• “Exporting a Submodel” on page 4-155
• “Exporting to LandXML” on page 4-155
Exporting a .DXF File
You can export your SewerCAD V8i model as a .DXF file if you plan to edit the file in
AutoCAD or another program. When you export a .DXF file, you export only the
graphical (vector) representation of the model. The DXF file is an ASCII file.
To export the current project to a .DXF file:
1. Select File > Export > DXF.

2. Type the name of the DXF file, then click Save.
You may now open the DXF file in another program.
Exporting a Submodel
You can export any portion of a model as a submodel for import into other projects.
Input data is also stored in the file that is created in the process of Exporting a
Submodel. This input data will be imported following a label-matching strategy for
any element, alternative, scenario, calculation option or supporting data in the
submodel. For more information about input data transfer, see Importing Submodels.
User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and export operations.
To export a submodel
1. In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To

highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.
2. Click the File menu and select Export...Submodel.
3. In the Select Submodel File to Export dialog box, specify the directory to which
the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.
Exporting to LandXML
You can export a model to LandXML format. See “Importing from LandXML” on
page 4-150 for information about the data that will be exported.

Exporting Data
To export the current project to a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Export > LandXML.

2. Type the name of the xml file , then click Save.
You may now open the .xml file in another program.

Chapter
Using Modelbuilder 5
ModelBuilder lets you use your existing GIS asset to construct a new SewerCAD V8i
model or update an existing SewerCAD V8i model. ModelBuilder supports a wide
variety of data formats, from simple databases (such as Access and DBase), spread-
sheets (such as Excel or Lotus), GIS data (such as shape files), to high end data stores
(such as Oracle, and SQL Server), and more.
Using ModelBuilder, you map the tables and fields contained within your data source
to element types and attributes in your SewerCAD V8i model. The result is that a
SewerCAD V8i model is created. ModelBuilder can be used in any of the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i platforms - Stand-Alone, MicroStation mode, AutoCAD mode, or
ArcGIS mode.
Note: ModelBuilder lets you bring a wide range of data into your
model. However, some data is better suited to the use of the
more specialized SewerCAD V8i modules. For instance,
LoadBuilder offers many powerful options for incorporating
loading data into your model.
ModelBuilder is the first tool you will use when constructing a model from GIS data.
The steps that you take at the outset will impact how the rest of the process goes. Take
the time now to ensure that this process goes as smoothly and efficiently as possible:
• “Preparing to Use ModelBuilder” on page 5-157

• “Reviewing Your Results” on page 5-178
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder

• Determine the purpose of your model—Once you establish the purpose of your
model, you can start to make decisions about how detailed the model should be.

Preparing to Use ModelBuilder
• Get familiar with your data—ModelBuilder supports several data source types,
including tabular and geometric. Tabular data sources include spreadsheets, data-
bases, and other data sources without geometric information. Some supported
tabular data source types include Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access.
Geometric data sources, while also internally organized by tables, include
geometric characteristics such as shape type, size, and location. Some supported
geometric data source types include the major CAD and GIS file types
If you obtained your model data from an outside source, you should take the time
to get acquainted with it in its native platform. For example, review spatial and
attribute data directly in your GIS environment. Do the nodes have coordinate
information, and do the pipes have start and stop nodes specified? If not, the best
method of specifying network connectivity must be determined.
Contact those involved in the development of the GIS to learn more about the GIS
tables and associated attributes. Find out the purpose of any fields that may be of
interest, ensure that data is of an acceptable accuracy, and determine units associ-
ated with fields containing numeric data.
Ideally, there will be one source data table for each SewerCAD V8i element type.
This isn’t always the case, and there are two other possible scenarios:
Many tables for one element type—In this case, there may be several tables in
the datasource corresponding to a single GEMS modeling element, component, or
collection. In this case each data source table must be individually mapped to the
SewerCAD V8i table type, or the tables must be combined into a single table from
within its native platform before running ModelBuilder.
One table containing many element types—In this case, there may be entries
that correspond to several SewerCAD V8i table types in one datasource table. You
should separate these into individual tables before running ModelBuilder.
• Preparing your data—When using ModelBuilder to get data from your data
source into your model, you will be associating rows in your data source to
elements in SewerCAD V8i. Your data source needs to contain a Key/Label field
that can be used to uniquely identify every element in your model. The data
source tables should have identifying column labels, or ModelBuilder will inter-
pret the first row of data in the table as the column labels. Be sure data is in a
format suited for use in ModelBuilder. Note that while ModelBuilder allows
duplicate labels, they may cause ModelBuilder to give unexpected results when
two elements of the same type have the same label. Where applicable, use
powerful GIS and Database tools to perform Database Joins, Spatial Joins, and
Update Joins to get data into the appropriate table, and in the desired format.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: When working with ID fields, the expected model input is the
SewerCAD V8i ID. After creating these items in your SewerCAD
V8i model, you can obtain the assigned ID values directly from
your SewerCAD V8i modeling file. Before synchronizing your
model, get these SewerCAD V8i IDs into your data source table
(e.g., by performing a database join).
• Preparing your CAD Data—In previous versions of SewerCAD V8i, the Poly-
line-to-Pipe feature was was used to import CAD data into a SewerCAD V8i
model. In v8, CAD data is imported using ModelBuilder. When using Model-
Builder to import data from your CAD file into your model, you will be associ-
ating cells in your CAD drawing with elements in SewerCAD V8i.
Different CAD cells will be recognized as different element types and presented
as tables existing in your CAD data source. It is recommended that you natively
export your AutoCAD .dwg or Microstation .dgn files first as a .dxf file, then
select this .dxf as the data source in ModelBuilder. Your data source will most
likely not contain a Key/Label field that can be used to uniquely identify every
element in your model, so ModelBuilder will automatically generate one for you
using the default "<label>". This "<label>" field is a combination of an element's
cell type label, its shape type, and a numeric ID that represents the order in which
it was created.
• Build first, Synchronize later—ModelBuilder allows you to construct a new
model or synchronize to an existing model. This gives you the ability to develop
your model in multiple passes. On the first pass, use a simple connection to build
your model. Then, on a subsequent pass, use a connection to load additional data
into your model, such as supporting pattern or collection data.
Note: Upon completion of your ModelBuilder run, it is suggested you

use the Network Navigator to identify any connectivity or
topological problems in your new model. For instance, Pipe Split
Candidates can be identified and then automatically modified
with the Batch Split Pipe Tool (see “Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box” on
page 4-275). See “Using the Network Navigator” on page 4-291 for
more information.
• Going Beyond ModelBuilder—Keep in mind that there are additional ways to

get data into your model. ModelBuilder can import loads if you have already
assigned a load to each node. If, however, this information is not available from
the GIS data, or if your loading data is in a format unrecognized by ModelBuilder
(meter data, etc.), use LoadBuilder; this module is a specialized tool for getting
this data into your model. In addition, with its open database format, SewerCAD
V8i gives you unprecedented access to your modeling data.

ModelBuilder Connections Manager
One area of difficulty in building a model from external data sources is the fact that
unless the source was created solely to support modeling, it most likely contains much
more detailed information than is needed for modeling. This is especially true with
regard to the number of piping elements. It is not uncommon for the data sources to
include every service line. Such information is not needed for most modeling applica-
tions and should be removed to improve model run time, reduce file size, and save
costs.

ModelBuilder can be used in any of the Bentley SewerCAD V8i platforms - Stand-
Alone, MicroStation mode, or AutoCAD mode.
To access ModelBuilder: Click the Tools menu and select the ModelBuilder
command, or click the ModelBuilder button .
The ModelBuilder Connections manager allows you to create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the model-building/model-synchronizing
process.
At the center of this window is the Connections List which displays the list of
connections that you have defined.
There is a toolbar located along the top of the Connections list.

Using Modelbuilder
The set of buttons on the left of the toolbar allow you to manage your connections:
New Create a new connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Edit Edit the selected connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Rename Rename the selected connection.
Duplicate Create a copy of the selected connection.

Delete Permanently Remove the selected connection.
Build Model Starts the ModelBuilder build process using the

selected connection. Excluding some spatial
option overrides, a build operation will update
your model with new elements, components,
and collections that already exist in the model.
Only table types and fields that are mapped will
be updated. If an element in your data source
does not already exist in your model, it will be
created. If the element exists, only the fields
mapped for that table type will be updated. It
will not override element properties not
specifically associated with the defined field
mappings. A Build Model operation will update
existing or newly created element values for the
current scenario/alternative.
Sync Out Starts the ModelBuilder synchronize process

using the selected connection. Unless
specifically overridden, a Sync Out operation
will only work for existing and new elements.
On a Sync Out every element in your data
source that also exists in your model will be
refreshed with the current model values. If your
model contains elements that aren’t contained in
your data source, those data rows will be added
to your source. Only those attributes specified
with field mappings will be synchronized out to
the data source. A Sync Out operation will
refresh element properties in the data source
with the current model values for the current
scenario/alternative.
Help Displays online help.
After initiating a Build or Sync command, ModelBuilder will perform the selected
operation. During the process, a progress-bar will be displayed indicating the step that
ModelBuilder is currently working on.
When ModelBuilder completes, you will be presented with a summary window that
outlines important information about the build process. We recommend that you save
this summary so that you can refer to it later.

Using Modelbuilder
ModelBuilder connections are preserved even after SewerCAD V8i is closed. The
location of the file is as follows:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application

Data\Bentley\<productname>\<productversion>
Windows Vista: C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Roaming\Bentley\<product-

name>\<productversion>\ModelBuilder.xml.
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The
Wizard will guide you through the process of selecting your data source and mapping
that data to the desired input of your model.
Tip: The ModelBuilder Wizard can be resized, making it easier to

preview tables in your data source. In addition, Step 1 and Step 3
of the wizard offer a vertical split bar, letting you adjust the size
of the list located on the left side of these pages.
There are 6 steps involved:
• Step 1—Specify Data Source

• “Step 2—Specify Spatial Options” on page 5-166
• “Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options” on page 5-168
• “Step 4—Additional Options” on page 5-170
• “Step 5—Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class” on page 5-173
• Step 6—Build operation Confirmation

ModelBuilder Wizard
Step 1—Specify Data Source
In this step, the data source type and location are specified. After selecting your data
source, the desired database tables can be chosen and previewed.
The following fields are available:
• Data Source type (drop-down list)—This field allows you to specify the type of
data you would like to work with.
Note: If your specific data source type is not listed in the Data Source
type field, try using the OLE DB data source type. OLE DB can be
used to access many database systems (including ORACLE, and
SQL Server, to name a few).
• Data Source (text field)—This read-only field displays the path to your data
source.
• Browse (button)—This button opens a browse dialog box that allows you to inter-
actively select your data source.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: Some Data Source types expect you to choose more than one
item in the Browse dialog box. For more information, see “Multi-
select Data Source Types” on page 5-178.
• Table/Feature Class (list)—This pane is located along the left side of the form
and lists the tables/feature classes that are contained within the data source. Use
the check boxes (along the left side of the list) to specify the tables you would like
to include.
Tip: The list can be resized using the split bar (located on the right
side of the list).
Right-click to Select All or Clear the current selection in the list.
• Duplicate Table (button) —The duplicate table button is located along the
top of the Table/Feature Class list. This button allows you to make copies of a
table, which can each be mapped to a different element type in your model. Use
this in conjunction with the WHERE clause.
• Remove Table (button) —The remove table button can be used to remove a
table from the list.
• WHERE Clause (field)—Allows you to create a SQL query to filter the tables.
When the box is checked, only tables that meet the criteria specified by the
WHERE clause will be displayed. Click the button to validate the query and
to refresh the preview table.
• Preview Pane—A tabular preview of the highlighted table is displayed in this
pane when the Show Preview check box is enabled.

ModelBuilder Wizard
Note: If both nodes and pipes are imported in the same ModelBuilder
connection, nodes will be imported first regardless of the order
they are listed here.
Step 2—Specify Spatial Options
In this step you will specify the spatial options to be used during the ModelBuilder
process. The spatial options will determine the placement and connectivity of the
model elements. The fields available in this step will vary depending on the data
source type.
• Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source (drop-down list)—This field
allows you to specify the coordinate unit of the spatial data in your data source.
The default unit is the unit used for coordinates.

Using Modelbuilder
• Create nodes if none found at pipe endpoint (check box)—When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will create a pressure junction at any pipe endpoint that:
a) doesn’t have a connected node, and b) is not within the specified tolerance of an
existing node. This field is only active when the Establish connectivity using
spatial data box is checked. (This option is not available if the connection is
bringing in only point type geometric data.)
ModelBuilder will not create pipes unless a valid start/stop node exists. Choose
this option if you know that there are nodes missing from your source data. If you
expect your data to be complete, then leave this option off and if this situation is
detected ModelBuilder will report errors for your review. For more information
see “Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder” on page 5-181.
• Establish connectivity using spatial data (check box)—When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will connect pipes to nodes that fall within a specified
tolerance of a pipe endpoint. (This option is available if the connection is bringing
in only polyline type geometric data.) Use this option, when the data source does
not explicitly name the nodes at the end of each pipe. For more information, see
“Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder” on page 5-181.
• Tolerance (numeric field)—This field dictates how close a node must be to a pipe
endpoint in order for connectivity to be established. The Tolerance field is only
available when the Establish connectivity using spatial data box is checked. (This
option is available if the connection is bringing in only polyline type geometric
data.) Tolerances should be set as low as possible so that unintended connections
are not made. If you are not sure what tolerance to use, try doing some test runs.
Use the Network Review queries to evaluate the success of each trial import.

ModelBuilder Wizard
Note: Pipes will be connected to the closest node within the specified
tolerance.
The unit associated with the tolerance is dictated by the Specify

the Coordinate Unit of your data source field.
For more information, see “Specifying Network Connectivity in

ModelBuilder” on page 5-181.
Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options
Because of the variety of different data sources and they way those sources were
created, the user has a wide variety of options to control the behavior of Model-
Builder.
How would you like to handle synchronization between source and destination?:

Using Modelbuilder
• Add objects to destination if present in source (check box)-When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will automatically add new elements to the model for
"new" records in the data source when synching in (or vice-versa when synching
out).
This is checked by default since a user generally wants to add elements to the
model (especially if this is the initial run of ModelBuilder). This should be
unchecked if new elements have been added to the source file since the model was
created but the user does not want them in the model (e.g. proposed piping).
– Prompt before adding objects (check box)-When this box is checked,
ModelBuilder will pause during the synchronization process to present a
confirmation message box to the user each time an element is about to be
created in the model or data-source.
• Remove objects from destination if missing from source (check box)-When
this box is checked, ModelBuilder will delete elements from the model if they do
not exist in the data source when synching in (or vice-versa when synching out).
This option can be useful if you are importing a subset of elements.
This is used if abandoned pipes have been deleted from the source file and the
user wants them to automatically be removed from the model by ModelBuilder.
– Prompt before removing objects (check box)-When this box is checked,
deleted from the model.
• Update existing objects in destination if present in source (check box) - If
checked, this option allows you to control whether or not properties and geometry
of existing model elements will be updated when synching in (or vice-versa when
synching out). Turning this option off can be useful if you want to synchronize
newly added or removed elements, while leaving existing elements untouched.
– Prompt before updating objects (check box)-When this box is checked,
updated.
If an imported object refers to another object that does not yet exist in the model,
should ModelBuilder:
• Create referenced element automatically? (check box)-When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will create any domain and/or support elements that are
referenced during the import process.

ModelBuilder Wizard
– Prompt before creating referenced elements (check box)-When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a
confirmation message box to the user each time a specified referenced
element could not be found, and is about to be created for the model.
"Referenced elements" refers to any support or domain element that is refer-
enced by another element. For example, Pumps can refer to Pump Definition
support-elements, Junctions can refer to Zone support-elements, and Pumps
can refer to a downstream Pipe domain-element. Node domain-elements that
get created as a result of being referenced during the ModelBuilder process
will use a default coordinate of 0, 0.
Note: These options listed above apply to domain elements (pipes and
nodes) as well as support elements (such as Zones or Controls).
Step 4—Additional Options
• How would you like to import incoming data? (drop-down list) - This refers to
the scenario (and associated alternatives) into which the data will be imported.
The user can import the data into the Current Scenario or a new child scenario. If
the latter is selected, a new child scenario (and child alternatives) will be created
for any data difference between the source and the active scenario.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: If there is no data change for a particular alternative, no child

alternative will be created in that case.
New scenario and alternatives will be automatically labeled

"Created by ModelBuilder" followed by the date and time when
they were created.
• Specify key field used during object mapping (drop-down list) - The key field
represents the field in the model and data source that contains the unique identifier
for associating domain elements in your model to records in your data source.
Refer to the "Key Field (Model)" topic in the next section for additional guidance
on how this setting applies to ModelBuilder. ModelBuilder provides three
choices for Key Field:
– Label - The element "Label" will be used as the key for associating model
elements with data source records. Label is a good choice if the identifier
field in your data-source is unique and represents the identifier you commonly
use to refer to the record in your GIS.
– <custom> - Any editable text field in your model can be used as the key for
associating model elements with data source records. This is a good choice if
you perhaps don't use labels on every element, or if perhaps there are dupli-
cate labels in your data source.
– GIS-ID - The element "GIS-ID" field will be used as the key for associating
model elements with data source elements. The GIS-ID field offers a number
of advanced capabilities, and is the preferred choice for models that you plan
to keep in sync with your GIS over a period of time.
Refer to the section “The GIS-ID Property” on page 5-183 for more informa-
tion.
The following options only apply when using the advanced GIS-ID key field option.
• If several elements share the same GIS-ID, then apply updates to all of them?
(check box) - When using the GIS-ID option, ModelBuilder allows you to main-
tain one-to-many, and many-to-one relationships between records in your GIS and
elements in your Model.
For example, you may have a single pipe in your GIS that you want to maintain as
multiple elements in your Model because you have split that pipe into two pipes
elements in the model. You may accomplish this using the native SewerCAD V8i
layout tools to split the pipe with a node; the newly created pipe segment will be
assigned the same GIS-ID as the original pipe (establishing a one-to-many rela-
tionship). By using this option, when you later synchronize from the GIS into
your model, any data changes to the single pipe record in your GIS can be
cascaded to both pipes elements in your model (e.g. so a diameter change to a
single record in the GIS would be reflected in both elements in the model).

ModelBuilder Wizard
– Prompt before cascading updates (check box) - When this box is checked,
ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation
message box to the user each time a cascading update is about to be applied.
• How would you like to handle add/removes of elements with GIS-ID
mappings on subsequent imports? - These options are useful for keeping your
GIS and Model synchronized, while maintaining established differences.
– Recreate elements associated with a GIS-ID that was previously deleted
from the model (check box) - By default, ModelBuilder will not recreate
elements you remove from your model that are associated with a records
(with GIS-ID mappings) that are still in your GIS. This behavior is useful
when you want to perform GIS to model synchronizations, but have elements
that exist in your GIS that you do not want in your model.
For example, after creating your model from GIS, you may find redundant
nodes when performing a Network Navigator, "Nodes in Close Proximity"
network review query. You may choose to use the "Merge Nodes in Close
Proximity" feature to make the correction in your model (deleting the redun-
dant nodes from your model). Normally, when you later synchronize from
your GIS to your model, missing elements would be recreated and your
correction would be lost. However, SewerCAD V8i now maintains the
history of elements (with GIS-ID's) that were removed from your model; this
option allows you to control whether or not those elements get recreated.
– When removing objects from destination if missing from source, only
remove objects that have a GIS-ID. (check box) - This option is useful
when you have elements that are missing from your GIS that you want to keep
in your model (or vice-versa).
For example, if you build your model from your GIS (using the GIS-ID
option, a GIS-ID will be assigned to newly created elements in your model. If
you later add elements to your model (they will not be assigned a GIS-ID); on
subsequent synchronizations, this option (if checked) will allow you to you
retain those model specific elements that do not exist in your GIS. For
example, you may have a proposed land development project in your model
that does not exist in the GIS. These elements will not have a GIS-ID because
they were not imported from the GIS. If this box is checked, the new elements
will not be removed on subsequent runs of ModelBuilder.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: This setting only applies if the "Remove objects from destination
if missing from source" option is checked.
When you do make connectivity changes to your model, it is

often beneficial to make those same changes to the GIS.
However, this is not always possible; and in some cases is not
desirable -- given the fact that Modeling often has highly
specialized needs that may not be met by a general purpose GIS.
Step 5—Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class
In this step, data source tables are mapped to the desired modeling element types, and
data source fields are mapped to the desired model input properties. You will assign
mappings for each Table/Feature Class that appears in the list; Step 1 of the wizard can
be used to exclude tables, if you wish.
• Tables (list)-This pane, located along the left side of the dialog box, lists the data
source Tables/Feature Classes to be used in the ModelBuilder process. Select an
item in the list to specify the settings for that item.
Note: The tables list can be resized using the splitter bar.
There are two toolbar buttons located directly above Tables list (these buttons can be a
great time saver when setting up multiple mappings with similar settings).

ModelBuilder Wizard
– Copy Mappings (button)-This button copies the mappings (associated with

the currently selected table) to the clipboard.
– Paste Mappings (button)-This button applies the copied mappings to the
currently selected table.
• Settings Tab-The Settings tab allows you to specify mappings for the selected
item in the Tables list.
The top section of the Settings tab allows you to specify the common data
mappings:
– Table Type (drop-down list)-This field, which contains a list of all of the
StormCAD V8i element types, allows you to specify the target modeling
element type that the source table/feature class represents. For example, a
source table that contains pipe data should be associated with the Conduit
element type.
There are three categories of Table Types: Element Types, Components, and
Collections. For geometric data sources, only Element Types are available.
However with tabular data sources all table types can be used. The catego-
rized menu accessed by the [>] button assists in quicker selection of the
desired table type.
- Element Types-This category of Table Type includes geometric elements
represented in the drawing view such as conduits, catch basins, manholes,
etc.
- Components-This category of Table Type includes the supporting data
items in your model that are potentially shared among elements such as
patterns, pump definitions, and controls.
- Collections-This category of Table Type includes table types that are
typically lists of 2-columned data. For instance, if one table in your
connection consists of a list of (Time From Start, Multiplier) pairs, use a
Pattern collection table type selection.
– Key Fields - This pair of key fields allows you to control how records in your
data source are associated with elements in the model. The Key Fields
element mapping consists of two parts, a data-source part and a model part:
- Key Field (Data Source) (drop-down list)-Choose the field in your data
source that contains the unique identifier for each record.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: If you plan to maintain synchronizations between your model

and GIS, it is best to define a unique identifier in your data
source for this purpose. Using an identifier that is unique
across all tables is critical if you wish to maintain explicit pipe
start/stop connectivity identifiers in your GIS.
When working with ArcGIS data sources, OBJECTID is not a

good choice for Key field (because OBJECTID is only unique for
a particular Feature Class).
For one-time model builds -- if you do not have a field that can be
used to uniquely identify each element -- you may use the
<label> field (which is automatically generated by ModelBuilder
for this purpose).
- Key Field (Model) (drop-down-list) - This field is only enabled if you

specified <custom> in the "Specify key field to be used in object
mapping?" option in the previous step. If you specified "GIS-ID' or
"Label" the field will be disabled.
If you specified <custom>, then you will be presented with a list of the
available text fields for that element type. Choose a field that represents
the unique alphanumeric identifier for each element in your model.
Note: You can define a text User Data Extensions property for use as
your <custom> model key field.
The <custom> key field list is limited to read-write text fields.

This is because during import, the value of this field will be
assigned as new elements in your model are created. Therefore,
the models internal (read-only) element ID field cannot be used
for this purpose.
The following optional fields are available for Pipe element types:
- Start/Stop - Select the fields in a pipe table that contain the identifier of
the start and stop nodes. Specify <none> if you are using the spatial
connectivity support in ModelBuilder (or if you want to keep connectivity
unchanged on update). For more information, see Specifying Network
Connectivity in ModelBuilder.
Note: When working with an ArcGIS Geometric Network data source,

these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that ModelBuilder
will automatically determine connectivity from the geometric
network).
These fields are available for Node element types:

- X/Y Field - These fields are used to specify the node X and Y coordinate
data. This field only applies to point table types.

ModelBuilder Wizard
Note: The Coordinate Unit setting in Step 2 of the wizard allows you to
specify the units associated with these fields.
When working with ArcGIS Geodatabase, shape file and CAD

data sources, these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that
ModelBuilder will automatically determine node geometry from
the data source).
These optional fields are available for Pump element types:

- Suction Element (drop-down list)-For tables that define pump data,
select a pipe label or other unique identifier to set the suction element of
the Pump.
- Downstream Edge (drop-down list)-For tables that define directional
node type data, such as pumps as valves, select the field in the data source
that contains the downstream pipe label or other unique identifier. This
will allow the direction of the node to be explicitly set.
The bottom section of the Settings tab allows you to specify additional data
mappings for each field in the source.
- Field - Field refers to a field in the selected data source. The Field list
displays the associations between fields in the database to properties in
the model.
- Property (drop-down list)-Property refers to a Bentley SewerCAD V8i
property. Use the Property drop-down list to map the highlighted field to
the desired property.
- Unit (drop-down list)-This field allows you to specify the units of the
values in the database (no conversion on your part is required). This field
only applies if the selected model property is unitized.
• Preview Tab-The Preview tab displays a tabular preview of the currently high-
lighted source data table when the Show Preview check box is checked.
To map a field in your table to a particular Bentley SewerCAD V8i property:
1. In the Field list, select the data source field you would like to define a mapping
for.
2. In the Property drop-down list, select the desired Bentley SewerCAD V8i target
model property.
3. If the property is unitized, specify the unit of this field in your data source in the
Unit drop-down list.

Using Modelbuilder
To remove the mapping for a particular field:
1. Select the field you would like to update.

2. In the Property drop-down list, select <none>.
Step 6—Build operation Confirmation
In this step, you are prompted to build a new model or update an existing model.
To build a new model, click the Yes radio button under Would you like to build the
model now?.
If you choose No, you will be returned to the ModelBuilder Manager dialog. The
connection you defined will appear in the list pane. To build the model from the
ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Build Model button.
Create Selection Set options: Often a user wants to view the elements that have been
affected by a ModelBuilder operation. To do this, ModelBuilder can create selection
sets which the user can view and use within the application.

Reviewing Your Results
• To create a selection set containing the elements added during the ModelBuilder,
check the box next to "Create selection set with elements added."
• To create a selection set containing the elements for which the properties or geom-
etry were modified during the ModelBuilder, check the box next to "Create selec-
tion set with elements modified."
Note: Selection sets created as a result of these options will include

the word "ModelBuilder" in their name, along with the date and
time (e.g. "Elements added via ModelBuilder - mm/dd/yyyy
hh:mm:ss am/pm")
Reviewing Your Results

At the end of the ModelBuilder process, you will be presented with statistics, and a list
of any warning/error messages reported during the process. You should closely review
this information, and be sure to save this data to disk where you can refer to it later.
Note: Refer to the section titled “ModelBuilder Warnings and Error

Messages” on page 5-178 to determine the nature of any
messages that were reported.
Multi-select Data Source Types

When certain Data Source types are chosen in Step 1 of the ModelBuilder Wizard (see
“Step 1—Specify Data Source” on page 5-149), multiple items can be selected for
inclusion in your ModelBuilder connection.
After clicking the Browse button to interactively specify your data source, use stan-
dard Windows selection techniques to select all items you would like to include in the
connection (e.g., Ctrl+click each item you would like to include).
The following are multi-select Data Source types:
• Shape files
• DBase, HTML Export, and Paradox.
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages

Errors and warnings that are encountered during the ModelBuilder process will be
reported in the ModelBuilder Summary.
For more information, see:

Using Modelbuilder
• “Warnings” on page 5-179

• “Error Messages” on page 5-180
Warnings
Warning messages include:
1. Some rows were ignored due to missing key-field values.

ModelBuilder encountered missing data (e.g., null or blank) in the specified Key/
Label field for rows in your data source table. Without a key, ModelBuilder is
unable to associate this source row with a target element, and must skip these
items. This can commonly occur when using a spreadsheet data source. To deter-
mine where and how often this error occurred, check the Statistics page for the
message <x> row(s) ignored due to missing key-field values.
2. Unable to create pipe <element>; start and/or stop node could not be found.
Pipes can only be created if its start and stop nodes can be established. If you are
using Explicit connectivity, a node element with the referenced start or stop label
could not be found. If you are using implicit connectivity, a node element could
not be located within the specified tolerance. For more information, see “Speci-
fying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder” on page 5-181.
3. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; (start or stop) node could not be
found.
This error occurs when synchronizing an existing model, and indicates that the
pipe connectivity could not be updated. For more information, see warning
message #2 (above).
4. The downstream edge for <element> could not be found.
ModelBuilder was unable to set a Pump direction because a pipe with the refer-
enced label could not be found.
5. Directed Node <element> direction is ambiguous.
ModelBuilder was unable to set the direction of the referenced pump or valve
because direction could not be implied based on the adjacent pipes (e.g. there
should be one incoming and one outgoing pipe).

ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages
Error Messages
Note: If you encounter these errors or warnings, we recommend that

you correct the problems in your original data source and re-run
ModelBuilder (when applicable).
Error messages include:
1. Unable to assign <attribute> for element <element>.

Be sure that the data in your source table is compatible with the expected
SewerCAD V8i format. For more information, see “Preparing to Use Model-
Builder” on page 5-157.
2. Unable to create <element type> <element>.
This message indicates that an unexpected error occurred when attempting to
create a node element.
3. Unable to create pipe <element> possibly due to start or stop connectivity
constraints.
This message indicates that this pipe could not be created, because the pump or
valve already has an incoming and outgoing pipe. Adding a third pipe to a pump
or valve is not allowed.
4. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; possibly due to start element connec-
tivity constraints.
This error occurs when synchronizing. For more information, see error message
#3 (above).
5. Operation terminated by user.
You pressed the Cancel button during the ModelBuilder process.
6. Unable to create < element>; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
7. Unable to update <element> topology; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
8. Unable to update the downstream edge for <element>.
An unexpected error occurred attempting to set the downstream edge for this
pump or valve.
9. Nothing to do. Some previously referenced tables may be missing from your data
source.

Using Modelbuilder
This data source has changed since this connection was created. Verify that tables/
feature-classes in your data source have not been renamed or deleted.
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder

When importing spatial data (ArcGIS Geodatabases or shapefile data contain spatial
geometry data that ModelBuilder can use to establish network connectivity by
connecting pipe ends to nodes, creating nodes at pipe endpoints if none are found.),
ModelBuilder provides two ways to specify network connectivity:
• Explicit connectivity—based on pipe Start node and Stop node (see “Step 4—
Additional Options” on page 5-170).
• Implicit connectivity—based on spatial data. When using implicit connectivity,
ModelBuilder allows you to specify a Tolerance, and provides a second option
allowing you to Create nodes if none found (see “Step 2—Specify Spatial
Options” on page 5-166).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible
situations include (in order from best case to worst case):
• You have pipe start and stop information—Explicit connectivity is definitely the
preferred option.
• You have some start and stop information—Use a combination of explicit and
implicit connectivity (use the Spatial Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop
fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe, Model-
Builder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
• You do not have start and stop information—Implicit connectivity is your only
option. If your spatial data is good, then you should reduce your Tolerance
accordingly.
• You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data
(e.g., you have GIS data that defines your pipes, but you do not have data for
nodes)—Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none found
option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.

Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder
Note: If pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes and “Establish

connectivity using spatial data” is not checked, the pipes will not
be connected to the nodes and a valid model will not be
produced.
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do
not match up with the node coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different
varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/
Stop nodes—In this case, the node coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are
moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes—The
nodes will be created, and the specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe
ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end does not fall
within any node’s specified tolerance, a new node can be created using the Create
nodes if none found option.
3. Pipe ends have coordinates but there are no junctions—New nodes must be
created using the Create nodes if none found option. Pipe ends are then
connected using the tolerance that is specified.
Another situation of interest occurs when two pipes cross but aren’t connected. If, at
the point where the pipes cross, there are no pipe ends or nodes within the specified
tolerance, then the pipes will not be connected in the model. If you intend for the pipes
to connect, then pipe ends or junctions must exist within the specified tolerance.
Sample Spreadsheet Data Source
Note: Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample below is intended only to
illustrate the importance of using expected data formats.
Here are two examples of possible data source tables. The first represents data that is
in the correct format for an easy transition into ModelBuilder, with no modification.
The second table will require adjustments before all of the data can be used by Model-
Builder.

Using Modelbuilder
Table 5-1: Correct Data Format for ModelBuilder
Label Roughness_C Diam_in Length_ft Material_ID Subtype
P-1 120 6 120 3 2
P-2 110 8 75 2 1
P-3 130 6 356 2 3
P-4 100 10 729 1 1
Table 5-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder
P-1 120 .5 120 PVC Phase2
P-2 110 .66 75 DuctIron Lateral
P-3 130 .5 356 PVC Phase1
P-4 100 .83 729 DuctIron Main
P-5 100 1 1029 DuctIron Main
In Table 5-2, no column labels have been specified. ModelBuilder will interpret the
first row of data in the table as the column labels, which can make the attribute
mapping step of the ModelBuilder Wizard more difficult unless you are very familiar
with your data source setup.
Table 5-1 is also superior to Table 5-2 in that it clearly identifies the units that are used
for unitized attribute values, such as length and diameter. Again, unless you are very
familiar with your data source, unspecified units can lead to errors and confusion.
Finally, Table 5-2 is storing the Material and Subtype attributes as alphanumeric
values, while ModelBuilder uses integer ID values to access this input. This data is
unusable by ModelBuilder in alphanumeric format, and must be translated to an
integer ID system in order to read this data.
The GIS-ID Property

All domain elements in SewerCAD V8i have an editable GIS-ID property which can
be used for maintaining associations between records in your source file and elements
in your model. These associations can be one-to-one, one-to-many, or many-to-one.

The GIS-ID Property
ModelBuilder can take advantage of this GIS-ID property, and has advanced logic for
keeping your model and GIS source file synchronized across the various model to GIS
associations.
The GIS-ID is a unique field in the source file which the user selects when Model-
Builder is being set up. In contrast to using Label (which is adequate if model
building is a one time operation) as the key field between the model and the source
file, a GIS-ID has some special properties which are very helpful in maintaining long
term updating of the model as the data source evolves over time.
In addition, SewerCAD V8i will intelligently maintain GIS-ID as you use the various
tools to manipulate elements (Delete, Morph, Split, Merge Nodes in Close Proximity).
• When an element with one or more GIS-IDs is deleted, ModelBuilder will not
recreate it the next time a synchronization from your GIS occurs if the "Recreate
elements associated with a GIS-ID that was previously deleted from the model"
option is left unchecked.
• When an element with one or more GIS-IDs is morphed, the new element will
preserve those GIS-IDs. The original element will be considered as "deleted with
GIS-IDs", which means that it will not be recreated by default (see above).
• When a link is split, the two links will preserve the same GIS-IDs the original pipe
had. On subsequent ModelBuilder synchronizations, any data-change occurring
for the associated record in the GIS can be cascaded into all the split link segments
(see ModelBuilder - additional options).
• When nodes in close proximity are merged, the resulting node will preserve the
GIS-IDs of all the nodes that were removed. On subsequent ModelBuilder
synchronizations into the model, if there are data-update conflicts between the
records in the GIS associated with the merged node in the model, updates from the
first GIS-ID listed for the merged node will be preserved in the model. Note that
in this case, the geometry of the merged node can't be updated in the model. For
synchronizations going from the model to the GIS, data-updates affecting
merged-nodes can be cascaded into all the associated records in the GIS (see
ModelBuilder - additional options).
To support these relationship (specifically one to many), GIS-ID are managed as a

collection property (capable of holding any number of GIS identifiers).
A variety of model element(s) to GIS record(s) associations can be specified:
• If the GIS-ID collection is empty, there is no association between the GIS and this
element.
• If there is a single entry, this element is associated with one record in the GIS.

Using Modelbuilder
• If there are multiple entries, this element is associated with multiple records in the
GIS.
• More than one element in the model can have the same GIS-ID, meaning multiple
records on the model are associated with a single record in the GIS.
Note: You can also manually edit the GIS-ID property to review or
modify the element to GIS association(s).
GIS-ID Collection Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to assign one or more GIS-IDs to the currently selected
element.
See “The GIS-ID Property” on page 5-183 for more information on using GIS-IDs.
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder

ModeBuilder has the ability to import Collection and Curve data, such as pump
curves, hydrographs, and pattern curves, among others. In the model, these data types
are always associated to either Domain elements (pumps, pipes, …) or Components
(pump definitions, patterns, …). You can just import the collection data, and Model-
Builder will create a default domain/component element if it doesn't yet exist, and if

the creation option to automatically create referenced elements is enabled. But a better
technique would be to import the domain/component element from an external table,
and then import the collection data into those created domain/component elements.
This gives you the ability to import the most amount of detail.
The external tabular data for a collection curve must have a label field, where the label
field contains string values that match the label of the associated domain/component
element. For example, if two pattern curves are defined in an external table, the table
would look something like the following:
Table 5-3: Sample Tabular Data
Label Time from Start Multiplier Order
Normal 1.2 .8 1
Normal 1.7 .7 2
Normal 12 .2 3
Normal 17 .5 4
High 5 1.0 1
High 19 .85 3
High 12 .65 2
This would assign 4 entries to the 'Normal' pattern, and 3 entries to the 'High' pattern.
The Order field is optional, and is discussed below. The same approach applies to
nodes, for such things as a variable area tank curve, or junction loads. In these cases,
the label field would contain the name of the node that collection entries are being
added into.
ModelBuilder also includes an advanced feature to allow precise ordering of the

collection records. For some collections, the order of the records does not matter and
this feature isn't needed. For other cases, order of the records is meaningful. For these
types of collections, there is a Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder mapping form. By
default, it uses the record order as the records exist in the external data source. If the
records are not ordered correctly in the data source, then the external table must have
an additional field that contains numeric values. These values will represent the order
that the records should be imported. So for the above example data, normally the
records would be imported in the order entered (5, 19, then 12 for the High pattern).
However the user can set the Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder form to use the 'Order'
external field, and this will import the records based on either Ascending 'Order'
values (5, 12, 19) or Descending 'Order' values (19, 12, 5).

Using Modelbuilder
The following topics provide examples of using ModelBuilder to import collection

data:
• “Importing Pump Definitions Using ModelBuilder” on page 5-187

• “Using ModelBuilder to Import Pump Curves” on page 5-192
• “Using ModelBuilder to Import Patterns” on page 5-196
Importing Pump Definitions Using ModelBuilder
Pump definition information can be extracted from an external data source using
ModelBuilder.
Most of this importing is accomplished by setting up mappings under the Pump Defi-
nition Table Type. However, to import multipoint head, efficiency or speed vs. effi-
ciency curves, the tabular values must be imported under Table Types: Pump
Definition - Pump Curves, Pump Definition - Flow-Efficiency Curve, and Pump
Definition - Speed-Efficiency Curve respectively.
The list of properties that can be imported under Pump Definition is given below. The
only property in the list that is required is a Key or Label. Most of the properties are
numerical values.
• BEP Efficiency
• BEP Flow
• Define BEP Max Flow?
• Design Flow
• Design Head
• GemsID (imported)
• Inertia (Pump and Motor)
• Is Variable Speed Drive?
• Max Extended Flow
• Max Operating Flow
• Max Operating Head
• Motor Efficiency
• Notes
• Pump Definition Type (ID)
• Pump Definition Type (Label)
• Pump Efficiency

• Pump Efficiency (ID)

• Pump Efficiency (Label)
• Pump Power
• Reverse Spin Allowed?
• Specific Speed
• Speed (Full)
• Shutoff Head
• User Defined BEP Max Flow
Those properties that are text such as Pump Efficiency and Pump Definition Type are
alphanumeric and must be spelled correctly. For example Standard (3 Point) must be
spelled exactly as shown in the Pump Definition drop down. Properties with a ques-
tion mark above, require a TRUE or FALSE value. Those with ID next to the name
are internal IDs and are usually only useful when syncing out from a model.
To import data, create a table in a data source (e.g. spreadsheet, data base), and then
create columns/fields for each of the properties to be imported. In Excel for example,
the columns are created by entering column headings in the first row of a sheet for
each of the properties. Starting with the second row in the table, there will be one row
for each pump definition to be imported.
Once the table is created in the source file, the file must be saved before it can be
imported.
In the Specify your data source step in the wizard, the user indicates the source file
name and the sheet or table corresponding to the pump definition data. In the Specify
field mappings for each table step, the user selects Pump Definition as the table
type, indicates the name of the pump definition in the Key>Label field and then maps
each of the fields to be imported with the appropriate property in the Attribute drop
down.
When syncing out from the model to a data table, the table must contain column head-
ings for each of the properties to be exported. The names of the columns in the source
table do not need to be identical to the property names in the model.

Using Modelbuilder
Importing can best be illustrated with an example. Given the data and graphs for three
pump definitions shown in the graph below, the table below the graph shows the
format for the pump curve definition import assuming that a standard 3 point curve is
to be used for the head curve and a best efficiency curve is to be used for the efficiency
curve. All three pumps are rated at 120 ft of TDH at 200 gpm.
Table 5-4: Format of Pump Definition Import Data
Q, gpm H (red) H (green) H (blue)
0 180 200 160
200 120 120 120
400 40 0 20
BEPe 70 69 65
All three pumps have 95% motor efficiency and a BEP flow of 200.
The data source is created in an Excel spreadsheet.

Table 5-5: Excel Data Source Format
Label Type Motor Desig Desig Shutof Max Q H@ BEP BEP Eff Variab
Eff nQ nH f Head Max Q Eff Q Type le
Speed
Red Stand 95 200 120 180 400 40 70 200 Best FALS

ard (3 Efficie E
Point) ncy
Point
Green Stand 95 200 120 200 400 0 69 200 Best FALS

ard (3 Efficie E
Point) ncy
Point
Blue Stand 95 200 120 160 400 20 65 200 Best FALS

ard (3 Efficie E
Point) ncy
Point
The data source step in ModelBuilder wizard looks like this:

Using Modelbuilder
The field mappings should look like the screen below:

After the import, the three pumps are listed in the Pump Definitions. The curve for the
"Red" pump is shown below:
Using ModelBuilder to Import Pump Curves
While most pump definition information can be imported using the Pump Definition
Table Type, tabular data including
1. Multipoint pump-head curves,

2. Multipoint pump-efficiency curves and
3. Multipoint speed-efficiency curves
must be imported in their own table types.
To import these curves, first set up the pump definition type either manually in the
Pump Definition dialog or by importing the pump definition through ModelBuilder.
The Pump definition type would be Multiple Point, the efficiency type would be
Multiple Efficiency Points or the Is variable speed drive? box would be checked.

Using Modelbuilder
In the field mapping step of the ModelBuilder wizard, the user the Table Type, Pump
Definition - Pump Curve and would use the mappings shown below:
The example below shows an example of importing a Pump Head Curve. The process
and format are analogous for flow-efficiency and speed-efficiency curves.

For the pump curves shown in the figure below, the data table needed is given. Several
pump definitions can be included in the single table as long as they have different
labels.
Table 5-6: Pump Curve Import Data Format
Label Flow (gpm) Head (ft)
M5 0 350
M5 5000 348
M5 10000 344
M5 15000 323
M5 20000 288
M5 25000 250
M5 30000 200
H2 0 312

Using Modelbuilder
Table 5-6: Pump Curve Import Data Format
H2 2000 304
H2 4000 294
H2 6000 280
H2 8000 262
H2 10000 241
H2 12000 211
H2 14000 172
Small 0 293
Small 1000 291
Small 2000 288
Small 3000 276
Small 4000 259
Small 5000 235
Small 6000 206

Upon running ModelBuilder to import the table above, three pump definitions would
be created. The one called "Small" is shown below.
Using ModelBuilder to Import Patterns
Patterns can be imported into the model from external tables using ModelBuilder. This
is a two step process.
1. Description of the pattern

2. Import tabular data
In general, the steps of the import are the same as described in the ModelBuilder docu-
mentation. The only steps unique to patterns are described below. All the fields except
the Key/Label fields are optional
The source data files can be any type of tabular data including spreadsheets and data
base tables.
Alphanumeric fields such as those which describe the month or day of the week must
be spelled exactly as used in the model (e.g. January not Jan, Saturday not Sat).
The list of model attributes which can be imported are given below.
• Label
• MONTH [January, February,…]
• DAY [Sunday, Monday,…]

Using Modelbuilder
• Pattern category type (Label) [Hydraulic, Reservoir…]

• Pattern format (Label) [Stepwise , Continuous]
• Start Time
• Starting Gate Opening
• Starting Multiplier
• Starting Relative Closure
The month and day are the actual month or day of week, not the word "MONTH".
Labels must be spelled correctly.
To import patterns, start ModelBuilder, create a new set of instructions, pick the file
type, browse to the data file and pick the tables in that file to be imported. Checking
the Show Preview button enables you to view the data before importing.

Then proceed to the Field Mapping step of ModelBuilder to set up the mappings for
the Pattern in the Pattern Table Type. Fields refers to the name in the source table,
Attributes refers to the name in the model.

Using Modelbuilder
And the actual Pattern Curve in the Pattern Curve table type.
The tables below show the pattern definition data and the pattern curve for two step-
wise curves labeled Commercial and Residential. These data must be stored in two
different tables although they may be and ideally should be in the same file.)
Table 5-7: Pattern Definition Import Data Format
Label Category Format StartTime StartMult
Residential Hydraulic Stepwise 12:00 PM 0.7
Commercial Hydraulic Stepwise 12:00 PM 0.8

Table 5-8: Pattern Curve Import Data Format
PatternLabel TimeFromStart Multiplier
Residential 3 0.65
Residential 6 0.8
Residential 9 1.3
Residential 12 1.6
Residential 15 1.4
Residential 18 1.2
Residential 21 0.9
Residential 24 0.7
Commercial 3 0.8
Commercial 6 0.85
Commercial 9 1.4
Commercial 12 1.6
Commercial 15 1.3
Commercial 18 0.9
Commercial 21 0.8
Commercial 24 0.8

Using Modelbuilder
One of the resulting patterns from this import is shown below:


Chapter
Creating Your Model 6

Click one of the following links to learn how to create your model using Bentley
SewerCAD V8i’ layout and editing tools:
• “Elements and Element Attributes” on page 6-203

• “Adding Elements to Your Model” on page 6-233
• “Connecting Elements” on page 6-235
• “Manipulating Elements” on page 6-235
• “Editing Element Attributes” on page 6-239
• “Changing the Drawing View” on page 6-264
• “Using Selection Sets” on page 6-267
• “Network Navigator” on page 6-276
• ”Using Prototypes’
• “Engineering Libraries” on page 6-281
• “Adding Hyperlinks to Elements” on page 6-291
• “Using Queries” on page 6-294
• “User Data Extensions” on page 6-321
Elements and Element Attributes

You use the Layout toolbar to add elements to your model and edit the attributes of
elements using the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i’s stand-alone editor.
To learn about the different elements available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i, click one
of the following links:
• “Link Elements” on page 6-204

• “Manholes” on page 6-214

• “Transitions” on page 6-217

• “Pumps” on page 6-221
• “Outfalls” on page 6-218
• “Pressure Junctions” on page 6-220
• “Variable Speed Pump Batteries” on page 6-230
• “Air Valves” on page 6-231
• “Other Tools” on page 6-232
Link Elements
Layout tool
Link elements connect the other elements to form the sewer network. The link
elements are the conveyance elements that carry flow through the network to its even-
tual discharge point at an outfall. You can add any of the following link elements to
your model, depending on the link element’s location within the network:
• Pressure pipes
• Conduits
When you click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar, you select the type of link
element to add (pressure pipe or conduit), then select an element. You can place
multiple elements with different kinds of connections using the Layout tool.
Entering Additional Data to Link Elements

There are several dialog boxes that are available from the Property Editors that let you
enter additional data for link elements.
• “Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe” on page 6-204

• “Defining the Geometry of a Link Element” on page 6-206
• “Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element” on page 6-208
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe
Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with
them. SewerCAD V8i provides an easy-to-use table for editing these minor loss
collections in the Minor Loss Collection dialog box.

Creating Your Model
Note: For more information on minor losses, see “Minor Losses” on

page 13-714.
To add a minor loss collection to a pressure pipe:
1. Click a pressure pipe in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
pressure pipe and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical: Minor Losses section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses
(...) button next to the Minor Loss Coefficient field.
3. In the Minor Loss Collection dialog box, each row in the table represents a single
minor loss type and its associated headloss coefficient. For each row in the table,
perform the following steps:
a. Type the number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the
composite minor loss for the pipe in the Quantity column, then press the Tab
key to move to the Minor Loss column.
b. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Minor Loss column to display the Minor
Loss Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
c. Click the plus signs to expand the Minor Loss Libraries, then select the
desired minor loss type and click the Select button. The minor loss type and
its associated headloss coefficient appears in the table in the Minor Loss
Collection dialog box. Note that the Headloss Coefficient column in the table
is not editable.
Note: You can edit the values of a minor loss type in the Engineering
Libraries in the Editor pane.
4. When you are finished adding minor losses to the table, click Close. The
composite minor loss coefficient for the minor loss collection appears in the Prop-
erty Editor.
5. Perform the following optional steps:
– To delete a row from the table, select the row label then click Delete.
– To view a report on the minor loss collection, click Report.
6. You can override the headloss coefficient for the minor loss collection by typing a
custom value in the Minor Loss Coefficient field of the Property Editor.
Minor Loss Collection Dialog Box
The Minor Loss Collection dialog box contains buttons and a minor loss table. The
dialog box contains the following controls:

New This button creates a new row in the table.

row from the table.
Report Opens a print preview window containing a

report that details the input data for this
dialog box.
The table contains the following columns:
Column Description
Quantity The number of minor losses of the same type to be

added to the composite minor loss for the pipe.
Minor Loss The type of minor loss element. Clicking the

Ellipses button next to this field displays the
Minor Loss Engineering Libraries, where you
select an existing minor loss type to be included in
your minor loss collection.
Headloss Coefficient The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss

element of the specified type.
Diversion Rating Curve Dialog Box
This dialog allows you to define the rating curve using Upstream Flow vs. Diverted
Flow points. The rating curve determines the flow into the associated conduit. At each
upstream flow point, you define how much of the flow is diverted.
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element
You define the geometry of a link element by entering the location and angle of bends
for the selected link element. You enter X vs. Y points that plot the shape of the
polyline that represents the element in the Polyline Vertices dialog box .
To define the geometry of a link element:
1. Click a link element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
link element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Geometry section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next
to the Geometry field.

Creating Your Model
3. In the Polyline Vertices dialog box, click the New button to add a new row to the
table.
4. Type values for X and Y points for each row in the table.
5. To remove rows from the table, click the Delete button.
6. Click OK.
Polyline Vertices Dialog Box
This dialog box contains the X vs. Y table that allows you to define any number of
points that plot the shape of the polyline representing the selected link element.
The dialog box contains the following controls:
New This button creates a new row in the table.

row from the table.
Irregular Channel Editor Dialog Box
The Irregular Channel editor dialog box contains buttons, a Station vs Elevation
(Relative) table, and a diagram window that plots the station-elevation curve defined
by the points in the table. The dialog box contains the following controls:
New This button creates a new row in the Station

vs Elevation (Relative) table.

row from the Station vs Elevation (Relative)
table.

dialog box.

Column Description
Station This field allows you to define the cross-sectional

distance at the current curve point. You can enter
these in any order that defines the channel (e.g.,
from left-to-right, from right-to-left, with an
upstream or downstream perspective).
Elevation (Relative) This field allows you to define the relative

elevation at the corresponding station for an
irregular channel. The elevation value is relative
to the invert of the channel (an elevation value of
1.0 ft will be 1.0 ft above the invert, an elevation
value of -1.0 ft will be 1.0 ft below the invert).
This value can be a negative number.
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element
You define the cross-sectional shapes of link elements in their respective Property
Editor as follows:
• Define the cross-sectional shape of a conduit section by entering data in the Phys-
ical section of the element’s Property Editor.
• Define the circular shape of a pressure pipe by entering data in the Physical
section of the element’s Property Editor.
You access the curve dialog boxes in the selected link element’s Property Editor.
The Is Reversed? Property

The Is Reversed? results property will be True if the start and stop nodes of the link
are not the same as the upstream and downstream nodes. When the conduit is
reversed, the stop node is the upstream and the start node is the downstream.

Creating Your Model
Split (Bifurcated) Irregular Channels

In some irregular channels, there are local high points in the cross sections such that
the flow is actually split into two parallel but unequal channels. When the flow is very
shallow, it will only occur in the channel with the lowest elevation. When the flow is
very deep, it will flow in both channels. When the flow is moderate, it is assumed that
the high point between the two channels is an island, not a levee, and flow will pass on
both sides of the island and not be blocked as it would be if the high point was a levee.

Conduit Control Structures Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define control structures that can then be assigned to one or
more conduits.
The dialog consists of a tree view pane at the top and a property editor on the bottom.
The tree view displays all of the control structure definitions associated with the
project. The property editor allows you to define the attributes of the element currently
highlighted in the tree view. Above the tree view are the following buttons:
• New: Opens a submenu containing the following commands:

– Control Structure: Creates a new Control Structure in the tree view.
– Orifice: Creates a new Orifice element under the currently highlighted
Control Structure.
– Weir: Creates a new Weir element under the currently highlighted Control
Structure.

Creating Your Model
– Depth-Flow Curve: Creates a new Depth-Flow Curve element under the

currently highlighted Control Structure.
– Functional: Creates a new Functional element under the currently high-
lighted Control Structure.
• Delete: Removes the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane
• Rename: Allows you to enter a new label for the entry that is currently high-
lighted in the list pane.
• Duplicate: Creates a copy of the entry that is currently highlighted in the list
pane.
• Expand All: Expands each of the nodes in the tree view, so that all entries
are displayed.
• Collapse All: Collapses each of the nodes so that only the top-level nodes
are visible.
• Report: Generates a preformatted report that details the data associated with
the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
• Help: Opens the online help associated with this dialog.
The attributes displayed in the property editor section below the tree view will change
depending on the type of node that is currently highlighted in the tree view. Depending
on the node type, the property grid allows you to define the following attributes:
• Control Structure Node (Top Level Node): When a top level node is highlighted
in the tree view, the following properties are available:
– ID: Unique identifier assigned to this element.
– Label: Descriptive label for this element.
– Notes: Additional information about this element.
• Orifice Attributes: When an Orifice is selected in the tree view the following
attributes are available:
– Control Structure: Allows you to select the control structure type.
– Crest Elevation: Orifice’s crest elevation.
– Orifice Coefficient: The orifice coefficient for this structure.

– Orifice Shape: Allows you to choose between a Circular and Rectangular

orifice shape.
– Orifice Diameter: The diameter of the orifice opening. This field is available
when the Orifice Shape is set to Circular Orifice.
– Orifice Height: The height of the orifice opening. This field is available when
the Orifice Shape is set to Rectangular Orifice.
– Orifice Width: The width of the orifice opening. This field is available when
the Orifice Shape is set to Rectangular Orifice.
– Orifice Type: Allows you to select the orifice type.
• Weir Attributes: When a Weir is selected in the tree view the following attributes
are available:
– Crest Elevation: Weir’s crest elevation.
– Structure Top Elevation: The weir’s top elevation.
– Weir Coefficient: The weir coefficient.
– Weir Type: Allows you to select the weir type.
– Weir Length: The length of the weir.
– Number of Contractions: The number of contractions in the weir.
– Weir Angle: This field is available when the Weir Type is set to V-Notch
Weir.
– Weir End Coefficient: This field is available when the Weir Type is set to
Trapezoidal Weir.
– Weir Side Slope: This field is available when the Weir Type is set to Trape-
zoidal Weir.
• Depth-Flow Curve Attributes: When a Depth-Flow Curve element is selected in
the tree view the following attributes are available:
– Crest Elevation: Crest elevation of the Depth-Flow Curve element.
– Depth-Flow Curve: Opens the Depth-Flow Curve dialog, allowing you to
define the Depth-Flow curve.
• Functional Attributes: When a Functional element is selected in the tree view
the following attributes are available:
– Crest Elevation: Crest elevation of the Functional element.
– Coefficient: Enter the coefficient for the functional element.
– Exponent: Enter the exponent for the functional element.

Creating Your Model
Depth-Flow Curve Dialog Box
This dialog allows you to define a depth-flow curve to use with a conduit control
structure.
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently
highlighted row. Click the Report button to generate a preformatted report containing
all of the curve data.
Enter the Depth vs. Flow points to define the curve. Depth in this case refers to the
flow height over the control crest (weir crest or the orifice bottom).
The graph pane dynamically plots the depth-flow curve.
Side Weir
The equation used to describe a side weir is:
1.667
Q = CWy
Where:
C = Weir discharge coefficient
W = Side weir crest length
Y = Water head over the weir crest

Manholes
Manhole element
Manholes are placed in a sewer system to provide access for inspection, maintenance,
and emergency service. Manholes should be placed at sewer junctions (i.e., tees, wyes,
and crosses), upstream terminal ends of sewers, and locations where there is a change
in sewer grade or direction. Manholes are locations where loads enter the gravity
portion of the sewer system.
When you click the manhole element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a manhole element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a manhole element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Flow (Downstream Conduit)

The calculated manhole result Flow (Downstream Conduit) is obtained using the
following formula:
Flow (Total Out) - Flow (Diverted Out)
Flow Headloss Curves Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter flow vs. headloss data for a manhole or transition
element.
The dialog box contains the Flow vs. Headloss table along with the following
controls:
• New: This button creates a new Flow-Headloss Curve.

• Duplicate: Creates a copy of the currently selected Flow-Headloss Curve.
• Delete: This button deletes the currently highlighted Flow-Headloss Curve.
• Rename: This button allows you to rename the currently highlighted Flow-Head-
loss Curve.
• Report: Opens a print preview window containing a report that details the input
data for this dialog box.
• Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the
following commands:
– Browse Engineering Library—Opens the Engineering Library manager
dialog, allowing you to browse the Flow-Headloss Curve Library.

Creating Your Model
– Synchronize From Library—Lets you update a flow-headloss curve previ-

ously imported from a Flow-Headloss Curve Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
– Synchronize To Library—Lets you update an existing Flow-Headloss Curve
Library using current flow-headloss curves that were initially imported but
have since been modified.
– Import From Library—Lets you import a flow-headloss curve from an
existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
– Export To Library—Lets you export the current flow-headloss curve to an
existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
• Flow: This field allows you to define the flow at the current curve point.
• Headloss: This field allows you to define the headloss for the current curve point.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the flow-headloss curve that is
currently highlighted in the flow-headloss curve list pane. The following controls are
available:
Data Tab This tab consists of input data fields that allow you
to define the points that make up the flow-
headloss curve.
Flow Enter the flow data point.
Headloss Headloss at the associated flow data point value.
Library Tab This tab displays information about the flow-

headloss curve that is currently highlighted in the
flow-headloss curve list pane. If the curve is
derived from an engineering library, the
synchronization details can be found here. If the
curve was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the curve was not
derived from a library entry.
Notes Tab This tab contains a text field that is used to type
descriptive notes that will be associated with the
flow-headloss curve that is currently highlighted
in the flow-headloss curve list pane.

To assign a Flow-Headloss curve to a node element:
1. Double-click the node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or
right-click a node and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical (Structure Losses) section of the Property Editor, select Flow-
Headloss Curve as the Headloss Method. The Flow-Headloss Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the <Select...> list item in the Flow-Headloss Curve field.
4. In the Flow-Headloss Curves Dialog Box, all of the Flow-Headloss Curves that
have been created for the model are listed in the left pane. Create a new Curve by
clicking the New button.
5. The data for each Flow-Headloss Curve is displayed in the table on the right. Each
row in the table represents a data point on the Flow-Headloss Curve curve. Type
values for the Flow and Headloss for each row. Click the New button to add a row
or press the Tab key to advance to the next field in the table.
a. To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
b. To view a report on the curve, click Report.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your curve data in the Property Editor.
Drop Manholes
Drop manholes occur at the intersection points of pipes with large changes in eleva-
tion. More specifically, the downstream invert elevation of incoming pipes into a drop
manhole is higher than the invert elevation of the manhole. This results in a drop in
water surface elevation from upstream to downstream. By default, the start and stop
invert elevation of connecting pipes are set to be equal to the connecting node. The
main advantage in designing a sanitary system with drop manholes is to reduce the
slopes in order to minimize the scouring effect of potentially high velocities and to
reduce turbulence within the manhole itself. However, due to potential blockage prob-
lems drop manholes should be used sparingly.
The calculation of headloss within a drop manhole is challenging for methods depen-
dent on an iterative solution process. AASHTO (“Headloss - AASHTO Method” on
page 13-710) and HEC-22 (“Headloss-HEC-22 Energy Method” on page 13-705)
methods calculate headloss when the incoming and outgoing velocities balance
resulting in a headloss that is the delta between the hydraulic grade upstream and
downstream of the manhole. A drop manhole adds additional complexity in that as
upstream hydraulic grade increases, incoming pipes with varying invert elevations
contribute additional incoming velocities to consider during the iteration. Also note
that the resulting calculated headloss may result in invalid downstream control depths
for incoming pipes. In these cases, gradually varied flow analysis continues upstream
by assuming minimal applicable control depths.

Creating Your Model
Transitions
Transition element
Transition elements, also known as Junction Chambers in SewerCAD v5.6 and earlier,
are locations where upstream flows in a gravity system combine. Transition elements
are useful for intersections of open channels where no manhole is located.
No loads enter the sewer/open channel at transition elements.
Transition elements have the same head loss methods as manhole elements although
some of them are meaningless for open channel transitions.
When you click the transition element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a transition element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a transition element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
While transition elements, like manhole elements, can be used as the transition from
pressure to gravity systems, they are primarily intended as the transition between
gravity conduits for which manhole elements are not appropriate.
Wet Wells
Wet well element
Wet wells are required at a pumping station to store wastewater before it is pumped.
Wet wells represent boundary conditions between pressure and gravity portions of a
sewer network. They serve as collection points for gravity systems, and as an HGL
boundary node for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the sewer network at
these locations.
Wet wells serve as collection points in gravity systems.
When you click the wet well element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a wet well element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a wet well element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.

Percent Full
The Percent Full (Calculated) value is obtained using the following equation:
Percent Full = (Hydraulic Grade Line (Calculated) - Elevation (Minimum)) / (Eleva-

tion (Maximum) - Elevation (Minimum))
Inflow (Wet) Collection Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the local inflows for the currently highlighted wet
well. It consists of controls that allow you to add and delete inflows to the table, and to
generate a report for the inflow collection.
New Opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
• Fixed Load: Creates a new Fixed
Load. Enter the fixed load value in
the Fixed Load field that appears.
• Hydrograph Load: Creates a new
Hydrograph Load. Define the
hydrograph by entering time vs. flow
data points in the table that appears.
• Pattern Load: Creates a new pattern
load. Enter the base flow and choose
the pattern that modifies the base
flow value. Click the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Pattern manager to
create a new pattern.
Delete Deletes the entry that is currently

highlighted in the Inflow Collection list.
Report Lets you generate a preformatted report

that contains the input data associated
with the inflow collection.
Outfalls
Outfall element

Creating Your Model
Outfalls represent the ultimate termination points in a sanitary sewer network.
When you click the outfall element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes
into a outfall element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active
causes a outfall element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Adding Elevation vs. Flow Data to an Outfall

You can add an Elevation-Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall in SewerCAD V8i.
To add an Elevation vs. Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall:
1. Click an outfall in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an

outfall and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Boundary Condition section of the Property Editor, select Elevation-Flow
Curve in the Boundary Condition Type field. The Elevation-Flow Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Elevation-Flow Curve field.
4. In the Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a point
on the Elevation-Flow curve. Type values for Elevation and outfall Flow for each
row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to advance to the
next field in the table.
– To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
– To view a report on the curve, click Report.
– To view a plot of the curve, click Graph.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your curve data in the Property Editor.
Elevation-Flow Curve Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the elevation vs. flow table and the following buttons:

New This button creates a new row in the E-

Q-TW curve table.
Delete This button deletes the currently

highlighted row from the E-Q-TW curve
table.
Report This button opens a print preview

window containing a report that details
the input data for this dialog box.
Graph This button opens a graph window

plotting the elevation-volume curve
defined by the points in the table.
Column Description
outfall Elevation This field allows you to define the elevation of the
E-Q-TW curve point.
outfall Flow This field allows you to define the flow for the E-
Q-TW curve point.
Pressure Junctions
Pressure junction element
Pressure junctions are connections between two or more pressure pipes of varying
characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure portion of a network through a pressure
junction.
When you click the pressure junction on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a pressure junction element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while
this tool is active causes a pressure junction element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.

Creating Your Model
Pumps
Pump element
In a wastewater collection system, pumps are placed where the hydraulic grade line
must be raised. Since sewage primarily flows by gravity, a pump transports sewage
from a low elevation to a higher elevation. The sewage then flows again by gravity to
the next pumping station or until it reaches its destination.
This dialog box allows you to create pump curve definitions. There are two sections:
the Pump Curve Definition Pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The Pump
Curve Definition Pane lets you create, edit, and delete pump curve definitions.
Defining Pump Settings

You define the settings for each pump in your model in the Pump Definitions dialog
box. You can define a collection of pump settings for each pump.
To define pump settings
1. Click a pump in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a pump
and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next to
the Pump Definitions field. The Pump Definitions dialog box opens.
3. In the Pump Definitions dialog box, each item in the list represents a separate
pump definition. Click the New button to add a new definition to the list.
4. For each definition in the list, perform these steps:
a. Type a unique label for the pump definition.
b. Define a new pump definition by entering Head, Efficiency, and Motor data.
5. Click OK to close the Pump Definitions dialog box and save your data in the
Property Editor.
Pump Definitions Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to create pump definitions. There are two sections: the pump
definition pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The pump definition pane is
used to create, edit, and delete pump definitions.

The following controls are available in the pump definitions dialog box:
New Creates a new entry in the pump definition

Pane.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the currently highlighted

pump definition.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted entry in the

pump definition Pane.
Rename Renames the currently highlighted entry in

the pump definition Pane.
Report Generates a pre-formatted report that contains

the input data associated with the currently
highlighted entry in the pump definition Pane.
Synchronization Clicking this button opens a submenu

Options containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—Opens
the Engineering Library manager dialog,
allowing you to browse the Pump Defini-
tion Libraries.
• Synchronize From Library—Updates a
set of pump definition entries previously
imported from a Pump Definition Engi-
neering Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the
library since it was imported.
• Synchronize To Library—Updates an
existing Pump Definition Engineering
Library using current pump definition
entries that were initially imported but
• Import From Library—Imports pump
definition entries from an existing Pump
Definition Engineering Library.
• Export To Library—Exports the current
pump definition entries to an existing
Pump Definition Engineering Library.
The tab section includes the following controls:

Creating Your Model
Head Tab This tab consists of input data fields that allow you to
define the pump head curve. The specific fields vary
depending on which type of pump is selected in the
Pump Definition type field.
Pump Definition A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes
Type through it. This software can currently be used to model eight
different pump types:
• Constant Power—When selecting a Constant Power
pump, the following attribute must be defined:
• Pump Power—Represents the water horsepower,
or horsepower that is actually transferred from the
pump to the water. Depending on the pump's effi-
ciency, the actual power consumed (brake horse-
power) may vary.
• Design Point (One-Point)—When selecting a Design
Point pump, the following flow vs. head points must be
defined:
• Shutoff—Point at which the pump will have zero
discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on
a pump curve. This value is automatically calcu-
lated for Design Point pumps.
• Design—Point at which the pump was originally
intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency
point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or
below this point, the pump is not operating under
optimum conditions.
• Max Operating—Highest discharge for which the
pump is actually intended to run. At discharges
above this point, the pump may behave unpredict-
ably, or its performance may decline rapidly. This
value is automatically calculated for Design Point
pumps.
• Standard (Three-Point)—When selecting a Standard
Three-Point pump, the following flow vs. head points
must be defined:
a pump curve.
optimum conditions.
ably, or its performance may decline rapidly.

Pump Definition • Standard Extended—When selecting a Standard

Extended pump, the following flow vs. head points must
Type (cont’d)
be defined:
a pump curve.
optimum conditions.
• Max Extended—Absolute maximum discharge at
which the pump can operate, adding zero head to
the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.
This value is automatically calculated for Standard
Extended pumps.
• Custom Extended—When selecting a Custom
Extended pump, the following attributes must be
defined:
a pump curve.
optimum conditions.
• Max Extended—Absolute maximum discharge at
which the pump can operate, adding zero head to
the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.
• Multiple Point—When selecting a Multiple Point pump,
an unlimited number of Flow vs. Head points may be
defined.
• Volume vs Flow—When selecting a Volume vs Flow
pump, an unlimited number of Volume vs. Flow points
may be defined.
• Depth vs Flow—When selecting a Depth vs Flow
pump, an unlimited number of Depth vs. Flow points
may be defined.

Creating Your Model
Efficiency Tab This tab allows you to specify efficiency settings for
the pump that is being edited.
Pump Efficiency Allows you to specify the pump efficiency type for the
pump that is being edited. The following efficiency
types are available:
• Constant Efficiency—This efficiency type main-
tains the efficiency determined by the input value
regardless of changes in discharge. When the
Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input field
is as follows:
• Pump Efficiency—The Pump Efficiency
value is representative of the ability of the
pump to transfer the mechanical energy
generated by the motor to Water Power.
• Best Efficiency Point—This efficiency type
generates a parabolic efficiency curve using the
input value as the best efficiency point. When the
Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input
fields are as follows:
• BEP Flow—The flow delivered when the
pump is operating at its Best Efficiency point.
• BEP Efficiency—The efficiency of the pump
when it is operating at its Best Efficiency
Point.
• Define BEP Max Flow—When this box is
checked the User Defined BEP Max Flow field
is enabled, allowing you to enter a maximum
flow for the Best Efficiency Point.
• User Defined BEP Max Flow—Allows you to
enter a maximum flow value for the Best Effi-
ciency Point.
• Multiple Efficiency Points—This efficiency type
generates an efficiency curve based upon two or
more user-defined efficiency points. These points
are linearly interpolated to form the curve. When
the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the
input field is as follows:
• Efficiency Points Table—This table allows
you to enter the pump's efficiency at various
discharge rates.

Motor Tab This tab allows you to define the pump's motor
efficiency settings. It contains the following controls:
Motor The Motor Efficiency value is representative of the

Efficiency ability of the motor to transform electrical energy to
rotary mechanical energy.
Is Variable This check box allows you to specify whether or not

Speed Drive? the pump is a Variable Speed Pump. Toggling this
check box On allows you to input points on the
Efficiency Points table.
Efficiency This table allows you to enter speed/efficiency points

Points Table for variable speed pumps. This table is activated by
toggling the "Variable Speed Drive" check box On.
Library Tab This tab displays information about the pump that is
currently highlighted in the Pump Curves Definition
Pane. If the pump is derived from an engineering
library, the synchronization details can be found here.
If the pump was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the pump was not
derived from a library entry.
descriptive notes that will be associated with the pump
that is currently highlighted in the Pump Curves
Definition Pane.
To create a pump definition
1. Select Components > Pump Definitions.

2. Click New to create a new pump definition.
3. For each pump definition, perform these steps:
a. Select the type of pump definition in the Pump Definition Type menu.
b. Type values for Pump Power, Shutoff, Design point, Max Operating, and/or
Max Extended as required. The available table columns or fields change
depending on which definition type you choose.

Creating Your Model
c. For Multiple Point pumps, click the New button above the curve table to add a
new row to the table, or press the Tab key to move to the next column in the
table. Click the Delete button above the curve table to delete the currently
highlighted row from the table.
d. Define efficiency and motor settings in the Efficiency and Motor tabs.
4. You can save your new pump definition in SewerCAD V8i’ Engineering Libraries
for future use. To do this, perform these steps:
a. Click the Synchronization Options button, then select Export to Library.

The Engineering Libraries dialog box opens.
b. Use the plus and minus signs to expand and collapse the list of available
libraries, then select the library into which you want to export your new unit
sanitary load.
c. Click Close to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box.

– To delete a pump definition, select the curve label then click Delete.
– To rename a pump definition, select the label of the pump definition you want
to rename, click Rename, then type the new name.
– To view a report on a pump definition, select the label for the pump definition,
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Submersible Pumps
Wastewater collection systems frequently use submersible pumps. The pressure solver
in SewerCAD V8i needs a suction pipe (pressure pipe) connecting the pump to a
suction node (a wet well for submersible pumps). To simulate a submersible pump in
SewerCAD V8i, you should connect the wet well to the pump with a short piece of
pressure pipe (about 1 ft) to move the water into the pump with negligible head loss.
The Elevation (Invert) for the submersible pump should be the low point of the pump
inlet.
Pump Elements - Moving between multiple engines

The Bentley gravity flow products SewerCAD, SewerGEMS and CivilStorm use
several different solvers (numerical engines). While many of the elements behave the
same in these solvers, pump elements have very different behaviors depending on
which solver (and in one case, which version of the solver) is being used.

The four different solvers and the applications in which they are included are listed
below:
1. Pressure solver (SewerCAD, SewerGEMS Sanitary, WaterCAD/GEMS)

2. Implicit solver prior to SELECTSeries2 (SS2) (SewerGEMS, CivilStorm prior to
SS2 - mid-2010)
3. Implicit solver SS2 and later (SewerGEMS, CivilStorm SS2 and after min-2010)
4. SWMM explicit solver (SewerGEMS, CivilStorm)
Each of these solvers has a unique way of handling pumps. The behaviors are summa-
rized below. When a user attempts to import a model created in one product into
another, it is important that the user understand the differences in the engines and
avoids situations where importing could be problematic.
There are four pump types that can be handled in SewerGEMS whether using the
implicit or explicit solver. Those types are
• Type 1 - Off line volume flow curve

• Type 2 - In line depth flow curve
• Type 3 - In line head flow curve
• Type 4 - In line variable speed pump
See SewerGEMS help topic ”Pump Definitions Dialog Box’ for details.
The pressure solver in SewerCAD and WaterGEMS/CAD handle several different

types of pump definitions:
Multi point
Standard (3 point)
Design (1 point)
Standard extended
Custom extended
Constant power (recommend not using)
See SewerCAD help topic ”Pump Definitions Dialog Box’ for details
Between the different engines it is clear that there are numerous ways of describing
pump behavior to the hydraulic solvers. The only methods that are common to the
SewerGEMS and SewerCAD solvers are the "In line head flow curve" which is equiv-
alent to the "Multi point" curve.

Creating Your Model
The behavior of each hydraulic solver are described below:
1. Pressure solver. The pressure solver used in SewerCAD and SewerGEMS Sani-
tary is the true pressure pipe network solver as found in water distribution models
such as WaterCAD/GEMS. Each pump is modeled as an individual element and
must have a suction and discharge pipe. Pump definitions must be real pump head
characteristic curves with head given as a function of flow.
There are numerous ways to define pump curves such as one-point, three point,
multi-point, constant power, standard extended and custom extended. If the user
intends to export the model to SewerGEMS, it is best to use the multi-point curve
since this is similar to the in-line pump definition in SewerGEMS.
In the pressure solver, it is possible to establish complex controls and time based
controls. At present, SewerGEMS only handles simple elevation based controls.
Therefore those are the only controls that can be imported into SewerGEMS.
The pressure solver can handle flow and head based variable speed pumps. The
implicit and SWMM solvers cannot model this exact behavior. These solvers must
use the Type 4- In line variable speed pump which must be entered manually once
the model has been imported into SewerGEMS.
2. Implicit solver prior to version SELECTseries 2. Prior to SELECTseries 2, a
pump element could represent a single pump or multiple pumps. Only one pump
symbol was displayed regardless of the number of pumps that the element repre-
sented. The user was presented with a Pump dialog in which he could identify the
pump definition, the initial status and the pump on and off level based on suction
element hydraulic grade.
All four types of SewerGEMS pumps described above could be assigned to a
pump.
Pumps are assigned a suction element and no head loss is assumed to occur
between the suction element and the pump. It is not possible to specify a suction
pipe. Essentially, this amounts to an assumption that pumps are submersible.
3. Implicit solver SELECT series 2 and later. With SELECTseries 2, each pump
element in the model corresponds to a single pump. However, pumps can be
assigned to a "pump station" and the user can open a pump station dialog that is
similar to the Pumps dialog in the earlier versions.
This type of pump always has a suction side link. If it is imported from an earlier
version, that link is a "virtual link", which has no head loss. For submersible
pumps, it is best to use a virtual link on the suction side of the pump.
In the pump station dialog, the elevations for the pump switches refers to the
water elevation in the node element immediately upstream from the pump.
Usually this will be a wet well.

All four types of pumps described above could be assigned to a pump. If a user is
planning to also use this model with the pressure solver in SewerCAD, it is best to
use the In-line flow head (Type 3) pump because this type can be automatically
converted into a SewerCAD multipoint curve.
4. SWMM Explicit Solver. The SWMM explicit solver recognizes the 4 types of
pumps listed above. With SWMM, prior to SS2, a pump element could represent
multiple pumps but with SS2, each pump element corresponds to one and only
one pump. SWMM treats each pump as a line not a point feature. Within Sewer-
GEMS, the pump is converted into two hidden node elements which capture
suction and discharge properties of the pump and a line feature which changes the
head across it, and these three elements are fed to the SWMM solver. Once the run
has completed, the properties of these three elements are combined back into the
single pump element. The control element for the pump is always the manhole or
wet well immediately upstream of the pump.
Variable Speed Pump Batteries
Variable Speed Pump Battery element
A Variable Speed Pump Battery element represents multiple variable speed pumps
that meet the following criteria:
1. the VSPs are parallel with each other (not in-line)

2. the VSPs are sharing common upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) nodes
3. the VSPs are identical (have the same pump definition)
4. the VSPs are controlled by the same target node and the same target head.
Parallel variable speed pumps (VSPs) are operated as one group and led by a single
VSP, the so-called lead VSP, while the other VSPs at the same battery are referred as
to as lag VSPs. A lag VSP turns on and operates at the same speed as the lead VSP
when the lead VSP is not able to meet the target head and turns off when the lead VSP
is able to deliver the target head. If the variable speed pumps in the battery are not
identical or do not maintain the same speeds as they ramp up and down, it may be
better to model them as a individual variable speed pumps with control statements.
From the standpoint of input data, Variable Speed Pump Batteries are treated exactly
the same as single pump elements that are defined as variable speed pumps of the
Fixed Head Type with one exception: the number of Lag Pumps (maximum that can
run in parallel) must be defined in the Lag Pump Count field.

Creating Your Model
VSP Batteries cannot be assigned a pattern, be included in a condition in a control

statement, or be included in an action in a simple control statement. If the controlling
node is not a storage node, the user can specify the target hydraulic grade. If the
controlling node is a storage node the target hydraulic grade is the initial hydraulic
grade. Furthermore, control nodes on the suction side may only be storage nodes
which means that if the control node is on the suction side it must be wet-well and the
Control Node on Suction Side? field for the VSP Battery must be set to true.
Air Valves
Air Valve element
Air valves are installed at local high points to allow air to come into the system during
periods when the head drops below the pipe elevation and expels air from the system
when fluid columns begin to rejoin. The presence of air in the line limits subatmo-
spheric pressures in the vicinity of the valve and for some distance to either side, as
seen in profiles. Air can also reduce high transient pressures if it is compressed
enough to slow the fluid columns prior to impact.
There are essentially two ways in which an active air valve can behave:
1. Pressure below atmospheric - air valve is open and acts to maintain pressure to 0
on the upstream end and maintains the same flow on the upstream and down-
stream side.
2. Pressure above atmospheric - air valve is closed and acts as any junction node.
When the air valve is open, the hydraulic grade on the downstream side may be less
than the pipe elevation. This can be displayed as the hydraulic grade line drawn below
the pipe. This should be interpreted as a pressure pipe that is not flowing full. Full
flow resumes at the point where the hydraulic grade line crosses back above the pipe.
Because air valves have the possibility to switch status, they can lead to instability in
the model especially if there are many air valves in the system. To improve the
stability of the model, it is desirable to force some of the valves closed. This can be
done by setting the property "Treat air valve as junction" to True for those valves that
are expected to be closed anyway.
If all of the pumps upstream of an air valve are off, the pressure subnetwork is discon-
nected in that area and the model will issue warning messages for all nodes in that
vicinity indicating that they are disconnected.

In addition, the profile between the air valve and the pumps that are Off will be inac-
curate. To make the profile view accurate, you can place an imaginary wet well on a
short branch with a tiny diameter pipe at an Elevation (Initial) equal to the air valve
elevation. This tank (which will not contribute significant flow) can eliminate the
disconnected system message and correctly represent the fluid in the upstream pipe
when the pump is off
Other Tools
Although Bentley SewerCAD V8i is primarily a modeling application, some addi-

tional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annota-
tion. Microstation and AutoCAD, of course, provide a tremendous number of drafting
tools. Bentley SewerCAD V8i provides the following tools:
• Border tool
• Text tool
• Line tool
Border Tool
Border tool
The Border tool lets you add rectangles to the drawing pane.
Text Tool
Text tool
The Text tool lets you add text to the drawing pane.
Line Tool

Creating Your Model
Line tool
The Line tool lets you add lines and polylines (multisegmented lines) to the drawing
pane.
Adding Elements to Your Model

Bentley SewerCAD V8i provides several ways to add elements to your model. They
include:
• Adding individual elements

• Adding elements using the layout tool
• Replacing an element with another element
To add individual elements to your model:
1. Click an element symbol on the Layout toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to the
element symbol you selected.
2. Click in the drawing pane to add the element to your model.
3. Click again to add another element of the same type to your model.
4. To add a different element, click on the desired element symbol in the Layout
toolbar, then click in the drawing pane.
5. To stop adding an element, right-click in the drawing pane to display a shortcut
menu, then click Done.
To add elements using the layout tool:
The layout tool lets you quickly add new elements to your model without having to
select a new element button on the Layout toolbar. When the layout tool is active, you
can right-click in the drawing pane to select different elements and pipes to add to the
model.

Adding Elements to Your Model
Layout Tool
1. Click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
2. Click the type of pipe you want to use to connect your elements in the model.
3. Right-click in the drawing pane, then select the type of element you want to add
from the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu displays only those element types that
are compatible with your pipe selection.
4. Click in the drawing pane to add the element.
5. Click again to add another of the same element type. The elements you add will
automatically be connected by the type of pipe you selected earlier.
6. To change the type of pipe, right-click and select a different type from the shortcut
menu.
7. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut
menu.
8. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the
drawing pane and click Done.
Note: In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the
submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Modeling Curved Pipes
You can model curved pipes in SewerCAD V8i by using the Bend command, which is
available by right-clicking in the Drawing Pane when placing a link element.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i does not account for any additional head loss due to the
curvature because in most cases the increased head loss is negligible. If you feel the
extra head loss is significant, it is possible to increase the Manning's n value to
account for such losses.
To model a curved pipe:
1. Select the desired link element using the Layout button on the Layout
toolbar.
2. Place the first segment of the curved pipe in your model, then right click and
select Bend from the shortcut menu.

Creating Your Model
3. Repeat Step 2 for each segment in the curved pipe. Be sure to insert bends to
clearly show the curved alignment.
4. When the curved pipe is complete, right click and select the next downstream
element (for a conduit, this is usually a manhole).
Connecting Elements
When building your model, you must consider these rules of connectivity:
“What Is A Virtual Conduit?” on page 6-235
What Is A Virtual Conduit?
Virtual links have slightly different uses in other Bentley products (SewerGEMs and
CivilStorm), virtual links in StormCAD and SewerCAD V8i are solely used as the
shape of the conduits which are set up as diversion links. This behavior is meant to
maintain fidelity with older versions of SewerCAD v5.6 which directly transfers
diverted flow to the diversion target without worrying about any type of Gradually
Varied Flow or Capacity analysis. The older versions established diversions at the
nodes, SewerCAD V8i (and StormCAD) allows the user to more accurately depict the
diversions as a conduit. The profiles in the virtual links are established by the
hydraulic grade at the bounding node.
If importing a SewerGEMs model containing conduits of virtual shape, you will either
have to remove the conduit, change its shape to something else, or establish a diver-
sion on it in order for the model to calculate.
Manipulating Elements
You can manipulate elements in your model in any one of the following ways:
• Select elements—manually select individual elements, manually select multiple

elements, select all elements, or select all elements of a single element type
• Move elements
• Delete elements
• Split pipes

To manually select an element:
Click the element. Selected elements appear in red.
Note: You can change the selection color in the Options dialog box,
which is accessible by selecting Tools > Options.
To manually select multiple elements:
Click the first element, then click additional elements while holding down Shift or
Ctrl.
To select all elements:
To select all of the elements in your model, select Edit > Select All.
To select all elements of the same type:
To select all elements of the same type (for example, all transitions), select Edit >
Select by Element, then click the desired element type.
All elements of the selected type appear in red, including connecting pipes.
To clear selected elements:
Click the Select tool then click any blank space in the drawing pane.
or
Click Edit > Clear Selection.
or
Press the Esc key.
You can also clear a selected element by clicking a different element.
To move an element in the model:
1. Click the Select tool on the Layout toolbar.

2. Select the element(s) you want to move, then drag it to its new location. Pipe
connections move with the element.

Creating Your Model
To delete an element:
Select the element, then press Delete.
or
Select Edit > Delete.
Splitting Pipes
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new element in the middle
of an existing pipe. For example, you may want to insert a new manhole to maintain
maximum access hole spacing.
To split an existing pipe:
1. Select the desired element symbol on the Layout toolbar.

2. In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe you want to split and click.
3. You are prompted to confirm that you want to split the pipe.
– If you choose to split the pipe, the element will be inserted and two new pipes
will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are
split proportionally).
– If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of
the pipe without connecting to anything.
If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo.
You can also split an existing pipe with an existing element:
To do this in the Stand-Alone version, drag the element into position along the pipe to
be split, then right-click the node and select Split <Pipe Label> from the shortcut
menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be split).
To do this in the Microstation version, drag the element into position along the pipe to
be split. Hold down the Shift key, then right-click the node and select Split <Pipe
Label> from the shortcut menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be
split).

Disconnecting and Reconnecting Pipes
In certain circumstances, you may wish to disconnect a pipe from a node without
deleting and redrawing the pipe in question. For example, if the model was built from
a database and the Establish By Spatial Data option was used to determine pipe
connectivity, a pipe may have been connected to the wrong node.
To disconnect and reconnect a pipe:
1. Right-click the pipe to be disconnected close to the end of the pipe nearest the end
you want to disconnect.
2. Pick Reconnect from the menu.
3. One end of the pipe is now connected to the node it will remain connected to and
the other end is connected to your mouse cursor. Hover the mouse cursor over the
node to which you would like to connect the pipe and click the left mouse button.
The pipe will now be connected to this node.
You must reconnect a pipe to an existing node. The Reconnect command will not split
a pipe or create a new node in an open area. If you want to reconnect along an existing
pipe, you must first split the pipe with a new node.
Merge Nodes in Close Proximity
This dialog allows you to merge together nodes that fall within a specified tolerance of
one another.
To access the dialog, right-click one of the nodes to be merged and select the Merge
nodes in close proximity command.

Creating Your Model
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Node to keep: Displays the node that will be retained after the merge operation.
Tolerance: Allows you to define the tolerance for the merge operation. Nodes that fall
within this distance from the “Node to keep” will be available in the “Nodes to merge”
pane.
Refresh: Refreshes the nodes displayed in the “Nodes to merge” pane. Click this
button after making a change to the tolerance value to update the list of nodes avail-
able for the merge operation.
Select nodes to merge: Toggle this button on to select the nodes that are selected in
the “Nodes to merge” pane in the drawing pane.
Nodes to merge: This pane lists the nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of
the “Node to keep”. Nodes whose associated boxes are checked will be merged with
the Node to keep when the Merge operation is initiated.
Merge: Performs the merge operation using the nodes whose boxes are checked in the
“Nodes to merge” list.
Close: Closes the dialog without performing the merge operation.
Editing Element Attributes

You edit element properties in the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in
Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
To edit element properties:
Double-click the element in the drawing pane. The Property Editor displays the
attributes of the selected element.
or
Select the element whose properties you want to edit, then select View > Properties
or click the Properties button on the Analysis toolbar.

Property Editor
The Property Editor is a contextual dialog box that changes depending on the status of
other dialog boxes. For example, when a network element is highlighted in the
drawing pane, the Property Editor displays the attributes and values associated with
that element. When one of the manager dialog boxes is active, the Property Editor
displays the properties pertaining to the currently highlighted manager element.
Attributes displayed in the Property Editor are grouped into categories. An expanded
category can be collapsed by clicking the plus (+) button next to the category heading.
A collapsed category can be expanded by clicking the minus (-) button next to the
category heading.
For the most efficient data entry in Text Box style fields, instead of clicking on the
Field, click on the label to the left of the field you want to edit, and start typing. Press
Enter to commit the value, then use the Up/Down keyboard arrows to navigate to the
next field you want to edit. You can then edit the field data without clicking the label
first; when you are finished editing the field data, press the Enter key, and proceed to
the next field using the arrow keys, and so on.
Find Element
The top section of the Property Editor contains the Find Element tool. The Find
Element tool lets you:
• Quickly find a recently-created or added element in your model. The Element

menu contains a list of the most recently-created and added elements. Click an
element in the Element menu to center the drawing pane around that element and
highlight it.
• Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the Element
menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane centers
around the highlighted element.
• Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card char-
acter. For example, if you want to find all of the conduits in your model, you type
co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane
centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and
lists all conduits in your model in the Element menu. Once the Element menu is
populated with a list of elements, you can use the Find Next and Find Previous
buttons to quickly navigate to the next or previous element in the list.
Note: See the ”Using the Like Operator’ topic for more information about
wildcard symbols.

Creating Your Model
The following controls are included:
Element Type an element label or ID in this field then

click the Find button to quickly locate it in
your model. The element selected in this menu
will be centered in the drawing pane when the
Zoom To command is initiated, at the
magnification level specified by the Zoom
Level menu. The drop-down menu lists
recently-created or added elements, elements
that are part of a selection set, and that are part
of the results from a recent Find operation.
Find Previous This button allows you to find the previous

element in the list of results from a recent Find
operation.
Find Zooms the drawing pane view to the element

typed or selected in the Element menu at the
magnification level specified in the Zoom
Level menu.
Find Next This button allows you to find the next

element in the list of results from a recent Find
operation.
Help Displays online help for the Property Editor.
Zoom Level Allows you to specify the magnification level

at which elements are displayed in the drawing
pane when the Zoom To command is initiated.
Alphabetic Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in alphabetical order.
Categorized Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in categories. This is the default.
Relabeling Elements
You can relabel elements from within the Property Editor.

To relabel an element:
1. Select the element in the Drawing Pane then, if the Property Editor is not already
displayed, select View > Properties.
2. In the General section of the Property Editor, click in the Label field, then type a
new label for the element.
Set Field Options Dialog Box

The Set Field Options dialog box lets you set the units for a specific attribute without
affecting the units used by other attributes or globally.
To use the Set Field Options dialog box, right-click any numerical field that has units,
then select Units and Formatting.
Value Displays the value of the currently selected item.
Unit Displays the type of measurement. To change the

unit, select the unit you want to use from the drop-
down list. This option also lets you use both U.S.
customary and S.I. units in the same worksheet.
Display Precision Sets the rounding of numbers and number of digits

displayed after the decimal point. Enter a negative
number for rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1)
rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to
1000, and so on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to
indicate the number of digits after the decimal point.

Creating Your Model
Format Lets you select the display format used by the

current field.
Choices include:
• Scientific—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "-
d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a digit
(0-9). The string starts with a minus sign if the
number is negative.
• Fixed Point—Abides by the display precision
setting, and automatically enters zeros after the
decimal place to do so. With a display precision
of 3, an entered value of 3.5 displays as 3.500.
• General—Truncates any zeros after the
decimal point, regardless of the display preci-
sion value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed Point
format displays as 5.2 when using General
format. The number is also rounded. So, an
entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4 regardless
of the display precision.
• Number—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string starts
with a minus sign if the number is negative.
Thousand separators are inserted between
each group of three digits to the left of the
decimal point.
What Length is Used for Conduits and Pressure Pipes When I Don't
Enter a User-defined Length?
If you do not enter a user-defined length in the attributes for conduits and pressure
pipes, the length used in Bentley SewerCAD V8i is the plan view distance between
the coordinates at each end of the link element. This length is used as the actual length
in hydraulic calculations. However, as the slope increases, the difference between the
plan length and the actual length also increases as shown below.
The table below shows the difference between the actual and plan length as a function
of slope. Note that for most reasonable slopes, the difference between the actual and
plan view length is less than one percent. (100% slope is 1:1 slope.) As the slope
approaches vertical, you must enter the actual length.

Automatic Design
Table 6-1: Actual and Plan Length as a Function of Slope
Slope, % * Actual/Plan Length
0 1.000
10 1.005
20 1.020
30 1.044
* The model’s generalized friction formulation is only valid for slopes less than 10%.
If you are not satisfied with the plan view length, you can enter a user-defined length,
which you can determine using the following equation:
Actual  Plan 2 (1  (% s lope / 100) 2 )
The length of a link element maybe be represented by one of the following fields:
• Length (User Defined) - entered by the user if "Has User Defined Length?" is set
to true.
• Length (Scaled) - The exact length of the link based on the 2D x/y coordinates in
the plan view.
• Length (3D) - The exact length of the link based on the x/y coordinates in the plan
view and the bounding nodes' invert elevation values
• Length - The user defined length if you have assigned it. Otherwise the length is
based on the plan view length, taking the 3D and rounding options into account
from the global project options.
Automatic Design
This program allows you to automatically design gravity piping and structures. The
design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the elements to be designed, from a
single pipe size to the entire system, or anything in between.
The design algorithm adjusts invert elevations and the section size of the pipe to meet
several constraints, such as allowable ranges of slope, velocity and cover. In general,
the design algorithm attempts to minimize pipe size and excavation, which is typically
the most expensive part of installing sewer piping and structures.
Some of the other things that are considered include:

Creating Your Model
• Pipe Matching
• Offset Matching
• Drop Structures
• Structure Sump Elevations
The designed pipe will be the smallest available section size from the Engineering
Library that meets the constraints and has a capacity greater than its discharge. In a
situation where there are no pipe sizes with adequate capacity, the largest available
size will be used.
Default Design Constraints
The Default Design Constraints dialog allows you to edit the pipe and node
constraints governing the design of the system. It also allows you to specify which
gravity elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want
to design the downstream invert elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and
slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format.
The top of the dialog box contains several fields where the design constraints can be
entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to every element of that
type.
The following attributes are available in this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, and node structures can be all designed with the
same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values individ-
ully for each pipe or node.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the following tabs:
• Gravity Pipe
• Node
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:

Automatic Design
• Default Constraints
• Extended Design
Default Constraints Section
In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
• Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:

– Velocity Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
– Velocity (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This
control is only available when the Velocity Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Velocity (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This
• Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:

– Cover Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Cover (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This
control is only available when the Cover Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Cover (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This
• Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:

– Slope Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Slope (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control
is only available when the Slope Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Slope (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control

Creating Your Model
Extended Design Section
This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
• Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following
controls:
– Is Part Full Design?–When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
– Percent Full Constraint Type–Allows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
– Percentage Full–Specify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only available when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Rise vs Percent Full Table–This table becomes available when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Table. Enter any number of Rise vs Percent Full
points to describe a range of values. Values not explicity listed will be linearly
interpolated by the software.
• Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
– Allow Multiple Barrels?–When checked, allows the design algorithm to use
more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
– Maximum Number of Barrels–The maximum number of identical sections
allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
• Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
– Limit Section Size?–When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
– Maximum Rise–The maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in
the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and

Minor Loss Coefficients
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can mini-
mize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Minor Loss Coefficients

The Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box allows you to create, edit, and manage minor
loss coefficient definitions.
The following management controls are located above the minor loss coefficient list
pane:

Creating Your Model
New Creates a new Minor Loss Coefficient.

minor loss coefficient.
Delete Deletes the minor loss coefficient that is

currently highlighted in the list pane.
Rename Renames the minor loss coefficient that is

Report Opens a report of the data associated with

the minor loss coefficient that is currently
highlighted in the list pane.
Synchronization Browses the Engineering Library,

Options synchronizes to or from the library, imports
from the library or exports to the library.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the minor loss that is currently high-
lighted in the minor loss list pane. The following controls are available:
Minor Loss Tab This tab consists of input data fields that allow you
to define the minor loss.
Minor Loss Type General type of fitting or loss element. This field
is used to limit the number of minor loss elements
available in choice lists. For example, the minor
loss choice list on the valve dialog box only
includes minor losses of the valve type. You
cannot add or delete types.
Minor Loss Coefficient Headloss coefficient for the minor loss. This
unitless number represents the ratio of the
headloss across the minor loss element to the
velocity head of the flow through the element.

Using the Totalizing Flow Meters
Library Tab This tab displays information about the minor loss
that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list
pane. If the minor loss is derived from an
engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the minor loss was created
manually for this project, the synchronization
details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the minor loss was not derived
from a library entry.
descriptive notes that will be associated with the
minor loss that is currently highlighted in the
minor loss list pane.

Totalizing flow meters allow you to view results of the total volume going through
your model for a specific selection of elements.
Note: Totalizing Flow Meters can only be applied to pressure elements.

If no pressure elements are selected in the drawing when the
Totalizing Flow Meter dialog is opened, you will be prompted to
choose elements initially.
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog
The Totalizing Flow Meter manager consists of the following controls:
New Create a new totalizing flow meter.
Delete Delete the selected totalizing flow meter.
Rename Rename the label for the current totalizing flow

meter.
Edit Open the totalizing flow meter editor.
Refresh Recompute the volume of the current totalizing

flow meter.
Help Opens the online help for totalizing flow meter.

Creating Your Model
To create a new Totalizing Flow Meter
1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)

2. From the Analysis Menu click Totalizing Flow Meters.
3. Click New which will open up the Select box.

4. Select the elements to be calculated or click the Query box then click Done.
You can also create a totalizing flow meter by simply right-clicking a pressure pipe
and selecting the Totalizing Flow Meter command from the context menu that
appears.
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog
The Totalizing Flow Meter editor allows you to:
• Define settings for new or existing flow meters

Display the calculated results for the current flow meter settings.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Summary tab displays the totals for each element type.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Details tab displays results for each individual element.
Note: Totalizing flow meters can only be created for pressure

elements; if no pressure elements are selected, you will be
prompted to choose pressure elements using the Select toolbar
when creating a new meter.
To define flow meter settings
1. Set Start and Stop times. Once selected, the results are automatically updated.
2. Click the Report button to run a report or click Close.
To remove elements from the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
Highlight the element to be removed in the list and click the Delete button above the
list pane.
To add elements to the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
1. Click the Select From Drawing button above the element list pane.
2. In the Drawing View, click the element or elements to be added.
3. Click the Done button in the Select dialog.

Creating Your Model
System Head Curves

The purpose of a pump is to overcome elevation differences and head losses due to
pipe friction and fittings. The amount of head the pump must add to overcome eleva-
tion differences is dependent on system characteristics and topology (and independent
of the pump discharge rate), and is referred to as static head. Friction and minor losses,
however, are highly dependent on the rate of discharge through the pump. When these
losses are added to the static head for a series of discharge rates, the resulting plot is
called a system head curve.
Pumps are designed to lift water from one elevation to another, while overcoming the
friction and minor losses associated with the piping system. To correctly size a pump,
one must understand the static head (elevation differences) and dynamic head (friction
and minor losses) conditions under which the pump is expected to operate. The static
head will vary due to changes in reservoir or tank elevations on both the suction and
discharge sides of the pump, and the dynamic head is dependent on the rate of
discharge through the pump.
System head curves are a useful tool for visualizing the static and dynamic head for
varying rates of discharge and various static head conditions. The system head curve
is a graph of head vs. flow that shows the head required to move a given flow rate
through the pump and into the distribution system.
System Head Curves Manager Dialog
The System Head Curves manager allows you to create, edit, and manager system
head curves. It consists of the following controls:
New Create a new system head curve.
Delete Delete the selected system head curve.
Rename Rename the label for the current system head

curve.
Edit Open the system head curve editor.
Help Open the online help for system head curves.

System Head Curves
System Head Curve Editor Dialog

The System Head Curve editor allows you to define and calculate a graph of head vs.
flow that shows the head required to move a given flow rate through the selected
pump and into the distribution system.
To create a new System Head Curve Definition
1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)

2. From the Analysis Menu click System Head Curves.
3. Click New which will open the System Head Curve editor.
The System Head Curves Editor is where you can specify the settings of System
Head Curve Definition. You can also compute and view the system head curve for
timestep 0.00.
4. Choose the pump that will be used for the system head curve from the Pump pull-
down menu, or click the ellipsis and click the pump to be used in the drawing
pane.
5. Type a value for Maximum Flow and Number of Intervals.
6. Click Compute to calculate the results for time step 0.00.

Creating Your Model
7. View the results as a graph or data.

8. Click Report to view the report.
9. Click Close to exit the System Head Curve editor.
Element Property Inferencing

In building a model, a user occasionally runs into situations where there are gaps in
the modeling data for which it is difficult to fill in the information. For example eleva-
tion data may be missing form a manhole or some property may be missing from a
pipe. In such cases, it is desirable to let the model draw "inferences" about those
values from property values from nearby elements. For example, elevations from
upstream and downstream manholes can be used to interpolate values for manhole
elevations between those with known properties or the diameter or material from the
downstream conduit can be used to fill in the diameter and material for conduits for
which those properties are missing.
SewerCAD V8i fills in elevation data such that the slopes of pipes being inferred are
constant along a reach and uses the downstream pipes as the basis for inferring
missing values for pipe properties. In the drawing below, the elevations are interpo-
lated between the known elevations and the physical properties of the downstream
pipe are used to fill in the properties of the missing pipes. However, if the user has
manually entered some of the physical properties manually, these values will not be
overridden. Loading information (sanitary load/infiltration rate) and head loss type
(AASHTO, HEC-22) are not inferred but are taken from the manhole prototype.
Where:

• Gu = upstream ground
• Gd = downstream ground
• Zu = upstream invert
• Zd = downstream invert
• N = number of additional manholes
• D = diameter (rise) of downstream pipe
In SewerCAD V8i, element property inferencing is only available for gravity

elements.
There are two general cases for this tool
1. Layout new manholes - In this case, the user knows the elevations of the manholes
at the beginning and end of a run and the physical properties of the downstream
conduit but has not yet placed the intervening manholes and pipes. The user indi-
cates the number of manholes that will be places in the gap and they will automat-
ically be inserted. This is useful in laying out new systems.
2. Follow existing path - In this case, the user has laid out the manholes and the
conduits between them. The user employs this tool to assign properties to the
elements between the upstream and downstream nodes. This is more useful in
filling in details of the system when the path is already determined whether for a
new or existing run of conduits.

Creating Your Model
Element Property Inferencing Dialog
To use the inferencing tool, click the Tools menu and select the Element Property
Inferencing command.
• Layout Type: Identify whether the inferencing tool should Layout New Elements
or Follow Existing path.

• Upstream Node and Downstream node: Pick the upstream and downstream
nodes between which element properties are to be inferred. Click on the Ellipse
(…) button to select the element from the drawing. Picking the element automati-
cally returns control to this dialog. It is important that all data for the upstream and
downstream elements already be entered when opening this dialog. If for example
ground elevations are missing from a node, then the user should close this dialog
and enter that data before opening this dialog.
• Downstream pipe: Field is automatically filled in when the user picks the Down-
stream Node. If the user has attached more than a single downstream conduit to
the downstream node, an error is generated.
• Interpolate ground elevations, Interpolate invert elevations and Overwrite
pipe properties: If checked, the inference tool will overwrite default values in the
nodes and pipes between the upstream and downstream nodes. However, if the
user has manually assigned properties to these elements, those properties will be
retained. These check boxes are only available when Follow Existing Path has
been selected because for new elements (Layout New Elements), the user has no
choice but to accept inferred values. The default elevation is 0 and default pipe
size is 12 in. (300 mm). If the ground elevation has been set to 512 ft (156 m) and
the pipe size set to 18 in. (450 mm), then the inference tool will only interpolate
invert elevations for those elements.
• Number of New Nodes: This field is only available when the user has selected
"Layout New Elements." If the user sets this value to N, the inference tool will
place N nodes and N+1 conduits (of equal length) in a straight line between the
upstream and downstream nodes. For example, if the distance is 1376 ft (419 m)
and the user wants 2 new elements, then the inferencing tool will add two
manholes and three pipes each 459 ft (140 m) long.
• Create new scenario: If the user checks this box, the tool will prompt for the
name and the parent scenario for the scenario being created. If the user does not
check this box, then the new elements and properties will be placed in the current
scenario.
When a new scenario is created and the Parent Scenario is set to None, the alterna-
tives that make up the scenario are selected based on the first scenario listed in the
Scenario Manager, usually the Base scenario. After the Element Property Infer-
encing tool creates a scenario, ensure that the other alternatives in the new
scenario are set up properly (double-check active topology, inflows, initial setting,
etc.).
• Parent scenario: Name of parent scenario if new scenario is being created.
• New scenario label: Name of new scenario if new scenario is being created.
• Override alternative label: When a new scenario is being created, the user can
check this box if the user wants to control the name of the new physical alternative
being created. If not, then the default new name is used.
• New alternative label: if the "Override alternative label" box is checked, then the
user provides the new name here.

Creating Your Model
• Interpolate: Starts the inferencing calculations.

• Close: Closes this dialog. Inferencing settings are saved for the project session.
Once the project is closed, all settings are lost. However, the user can open the
dialog, setup the reach and close this dialog if additional input information is
required. When the user reopens the dialog (as long as the project was not
closed), the settings will be restored.
• Help: Opens this Help.
Note: Note that no new Active Topology alternative is created by this

tool. This is not an issue for the Follow Existing Path option
since no new elements are created, but can be for the Layout
New Elements options. In the latter case, the user should
consider whether it is more desirable to create a new active
topology alternative before running the inferencing tool.
It is advisable to have all elements created and property data

entered before opening this tool. New data cannot be entered
when this dialog is open.
Example
Given the system below, and the values in the inferencing dialog, two new manholes
are created between MH-3 and MH-5.


Creating Your Model
The following summary is displayed after the run.
The resulting model looks like this:

If on the other hand, the system was already laid out with no elevation data for MH-7
and MH-8 and only default pipe sizes (12 in., 300 mm) for CO-6, CO-7 and CO-8, the
profile would initially look like this.
After running, Follow Existing Path, the profile looks like this with correct elevations
and pipe size set to 20 in. based on the downstream conduit properties.

Creating Your Model
Existing Path Interpolation Results Summary Dialog

This dialog appears after a Follow Existing Path interpolation operation has
completed. After a a successful run the Statistics tab will display the results of the
operation. The Messages tab displays any warnings or errors.
Click the Save button to save the summary as a text file.
Click the Copy button to copy the summary to the clipboard.
Click the Help button to open the online help.
New Element Layout Summary Dialog

This dialog appears after an interpolation operation has completed. After a a
successful run the Statistics tab will display the results of the operation, including
how many nodes and pipes were created. The Messages tab displays any warnings or
errors.

Changing the Drawing View

You change the drawing view of your model by using the pan tool or one of the zoom
tools:
• “Panning” on page 6-264

• “Zooming” on page 6-264
Panning
You can change the position of your model in the drawing pane by using the Pan tool.
Pan tool
To use the Pan tool:
1. Click the Pan button on the Tools toolbar.

The mouse cursor changes to the Pan icon.
2. Click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse
to reposition the current view.
or
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you can pan by simply holding down
the mousewheel and moving the mouse to reposition the current view.
or
Select View > Pan, then click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button
and move the mouse to reposition the current view
Zooming
You can enlarge or reduce your model in the drawing pane using one of the following
zoom tools:
Zoom In and Out
The simple Zoom In and Zoom Out commands allow you to increase or decrease,
respectively, the zoom level of the current view by one step per mouse click.

Creating Your Model
Zoom In
Zoom Out
To use Zoom In or Zoom Out, click the desired button on the Tools toolbar, or select
View > Zoom > Zoom In or View > Zoom > Zoom In.
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you zoom in or out by simply moving
the mousewheel up or down respectively.
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window command lets you zoom in on an area of your model defined by a
window that you draw in the drawing pane.
To use Zoom Window, select View > Zoom > Zoom Window button, then click and
drag the mouse inside the drawing pane to draw a rectangle. The area of your model
inside the rectangle will appear enlarged.
Note: If you use the Zoom Window command frequently, you might
find it more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See
“Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-46 for more
information.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents command automatically sets the zoom level such that the entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
Zoom Extents
To use Zoom Extents, click the Zoom Extents button on the Tools toolbar. The entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Extents.

Zoom Realtime
The Zoom Realtime command lets you dynamically scale up and down the zoom
level. The zoom level is defined by the magnitude of mouse movement while the tool
is active.
Zoom Realtime
Zoom Previous and Zoom Next
Zoom Previous
Zoom Previous returns the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. To use
Zoom Previous, click the Zoom Previous button on the Tools toolbar.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Previous.
Zoom Next returns the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed. To use Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom >
Zoom Next.
Note: If you use the Zoom Next command frequently, you might find it
more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See “Adding
and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-46 for more information.
Using the Zoom Center Command

The Zoom Center command lets you enter drawing coordinates that will be centered
in the drawing pane.
To use the Zoom Center command:
1. Select View > Zoom > Zoom Center. The Zoom Center dialog box appears.
2. Enter the X and Y coordinates.
3. Select the zoom factor from the Zoom drop-down, then click OK.

Creating Your Model
Zoom Center Dialog Box

The Zoom Center dialog box contains the following options:
X Defines the X coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Y Defines the Y coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Zoom Factor Defines the zoom level that will be applied

when the zoom center command is initiated.
Available zoom levels are listed in percentages
of 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 and 400.
Using Selection Sets

Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to
predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. You
manage selection sets in the ”Selection Sets Manager’.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i contains powerful features that let you view or analyze
subsets of your entire model. You can find these elements using the Network Navi-
gator (see “Network Navigator” on page 6-276). The Network Navigator lets you
choose a selection set, then view the list of elements in the selection set or find indi-
vidual elements from the selection set in the drawing.
In order to use the Network Navigator, you must first create a selection set. There are
two ways to create a selection set:
• From a selection of elements—You create a new selection set in the Selection Sets
Manager, then use your mouse to select the desired elements in the drawing pane.
• From a query—Create a query in the Queries Manager, then use the named query
to find elements in your model and place them in the selection set.
The following illustration shows the overall process.

You can perform the following operations with selection sets:
• “Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets” on page 6-270

• “Creating a Selection Set from a Selection” on page 6-271
• “Creating a Selection Set from a Query” on page 6-271
• “Adding Elements to a Selection Set” on page 6-273
• “Removing Elements from a Selection Set” on page 6-274
Selection Sets Manager
The Selection Sets Manager allows you to create, edit, and navigate to selection sets.
The Selection Sets Manager consists of a toolbar and a list pane, which displays all of
the selection sets that are associated with the current project.

Creating Your Model
The toolbar contains the following buttons:

• Create from Selection—Creates a new
static selection set from elements you
select in your model.
• Create from Query—Creates a new
dynamic selection set from existing
queries.
Delete Deletes the selection set that is currently

highlighted in the list pane. This command
is also available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking an
item in the list pane.

Edit • When a selection-based selection set is

highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection Set Element
Removal dialog box, which lets you edit
the selection set. This command is also
available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking
an item in the list pane.
• When a query-based selection set is
highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection By Query dialog
box, which lets you add or remove
queries from the selection set. This
command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access
by right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Rename Lets you rename the selection set that is

currently highlighted in the list pane. This
command is also available from the short-
cut menu, which you can access by right-
clicking an item in the list pane.
Select In Drawing Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted selection set. Once you
have selected the elements in a selection set
using Select In Drawing, you can delete
them all at once or create a report on them.
This command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access by
right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Help Displays online help for the Selection Sets

Manager.
You can view the properties of a selection in the Property Editor by right-clicking the
selection set in the list pane and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets
You use the Network Navigator to view the elements that make up a selection set.

Creating Your Model
To view the elements that make up a selection set:
1. Open the Network Navigator by selecting View > Network Navigator or clicking
the Network Navigator button on the View toolbar.
2. Select a selection set from the Selection Set drop-down list. The elements in the
selection set appear in the Network Navigator.
Tip: You can double-click an element in the Network Navigator to

select and center it in the Drawing Pane.
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection
You create a new selection set by selecting elements in your model.
To create a new selection set from a selection:
1. Select all of the elements you want in the selection set by either drawing a selec-
tion box around them or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in
turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Create
Selection Set.
3. Type the name of the selection set you want to create, then click OK to create the
new selection set. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selec-
tion set.
4. Alternatively, you can open the Selection Set Manager and click the New button
and select Create from Selection. Bentley SewerCAD V8i prompts you to select
one or more elements.
Create Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you create a new selection set. It contains the following
field:
New selection set name Lets you type the name of the new selection set.
Creating a Selection Set from a Query
You create a dynamic selection set by creating a query-based selection set. A query-
based selection set can contain one or more queries, which are valid SQL expressions.

To create a new selection set from a query:
1. In the Selection Sets Manager, click the New button and select Create from
Query. The Selection by Query dialog box appears.
2. Available queries appear in the list pane on the left; queries selected to be part of
the selection set appear in the list pane on the right. Use the arrow buttons in the
middle of the dialog to add one or all queries from the Available Queries list to the
Selected Queries list, or to remove queries from the Selected list.
– You can also double-click queries on either side of the dialog box to add them
to or remove them from the selection set.
Selection by Query Dialog Box

The Selection by Query dialog box lets you create selection sets from available
queries. The dialog box contains the following controls:
Available Queries Contains all the queries that are available for your
selection set. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the dialog box.
Selected Queries Contains queries that are part of the selection set.
To add queries to the Selected Queries list, select
one or more queries in the Available Queries list,
then click the Add button [>].

Creating Your Model
Query Manipulation Lets you select or clear queries to be used in the

Buttons selection set:
• [ > ] Adds the selected items from the Avail-
able Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
• [ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available
Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
• [ < ] Removes the selected items from the
Selected Queries list.
• [ << ] Removes all items from the Selected
Queries list.
Note: You can select multiple queries

in the Available Queries list by
holding down the Shift key or
the Control key while clicking
with the mouse. Holding down
the Shift key provides group
selection behavior. Holding
down the Control key provides
single element selection
behavior.
Adding Elements to a Selection Set
You can add a single or multiple elements to a static selection set.
To add an element to a static selection set:
1. Right-click the element to be added, then select Add to Selection Set from the
shortcut menu.
2. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
To add a group of elements to a static selection set all at once:
1. Select all of the elements to be added by either drawing a selection box around
them, or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Add to
Selection Set.

3. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
Add To Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select the Add to Selection Set command. It
contains the following field:
Add to: Drop-down menu that lets you select the selection
set to which the currently highlighted element or
elements will be added.
Removing Elements from a Selection Set
You can easily remove elements from a static selection set in the Selection Set
Element Removal dialog box.
To remove an element from a static selection set:
1. Display the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or
clicking the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, select the desired selection set then click the Edit
button.
3. In the Selection Set Element Removal dialog box, find the element you want to
remove in the table. Select the element label or the entire table row, then click the
Delete button.
4. Click OK.
Selection Set Element Removal Dialog Box

This dialog appears when you click the edit button from the Selection Set Manager. It
allows you to remove elements from the selection set that is highlighted in the Selec-
tion Sets Manager when the Edit button is clicked.
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets
SewerCAD V8i lets you perform group-level deletions on elements in a selection set
using the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager.

Creating Your Model
Note: While it is not possible to directly edit groups of elements in a

selection set, you can use the Next button in the Network
Navigator to quickly navigate through each element in the
selection set and edit its properties in the Property Editor.
To delete multiple elements from a selection set:
1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to delete.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection set’s elements in the drawing pane.
– If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you don’t
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to delete.
5. Right-click and select Delete. The highlighted elements in the selection set are
deleted from your model.
To create a report on a group of elements in a selection set:
1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to report on.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection set’s elements in the drawing pane.
– If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you don’t
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to include in the report.
5. Right-click and select Report. A report window displays the report.

Network Navigator
Network Navigator
The Network Navigator consists of a toolbar and a table that lists the Label and ID of
each of the elements contained within the current selection. The selection can include
elements highlighted manually in the drawing pane, elements contained within a
selection set, or elements returned by a query. It can be used to search through the
model to find potential problems or to simply execute queries on input or results.
Network navigator works by running queries that have been either
1. predefined by Bentley Systems or

2. created by the user in the Query manager.
You cannot edit predefined queries. Queries must be created in the query manager
before running them in the network navigator.
To open the Network Navigator, click the View menu and select the Network Navi-
gator command, press <Ctrl+3>, or click the Network Navigator button on the
View toolbar.
The following controls are included in Network Navigator:

Creating Your Model
Query Selection Choose the element sets to use in the query.

List Once a query is selected, it can be executed
when you click the Execute icon.
If there is already a Query listed in the list

box, it can be run when the Execute icon is
clicked.
Execute Click to run the selected query.
Previous Zooms the drawing pane view to the

element prior to the currently selected one in
the list.
Zoom To Zooms the drawing pane view to the

selected element in the list.
Next Zooms the drawing pane view to the

element below the currently selected
element in the list.
Copy Copies the elements to the Windows

clipboard.
Remove Removes the selected element from the list.

Network Navigator
Select In Drawing Selects the elements in the drawing pane and

performs a zoom extent based on the
selection.
Highlight When this toggle button is on, elements

returned by a query will be highlighted in
the drawing pane to increase their visibility.
Refresh Drawing Refreshes the current selection.
Help Opens SewerCAD V8i Help.
Predefined Queries
The Network Navigator provides access to a number of predefined queries grouped

categorically, accessed by clicking the [>] button. Categories and the queries
contained therein include:
Element types - finds all elements of a specified type (e.g. all pumps).
Network review - finds potential problems in the model (e.g. finding disconnected
elements). This is a very powerful tool for model cleanup.
Network trace - finds elements with specific relationships between them (e.g. trace
downstream to outfall).
Note: The Trace Upstream and Trace Downstream queries are limited
to the gravity subnetwork.
Input - finds elements in model with specified properties (e.g. find elliptical pipes)
Results - finds elements in model with results that meet the query criteria (e.g.
conduits that are surcharged in this time step)
User Defined Queries
In addition to predefined queries, you can create your own queries in the ”Queries
Manager’. These queries can be saved with the project or in a shared file.

Creating Your Model
Using Prototypes
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for elements in your network. These
values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry
requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data.
For example, if a section of the network contains all three foot-diameter manholes ,
use the manhole prototype to set the Diameter field to 3.00 ft. When you create a new
manhole in your model, its diameter attribute will default to 3.00 ft.
Note: Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect
any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different

characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your
prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time
when you edit the properties later.
For instructions on how to create prototypes, see “Creating Prototypes” on page 6-

279.
Creating Prototypes
Prototypes contain default values for Bentley SewerCAD V8i elements. You create
prototypes in the Prototypes Manager.
To create a prototype:
1. Open your Bentley SewerCAD V8i project or start a new project.

2. Select View > Prototypes or press Ctrl+6.
The Prototypes Manager opens. All Bentley SewerCAD V8i element types are
displayed in an expanding and collapsing list.
3. Select the element type for which you want to create a prototype, then click the
New button.
The element type in the list expands to display all the prototypes that exist for that
element type.
Each element type contains a default prototype, which is not editable, and any
prototypes that you have created. The current set of default values for each
element type is identified by the Make Current icon.
4. Double-click the prototype you just created. The Property Editor for the element
type opens.
5. Edit the attribute values in the Property Editor as required.

Using Prototypes
6. To make the new prototype the default, click the Make Current button in the
Prototypes Manager.
The icon next to the prototype changes to indicate that the values in the prototype
will be applied to all instances of that element type that you add to your current
project.
– To rename a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Rename
button.
– To delete a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Delete
button.
– To view a report of the default values in the prototype, select the prototype in
the list and click the Report button.
Prototypes Manager
The Prototypes Manager allows you to create prototypes, which contain default
common data for each element type. The Prototypes Manager consists of a toolbar and
a list pane, which displays all of the elements available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
The list of elements in the Prototypes Manager list pane is expandable and collapsible.
Click on the Plus sign to expand an element and see its associated prototypes. Click on
the Minus sign to collapse the element.
Each element in the list pane contains a default prototype; you cannot edit this default
prototype. The default prototypes contains common values for each element type; if
you add elements to your model without creating new prototypes, the data values in
the default prototypes appear in the Property Editor for that element type.

Creating Your Model
New Creates a new prototype of the selected

element.
Delete Deletes the prototype that is currently

Rename Lets you rename the prototype that is

Make Current Lets you make the prototype that is currently

highlighted in the list pane the default for
that element type. When you make the
current prototype the default, every element
of that type that you add to your model in
the current project will contain the same
common data as the prototype.
Report Lets you view a report of the data associated

with the prototype that is currently
Help Displays online help for the Prototypes

Manager.
Engineering Libraries
Engineering Libraries are powerful and flexible tools that you use to manage specifi-
cations of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects.
Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe
materials, storm events, and unit sanitary loads. You can modify engineering libraries
and the items they contain by using the Engineering Libraries command in the Tools
menu, or by clicking the ellipsis (…) buttons available next to the fields in dialog
boxes that make use of engineering libraries.

Note: The data for each engineering library is stored in an XML file in
your Bentley SewerCAD V8i program directory. We strongly
recommend that you edit these files only using the built-in tools
available by selecting Tools > Engineering Libraries.
You work with engineering libraries and the items they contain in the Engineering
Libraries dialog box, which contains all of the project’s engineering libraries. Indi-
vidual libraries are compilations of library entries, along with their attributes. For
more information about working with engineering libraries, see “Working with Engi-
neering Libraries” on page 6-282.
By default, each project you create in SewerCAD V8i uses the items in the default
libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with
one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new
library.
When you change the properties for an item in an engineering library, those changes
affect all projects that use that library item. At the time a project is loaded, all of its
engineering library items are synchronized to the current library. Items are synchro-
nized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the item’s values will be made
the same.
The default libraries that are installed with Bentley SewerCAD V8i are editable. In
addition, you can create a new library of any type, and can then create new entries of
your own definition.
• Library types are displayed in the Engineering Library manager in an expanding/

collapsing tree view.
• Library types can contain categories and subcategories, represented as folders in
the tree view.
• Individual library entries are contained within the categories, subcategories, and
folders in the tree view.
• Libraries, categories, folders, and library entries are displayed in the tree view
with their own unique icons. You can right-click these icons to display submenus
with different commands.
Working with Engineering Libraries
When you select a library entry in the tree view, the attributes and attribute values
associated with the entry are displayed in the editor pane on the right side of the dialog
box.
Working with Libraries

Creating Your Model
Right-clicking a Library icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Create Library Creates a new engineering library of the currently

highlighted type.
Add Existing Library Lets you add an existing engineering library that
has been stored on your hard drive as an .xml file
to the current project.

Working with Categories
Right-clicking a Category icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item Creates a new entry within the current library.
Add Folder Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted library.
Save As Lets you save the currently highlighted category

as an .xml file that can then be used in future
projects.
Remove Deletes the currently highlighted category from

the library.
Working with Folders
Right-clicking a Folder icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item Creates a new entry within the current folder.
Add Folder Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted folder.
Rename Lets you rename the currently highlighted folder.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted folder and its

contents.
Working with Library Entries
Right-clicking a Library Entry icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing
the following commands:
Rename Lets you rename the currently highlighted entry.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted entry from the

library.

Creating Your Model
Engineering Libraries Dialog Box

The Engineering Libraries dialog box contains an explorer tree-view pane on the left,
a library entry editor pane on the right, and the following buttons above the explorer
tree view pane:
New Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Create Library—Creates a new engi-
neering library.
• Add Existing Library—Lets you add an
existing engineering library that has
been stored on your hard drive as an
.xml file to the current project.
Delete Removes the currently highlighted

engineering library from the current project.
Rename Lets you rename the currently highlighted

engineering library.
Sharing Engineering Libraries On a Network

You can share engineering libraries with other SewerCAD V8i users in your organiza-
tion by storing the engineering libraries on a network drive. All users who will have
access to the shared engineering library should have read-write access to the network
folder in which the library is located.
To share an engineering library on a network, open the Engineering Libraries in

SewerCAD V8i and create a new library in a network folder to which all users have
read-write access.
Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files
You can convert your legacy format engineering library files (.hlb) to the .xml format
used in SewerCAD V8i using the WaterObjects.Net.EngineeringLibraryCon-
verter.exe utility. This utility can be found in your main product installation folder.
The utility consists of the following controls:
• Product: Select whether the .hlb file to be converted is a SewerGEMS, Water-

GEMS, StormCAD, or SewerCAD engineering library file.
• Library Type: Select the type of engineering library you are converting.

• HLB Library File: Enter the path of the .hlb file to be converted, or click the
Browse button to find it using a Windows browse dialog.
• Material Library: Enter the path of the material.hlb file. This control is only
available when the Library Type being converted is a Section Size library.
• Use SI Label: Check this box if the library being converted uses System Interna-
tional (SI) units.
• Destination Root: Enter the path where the converted .xml file should be created,
or click the Browse button to browse to the location.
• Convert: Click this button to perform the conversion.
• Close: Closes the utility dialog.
To convert an .hlb Engineering Library file to an .xml Engineering Library file
1. Double-click the WaterObjects.Net.EngineeringLibraryConverter.exe utility

found in the Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Sanitary folder.
2. In the Classic Engineering Library Converter Utility dialog that appears, select
SewerCAD from the Product menu.
3. Choose the Library Type that is stored in the .hlb file to be converted.
4. Click the Browse button next to the HLB Library File field and find the .hlb file
to be converted.
5. If the Library Type you are converting is a Section Size library:
a. Click the Browse button next to the Material Library field and find the
material.hlb file associated with the Section Size .hlb file to be converted.
b. Place a check in the Use SI Label box if the Section Size library file uses SI
units.
6. Click the Browse button next to the Destination Root field and browse to the
directory where you want the new .xml engineering library file to be created.
7. Click the Convert button.
To import the converted .xml Engineering Library file
1. Click the Components menu and select Engineering Libraries.

2. In the Engineering Libraries dialog, highlight the library type associated with
the .xml file to be imported.
3. Click the New button and select Add Existing Library.
4. Browse to the directory you specifed during step 6 of the conversion process
above, select the .xml file, and click Open.

Creating Your Model
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view catalog conduits. Catalog conduits
are an efficient way to reuse common physical conduit definitions.

The dialog box contains a toolbar, a Conduit Catalog list pane, and two tabs. The
toolbar contains the following buttons:
New Creates a new entry in the Conduit

Catalog List Pane.

highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Rename Lets you rename the entry that is

currently highlighted in the Conduit
Catalog List Pane.

with the entry that is currently
highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Synchronize Clicking this button opens a submenu

containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—This
command opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to browse
the Conduit Catalog Library.
• Synchronize From Library—This
command allows you to update a conduit
catalog that was previously imported
from a Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library to reflect changes that have been
made to the library since it was imported.
• Synchronize To Library—This
command allows you to update an
existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library using current Conduit Catalog
entries that were initially imported but
• Import From Library—This command
allows you to import catalog entries from
an existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library.
• Export To Library—This command
allows you to export the current catalog
entries to an existing Conduit Catalog
Engineering Library.

Creating Your Model
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Conduit Catalog dialog
box.
Conduit Catalog List Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays
Pane a list of all of the catalog conduits that have been
defined in the current project. Highlighting a
catalog conduit in this list causes the Cross
Section Shape and Roughness Sections to
display the associated information with the
highlighted conduit.
Cross Section Shape Located in the top-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, contains controls that allow you to
define the size and shape of the catalog conduit
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The controls
that appear change according to the Cross
Section Type that is selected.
Cross Section Type Lets you define the type of cross section for the
currently highlighted catalog conduit.
The following conduit cross section types are only
available in the catalog conduit to support import
from SewerGEMS:
• Basket Handle
• Horseshoe
• Egg
• Semi-Elliptical
They can be created in the conduit catalog but can
not be referenced by a conduit in the model.
Diameter Lets you define the diameter of the conduit. This

field is only available for Circular catalog conduits.
<Section Type> Rise Lets you define the rise (height) of the catalog
conduit. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
<Section Type> Span Lets you define the span (width) of the catalog
conduit. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
Roughness Located in the bottom-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, lets you define the roughness
attributes of the catalog conduit currently
highlighted in the List Pane. The controls that are
available change depending on the Roughness
Type selected.

Roughness Type Lets you specify which of the available roughness

methods to be applied to the catalog conduit
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The other
controls available in section are dependent on the
selection made in this box.
Material Lets you enter a material label. This field is

informational only, and will not affect the
roughness properties of the associated catalog
entry.
Manning’s n Lets you define the roughness value for the

catalog conduit. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Single Manning’s n.
Depth vs. Manning’s Lets you define a depth vs. roughness curve for
Table the catalog conduit. This field is available only
when the Roughness Type is Manning’s n-Depth
Curve.
Manning’s vs. Lets you define a flow vs. roughness curve for the
Discharge Table catalog conduit. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Manning’s n-Flow.
Library Tab Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
• ID
• Label
• Modified Date
• Library Source
• Library Modified Date
• Synchronization Status

Creating Your Model
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements

The Hyperlinks feature lets you associate external files, such as pictures or movie
files, with elements. To use hyperlinks, select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink
dialog box opens.
The hyperlink tool enables the user to associate a photo, word processign document,
spreadsheet or otehr file with a given model element. Opening the hyperlink opens the
file using its associated program (Picture Manager, Word, Excel, etc.).
The hyperlink can also be opened from the Property grid by picking the Hyperlink
property from the grid and clicking the ellipse button which will open the hyperlink
tool.
If a model file is moved to a different computer, the hyperlink will no longer work
unless the associated file is moved to a comparable path on the same computer.
Hyperlinks Dialog Box
The Hyperlinks dialog contains a toolbar and a tabular view of all your existing hyper-
links.

Adding Hyperlinks to Elements
New Lets you create a new hyperlink.

Launches the Add Hyperlink dialog box.
Delete Deletes the currently highlight hyperlink.
Edit Lets you edit the currently highlighted

hyperlink. Launches the Edit Hyperlink
dialog box.
Launch Launches the external file associated

with the currently highlighted hyperlink.
Column Description
Element Type Displays the element type of the element

associated with the hyperlink.
Element Displays the label of the element associated with

the hyperlink.
Link Displays the complete path of the hyperlink.
Description Displays a description of the hyperlink, which you

can optionally enter when you create or edit the
hyperlink.
Adding a Hyperlink
To add a hyperlink:
Note: You can add more than one associated file to an element using
the hyperlink feature, but you must add the associations one at a
time.
1. Select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.

2. Click Add to add a hyperlink. The Add Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Select the element to which you want to associate an external file.
4. Browse to the external file you want to use. This might be something like a picture
of the element or a movie about the element.

Creating Your Model
Add Hyperlink Dialog Box
You create new hyperlinks in the Add Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
the following controls:
Element Type Lets you select an element type from the drop-
down list.
Element Lets you select an element from a drop-down list

of specific elements from your model. Only those
element types selected in the Element Type drop-
down list are displayed.
Link Lets you enter the complete path of the external

file you want to associate with the selected
element. You can type the path yourself or click
the Ellipsis (...) button to search your computer
for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description Lets you type a description of the hyperlink.
Editing a Hyperlink
You can edit existing hyperlinks using the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
To edit a hyperlink:

2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to edit.
5. Edit the hyperlink by adding or deleting an associated file.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box
You edit existing hyperlinks in the Edit Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains

Using Queries
Link Lets you edit the complete path of the external file
associated with the selected hyperlink. You can
type the path yourself or click the Ellipsis (...)
button to search your computer for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description Lets you edit an existing description of the

hyperlink or type a new description.
Deleting a Hyperlink
To delete a hyperlink:

2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to delete.
5. Click Delete.
Using Queries
A query in Bentley SewerCAD V8i is a user-defined SQL expression that applies to a
single element type. You use the Queries Manager to create and store queries; you use
the Query Builder dialog box to construct the actual SQL expression.
You can create the following types of queries:
• Project queries—Queries you define that are available only in the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i project in which you define them.
• Shared queries—Queries you define that are available in all Bentley SewerCAD
V8i projects you create. You can edit shared queries.
• Predefined queries—Factory-defined queries included with Bentley SewerCAD
V8i that are available in all projects you create. You cannot edit predefined
queries.
You can also use queries in the following ways:

Creating Your Model
• Create dynamic selection sets based on one or more queries. For more informa-
tion, see “Creating a Selection Set from a Query” on page 6-271.
• Filter the data in a FlexTable using a query. For more information, see “Sorting
and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 10-748.
For more information on how to construct queries, see “Creating Queries” on page 6-
297.
Queries Manager
The Queries Manager is a docking manager that displays all queries in the current
project, including predefined, shared, and project queries. You can create, edit, or
delete shared and project queries from within the Queries Manager, as well as use it to
select all elements in your model that are part of the selected query.
Queries created with the query manager can be saved with the current project (Project
query) or saved in a file that can be shared with other projects (Shared query).
Queries are not executed in the query manager but are executed in the Network navi-
gator or used in FlexTables to filter the table.
The Queries Manager consists of a toolbar and a tree view, which displays all of the
queries that are associated with the current project. The toolbar contains the following
buttons:

Using Queries

• Query—Lets you create a new SQL
expression as either a project or shared
query, depending on which item is high-
lighted in the tree view.
• Folder—Creates a folder in the tree
view, allowing you to group queries. You
can right-click a folder and create
queries or folders in that folder.
Delete Deletes the currently-highlighted query or

folder from the tree view. When you delete a
folder, you also delete all of its contents (the
queries it contains).
Rename Lets you rename the query or folder that is

currently highlighted in the tree view.
Edit Opens the Query Builder dialog box,

allowing you to edit the SQL expression that
makes up the currently-highlighted query.
Expand All and Expands or collapses the named views and

Select in Drawing Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query. Once you have
selected the elements in a selection set using
Select In Drawing, you can delete them all
at once.
Help Displays online help for the Queries

Manager.
Query Parameters Dialog Box

Some predefined queries require that a parameter be defined. When one of these
queries is selected, the Query Parameters dialog box will open, allowing you to type
the parameter value that will be used in the query. For example, when the Pipe Split
Candidates query is used the Query Parameters dialog will open, allowing the Toler-
ance parameter to be defined.

Creating Your Model
Creating Queries
A query is a valid SQL expression that you construct in the Query Builder dialog box.
You create and manage queries in the Queries Manager. You also use queries to filter
FlexTables and as the basis for a selection set.
To create a query from the Queries Manager:
1. Open the Queries Manager by selecting View > Queries, clicking the Queries
button on the View toolbar, or by pressing CTRL+5.

Using Queries
2. Perform one of the following steps:

– To create a new project query, highlight Queries - Project in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
– To create a new shared query, highlight Queries - Shared in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
Note: You can also right-click an existing item or folder in the list pane
and select New > Query from the shortcut menu.
3. In the Select Element Type dialog box, select the desired element type from the
drop-down menu. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
4. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. Note that the Refresh button is
disabled after you use it for a particular field (because the unique values do
not change in a single query-building session).
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
Note: You can also manually edit the expression in the preview pane.
e. Check the Validate on OK box above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression when you click the OK button. If the expression is valid, the query
will be created. If the query is invalid, a message to that effect will appear.
f. Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didn’t validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.

Creating Your Model
Double-click the Click the desired operator Click the Refresh

desired field to add it or keyword button to add it button to display the
to the preview pane to the SQL expression in list of available
unique values
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Apply button
Preview pane
Validate on OK
checkbox
5. Perform these optional steps in the Queries Manager:

– To create a new folder in the tree view, highlight the existing item or folder in
which to place the new folder, then click the New button and select Folder.
You can create queries and folders within folders.
– To delete an existing query or folder, click the Delete button. When you delete
a folder, you also delete all of its contents (the queries it contains).
– To rename an existing query or folder, click the Rename button, then type a
new name.
– To edit the SQL expression in a query, select the query in the list pane, then
click the Edit button. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
– To quickly select all the elements in the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query, click the Select in Drawing button.
Query Builder Dialog Box

You construct the SQL expression that makes up your query in the Query Builder
dialog box. The Query Builder dialog box is accessible from the Queries Manager and
from within a FlexTable.

Using Queries
The top part of the dialog box contains all the controls you need to construct your
query: a list pane displaying all available attributes for the selected element type, a
SQL control panel containing available SQL keywords and operators, and list view
that displays all the available values for the selected attribute. The bottom part of the
dialog box contains a preview pane that displays your SQL expression as you
construct it.
All the dialog box controls are described in the following table.
Fields Lists all input and results fields

applicable to the selected element type.
This list displays the labels of the
fields, while the underlying database
column names of the fields become
visible in the preview pane when you
add them to the expression. Double-
click a field to add it to your SQL
expression.
SQL Controls These buttons represent all the SQL

operators and controls that you can use
in your query. They include =, >, <, _,
?, *, <>, >=, <=, [ ], Like, And, and
Or. Click the appropriate button to add
the operator or keyword to the end of
your SQL expression, which is
displayed in the preview pane.
Unique Values When you click the Refresh button,

this list displays all the available
unique values selected field. Double-
click a value in the list to add it to the
end of your SQL expression, which is
displayed in the preview pane. If you
select a different field, you must click
the Refresh button again to update the
list of unique values for the selected
field. When you first open the Query
Builder dialog box, this list is empty.
Refresh Updates the list of unique values for

the selected field. This button is
disabled after you use it for a particular
field.
Copy Copies the entire SQL expression

displayed in the preview pane to the
Windows clipboard.

Creating Your Model
Paste Pastes the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the preview pane at the
location of the text cursor. For
example, if your cursor is at the end of
the SQL expression in the preview
pane and you click the Paste button,
the contents of your clipboard will be
added to the end of the expression.
Validate on Ok Validates the SQL expression in the

preview pane when you click the OK
button. If the expression is not valid, a
message appears.
Apply Executes the query. The results of the

query are displayed at bottom of the
Query Builder dialog box in the form
“x of x elements returned.”
Preview Pane Displays the SQL expression as you

add fields, operators and/keywords,
and values to it.
Using the Like Operator

The Like operator compares a string expression to a pattern in an SQL expression.
Syntax
expression Like “pattern”
The Like operator syntax has these parts:
Part Description
expression SQL expression used in a WHERE clause .
pattern String or character string literal against which expression is

compared.
You can use the Like operator to find values in a field that match the pattern you
specify. For pattern, you can specify the complete value (for example, Like
“Smith”), or you can use wildcard characters to find a range of values (for example,
Like “Sm*”).

Using Queries
In an expression, you can use the Like operator to compare a field value to a string
expression. For example, if you enter Like “C*” in an SQL query, the query returns
all field values beginning with the letter C. In a parameter query , you can prompt the
user for a pattern to search for.
The following example returns data that begins with the letter P followed by any letter
between A and F and three digits:
Like “P[A-F]###”
Note: The LIKE operator only works with string fields, not with
booleans.
The following table shows how you can use Like to test expressions for different
patterns.
Match No match
Kind of match Pattern (returns True) (returns False)
Multiple characters a*a aa, aBa, aBBBa aBC
*ab* abc, AABB, Xab aZb, bac
Special character a[*]a a*a aaa
Multiple characters ab* abcdefg, abc cab, aab
Single character a?a aaa, a3a, aBa aBBBa
Single digit a#a a0a, a1a, a2a aaa, a10a
Range of characters [a-z] f, p, j 2, &
Outside a range [!a-z] 9, &, % b, a
Not a digit [!0-9] A, a, &, ~ 0, 1, 9
Combined a[!b-m]# An9, az0, a99 abc, aj0
Querying by User-Defined Date

Date values in queries are required (by the Access/Jet engine) to be enclosed by '#'.
So, for example, instead of using a query like this:
date = 7/9/2008
...you should use:

Creating Your Model
date = #7/9/2008#
However: the values stored for that field contain a specific time, so the query, even
with those enclosures, will still return no elements. So, if you want to use the equal
operator in that case, you should change that query to:
date = #7/9/2008 4:21:50 PM#
in order to return any elements. However, one could also use other operators in order
to avoid having to specify the time portion. For example:
date > #7/9/2008#
Or
date < #7/9/2008#
will return elements.
Controls
Controls give you a way to specify an action for virtually any element based on almost
any property of the system. Controls are included in a scenario when they are speci-
fied in the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an Operational Alter-
native when you specify the name of a Control Set to use in a given Operational
Alternative.

Controls
The Control Manager is the main work center for controls. The Control Manager
manages all controls, conditions, actions, and control sets in the system. The Control
manager allows you to define controls using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition
logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions.
Choose Components > Controls to open the Control Manager.
The Controls manager consists of the following tabs:
• Controls—Manage all controls defined in the system. See “Controls Tab” on

page 6-305.
• Conditions—Define the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. See
“Conditions Tab” on page 6-310.
• Actions—Define what should be done to an element in the system in response to
an associated control condition. See “Actions Tab” on page 6-316.
• Control Sets—Assign groups of controls to Control Sets. See “Control Sets Tab”
on page 6-320.

Creating Your Model
Controls Tab
The Controls tab allows you to manage all controls defined in the system. Controls
can be one of two types: simple or logical. Simple controls are made up of an IF
condition and a THEN action statement. Logical controls are made up of an IF condi-
tion, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action, and can be assigned a priority for
resolving potential conflicts between logical controls.
Controls, Conditions, and Actions are assigned a non-editable application-provided

ID (e.g., LC01).
The Controls tab is divided into sections:
•The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a list of
all Logical Controls defined in the system.
• Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
– New—Creates a new control.
– Delete—Deletes the highlighted control.
– Duplicate—Creates a copy of the highlighted control.
– Refresh—Refreshes the highlighted control.
– Control Wizard—Opens the Control Wizard dialog.
– Report—Generates a summary of the selected control, listing the ID, condi-
tions, actions, and elements incorporated into the control.

Controls
– Help—Opens the online help.

• Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
meet criteria defined by the filter settings. The following filters are available:
– Type—When a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only controls of that
type will be displayed in the Controls list.
– Priority—When a Priority filter other than <All> is specified, only controls
of that priority will be displayed in the Controls list.
– Condition Element—When a Condition filter other than <All> is specified,
only controls containing the selected Condition element will be displayed in
the Controls list.
– Action Element—When an Action filter other than <All> is specified, only
controls containing the selected Action element will be displayed in the
Controls list.
You can edit or create controls consisting of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an
optional ELSE action. The lower pane is split into sections:
• Evaluate as Simple Control—Turn on in order to evaluate the condition as a

simple control.
– IF Condition—The drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of condi-
tions that have already been created in the Conditions tab.
– THEN Action—The drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of
actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
– ELSE Action (optional)—The ELSE action is used when the conditions for
the control are not met. To specify an ELSE action, click the check box to
activate the drop-down list. The drop-down list allows you to choose from a
list of actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
• Priority—This area of the dialog box is optional. To set a priority for the control
being created, turn on to activate the priority drop-down list. You can set a priority
of 1-5, 5 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain condition
and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority will be
used.

Creating Your Model
Note: At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the logical

control to apply when multiple controls require that conflicting
actions be taken. Logical controls with identical priorities will be
prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control
Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower
priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same
priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher
priority.
Relative speed pump patterns take precedence over any

controls (simple or logical) that are associated with the pump.
Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a
tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up
that control.
When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the

condition and action input fields will be initialized with the data
used in the last condition or action that was created.
Once created, the Logical Control will be assigned an

application generated ID (e.g., LC04).
• Description—This area is preset with a default description. There is an option to

change the default description. To do so, turn on to activate the description field,
and enter your description in the text box.
• Summary—This area of the dialog box displays a description of the control.
• Status Pane—When one or more filters are active, the lower left corner of the
dialog will show the number of controls currently displayed out of the number of
total controls. Additionally, a FILTERED flag is displayed in the lower right
corner.
Logical, or rule-based controls allow far more flexibility and control over the behavior
of your network elements than is possible with simple controls. This is accomplished
by allowing you to specify one or more conditions and then link these to one or more
Actions by using logical IF, AND, THEN, OR, and ELSE statements.
Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.
Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions.
Controls are defined as:
IF: Condition 1 AND condition 2 OR condition 3 AND

condition 4, etc., where condition X is a a condition
clause.
THEN: Action 1 AND action 2, etc. where action X is an
action clause.

Controls
ELSE (Optional): Action 3 AND action 4, etc. where action X is an

action clause.
Priority (Optional): Priority where priority is a priority value (1 to 5, 5
being the highest priority).
In addition to the high level of flexibility provided by allowing multiple conditions

and actions, the functionality of Logical controls is also enhanced by the range of
Condition types that are available. You can activate the stated actions based on
element loads, element hydraulic grade or pressure, system load, clock time, time
from start, tank level, or time to fill or drain a tank.
You can also create composite conditions and actions. You can cause actions to be
performed when multiple conditions are met simultaneously, or when one or the other
conditions are met. You can also activate multiple actions when a single condition is
met.
EXAMPLE:
To create a logical control in which a pump (PMP-1) is turned on when the level in a
tank (T-1) falls below a specified value (5 ft.) or when the system loads exceed a
certain level (5000 gpm):
• Conditions—Because this control needs to be triggered by multiple condi-

tions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the operator OR is
chosen to link the conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either
condition is true.
IF condition—{T-1 Level < 5 ft.}
OR condition—{System Load > 5000 gpm}
• Actions—Because this control has a single desired outcome if one of the
conditions is met, a simple action is chosen. The first action in a logical
control is always linked to the conditions by a logical THEN statement. In this
instance, an ELSE action will also be used, to keep the pump off if neither of
the conditions is true.
THEN action—{PMP-1 Status = On}
ELSE action—{PMP-1 Status = Off}
The finished logical control looks like this:
IF {T-1 Level < 5 ft.} OR {System Load > 5000 gpm} THEN {PMP-1 Status =
On} ELSE {PMP-1 Status = Off}

Creating Your Model
This example illustrates the power of using logical controls. To achieve the same func-
tionality using simple controls, you would need to create four separate controls—one
to turn the pump on if the tank level is below the specified value, one to turn the pump
off if the tank level is above a specified value, one to turn the pump on if the system
load is greater than the specified value, and one to turn the pump off if the system load
is less than the specified value.
Tip: Use the optional ELSE field to cause actions to be performed

when the conditions in the control are not being met. For
example, if you are creating a control that states, “If the level in
Tank 1 is less than 5 ft., Then turn Pump 1 On,” use an ELSE
action to turn the pump off if the tank level is above 5 ft.
Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.
When defining a logical control, you have the option to share

conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control
can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that
when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect
all controls that reference that condition or action.
Control Wizard
The Control Wizard allows you to quickly create pump controls based on wet well
HGL.
Click the New button to create a new row in the controls list.
Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted control.
Choose the controlled pump from the list box in the Pump column.
Choose the controlling wet well from the list box in the Wet Well column. Choose the
desired On and Off Operators and enter the HGL values that will turn the pump On
and Off.

Controls
Click the Create button to generate the control(s), or click the Cancel button to close
the wizard without creating a control.
Conditions Tab
Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an
action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all conditions defined in the system.
There are two types of conditions: simple conditions and composite conditions.
The Conditions tab is divided into sections:
• The pane in the middle of the dialog box is the Conditions List. The Conditions
List displays a list of all logical conditions defined in the system. The list contains
four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g., C01 for simple, CC01 for
composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
• Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
– New—Create a simple or composite condition.
– Duplicate—Copy the selected condition.
– Delete—Deletes the selected condition.
– Refresh—Refreshes the selected condition.
– Report—Generates a summary of the selected condition.

Creating Your Model
• Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
– Control Set—When a control set is specifed, only conditions that are a
component of that control set are displayed in the Conditions list.
– Type—When a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only conditions of
that type will be displayed in the Conditions list.
– Condition Element—When a Condition filter other than <All> is specified,
only conditions containing the selected Condition element will be displayed
in the Conditions list.
• The controls used to create or edit a condition vary depending on whether the
condition is simple or composite:
Simple Conditions
The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is
selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corre-
sponding input data are as follows:
Element—This will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected

element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:
• Element—The Element field allows you to specify which element the condition
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The
drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box, and the
Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the
graphical Drawing view.
Attribute—This field displays the available attributes for the element type currently
specified in the Element field.
• Pressure Junctions—The following attributes are available for use when a Junc-
tion is chosen in the Element field:
– Load—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified load at
the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a load…).
– Hydraulic Grade—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a
specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a
hydraulic grade of…).
– Pressure—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified
pressure at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a pressure of…).
• Pumps—The following attributes are available for use when a Pump is chosen in
the Element field:

Controls
– Discharge—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified

rate of discharge at the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a discharge
of…).
– Setting—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the Relative
Speed Factor of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a relative speed
factor of 1.5…).
– Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (On or
Off) of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 is On…).
Note: Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any

controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.
• Tanks—The following attributes are available for use when a Tank is chosen in
the Element field:
– load—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified load at
the corresponding tank. For tanks, this load can represent an inflow or outflow
(e.g., If T-1 has a load…).
specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a
pressure at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a pressure of…).
– Level—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified water
level at the corresponding tank (e.g., If the water in T-1 is at a level of…).
– Time to Drain—This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of
time required for the tank to drain (e.g., If T-1 drains in X hours…).
– Time to Fill—This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of
time required for the tank to fill (e.g., If T-1 fills in X hours…).
• Reservoirs—The following attributes are available for use when a Reservoir is

chosen in the Element field:
– load—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified load at
the corresponding reservoir. For reservoirs, this load can represent an inflow
or outflow (e.g., If R-1 has a load…).
specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a
pressure at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a pressure of…).
• Pipes—The following attributes are available for use when a Pipe is chosen in the
Element field:

Creating Your Model

rate of discharge at the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 has a discharge of…).
– Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Open
or Closed) of the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 is Open…).
• Valves—The following attributes are available for use when a valve is chosen in
the Element field:
rate of discharge at the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 has a discharge
of…).
Note: The Setting attribute is not available when a GPV is selected in

the Element field.
• Setting—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the setting of the

corresponding valve. The type of setting will change depending on the type of
valve that is chosen. The valves and their associated setting types are as follows:
– PRV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PRV-1 has a pres-
sure of…).
– PSV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PSV-1 has a pres-
sure of…).
– PBV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PBV-1 has a pres-
sure of…).
– FCV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the PRV (e.g., If FCV-1 has
a discharge of…).
– TCV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a
condition based on a specified headloss coefficient at the PRV (e.g., If TCV-1
has a headloss of…).
• Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Closed or

Inactive) of the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 is Inactive…).
System load—This will create a condition based on the loads for the entire system.
The fields available when this condition type is selected are: xxxx checkout this

Controls
• Operator—This field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
• System load—This field lets you set a system-wide load.
Clock Time—This will create a condition based on the clock time during an extended
period simulation. If the extended period simulation is for a period longer than 24
hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time.
Time From Start—This will create a condition based on the amount of time that has
passed since the beginning of an extended period simulation. The following fields are
available when this condition type is selected:
xxxx is target value okay?
Target Value—This field’s label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen
to determine if the condition has been met.
Description—This area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%# ID
%e Element
%a Attribute
%o Operator
%v Value
%u Unit

Creating Your Model
Note: Click the description list box to select one of the predefined
masks.
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the addi-
tional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various condition components.
Summary— This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of
the expanded description.
Composite Conditions
When a Composite Condition is being defined or edited, the lower part of the dialog
box is comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows:
• Insert—Adds a new row to the Condition list.

• Delete—Deletes the highlighted row from the Condition list.
• Refresh—Updates the referenced conditions.
The table contains two columns, as follows:
• Operator—This column allows you to choose the way in which the related
Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.
Note: The first condition in the list will use the If operator. Any
additional conditions will allow you to choose between AND and
OR.
Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule.

When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher
precedence than AND. Therefore, “IF A or B and C” is equivalent
to “IF (A or B) and C”. If the interpretation was meant to be IF A
or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls:
Logical Control 1: “IF A THEN...” and Logical Control 2: “IF B
AND C THEN...”
• Condition—The drop-down list allows you to choose a condition that was

already created beforehand.
%# ID
%v Value

Controls
are made to the various condition components.
masks.
Summary—This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of

Actions Tab
Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in
response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all
actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple actions and
composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01
for simple, AA01 for composite).
The Actions tab is divided into sections:
• The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list
contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01
for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).

Creating Your Model
• Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
- New—Opens the New Logical Action dialog box, where you can create a
new logical action.
- Edit—Depending on whether a simple or composite action is highlighted,
this button opens the Simple Logical Action or Composite Logical Action
dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted action.
- Delete—Deletes the highlighted action. You will be prompted to confirm
this action.
- Find—Opens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to
find a particular action based on a variety of criteria.
- Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted action.
– Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
- Control Set—When a control set is specifed, only actions that are a
component of that control set are displayed in the Actions list.
- Type—When a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only actions of
that type will be displayed in the Actions list.
- Action Element—When an Action Element filter other than <All> is
specified, only actions containing the selected Element will be displayed
in the Actions list.
• The controls used to create or edit an action vary depending on whether the action
is simple or composite:
Simple Actions
The following controls are used to define or edit Simple Actions:
• Element—The Element field allows you to specify which element the action will
be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The drop-
down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection box, and the Select
From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical
Drawing view.
• Attribute—This field displays the available attributes for the element type speci-
fied in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element types. The
available attributes include:
– Status – This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve
when the related conditions are met. The available choices are dependant on
the element type.

Controls
– Setting—This attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve

when the related conditions are met. The setting type varies depending on the
type of element.
Note: Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves
except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting
Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.
For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active
status with which to base a control upon—the status choices are
Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or
Closed, to reactivate the valve another control must be created
with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to
Active, but must have specific input data to work with.
For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to

Active or Closed. If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always
produce the headlosses associated with it through the Head-
Discharge Points table.
• Operator—The operator for logical actions is always EQUAL TO (=).

• Attribute Value—This field’s label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. Depending on the element type and the attribute that was chosen, the
input field may also change to a drop-down list, which contains the possible
settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all element types.
Note: Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off,
or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs
can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to
Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed,
depending on the Valve type.
%# ID
%e Element
%a Attribute
%o Operator
%v Value (and Unit, if applicable)

Creating Your Model
are made to the various control components.
masks.
Summary—This area of the dialog displays an automatically updated preview of the

expanded description.
Composite Actions
When a Composite Action is being defined or edited, the lower section of the dialog
box is comprised of a single column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of
the Actions to be used. Each row is a drop-down list that allows you to choose an
action that was already created beforehand.
• Insert—Adds a new row to the Action list

• Delete—Deletes the highlighted row from the Action list.
%# ID
%v Value
are made to the various control components.
masks.
Composite logical actions consist of multiple simple logical

actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.
Summary—This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of


Controls
Control Sets Tab
The Control Sets tab allows you to create, modify and manage control sets. Control
sets are a way to organize your controls, and also provide the means to use different
controls in different scenarios.
A Control Set is made up of one or more control statements (called Controls) of the
form: If (condition) then (action) else (action). The actions and conditions are
defined under the Conditions or Actions tab under control.
The following options are available in this dialog box:
• New—Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you
can add previously created logical controls to the new control set.
• Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit
the highlighted control set.
• Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to
allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.
• Delete—Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
• Rename—Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.
• Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID,
conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls contained within
the control set.

Creating Your Model
Logical Control Sets Dialog Box

The Logical Control Set Editor is divided into two panes.
The left pane, labeled Available Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that
have been created in the current project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on
the right, highlight the desired controls and click the [>] button under Add. To add all
of the controls to your Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To
remove a control from the Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button
under Remove. To remove all controls from the Selected Items pane, click the [<<]
button under Remove.
Note: Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this
dialog box. The first control in the control set has the highest
priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule
any control with no set priority.
User Data Extensions

User data extensions are a set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to
hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions allow you to add your own
data fields to your project. For example, you can add a field for keeping track of the
date of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element.

Note: The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations.
However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing,
annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any
of the standard pre-defined attributes.
User data extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the predefined data used in
and produced by the model calculations. This means that user data extensions can be
imported or exported through database and shapefile connections, viewed and edited
in the Property Editor or in FlexTables, included in tabular reports or element detailed
reports, annotated in the drawing, color coded, and reported in the detailed element
reports.
Note: The terms “user data extension” and “field” are used
interchangeably here. In the context of the User Data Extension
feature, these terms mean the same thing.
You define user data extensions in the User Data Extensions dialog box.
To define a user data extension:
1. Select Tools > User Data Extensions.

2. In the list pane on the left, select the element type for which you want to define a
new attribute field.
3. Click the New button to create a new user data extension. A user data extension
with a default name appears under the element type. You can rename the new field
if you wish.
4. In the Property Editor for the new field, enter the following:
– Type the name of the new field. This is the unique identifier for the field. The
name field in the Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
– Type the label for the new field. This is the label that will appear next to the
field for the user data extension in the Property Editor for the selected element
type. This is also the column heading if the data extension is selected to
appear in a FlexTable.
– Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Category field, then use the drop-down
menu in the Select Category dialog box to select an existing category in which
the new field will appear in the Property Editor. To create a new category,
simply type the category name in the field.
– Type a number in the Field Order Index field. This is the display order of
fields within a particular category in the Property Editor. This order also
controls the order of columns in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the
new field will be displayed first within the specified category.
– Type a description for the field. This description will appear at the bottom of
the Property Editor when the field is selected for an element in your model.
You can use this field as a reminder about the purpose of the field.

Creating Your Model
– Select an alternative from the drop-down menu in the Alternative field. This is
the alternative that you want to extend with the new field. Need more infor-
mation on this.
– Select a data type from the drop-down menu in the Data Type field.
- If you select Enumerated, an Ellipses (...) button appears in the Default
Value field. Enumerated user data extensions are fields that present
multiple choices.
– Enter the default value for the new field. If the data type is Enumerated, click
the Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor dialog box, where
you define enumerated members.

– To import an existing User Data Extension XML File, click the Import
button, then select the file you want to import. User Data Extension XML
Files contain the file name extension .xml or .udx.xml.
– To export existing user data extensions, click the Export to XML button, then
type the name of the udx.xml file. All user data extensions for all element
types defined in the current project are exported.
– To share the new field among two or more element types, select the user data
extension in the list pane, then click the Sharing button or right-click and
select Sharing. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check
box next to the element or elements that will share the user data extension.
The icon next to the user data extension changes to indicate that it is a shared
field. For more information, see “Sharing User Data Extensions Among
Element Types” on page 6-329.
– To delete an existing user data extension, select the user data extension you
want to delete in the list pane, then click the Delete button, or right-click and
select Delete.
– To rename a the display label of an existing user data extension, select the
user data extension in the list pane, click the Rename button or right-click and
select Rename, then type the new display label.
– To expand the list of elements and view all user data extensions, click the
Expand All button.
– To collapse the list of elements so that no user data extensions are displayed,
click the Collapse All button.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your user data extensions. The new
field(s) you created will appear in the Property Editor for every instance of the
specified element type in your model.

User Data Extensions Dialog Box
The User Data Extensions dialog box displays a summary of the user data extensions
associated with the current project. The dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane
displaying all available Bentley SewerCAD V8i element types, and a property editor.
Import Lets you merge the user data

extensions in a saved User Data
Extension XML file (.udx.xml or
.xml) into the current project.
Importing a User Data Extension
XML file will not remove any of the
other data extensions defined in your
project. User data extensions that
have the same name as those already
defined in your project will not be
imported.
Export to XML Lets you save existing user data

extensions for all element types in
your model to a User Data Extension
XML file (.udx.xml) for use in a
different project.
New Lets you create a new user data

extension for the currently
highlighted element type.
Sharing Lets you share the current user data

extension with another element type.
When you click this button, the
Shared Field Specification dialog
box opens. For more information,
see “Sharing User Data Extensions
Among Element Types” on page 6-
329.

Creating Your Model
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted

user data extension
Rename Lets you rename the display label of

the currently highlighted user data
extension.
Expand All Expands all of the branches in the

hierarchy displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All Collapses all of the branches in the

The Property Editor contains the following controls:
Alphabetized Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in alphabetical
order.
Categorized Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in categories. This
is the default.
and the following fields, which define your new user data extension:
Table 6-2:
Attribute Description
General
Name The unique identifier for the field. The name field in the
Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Label The label that will appear next to the field for the user data
extension in the Property Editor for the selected element type.
This is also the column heading if the data extension is
selected to appear in a FlexTable.
Category The section in the Property Editor for the selected element
type in which the new field will appear. You can create a new
category or use an existing category. For example, you can
create a new field for manholes and display it in the Physical
section of that element’s Property Editor.

Table 6-2:
Field Order The display order of fields within a particular category in the
Index Property Editor. This order also controls the order of columns
in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the new field will be
displayed first within the specified category.
Field The description of the field. This description will appear at the
Description bottom of the Property Editor when the field is selected for an
element in your model. You can use this field as a reminder
about the purpose of the field.
Alternative Lets you select an existing alternative to extend with the new
field.
Referenced Displays all the element types that are using the field. For
By example, if you create a field called "Installation Date" and you
set it up to be shared, this field will show the element types that
share this field. So for example, if you set up a field to be
shared by manholes and transitions, the Referenced By field
would show "Manhole, Transition".
Units
Data Type Lets you specify the data type for the user data extension.
Click the down arrow in the field then select one of the
following data types from the drop-down menu:
• Integer—Any positive or negative whole number.
• Real—Any fractional decimal number (for example, 3.14).
It can also be unitized with the provided options.
• Text—Any string (text) value up to 255 characters long.
• Long Text—Any string (text) up to 65,526 characters long.
• Date/Time—The current date. The current date appears
by default in the format month/day/year. Click the down
arrow to change the default date.
• Boolean—True or False.
• Enumerated—When you select this data type, an Ellipses
button appears in the Default Value field. Click the
Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor
dialog box, where you can add enumerated members and
their associated values. For more information, see
“Enumeration Editor Dialog Box” on page 6-331.

Creating Your Model
Table 6-2:
Default Value The default value for the user data extension. The default
value must consistent with the selected data type. If you chose
Enumerated as the data type, click the Ellipses (...) button to
display the Enumeration Editor.
Dimension Lets you specify the unit type. Click the drop-down arrow in the
field to see a list of all available dimensions. This field is
available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Storage Unit Lets you specify the storage units for the field. Click the drop-
down arrow in the field to see a list of all available units; the
units listed change depending on the Dimension you select.
This field is available only when you select Real as the Data
Type.
Numeric Lets you select a number format for the field. Click the drop-
Formatter down arrow in the field to see a list of all available number
formats; the number formats listed change depending on the
Dimension you select. For example, if you select Flow as the
Dimension, you can select Flow, Flow - Pressurized Condition,
Flow Tolerance, or Unit Load as the Numeric Formatter. This
field is available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Formula Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define formulas for use with the Real (Formula) User Data
Extension type.
You construct the formula using the available fields, operators, and functions. All the
dialog box controls are described in the following table.

Fields Lists all input and results fields applicable

to the selected element type. This list
displays the labels of the fields while the
underlying database column names of the
fields become visible in the preview pane
when you add them to the formula.
Double-click a field to add it to your
formula.
Operators These buttons represent all of the

operators that can be used in the fomula.
Click the appropriate button to add the
operator to the end of your formula ,
which is displayed in the preview pane.
Besides the common options for options
for adding, subtracting, multiplying and
dividing values , there are also ( ) which
allows for more complex formulas, and
the caret (^) which is used for raising a
value to the power of a value
Available Match Lists mathematical functions that can be

Functions used in the formula. If you hover over a
function it will describe the number of
requied parameters and a brief description
of what the function does.
Copy Copies the entire formula displayed in the

preview pane to the Windows clipboard.
Paste Pastes the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the preview pane at the
location of the text cursor. For example, if
your cursor is at the end of the formula in
the preview pane and you click the Paste
button, the contents of your clipboard will
be added to the end of the formula.
Preview Pane Displays the formula as you add fields,

operators, and functions to it.

Creating Your Model
User Data Extensions Import Dialog Box
The Import dialog box opens after you initiate an Import command and choose the
xml file to be imported. The Import dialog displays all of the domain elements
contained within the selected xml file. Uncheck the boxes next to a domain element to
ignore them during import.
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types
You can share user data extensions across multiple element types in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i. Shared user data extensions are displayed in the Property Editor for
all elements types that share that field.
The icons displayed next to the user data extensions in the User Data Extensions
dialog box change depending on the status of the field:
• Indicates a new unsaved user data extension.

• Indicates a user data extension that has been saved to the data source.
• Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
but has not been applied to the data source.
• Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
and that has been applied to the data source. Fields with this icon appear in
the Property Editor for any elements of the associated element types that appear in
your model.

Observe the following rules when sharing user data extensions:
• You can select any number of element types with which to share the field. The list
is limited to element types that support the Alternative defined for the Field. For
example, the Physical Alternative may only apply to five of the element types. In
this case, you will only see these five items listed in the Alternative drop-down
menu.
• You cannot use the sharing feature to move a field from one element type to
another. Validation is in place to ensure that only one item is selected and if it is
the same as the original, default selection. If it is not, a message appears telling
you that when sharing a field, you must select at least two element types, or select
the original element type.
• To unshare a field that is shared among multiple element types, right-click the user
data extension you want to keep in the list pane, then select Sharing. Clear all the
element types that do not want to share the field with and click OK. If you leave
only one element type checked in the Shared Field Specification dialog box, it
must be the original element type for which you created the user data extension.
– The fields that were located under the manhole and conduit element type root
nodes will be removed completely.
– You can also unshare a field by using the Delete button or right-clicking and
selecting Delete. This will unshare and delete the field.
To share a user data extension:
1. Open the User Data Extensions dialog box by selecting Tools > User Data Exten-
sions.
2. In the list pane, create a new user data extension to share or select an existing user
data extension you want to share, then click the Sharing button.
3. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check box next to each
element type that will share the user data extension.
4. Click OK.
5. The icon next to the user data extension in the list pane changes to indicate that it
is a shared field.
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box
You select element types to share a user data extension in the Shared Field Specifica-
tion dialog box. The dialog box contains a list of all possible element types with check
boxes.

Creating Your Model
Select element types to share the current user data extension by selecting the check
box next to the element type. Clear a selection if you no longer want that element type
to share the current field.
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box
The Enumeration Editor dialog box appears when you select Enumerated as the Data
Type for a user data extension, then click the Ellipses (...) button in the Default Value
field. Enumerated fields are fields that contain multiple selections - you define these
as members in the Enumeration Editor dialog box.
For example, suppose you want to identify conduits in a model of a new subdivision
by one of the following states: Existing, Proposed, Abandoned, Removed, and
Retired. You can define a new user data extension with the label “Pipe Status” for
conduits, and select Enumerated as the data type. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the
Default Value field in the Property Editor for the user data extension to display the
Enumeration Editor dialog box. Then enter five members with unique labels (one
member for each unique pipe status) and enumeration values in the table. After you
close the User Data Extensions dialog box, the new field and its members will be
available in the Property Editor for all conduits in your model. You will be able to
select any of the statuses defined as members in the new Pipe Status field.
You can specify an unlimited number of members for each user data extension, but
member labels and values must be unique. If they are not unique, an error message
appears when you try to close the dialog box.
The dialog box contains a table and the following controls:
• New—Lets you add a new row to the table. Each row in the table represents a
unique enumerated member of the current user data extension.
• Delete—Deletes the current row from the table. The enumerated member defined
in that row is deleted from the user data extension.
You define enumerated members in the table, which contains the following columns:
• Enumeration Member Display Label—The label of the member. This is the

label you will see in Bentley SewerCAD V8i where ever the user data extension
appears (Property Editor, FlexTables, etc.).
• Enumeration Value—A unique integer index associated with the member label.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses this number when it performs operations such as
queries.

Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box

The Batch Pipe Split dialog allows you to split pipes with neighboring nodes that are
found within the specified tolerance.
• Choose Features to Process: Allows you to specify which pipes to include in the
split operation. The following options are available:
– All: All pipes in the model that have a neighboring node within the specified
tolerance will be split by that junction.
– Selection: Only the pipes that are currently selected in the drawing pane will
be split by a neighboring junction that lies within the specified tolerance.
– Selection Set: Only those pipes that are contained within the selection set
specified in the drop down list or pipes that lie within the tolerance of a node
that is contained in the selection set will be split by a neighboring junction
that lies within the specified tolerance.
• Allow splitting with inactive nodes: When this box is checked, nodes that are
marked Inactive will not be ignored during the split operation.
• Tolerance: This value is used to determine how close a pipe must be to a node in
order for the pipe to be split by that junction.
Pipes will be split by every node that falls within the specified tolerance. To
prevent unwanted pipe splits, first use the Network Navigator's "Network Review
> Pipe Split Candidates" query to verify that the tolerance you intend to use for
the Batch Split operation will not include nodes that you do not want involved in
the pipe split operation.
To use the Network Navigator to assist in Batch Pipe Split operations
1. Open the Network Navigator.

2. Click the [>] button and select the Network Review...Pipe Split Candidates query.
3. In the Query Parameters dialog box, type the tolerance you will be using in the
pipe split operation and click OK.
4. In the Network Navigator, highlight nodes in the list that you do not want to be
included in the pipe split operation and click the Remove button.
5. Open the Batch Pipe Split dialog.
6. Click the Selection button.
7. Type the tolerance you used in the Network Review query and click OK.

Creating Your Model
External Tools
Use the External Tool Manager to manage custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility.
Click Tools>External Tools to create a custom menu command from any executable
file. Executable file types include:
• .exe
• .com
• .pif
• .bat
• .cmd
The External Tool Manager consists of the following elements:
• External Tool List Pane—This pane lists the external tools that have been
created. All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools >
External Tools menu.
• New—Creates a new external tool in the list pane.
• Delete—Deletes the currently highlighted tool.
• Rename—Allows you to rename the currently highlighted tool.
• Command—This field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that
the tool will initiate. Click the ellipsis button to open a Windows Open dialog to
allow you to browse to the executable.
• Arguments—This optional field allows you to enter command line variables that
are passed to the tool or command when it is activated. Click the > button to open
a submenu containing predefined arguments. Arguments containing spaces must
be enclosed in quotes. The available arguments are:
– Project Directory—This argument passes the current project directory to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjDir).
– Project File Name—This argument passes the current project file name to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjFile-
Name).
– Project Store File Name—This argument passes the current project datastore
file name to the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is
%(ProjStoreFileName).
– Working Directory—This argument passes the current working directory to
the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(Proj-
WorkDir).

External Tools
• Initial Directory—Specifies the initial or working directory of the tool or

command. Click the > button to open a submenu containing predefined directory
variables. The available variables are:
– Project Directory—This variable specifies the current project directory as
the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjDir).
– Working Directory—This variable specifies the current working directory as
the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjWorkDir).
Test—This button executes the external tool using the specified settings.
External Tools Workflow
Access External Tools from Tools->External Tools->Customize.
If there are any existing tools they will appear as menu items above Customize with a
separator.
1. In the External Tools dialog, click the new button to create a new external tool.
2. The command field should contain the entire path and filename to execute. Use
the […] button to browse to the program or file that will execute. This can be any
file with the following extensions:
a. exe
b. com
c. pif (shortcut file)
d. bat
e. cmd
3. The arguments field is optional. If the program you selected can receive argu-
ments you have a number to choose from.
a. Project Directory - this is the directory to the currently open project.
Displayed as %(ProjDir)
b. Project Filename - this is the filename of the currently open project (what you
see in the project file tab near the top of the drawing window). Displayed as
%(ProjFileName)
c. Project Store Filename - this is the temporary filename that is used and is
stored in the user's temporary directory. Displayed as %(ProjStoreFileName)
d. Working Directory - this is normally the temporary folder location (the user's
temporary folder) where the project store file is located. Displayed as %(Proj-
WorkDir)

Creating Your Model
4. The initial directory is also optional. This is used to set a working directory if one
is required by the program you selected. Normally it is not required. You have the
choice between the following:
a. Project Directory - the directory where the project file is located. Displayed as
%(ProjDir)
b. Working Directory - the directory where the project store file is located.
Displayed as %(ProjWorkDir)
TRex Wizard
The TRex Wizard steps you through the process of automatically assigning elevations
to specified nodes based on data from a Digital Elevation Model or a Digital Terrain
Model.

TRex Wizard
Step 1: File Selection
The DEM, DTM, DDF, or SHP (contour shapefile) file, the SewerCAD V8i model,
and the features to which elevations will be assigned are specified.
• Data Source Type—This menu allows you to choose the type of file that contains
the input data you will use.
• File—This field displays the path where the DXF, XML, or SHP file is located.
Use the browse button to find and select the desired file.
• Select Elevation Field—Select the elevation unit.
• X-Y Units—This menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associ-
ated with the X and Y coordinates of the elevation data file.
• Z Units—This menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated
with the Z coordinates of the elevation data file.
• Clip Dataset to Model—In some cases, the data source contains elevation data
for an area that exceeds the dimensions of the area being modeled. When this box
is checked, TRex will calculate the model’s bounding box, find the larger dimen-
sion (width or height), calculate the Buffering Percentage of that dimension, and
increase both the width and height of the model bounding box by that amount.
Then any data point that falls outside of the new bounding box will not be used to
generate the elevation mesh. If this box isn’t checked, all the source data points
are used to generate the elevation mesh. Checking this box should result in faster
calculation speed and use less memory.
• Buffering Percentage—This field is only active when the Clip Dataset to Model
box is checked. The percentage entered here is the percentage of the larger dimen-
sion (width or height) of the model’s bounding box that will be added to both the
bounding box width and height to find the area within which the source data
points will be used to build the elevation mesh.
• Also update inactive elements—Check this box to include inactive elements in
the elevation assignment operation. When this box is unchecked, elements that are
marked Inactive will be ignored by TRex.
• All—When this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all
nodes within the SewerCAD V8i model.
• Selection—When this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to
all currently highlighted nodes.
• Selection Set—When this is selected, the Selection Set menu is activated. When
the Selection Set button is selected, TRex will assign elevations to all nodes
within the selection set that is specified in this menu.

Creating Your Model
Note: If the SewerCAD V8i model (which may or may not have a spatial
reference explicitly associated with it) is in a different spatial
reference than the DEM/DTM (which does have a spatial
reference explicitly associated with it), then the features of the
model will be projected from the model’s spatial reference to the
spatial reference used by the DEM/DTM.

Step 2: Completing the TRex Wizard
The results of the elevation extraction process are displayed and the results can be
applied to a new or existing physical alternative.
• Results Preview Pane—This tabular pane displays the elevations that were
calculated by TRex. The table can be sorted by label by clicking the Label column
heading and by elevation by clicking the Elevation column heading. You can filter
the table by right-clicking a column in the table and selecting the Filter...Custom
command. You can also right-click any of the values in the elevation column to
change the display options.
• Use Existing Alternative—When this is selected, the results will be applied to
the physical alternative that is selected in the Use Existing Alternative menu. This
menu allows the selection of the physical alternative to which the results will be
applied.
• New Alternative —When this is selected, the results will be applied to a new
physical alternative. First, the currently active physical alternative will be dupli-
cated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the newly created
alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in the New Alter-
native text field.
• Parent Alternative—Select an alternative to duplicate from the menu, or select
<None> to create a new Base alternative.
• Export Results—This exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or comma-
delimited text file (.TXT). These files can then be re-used by SewerCAD V8i or
imported into other programs.
• Click Finish when complete, or Cancel to close without making any changes.

In building a model, a user occasionally runs into situations where there are gaps in
the modeling data for which it is difficult to fill in the information. For example eleva-
tion data may be missing form a manhole or some property may be missing from a
pipe. In such cases, it is desirable to let the model draw "inferences" about those
values from property values from nearby elements. For example, elevations from
upstream and downstream manholes can be used to interpolate values for manhole
elevations between those with known properties or the diameter or material from the
downstream conduit can be used to fill in the diameter and material for conduits for
which those properties are missing.
SewerCAD V8i fills in elevation data such that the slopes of pipes being inferred are
constant along a reach and uses the downstream pipes as the basis for inferring
missing values for pipe properties. In the drawing below, the elevations are interpo-
lated between the known elevations and the physical properties of the downstream

Creating Your Model
pipe are used to fill in the properties of the missing pipes. However, if the user has
manually entered some of the physical properties manually, these values will not be
overridden. Loading information (sanitary load/infiltration rate) and head loss type
(AASHTO, HEC-22) are not inferred but are taken from the manhole prototype.
Where:
• Gu = upstream ground
• Gd = downstream ground
• Zu = upstream invert
• Zd = downstream invert
• N = number of additional manholes
• D = diameter (rise) of downstream pipe
In SewerCAD V8i, element property inferencing is only available for gravity

elements.

There are two general cases for this tool
1. Layout new manholes - In this case, the user knows the elevations of the manholes
at the beginning and end of a run and the physical properties of the downstream
conduit but has not yet placed the intervening manholes and pipes. The user indi-
cates the number of manholes that will be places in the gap and they will automat-
ically be inserted. This is useful in laying out new systems.
2. Follow existing path - In this case, the user has laid out the manholes and the
conduits between them. The user employs this tool to assign properties to the
elements between the upstream and downstream nodes. This is more useful in
filling in details of the system when the path is already determined whether for a
new or existing run of conduits.

Creating Your Model
Element Property Inferencing Dialog
To use the inferencing tool, click the Tools menu and select the Element Property
Inferencing command.
• Layout Type: Identify whether the inferencing tool should Layout New Elements
or Follow Existing path.

• Upstream Node and Downstream node: Pick the upstream and downstream
nodes between which element properties are to be inferred. Click on the Ellipse
(…) button to select the element from the drawing. Picking the element automati-
cally returns control to this dialog. It is important that all data for the upstream and
downstream elements already be entered when opening this dialog. If for example
ground elevations are missing from a node, then the user should close this dialog
and enter that data before opening this dialog.
• Downstream pipe: Field is automatically filled in when the user picks the Down-
stream Node. If the user has attached more than a single downstream conduit to
the downstream node, an error is generated.
• Interpolate ground elevations, Interpolate invert elevations and Overwrite
pipe properties: If checked, the inference tool will overwrite default values in the
nodes and pipes between the upstream and downstream nodes. However, if the
user has manually assigned properties to these elements, those properties will be
retained. These check boxes are only available when Follow Existing Path has
been selected because for new elements (Layout New Elements), the user has no
choice but to accept inferred values. The default elevation is 0 and default pipe
size is 12 in. (300 mm). If the ground elevation has been set to 512 ft (156 m) and
the pipe size set to 18 in. (450 mm), then the inference tool will only interpolate
invert elevations for those elements.
• Number of New Nodes: This field is only available when the user has selected
"Layout New Elements." If the user sets this value to N, the inference tool will
place N nodes and N+1 conduits (of equal length) in a straight line between the
upstream and downstream nodes. For example, if the distance is 1376 ft (419 m)
and the user wants 2 new elements, then the inferencing tool will add two
manholes and three pipes each 459 ft (140 m) long.
• Create new scenario: If the user checks this box, the tool will prompt for the
name and the parent scenario for the scenario being created. If the user does not
check this box, then the new elements and properties will be placed in the current
scenario.
When a new scenario is created and the Parent Scenario is set to None, the alterna-
tives that make up the scenario are selected based on the first scenario listed in the
Scenario Manager, usually the Base scenario. After the Element Property Infer-
encing tool creates a scenario, ensure that the other alternatives in the new
scenario are set up properly (double-check active topology, inflows, initial setting,
etc.).
• Parent scenario: Name of parent scenario if new scenario is being created.
• New scenario label: Name of new scenario if new scenario is being created.
• Override alternative label: When a new scenario is being created, the user can
check this box if the user wants to control the name of the new physical alternative
being created. If not, then the default new name is used.
• New alternative label: if the "Override alternative label" box is checked, then the
user provides the new name here.

Creating Your Model
• Interpolate: Starts the inferencing calculations.

• Close: Closes this dialog. Inferencing settings are saved for the project session.
Once the project is closed, all settings are lost. However, the user can open the
dialog, setup the reach and close this dialog if additional input information is
required. When the user reopens the dialog (as long as the project was not
closed), the settings will be restored.
• Help: Opens this Help.
Note: Note that no new Active Topology alternative is created by this

tool. This is not an issue for the Follow Existing Path option
since no new elements are created, but can be for the Layout
New Elements options. In the latter case, the user should
consider whether it is more desirable to create a new active
topology alternative before running the inferencing tool.
It is advisable to have all elements created and property data

entered before opening this tool. New data cannot be entered
when this dialog is open.
Example
Given the system below, and the values in the inferencing dialog, two new manholes
are created between MH-3 and MH-5.


Creating Your Model
The following summary is displayed after the run.
The resulting model looks like this:

If on the other hand, the system was already laid out with no elevation data for MH-7
and MH-8 and only default pipe sizes (12 in., 300 mm) for CO-6, CO-7 and CO-8, the
profile would initially look like this.
After running, Follow Existing Path, the profile looks like this with correct elevations
and pipe size set to 20 in. based on the downstream conduit properties.

Creating Your Model
New Element Layout Summary Dialog

This dialog appears after an interpolation operation has completed. After a a
successful run the Statistics tab will display the results of the operation, including
how many nodes and pipes were created. The Messages tab displays any warnings or
errors.


Chapter
Loading 7
Click one of the following links to learn how to add loading data to your Bentley
SewerCAD V8i model:
• “Loading” on page 7-349

• “Types of Loads” on page 7-351
• “Composite Hydrographs” on page 7-370
• “Inflows” on page 7-371
• “Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections” on page 7-384
• “Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data” on page 7-387
• “Pipeline Infiltration” on page 7-412
Loading
The word "loading" is used in Bentley SewerCAD V8i to describe flow entering the
sewer system. Depending on the type of system, available data and level of detail,
there are numerous ways of loading Bentley SewerCAD V8i models. Some of the
distinctions relate to whether the system is a combined or sanitary system, whether the
loads are existing with flow data or proposed loads with only land use descriptions,
whether the flow refers to dry weather sanitary flows or wet weather flow.
Note: For more information on loading, see Chapter 6 "Dry weather

wastewater flows" and Chapter 7 "Wet weather wastewater
flows" in the book Wastewater Collection System Modeling and
Design" by Haestad Press.
With the exception of known fixed flows, the loading to the model consists of a table
of flow or pattern values vs. time. The generic word "collection" is used to describe
inputs to Bentley SewerCAD V8i that are not a single value but are some type of table.
For example, you will see Inflow Collections, which are simply a table of inflow vs.
time.

Loading
Methods for Entering Loads
There are several methods for entering loads into Bentley SewerCAD V8i. In general,
most of the methods described can be applied to any node type element (i.e., manhole,
pressure junction, but not outfalls). Some such as stormwater loading must be applied
to catchments and conduit infiltration can only be applied to conduits. They are
summarized below and described in more detail later in this chapter.
• Inflow consists of data which may be:

– Known constant flow
– Hydrograph - flow vs. time
– Pattern Load - baseline flow times multiplier
In general, the hydrograph input is used for wet weather events while pattern
loads are used for sanitary flows which repeat from one day to the next. For more
information, see “Inflows” on page 7-371.
• Sanitary loading consists of data which may be

– Know constant flow
– Hydrograph - flow vs. time
– Pattern Load - baseline flow times multiplier
– Unit loads - number of units (e.g. houses) times unit load (e.g. flow/house/
day)
Sanitary loads are generally used to describe dry weather contribution to flow
from domestic, commercial and industrial customers. For more information, see
“Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections” on page 7-384.
• LoadBuilder consists of using the LoadBuilder model to place loads on nodes

using ArcGIS functions. Unlike the methods above which are applicable when the
loads are already known for each node, LoadBuilder is used when the loading data
is not yet associated with individual nodes. For example, the data can be in the
form of:
– Customer water use billing data
– Area-wide flow measurement
– Load (e.g. population or land use assigned to polygons) times unit loading
factors (e.g. flow/day/area)
For more information, see “Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data” on

page 7-387.

Loading
• Conduit infiltration can be used to model infiltration into pipes along the length of
the pipe. This can be specified as:
– Known unit flow based on Length, Area, Diameter-length, or Count.
– Hydrograph
– Pattern
For more information, see “Pipeline Infiltration” on page 7-412.
Summary
In general:
• Dry weather load can be entered using Inflow, Sanitary Loading and LoadBuilder.
• Wet weather flow in sanitary systems can be entered using inflow, RDII or conduit
infiltration.
• Wet weather flow in stormwater and combined systems can be entered using
Inflow, Stormwater flow or Conduit infiltration.
Types of Loads
Within each of the loading methods available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i, there are
several ways to enter (add) data. For example, under the method Inflow for loading
the model, there are two types of inflow - fixed and hydrograph. For example, under
the method Inflow for loading the model, there are three types of inflow - fixed,
hydrograph and pattern load. These loading types may be used by several methods.
For example, pattern loading is used by the Inflow, Sanitary and Pipeline Infiltration
methods. The dialogs for each of these types are the same regardless of the method
being used.

Types of Loads
The following table illustrates which types of loads are available in each method.
Table 7-1: Types of Loads
Modified Rational
Unit Hydrograph
Pattern Load
RTK Method
Hydrograph
Unit Load
SWMM
Fixed
SCS
Method
Inflow X X X
Sanitary Load X X X X
LoadBuilder *
RDII Inflow X X
Stormwater X X X X
Conduit infiltration * X X X
Table 7-2: Types of Loads

Modified Rational
Unit Hydrograph
RTK Method
Hydrograph
Unit Load
SWMM
Fixed
SCS
Method
Inflow X X
LoadBuilder *
RDII Inflow X X
Stormwater X X X X
Conduit infiltration * X X

Loading
*LoadBuilder used GIS based calculations described in [hot link].
*Conduit infiltrations uses fixed flows on a per length or area basis.
Adding Fixed Loads
A fixed load can be entered as a:
• Known flow under sanitary loading

• Pattern load with the multiplier set to 1
• Hydrograph inflow with "fixed" specified
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads
Hydrographs and pattern loads are two distinct ways to describe how flow varies over
time. Ultimately, you can attain the same results using either type but there are some
behavioral and semantic differences that should be noted.
Pattern loads consists of a single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over time. A hydrograph, simply, is
a time-discharge series.
Hydrographs are usually applied as wet weather loads, and are generated using hydro-
logic methods, while patterns are more typically applied to sanitary loads. Pattern
multipliers are usually developed based on flow monitoring data for the system under
consideration. The multipliers are used to account for time-of-day variations in sewer
loads. Usually a handful of patterns are developed (e.g. residential area, commercial
area, large industry) and these patterns are assigned to the appropriate nodes. These
statements represent typical usage of both loading types; they do not represent hard
and fast rules.
During an extended period simulation if the duration of the simulation exceeds the
duration of a pattern then the pattern will repeat itself. If the duration of the simula-
tion exceeds the duration of a hydrograph the last point of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the extent of the remaining time.
The following figure shows the difference between a hydrograph and pattern load.

Types of Loads
Figure 7-1: Difference between a Hydrograph and Pattern Load
Adding User Defined Hydrographs
You can directly associate a user-defined unit hydrograph to a node element (e.g.
manhole, wet well) or a Conduit for infiltration & inflow calculations.
To add a user defined hydrograph to a node:
1. Click a node in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a node
and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Inflow (Sanitary Loading) or Inflow (Wet) section of the Property Editor,
click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Sanitary Loads or the Inflow (Wet)
Collection field.
3. In the Sanitary Loads dialog click the New button and select Hydrograph - Flow
vs. Time. In the Inflow (Wet) Collection dialog click the New button and select
Hydrograph Load. In the Conduit dialog, under Infiltration, pick Hydrograph as
the Infiltration Load Type.
4. Click the New button to add a row to the Time vs. Flow table.
5. Enter Time vs. Flow data into the table. Press Enter after typing a value to add a
new row to the table (or click the New button to add a new row).
To insert a row at a time in between two other times, simply insert at the bottom of
the table. When you close the table then reopen it, the row will be in the correct
position.

Loading
Note: Time and flow units must be consistent with time and flow units
used throughout the model.
6. Click the Graph button to view a plot of the Time vs. Flow data.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the hydrograph to the Property Editor
for the node.
Pattern Loads
A pattern load consists of a base flow and a pattern, which is a set of multipliers used
to adjust base flow over the course of a day (or some other period). Patterns can also
be used with unit loads by assigning a pattern setup for a particular scenario.
Working with Patterns

A dynamic analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against time-vari-
able loads such as sewer inflows, loads, or chemical constituents. Patterns allow you
to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The most common appli-
cation of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal curves are patterns that
relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day, reflecting times when people
are using more or less water than average. Most patterns are based on a multiplication
factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication factor of one represents the
base value (which is often the average value).
Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that
there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare
breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people
arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects
the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average.

Types of Loads
Note: This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as

representative of any particular network.
There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A step-
wise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and
then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next
jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known
and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the
continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start
time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns
that repeat.
Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts contin-
uous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a
time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That multiplier is then
used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next
time step.
Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.

Loading
Pattern Manager
A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value.
During an extended period analysis, each time step of the simulation uses the multi-
plier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is
longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to
any baseline load that is associated with the pattern. You can also define daily and
monthly multipliers for any pattern.
Patterns provide an effective means of applying time-variable system loads to the

distribution model. The Pattern Manager allows you to create the following types of
patterns:
• Hydraulic—This type of pattern can be applied to Junctions or Tanks. Use this

pattern type to describe load or inflow patterns over time.
• Pump—This type of pattern can be applied to Variable Speed Pumps only. Use
this pattern type to describe changes in the pump’s Relative Speed Factor. In the
Property dialog box for the pump, Is Variable Speed Pump needs to be set to True
and the VSP type needs to be Pattern Based.
The following management controls are located above the pattern list pane:
New Creates a new pattern of the highlighted

type.
Copy Creates a copy of the pattern that is currently


Types of Loads
Delete Deletes the pattern that is currently

Rename Renames the pattern that is currently

Report Opens a report of the data associated with

the pattern that is currently highlighted in
the list pane.
Synchronization Browse the Engineering Library,

Options synchronize to or from the library, import
from the library or export to the library.
Tip: Use the Report button to view or print a graph or detailed report
of your pattern.
The right half of the dialog consists of controls that allow you to define the settings for
the pattern that is currently selected in the list of patterns on the left side of the dialog.
• Start Time—The first time step in the pattern. The start time format is a standard
24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM (e.g., 12:45:30
PM).
• Starting Multiplier—The multiplier value of the first time step point in your
pattern. Any real number can be used for this multiplier (it does not have to be
1.0).
• Pattern Format—The following pattern formats are available:
– Stepwise—The multiplier values are considered to be the average value for

the interval between the specified time and the next time. Patterns using this
format will have a staircase appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified
time and held constant until the next point in the pattern.
– Continuous—The multipliers are considered to be the instantaneous values at
a particular time. Patterns using this format will have a curvilinear appear-
ance. Multipliers are set at the specified time, and are linearly increased or
decreased to the next point in the pattern.
Hourly patterns consist of a number of time step points, defined in the table below the
Pattern Format control on the Hourly tab.

Loading
• Time From Start—The amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the
time step point being defined.
• Multiplier—The multiplier value associated with the time step point.
Daily and Monthly factors are defined in the same way as hourly ones, the difference
being that rather than defining time steps you enter multipliers for each day of the
week (for Daily patterns) or for each month of the year (for monthly patterns).
A graph of the currently selected pattern is displayed in the lower right corner of the
dialog.
Note: Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This
is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the
Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In
other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point
of the pattern’s next cycle.
An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of Steady State

analyses for which the boundary conditions of the current time
step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time
step. This software will automatically convert a continuous
pattern format to a stepwise format so that the loads and source
concentrations remain constant during a time step.
An individual node can support multiple hydraulic loads.

Furthermore, each load can be assigned any hydraulic load
pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine
two or more types of load patterns (such as residential and
institutional) at a single loading node.
Defining Pattern Setups

A pattern setup allows you to match unit sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate
loading patterns. A pattern setup is associated with each scenario as specified in the
Calculation Options Manager. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup, thus
allowing you to model different loading alternatives for different extended period
simulations.

Types of Loads
Note: You must have at least one unit sanitary (dry weather) load set
up in your model and at least one pattern defined before you can
define a pattern setup.
To define a pattern setup:
1. Define at least one unit sanitary (dry weather) load in your current project. For
more information, see “Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads” on page 7-
364.
2. Define at least one pattern in your current project.
3. Select Analysis > Pattern Setups or click the Pattern Setups button on the Anal-
ysis toolbar.
4. In the Pattern Setups dialog box, click the New button to create a new pattern
setup.
5. The table on the right side of the dialog box displays all of the unit sanitary (dry
weather) loads currently associated with your current project. For each unit load
in the table, select an existing pattern from the Setup Pattern submenu.
– To delete an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in the list
pane, then click the Delete button.
– To rename an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in the list
pane, then click the Rename button and type the new name of the pattern
setup.
– To view a report on an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in
the list pane, then click the Report button.
7. Click Close.
Pattern Setups Dialog Box

The Pattern Setups dialog box lets you define a list of pattern setups. The dialog box
contains a list pane on the left and a table on the right:

Loading
The dialog box contains the following controls above the list pane:
New Creates a new pattern setup in the list pane.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted pattern

setup.

pattern setup.

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted pattern setup.
The right side of the dialog contains a table with the following fields:
Column Description
Unit Load Each row displays a unit sanitary (dry weather)

load in the current project.
Set Pattern Lets you select an existing pattern to apply to the

unit load.
Pattern Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define pattern curves for the Patterns Engineering Library.
It consists of the Time From Start vs.Multiplier table and the following controls:
New Adds a new row to the table.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted row in

the table.
The table consists of the following columns:
Time From Start: Enter the time from start for the corresponding multiplier.

Types of Loads
Multiplier: Enter the value by which the associated attribute is multiplied for the
corresponding time.
Unit Sanitary Loading
A unit loading consists of a unit (person, building, area) multiplied by a unit load (gal/
capita/day, litres/sq m/day, cfs/acre). The units are assigned to individual nodes
elements (manholes, pressure junctions) while the unit loads are created using the Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box.
Unit loads are calculated as: Load (flow Units) = Unit load (flow/number) x number
of Loading units. For example: 100 gallons/capita/day x 40 people = 4000 gallons per
day.
If the unit loads are not assigned to nodes but to polygons in a GIS, then it is best to
use LoadBuilder to import the loads. For more information, see “Using LoadBuilder
to Assign Loading Data” on page 7-387.
For more information, see “Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads” on page 7-
364 and “Types of Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads” on page 7-362.
Unit loads correspond to a baseline load and time of day patterns can be assigned to
scenarios. For more information, see “Defining Pattern Setups” on page 7-359.
Default unit load information is not stored with the project but with a library that can
be shared between projects. Default values are provided in the library called "HMI
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.xml"
Types of Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

The following types of unit sanitary loads are supported in Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
Population-based
The most common way of specifying sanitary loads to a sewer system is to make them
proportional to the contributing population. Population-based unit sanitary loads
define loads as a function of adjusted contributing population. You can select the
population loading units that will be used and the unit load per population unit. For
example, the unit sanitary load, Home (Average), specifies Resident as the population
loading unit, and 280 l/d per Resident as the unit load per population unit.
Non-population-based
Non-population-based unit sanitary loads can be area-based (function of contributing

area), discharge-based (function of direct discharge), or count-based (function of a
user-defined count).

Loading
Area-based
Area-based unit sanitary loads are commonly used to specify industrial loads and
steady inflows. Use these unit sanitary loads whenever your load is specified as a
function of contributing area. For example, you may use "area residential" (in hectare)
as a property of each node and 400 L/day/hectare as the unit loading.
Discharge-based
Discharge-based unit sanitary loads are used to directly specify loads without speci-
fying them on the basis of some other count, such as population or area.
There are two general ways to use discharge based loads:
• Specify 1.0 discharge unit (e.g. l/day, gpd, cfs, etc.) as the unit load. Then, when
using the load, specify the total desired load for the loading unit count. For
example, you can create a load called Liter per Day whose loading unit type is
Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit load is 1.0. When you use this load at a
manhole, a wet well, or a pressure junction, you specify 50.0 as the loading unit
count. This yields a base load of 50 l/day.
• Specify total desired load as the unit load. Then, when using the load, only
specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. For example, you can create a load called
Industry XYZ whose loading unit type is Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit
load is 2000.0. When you use this load at the manhole, wet well, or pressure junc-
tion, you would specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. This yields a base load of
2000 l/day.
In other words, you can specify a unit load of 1.0 in the Unit Sanitary Load Library
and determine the total load at each node through the loading unit count, or you can
specify the total load in the Unit Sanitary Load Library and then have a loading unit
count of 1.0.
Count-based
Count-based unit sanitary loads should be used for any load that is not area, popula-
tion, nor discharge-based. These loads allow you to specify any loading unit such as
loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
Loading units in user-defined counts are treated only as labels. Conversion between
these units is always 1 to 1.

Types of Loads
Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

Bentley SewerCAD V8i defines unit sanitary loads in editable Engineering Libraries,
allowing you to edit predefined unit sanitary loads and insert new ones. A unit sanitary
load is used to specify loads to a sewer system for a user-selected loading unit. Unit
sanitary loads can be either population-based or non-population-based. Population-
based unit sanitary loads specify a load to the sewer system as a function of the
contributing population. Non-population-based loads specify loads based on service
area, discharge, or user-defined counts.
You add unit sanitary loads using the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box or
Bentley SewerCAD V8i’ Engineering Libraries.
To add a unit sanitary (dry weather) load:
1. Select Component > Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads, or click the Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads button on the Analysis toolbar.
2. In the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box, click the New button, then
select the type of unit sanitary load you want to create from the submenu (Area,
Count, Discharge, or Population).
3. On the Unit Sanitary Load tab, enter the following data:
– For area-based loads, select the desired unit from the Area Unit drop-down
menu.
– For discharge-based loads, select the desired unit from the Discharge Units
drop down menu.
– For count-based loads, type the base unit used to define the count-based load
in the Count Load Unit field. You can specify any unit you want, such as
loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
– For population-based loads, select the desired unit from the Population Units
drop-down menu.
– Type the amount of flow contributed per loading unit in the Unit Load field.

Loading
– Type the count of adjusted population per loading unit in the Population
Equivalent field. For area based loads, this is essentially a population density,
or population per unit area.
– Check the Report Adjusted Population check box to report the adjusted popu-
lation with other populations. If you clear this check box, the adjusted popula-
tion will be not be reported as part of the total population.
4. You can save your new load in Bentley SewerCAD V8i’ Engineering Libraries for
future use. To do this, perform these steps:
a. Click the Synchronization Options button, then select Export to Library.

The Engineering Libraries dialog box appears.
b. Use the plus and minus signs to expand and collapse the list of available
libraries, then select the library into which you want to export your new unit
sanitary load.
c. Click Close to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box.

– To delete a load, select the load label then click Delete.
– To rename an load, select the load label you want to rename, click Rename,
then type the new name for the load.
– To view a report on a load, select the load label for which you want a report
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box.
To add a unit sanitary load in the Engineering Library:
1. Select Tools > Engineering Libraries to display the Engineering Libraries dialog
box.
2. Click the plus sign next to the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads Library to
expand the list of items (categories and folders) included in that library. This
library includes a category entitled Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.
Note: You can add new items to a category or a folder, add new folders
to categories, and add new categories to libraries. For more
information, see “Engineering Libraries” on page 6-378.
3. Right-click the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads category (or a different cate-
gory or folder) and select New Item.

Types of Loads
4. Define the new unit sanitary load in the Editor pane on the right as described in
the following steps:
a. Type the unit load in the Unit Load field.
b. Select the load type from the Loading Unit Type drop-down (Area Based,
Count Based, Discharge Based, or Population Based).
c. Select the load units from the Sanitary Unit Load Units drop-down. For count-
based loads, you can specify any unit you want, such as loading per vehicle or
machine.
d. For area-, count-, and discharge-based loads, type the count of adjusted popu-
lation per loading unit in the Pop.Equivalent (Capita) field. For area based
loads, this is essentially a population density, or population per unit area.
e. For area-, count-, and discharge-based loads, select True from the Report
Adjusted Population drop down to report the adjusted population with other
populations. Select False if you don’t want to report the adjusted population
as part of total population.
5. Click Close. Your new unit sanitary load is now part of the Engineering Libraries
and can be re-used any time.
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to create unit sanitary (dry weather) loads. There are two
sections: the list pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The list pane lets you
create, edit, and delete unit sanitary loads and the tab section contains entry fields for
each type of unit sanitary load.

Loading
The following controls are available in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load dialog
box:
New Creates a new unit sanitary load that uses

an automatically created label.
• Area—Adds a new area-based unit
sanitary load to the list pane. An area-
based unit sanitary load is a function of
contributing service area.
• Count—Adds a new count-based unit
sanitary load. A count-based unit sani-
tary load is a function of a user-defined
count. Count-based unit sanitary loads
should be used for any load that is not
area-, discharge-, or population-based.
• Discharge—Adds a new discharge-
based unit sanitary load. A discharge-
direct discharge.
• Population—Adds a new population-
based unit sanitary load. A population-
adjusted contributing population.

Types of Loads
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted unit

sanitary load.

unit sanitary load.

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted unit sanitary load.
Synchronization Clicking this button opens a submenu

Options containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—
Opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to
browse the Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Load Engineering Libraries.
• Synchronize From Library—Lets you
update a set of unit sanitary loads
previously imported from a Unit Sani-
tary (Dry Weather) Load Engineering
Library. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library
since it was imported.
• Synchronize To Library—Lets you
update an existing Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Load Engineering Library
using current unit sanitary loads that
were initially imported but have since
been modified.
• Import From Library—Lets you
import a unit sanitary load from an
existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library.
• Export To Library—Lets you export
the current unit sanitary load to an
existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library.

Loading
The tab section includes the following controls:
Unit Sanitary Load Tab
Area Unit Lets you specify the base unit used to define the
area-based load.
Unit Load Lets you specify the amount of flow contributed

per loading unit.
Population Equivalent Lets you specify the count of adjusted population

per loading unit. For area based loads, this is
essentially a population density, or population per
unit area. The Population equivlant field is
optional and simply converts area or count into
equivalent popultion, based on the Population
equivalent value.
Report Adjusted If this option is toggled ON, the adjusted

Population population will be reported with other
populations. If the option is OFF, adjusted
population will be not be reported as part of the
total population.
Count Load Unit Lets you specify the base unit used to define the
count-based load. You can specify any unit you
want, such as loading per vehicle, machine, or
anything else.
Discharge Units Lets you specify the base unit used to define the
discharge-based load.
Population Units Lets you specify the base unit used to define the
unit load.
Library Tab This tab displays information about the unit

sanitary load that is currently highlighted in the
list pane. If the load is derived from an
engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the load was created
manually for this project, the synchronization
details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the pump was not derived from a
library entry.

Composite Hydrographs
Composite Hydrographs
A composite hydrograph graphs the total flow over time from multiple defined fixed/
unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads and hydrographs.
You can access the composite hydrograph and its corresponding data table from the
Inflow Collection dialog box, which is and the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collec-
tion Editor dialog box, both of which are available from the Property Editor for
selected elements. For example, a manhole has properties for Inflow Collection and
Sanitary Loading.
This graph is dynamic and is generated automatically each time it is requested.
The time step in a composite hydrograph is determined by going from time 0 to the
Total Simulation Time divided by Calculation Time Step. You can define the Total
Simulation Time and Calculation Time Step values in the Calculation Options
Manager. For more information, see “Calculation Options Manager” on page 8-575.
Composite Hydrograph Window
This window displays the composite hydrograph from multiple fixed/unit loads,
hydrographs, and pattern loads defined in either the Inflow Collection dialog box or
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box.
This window displays the composite hydrograph from multiple fixed/unit loads and
hydrographs, defined in the Inflow Collection dialog box.
You access the Composite Hydrograph window by clicking the Graph button in the
Inflow Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog
box. If you have only one load or hydrograph defined, the graph displays the data for
that single load or hydrograph.
The Composite Hydrograph window contains the following button:
Chart Settings Opens the Chart Options dialog box,

allowing you to change graph display
settings.
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window
This window displays a table of all the data points in a composite hydrograph from
multiple fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads defined in either the Inflow
Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box.

Loading
The data table displays the same data used in the composite hydrograph in numerical
form. The table contains two columns: the first column displays the time steps and the
second column displays the flows. The values in this table can not be edited.
You access the Data Table window by clicking the Data Table button in the Inflow
Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box. If
you have only one load or hydrograph defined, the Data Table displays the data for
that single load or hydrograph.
The Composite Hydrograph Data Table window contains the following buttons:
Copy Copies the contents of the data table to the

Windows clipboard. You can then paste the
data into a different application or document.
Paste Pastes the contents of the Windows clipboard

into the data table. This is useful if you’ve
got the data defined in a different document
or application and want to simply copy and
paste it into a composite hydrograph.

dialog box.
Inflows
The word "inflow" is used in two ways in sewer modeling. It is used first to describe
wet weather flows to sewer systems that do not infiltrate through the ground [inflow
and infiltration loading] and it is used in Bentley SewerCAD V8i to describe any flow
which enters a node element whether it is a fixed inflow, hydrograph or pattern load.
The type of load available depends on the element type. The descriptions below, refer
to the Bentley SewerCAD V8i definition of inflow.
The following diagrams describe the various types of flow used in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.

Inflows
Table 7-3: Flow Attributes and Definitions
Flow Attribute Definition MH-1 MH-2 MH-3
Flow (Total In) Flow piped In from upstream links 0 18 5.5
Flow (Locally Injected) Flow injected into system at node. 15 4 0
Flow (Total Out) Flow (Total In) + Flow (Locally Injected) or 15 22 5.5
Flow (Non-Diverted Out) + Flow (Diverted
Out)
Flow (System Wet Well Collection) Portion of the Flow (Total Out) derived from 10 10 2.5
Inflow (Wet) Collection
Flow (System Known) Portion of the Flow (Total Out) derived from 0 0 0
Known Flows
Flow (Total Diverted In) Flow (Local Diverted In Same Subnetwork) + 0 0 5.5
Flow (Diverted In Outside Subnetwork)
Flow (Local Diverted In Same Subnetwork) Portion of Flow (Total In) which is diverted in 0 0 0
from an element in the same subnetwork.
Flow (Diverted In Outside Subnetwork) Portion of Flow (Total In) which is diverted in 0 0 5.5
from an element outside the subnetwork.
Flow (System Sanitary) Portion of Flow (Total Out) which is derived 5 9 2.25
from Sanitary Loads

Loading
Table 7-3: Flow Attributes and Definitions
Flow Attribute Definition MH-1 MH-2 MH-3
Flow (Non-Diverted Out) Portion of Flow (Total Out) which exits via 15 16.5 4.5
physical conduits.
Flow (Diverted Out) Portion of Flow (Total Out) which exits via 0 5.5 0
diversion links
Infiltration (System Additional) Portion of Flow (Total Out) derived from Flow 0 1 0.25
(Additional Infiltration) on conduits
Infiltration (System Non-Additional) Portion of Flow (Total Out) derived from 0 2 0.5
computed infiltration on conduits.
Infiltration (System Total) Infiltration (System Additional) + Infiltration 0 3 0.75

(System Non-Additional)
Flow (System Total Wet Weather) Flow (System Wet Weather Collection) + 10 13 3.25
Infiltration (System Total)

Inflows
Note: The calculated manhole result Flow (Downstream Conduit) is

obtained using the following formula:
Flow (Total Out) - Flow (Diverted Out)
The following diagram describes flows at a wet well:
Table 7-4: Wet Well Flows
Attribute Definition Flow (cfs)
Load (Calculated) Loads from gravity system + 6 + 5 + 1 = 12

locally injected flow
Flow (Total Out) Flow exiting the wet well into the 4
pressure network
Flow (Out net) Net flow exiting the wet well 4 - 1 - 1.5 - 6 - 5 = -9.5
Flow (In net) Net flow entering the wet well 5 + 6 + 1.5 + 1 - 4 = 9.5
Defining Inflow Collections
You can define an inflow collection for any node element in SewerCAD V8i. An
inflow collection can contain any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or pattern
inflows. An inflow collection can contain any combination of fixed and hydrograph
inflows.

Loading
To define an inflow collection:
1. Click a node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
node element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Inflow Collection section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...)
button. The Inflow Collection Editor appears.
3. Click the New button, then select the type of inflow you want to create from the
submenu (Fixed Inflow, Hydrograph Inflow, Pattern Inflow).
4. For a Hydrograph Inflow, enter the data points in the hydrograph table. For Fixed
and Pattern Inflows, enter the data in the appropriate fields.
Note: For a hydrograph, if the last time in the table is less than the total
simulation time, the simulation time and last flow will be
appended to the hydrograph table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each inflow you want to add to the collection.
6. Click the Composite Hydrograph button to see a graph of the composite
hydrograph.
7. Click the Composite Hydrograph Data Table button to see a tabular view of all
the data points in the composite hydrograph.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection data to the Property
Editor.
Inflow Collection Editor

This dialog box lets you define fixed loads, hydrograph loads, and pattern inflows for
any node element. A node may have any combination of fixed loads, hydrograph
loads, and pattern inflows.
The dialog box contains an Inflow list pane and the following controls:

Inflows

options:
• Fixed Inflow—Adds a new Fixed Load
inflow to the Inflow list pane.
• Hydrograph Inflow—Adds a new
Hydrograph inflow to the Inflow list pane.
• Pattern Load—Adds a new Pattern
Load to the inflow list pane.
Delete Lets you delete the currently highlighted

load.

dialog box.
Composite Opens a graph window plotting a curve of a

Graph selected single sanitary load or the composite
hydrograph of all loads.
Composite Opens a window listing all the data points in

Hydrograph the curve of a selected single sanitary load or
in the composite hydrograph of all loads.

Loading
The Inflow Collection Editor also contains the following controls:
Hydrograph Table Lets you define the hydrograph by entering Time

vs. Flow points. This table is available only when
a Hydrograph Load inflow is highlighted in the
Inflow list pane. If the last time in the table is less
than the total simulation time, the simulation time
and last flow will be appended to the hydrograph
table.
Fixed Load Lets you define a fixed load value. This field is
available only when a Fixed Load inflow is
highlighted in the Inflow list pane. Set the fixed
flow that affects the manhole.
Base Inflow Lets you enter the average inflow over the
duration of the simulation.
Inflow Pattern Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern
inflow. Patterns are selected, edited, and created in
the Pattern Manager, which you access by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button next to this field.
Inflow Control Center
The Inflow Control Center is an editor for manipulating all the inflows in your model.
Using the Inflow Control Center, you can add new inflows, delete existing inflows, or
modify the values for existing inflows using standard SQL select and update queries.
The Inflow Control Center provides load editing capabilities which can:
• open on all inflow nodes, or subset of inflow nodes,

• sort and filter based on inflow criteria,

Inflows
• add, edit, and delete individual inflows,

• globally edit inflows.

Loading
The Inflow Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each element type
that list all of the inflows for all of the elements in the model and a pane that displays
Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted element.
It also contains the following controls:

Inflows
New Clicking the New button opens a submenu containing the following
commands:
• Add Fixed Load to Element—Adds a new Fixed Load to the element
currently selected in the list pane.
• Add Hydrograph Load to Element—Adds a new Hydrograph Load to
the element currently selected in the list pane.
• Add Pattern Load to Element—Adds a new pattern load to the
element currently selected in the list pane.
• Add Inflows—Return the view to te drawing pane, allowing you to
select an element from the drawing. After an element has been
selected, the Apply Inflow Type to Selection dialog opens, allowing
you to enter a Fixed or Hydrograph Load to the element you selected.
• Initialize Fixed Loads for All Elements—Adds a Fixed Load to each
element of the current type in the model that does not currently have
an inflow defined. The loads added by this command have an initial
value of 0.0.
• Initialize Hydrograph Loads for All Elements—Adds a Hydrograph
Load to each element of the current type in the model that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The hydrographs added by this
command are intially blank.
• Initialize Pattern Load for All Elements—Adds a Pattern Load to each
element of the current type in the model that does not currently have
an inflow defined. The loads added by this command have an initial
value of 0.0.
• Initialize Fixed Load for Selection—Adds a Fixed Load to each
element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this command
have an initial value of 0.0.
• Initialize Hydrograph Load for Selection—Adds a Hydrograph Load to
each element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The hydrographs added by this
command are intially blank.
• Initialize Pattern Load for Selection—Adds a Pattern Load to each
element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined.The loads added by this command
have an initial value of 0.0.
Note: You can only use one type of Initialize operation

in any given element. For example, if you
perform an Initialize Fixed Loads for All
Elements operation, you will not then be able to
then perform an Initialize Hydrograph Loads for
All Elements on the model.
If you wish to add another inflow of a different

type than the one that was Initialized, you must
do so for each individual element.
Delete Deletes the currently selected row from the list. Delete commands can not
be undone.
Report Opens a report containing the inflow information displayed in each tab of
the list pane.
Create or Add to Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following
a Selection Set commands:
• Create Selection Set—Creates a new selection set
consisting of the currently highlighted elements.
• Add to Selection Set—Adds the currently selected elements
to an existing selection set.
• Remove from Selection Set—Removes the currently
selected elements from an existing selection set.

Loading
Zoom To Centers the drawing pane view on the currently selected element.
Find Opens the Find Element dialog, allowing you to search for a
specific element.
Options Allows you to sort and/or filter the contents of the list pane.
Apply Sanitary Inflow Type to Selection Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign an inflow to the currently selected element or
elements. The dialog appears after you have used the Add Inflows command in the
Inflow Control Center. To add an inflow, choose the inflow type, then enter inflow
data and click OK for a Fixed Inflow or just click OK for a Hydrograph Inflow. If a
Hydrograph Inflow is selected, the hydrograph must then be defined in the hydrograph
pane of the Inflow Control Center.
Sanitary Load Control Center
The Sanitary Load Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each
element type that list all of the loads for all of the elements in the model and a pane
that displays Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted element,
along with the following controls:

Inflows

Loading
New Clicking the New button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
• Add Unit Load to Element—Adds a new Unit Load to the
element currently selected in the list pane.
• Add Sanitary Hydrograph to Element—Adds a new sanitary
hydrograph to the element currently selected in the list pane.
• Add Pattern Load to Element—Adds a new pattern load to
the element currently selected in the list pane.
• Add Sanitary Loads—Return the view to te drawing pane,
allowing you to select an element from the drawing. After an
element has been selected, the Apply Sanitary Load to
Selection dialog opens, allowing you to enter a Sanitary
Hydrograph, Unit Load, or Pattern Load to the element you
selected.
• Initialize Unit Loads for All Elements—Adds a Unit Load to
each element of the current type in the model that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
command have an initial value of 0.0.
• Initialize Hydrograph Loads for All Elements—Adds a
Hydrograph Load to each element of the current type in the
model that does not currently have an inflow defined. The
hydrographs added by this command are intially blank.
• Initialize Pattern Load for All Elements—Adds a Pattern Load
to each element of the current type in the model that does
not currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
• Initialize Unit Loads for Selection—Adds a Unit Load to each
element that is currently selected in the list pane that does
not currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
• Initialize Hydrograph Load for Selection—Adds a
Hydrograph Load to each element that is currently selected
in the list pane that does not currently have an inflow defined.
The hydrographs added by this command are intially blank.
• Initialize Pattern Load for Selection—Adds a Pattern Load to
each element that is currently selected in the list pane that
does not currently have an inflow defined.The loads added
by this command have an initial value of 0.0.
Note: You can only use one type of Initialize

operation for any given element. For
example, if you perform an Initialize
Hydrograph Loads for All Elements
operation, you will not then be able to
then perform an Initialize Pattern Load for
All Elements on the model.
If you wish to add another load of a

different type than the one that was
Initialized, you must do so for each
individual element.
Delete Deletes the currently selected row from the list. Delete commands
can not be undone.

Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections
Report Opens a report containing the load information displayed in each

tab of the list pane.
Create or Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Add to a
• Create Selection Set—Creates a new selection set
Selection
consisting of the currently highlighted elements.
Set
• Add to Selection Set—Adds the currently selected elements
to an existing selection set.
• Remove from Selection Set—Removes the currently
selected elements from an existing selection set.
Zoom To Centers the drawing pane view on the currently selected element.
Find Opens the Find Element dialog, allowing you to search for a
specific element.
Options Allows you to sort and/or filter the contents of the list pane.
Apply Sanitary Load to Selection Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign a sanitary load to the currently selected element or
elements. The dialog appears after you have used the Add Sanitary Loads command in
the Sanitary Load Control Center. To add a load, choose the load type, then enter load
data and click OK for a Sanitary Unit Load or Sanitary Pattern Load. Click OK for a
Sanitary Hydrograph. If a Sanitary Hydrograph is selected, the hydrograph must then
be defined in the hydrograph pane of the Sanitary Load Control Center.

You can define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection for any node element in your
model. A sanitary flow collection can contain any combination of hydrograph, unit, or
pattern loads.

Loading
To define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection:
1. Click an element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an

element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Sanitary Loads section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button.
The Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor appears.
3. Click the New button, then select the type of sanitary load you want to create from
the submenu (Hydrograph - Flow vs. Time, Unit Load - Unit Type and Count, or
Pattern Load - Base Flow and Pattern).
4. For a Hydrograph, enter the data points in the hydrograph table. For Unit and
Pattern Loads, enter the data in the appropriate fields.
Note: For a hydrograph, if the last time in the table is less than the total
simulation time, the simulation time and last flow will be
appended to the hydrograph table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each load you want to add to the collection.
6. Click the Composite Hydrograph button to see a graph of the composite
hydrograph.
7. Click the Composite Hydrograph Data Table button to see a tabular view of all
the data points in the composite hydrograph.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection data to the Property
Editor.
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor

This dialog box lets you define collections of sanitary (dry weather) loads for the
selected element in your model. Sanitary loads correspond to loads produced by resi-
dential, commercial, recreational, and industrial activity. A sanitary load represents
the base load to the sewer system.

The dialog box contains a list pane and the following controls:

options:
• Hydrograph - Flow vs. Time—Adds a
new hydrograph load to the list pane.
This is a flow vs. time distribution.
• Unit Load - Unit Type and Count—
Adds a new unit load to the list pane.
Unit Type refers to the type of Unit Load
and Count refers to the number of units
associated with the unit load. For
example, 5000 passengers at an airport.
• Pattern Load - Base Flow and
Pattern—Adds a new pattern load to the
list pane. A pattern load is a direct,
known sanitary load with a set pattern.
Delete Lets you delete the currently highlighted

load.

dialog box.
Composite Opens a graph window plotting a curve of a

Hydrograph selected single sanitary load or the composite
hydrograph of all loads.
Composite Opens a window listing all the data points in

Hydrograph the curve of a selected single sanitary load or
Data Table in the composite hydrograph of all loads.
Depending on the type of sanitary load you select in the list pane, the following
controls appear:
Hydrograph Table Lets you define the hydrograph by entering Time

From Start vs. Sanitary Flow points. This table is
available only when a hydrograph load is
highlighted in the list pane. If the last time in the
table is less than the total simulation time, the
simulation time and last flow will be appended to
the hydrograph table.

Loading
Unit Sanitary Load Lets you select the type of the load (for example
Apartment or Airport). Unit sanitary loads are
selected, edited, and created in the Unit Sanitary
(Dry Weather) Load dialog box, which you access
by clicking the ellipsis (…) button next to this
field.
Loading Unit Count Lets you enter the local count of loading units for
the selected unit sanitary load.
Base Flow Lets you enter the average inflow over the
duration of the simulation.
Pattern Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern
load. Pattern loads are selected, edited, and
created in the Pattern Manager, which you access
by clicking the ellipsis (...) button next to this
field.
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data

LoadBuilder is a tool used to assign flows to elements in Bentley SewerCAD V8i. If
you already know what flows to assign to an element, then you should use the other
methods such as inflow, sanitary loads, or stormwater loading. The power of Load-
Builder is that it can take loading information from a variety of Loadbuilder based
sources such as customer meter data, system flow meter or polygons with known
population or land use and assign those flows to elements. LoadBuilder is oriented to
the types of data available to describe dry weather flows and other methods in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i are more amenable to wet weather flows.
The consumption of water is the driving force behind the hydraulic dynamics occur-
ring in water distribution systems. When simulating these dynamics in your water
distribution model, an accurate representation of system loads is as critical as
precisely modeling the physical components of the model.
To realize the full potential of the model as a master planning and decision support
tool, you must accurately allocate loads while anticipating future loads. Collecting the
necessary data and translating it to model loading data must be performed regularly to
account for changes to the network conditions. Due to the difficulties involved in
manually loading the model, automated techniques have been developed to assist the
modeler with this task.
Spatial allocation of loads is the most common approach to loading a water distribu-
tion model. The spatial analysis capabilities of Loadbuilder make these applications a
logical tool for the automation of the load allocation process.

LoadBuilder leverages the spatial analysis abilities of your Loadbuilder software to

distribute loads according to geocoded meter data, load density information, and
coverage polygon intersections.
LoadBuilder greatly facilitates the tasks of load allocation and projection. Every step
of the loading process is enhanced, from the initial gathering and analysis of data from
disparate sources and formats to the employment of various allocation strategies.
The following are descriptions of the types of allocation strategies that can be applied
using LoadBuilder.
Allocation
This uses the spatial analysis capabilities of Loadbuilder to assign geocoded

(possessing coordinate data based on physical location, such as an x-y coordinate)
customer meters to the nearest load node or pipe. Assigning metered loads to nodes is
a point-to-point load allocation technique, meaning that known point loads (customer
meters) are assigned to network load points (load nodes). Assigning metered loads to
pipes is also a point-to-point assignment technique, since loads must still be assigned
to node elements, but there is an additional step involved. When using the Nearest
Pipe meter assignment strategy, the loads at a meter are assigned to the nearest pipe.

Loading
From the pipe, the load is then distributed to the nodes at the ends of the pipe by
utilizing a distribution strategy. Meter assignment is the simplest technique in terms of
required data, because there is no need for service polygons to be applied (see Figure
below).
Meter assignment can prove less accurate than the more complex allocation strategies
because the nearest node is determined by straight-line proximity between the load
node and the consumption meter. Piping routes are not considered, so the nearest load
node may not be the location from which the meter actually receives its flow. In addi-
tion, the actual location of the service meter may not be known.
The geographic location of the meter in the Loadbuilder is not necessarily the point
from which water is taken from the system, but may be the centroid of the land parcel,
the centroid of building footprint, or a point along the frontage of the building. Ideally,
these meter points should be placed at the location of the tap, but the centroid of the
building or land parcel may be all that is known about a customer account.

Note: In LoadBuilder, the Nearest Node and Nearest Pipe strategies

are also in the Allocation loading method.
Billing Meter Aggregation
Billing Meter aggregation is the technique of assigning all meters within a service
polygon to a specified load node (see Figure below). Service polygons define the
service area for each of the load nodes.
Meter Aggregation is a polygon-to-point allocation technique, because the service

areas are contained in a Loadbuilder polygon layer, while again, the load nodes are
contained in a point layer. The loads associated with the meters within each of the
service area polygons is assigned to the respective load node points.
Due to the need for service polygons, the initial setup for this approach is more
involved than the meter assignment strategy, the trade-off being greater control over
the assignment of meters to load nodes. Automated construction of the service poly-
gons may not produce the desired results, so it may be necessary to manually adjust
the polygon boundaries, especially at the edges of the drawing.

Loading
Note: In LoadBuilder, the Billing Meter Aggregation strategy falls into

the meter aggregation category of loading methods.
Distribution
This strategy involves distributing lump-sum area water use data among a number of
service polygons (service areas) and, by extension, their associated load nodes. The
lump-sum area is a polygon for which the total (lump-sum) water use of all of the
service areas (and their load nodes) within it is known (metered), but the distribution
of the total water use among the individual nodes is not. The water use data for these
lump-sum areas can be based on system meter data from pump stations, treatment
plants or flow control valves, meter routes, pressure zones, and traffic analysis zones
(TAZ). The lump sum area for which a flow is known must be a Loadbuilder polygon.
There is one flow rate per polygon, and there can be no overlap of or open space
between the polygons.
The known flow within the lump-sum area is generally divided among the service
polygons within the area using one of two techniques: equal distribution or propor-
tional distribution:
• The equal flow distribution option simply divides the known flow evenly
between the load nodes. The equal flow distribution strategy is illustrated in the
diagram below. The lump-sum area in this case is a polygon layer that represents
meter route areas. For each of these meter route polygons, the total flow is known.
The total flow is then equally divided among the load nodes within each of the
meter route polygons (See Figure).
• The proportional distribution option (by area or by population) divides the
lump-sum flow among the service polygons based upon one of two attributes of
the service polygons-the area or the population. The greater the percentage of the
lump-sum area or population that a service polygon contains, the greater the
percentage of total flow that will be assigned to that service polygon.
Note: In addition to the distribution options listed above, LoadBuilder

allows Nearest node and Farthest node strategies as well.
Each service polygon has an associated load node, and the flow that is calculated for
each service polygon is assigned to this load node. For example, if a service polygon
consists of 50 percent of the lump-sum polygon’s area, then 50 percent of the flow
associated with the lump-sum polygon will be assigned to the load node associated
with that service polygon. This strategy requires the definition of lump-sum area or
population polygons in the Loadbuilder, service polygons in the model, and their
related load nodes. Sometimes the flow distribution technique must be used to assign

unaccounted-for-water to nodes, and when any method that uses customer metering
data as opposed to system metering data is implemented. For instance, when the flow
is metered at the well, unaccounted-for-water is included; when the customer meters
are added together, unaccounted-for-water is not included.
Note: In LoadBuilder, the Equal Flow Distribution, Proportional

Distribution by Area, and Proportional Distribution by
Population strategies fall within the flow distribution category of
loading methods.
In the following figure, the total load in meter route A may be 55 gpm (3.48 L/s) while
in meter route B the load is 72 gpm (4.55 L/s). Since there are 11 nodes in meter route
A, if equal distribution is used, the load at each node would be 5 gpm (0.32 L/s), while
in meter route B, with 8 nodes, the load at each node would be 9 gpm (0.57 L/s).
Point load Assignment

Loading
A point load assignment technique is used to directly assign a load to a load node. This
strategy is primarily a manual operation, and is used to assign large (generally indus-
trial or commercial) water users to the load node that serves the consumer in question.
This technique is unnecessary if all loads are accounted for using one of the other allo-
cation strategies.
Projection
Automated techniques have also been developed to assist in the estimation of loads
using land use and population density data. These are similar to the Flow Distribution
allocation methods except that the type of base layer that is used to intersect with the
service layer may contain information other than flow, such as land use or population.
This type of load estimation can be used in the projection of future loads; in this case,
the load allocation relies on a polygon layer that contains data regarding expected
future conditions. A variety of data types can be used with this technique, including
future land use, projected population, or load density (in polygon form), with the poly-
gons based upon traffic analysis zones, census tracts, planning districts, or another
classification. Note that these data sources can also be used to assign current loads; the
difference between the two being the data that is contained within the source. If the
data relates to projected values, it can be used for load projections.
Many of these data types do not include load information, so further data conversion is
required to translate the information contained in the future condition polygons into
projected load values. This entails translating the data contained within your data
source to flow, which can then be applied using LoadBuilder.
After an appropriate conversion method is in place, the service layer containing the
service areas and load nodes is overlaid with the future condition polygon layer(s). A
projected load for each of the service areas can then be determined and assigned to the
load nodes associated with each service polygon. The conversion that is required will
depend on the source data that is being used. It could be a matter of translating the data
contained within the source, such as population, land area, etc. to flow, which can then
be used by LoadBuilder to assign loads.
Depending on how the layers intersect, service areas may contain multiple load types
(land uses) that are added and applied to the load node for that service polygon.


LoadBuilder simplifies and expedites the process of assigning loading data to your
model, using a variety of source data types.
Note: The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base

Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may

need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.
LoadBuilder Manager
The LoadBuilder manager provides a central location for the creation, storage, and
management of Load Build templates.
Go to Tools > Loadbuilder or click .

Loading
The following are available from this dialog box:
New Opens the LoadBuilder Wizard.
Delete Deletes an existing LoadBuilder template.
Rename Renames an existing LoadBuilder template.
Edit Opens the LoadBuilder Wizard with the

settings associated with the currently
highlighted definition loaded.
Help Opens the context-sensitive online help.
LoadBuilder Wizard
The LoadBuilder wizard assists you in the creation of a new load build template by
stepping you through the procedure of creating a new load build template. Depending
on the load build method you choose, the specific steps presented in the wizard will
vary.
Note: The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base

Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may

need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.

Step 1: Available LoadBuilder Methods
In this step, the Load Method to be used is specified. The next steps will vary
according to the load method that is chosen. The load methods are divided into three
categories; the desired category is selected by clicking the corresponding button. Then
the method is chosen from the Load load types pane.
The available load methods are as follows:
Allocation
• Billing Meter Aggregation—This loading method assigns all meters within a

service polygon to the specified load node for that service polygon.
• Nearest Node—This loading method assigns customer meter loads to the closest
load junction.

Loading
• Nearest Pipe—This loading method assigns customer meter loads to the closest
pipe, then distributes loads using user-defined criteria.
• Flow Monitoring Distribution—This loading method assigns loads to nodes

based on a user-supplied flow monitoring layer.
Distribution
• Equal Flow Distribution—This loading method equally divides the total flow
contained in a flow boundary polygon and assigns it to the nodes that fall within
the flow boundary polygon.
• Proportional Distribution by Area—This load method proportionally distrib-

utes a lump-sum flow among a number of load nodes based upon the ratio of total
service area to the area of the node’s corresponding service polygon.

• Proportional Distribution by Population—This load method proportionally

distributes a lump-sum load among a number of load nodes based upon the ratio
of total population contained within the node’s corresponding service polygon.
Projection
• Projection by Land Use—This method allocates load based upon the density per
land use type of each service polygon.
• Load Estimation by Population—This method allocates load based upon user-

defined relationships between load per capita and population data.

Loading
Step 2: Input Data
The available controls in this step will vary according to the load method type that was
specified as follows:
• Billing Meter Aggregation—Input Data—The following fields require data to be

specified:
– Service Area Layer—Specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that
defines the service area for each load node.
– Node ID Field—Specify the source database field that contains identifying
label data.
Note: ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always

unique to any given element.
– Billing Meter Layer—Specify the point feature class or shapefile that

contains the geocoded billing meter data.
– Load Type Field—Specify the source database field that contains load type
data. Load Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign
composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types
may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
Load Type classification, your source database must include a column that
contains this data.
– Usage Field—Specify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
• Nearest Node—Input Data—The following fields require data to be specified:
– Node Layer—Specify the feature class or shapefile that contains the nodes
that the loads will be assigned to.
– Node ID Field—Specify the feature class database field that contains the
unique identifying label data.
Note: ElementID is the preferred node ID value because it is always

– Billing Meter Layer—Specify the feature class or shapefile that contains the
geocoded billing meter data.

– Load Type Field—Specify the source database field that contains load type
data. Load Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign
composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types
may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
contains this data.
– Use Previous Run—LoadBuilder’s most time-consuming calculations when
using the Nearest Node strategy are the spatial calculations that are performed
to determine proximity between the meter elements and the node elements.
When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that were generated
from a previous run are used, thereby increasing the overall calculation
performance.
• Nearest Pipe—Input Data—The following fields require data to be specified:
– Pipe Layer—Specify the line feature class or shapefile that contains the pipes
that will be used to determine meter-to-pipe proximity. Note that the pipes in
this layer must connect to the nodes contained in the Node Layer.
– Pipe ID Field—Specify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
Note: ElementID is the preferred Pipe ID value because it is always

– Load Assignment—Specify the method that will be used to distribute the

metered loads that are assigned to the nearest pipe to the end nodes of said
pipe. Options include:
- Equal Distribution—This method assigns an equal portion of the total
load assigned to a pipe to each of the pipe’s end nodes.
- Distance Weighted—This method assigns a portion of the total load
assigned to a pipe based on the distance between the meter(s) and the
nodes at the pipe ends. The closer a meter is to the node at the end of the
pipe, the more load will be assigned to it.
- Closest Node—This method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is closest to the meter.
- Farthest Node—This method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is farthest from the meter.
– Node Layer—Specify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the
nodes that will be used to determine node-to-pipe proximity. Note that the
nodes in this layer must connect to the pipes contained in the Pipes Layer.

Loading
– Node ID Field—Specify the source database field that contains the unique

– Use Previous Run—LoadBuilder’s most time-consuming calculations when

using the Nearest Pipe strategy are the spatial calculations that are performed
to determine proximity between the meter elements, the pipe elements, and
the node elements. When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that
were calculated from a previous run are used, thereby increasing the overall
calculation performance.
– Billing Meter Layer—Specify the point or polyline feature class or shapefile
that contains the geocoded billing meter data.
– Billing Meter ID Field—Billing Meter ID is used to identify the unique
meter. When polylines are used to represent water consumption meters,
multiple polylines (multiple records) may designate one actual meter, but each
(record in the attribute Table) of the polylines contains the same consumption
data with the same billing meter ID.
– Load Type Field—This field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains load type data. Load Type is an optional classification that can
be used to assign composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors,
multipliers, and patterns to be applied in various situations. For example,
possible load types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To
make use of the Load Type classification, your source database must include a
column that contains this data.
– Polyline Distribution—When a polyline meter layer is selected, this field
will be activated. When multiple pipes are associated with (overlapped by) a
polyline meter, the option chosen in this field determines the method that will
be used to divide the polyline meter load among them. The available options
are:
- Equal Distribution—This option will distribute the load equally among
the pipes associated with (overlapping) the meter.
- Proportional Distribution—This option will divide the load proportion-
ally according to the ratio of the length of pipe that is associated with
(overlapping) the meter to the total length of the meter.

• Equal Flow Distribution—Input Data—The following fields require data to be

specified:
– Node Layer—Specify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the
nodes that the flow will be assigned to.
label data.
Note: ElementID is the preferred Node ID value because it is always

– Flow Boundary Layer—Specify the polygon feature class that contains the
flow monitoring meter data.
– Flow Field—Specify the source database field that contains usage data. The
• Proportional Distribution by Area—Input Data—The following fields require
data to be specified:
defines the service area for each node.

– Flow Boundary Layer—Specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the flow boundary data.
– Boundary Field—Specify the source database field that contains the
boundary label.
• Proportional Distribution by Population—Input Data—The following fields
require data to be specified:

Loading

– Flow Boundary Layer—Specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the flow boundary data.
– Boundary Field—Specify the source database field that contains the
boundary label.
– Population Layer—Specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that
contains population data.
– Population Count Field—Specify the source database field that contains
population data.
– Land Type Field—Specify the source database field that contains land use
type.
• Projection by Land Use—Input Data—The following fields require data to be

specified:

– Land Use Layer—Specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the land use data.
– Land Type Field—Specify the source database field that contains land use
type.
– Load Type and Load Density—Use this table to assign load density values
to the various load types contained within your land use layer.
• Load Estimation by Population—Input Data—The following fields require data

to be specified:
label data.


– Population Layer—Specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the population data.
– Population Density Type Field—Specify the source database field that
contains the population density type data.
– Population Density Field—Specify the source database field that contains
population density data.
– Load Type and Load Density—Use this table to assign load density values
to the various load types contained within your population density layer.
Step 3: Calculation Summary
This step displays the Results Summary pane, which displays the total load, load
multiplier, and hydraulic pattern associated with each load type in a tabular format.
The number of entries listed will depend on the load build method and data types
selected in Step 1.
Note: Different types of shapefiles may need to be created based on

the loadbuilder method selected.
The Results Summary pane contains the following columns:
• Load Type—This column contains an entry for each load type contained within
the database column specified in step one. (Examples include Residential,
Commercial, Industrial, etc.)
• Consumption—This column displays the total load associated with each load
type entry.
• Multiplier—This column displays the multiplier that is applied to each load type
entry. Multipliers can be used to account for peak loads, expected future loads, or
to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. This field can be edited.
• Pattern—This column displays the hydraulic pattern associated with each load
type entry. A different pattern can be specified using the menu contained within
each cell of this column. New patterns cannot be created from this dialog box; see
the Pattern manager help topic for more information regarding the creation of new
patterns.
In addition to the functionality provided by the tabular summary pane, the following
controls are also available in this step:

Loading
• Global Multiplier—This field allows you to apply a multiplier to all of the

entries contained within the Results Summary Pane. Any changes are automati-
cally reflected in the Total Load text field. Multipliers can be used to account for
peak loads, expected future loads, or to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. The Global
Multiplier should be used when the conditions relating to these considerations are
identical for all usage types and elements.
• Total Load—This field displays an updated total of all of the entries contained
within the Results Summary Pane, as modified by the local and global multipliers
that are in effect.
Step 4: Results Preview
This step displays the calculated results in a tabular format. The table consists of the
following information:
• Node ID—The unique identifying label assigned to all geodatabase elements by

the Loadbuilder.
• Label—The unique identifying label assigned by Bentley SewerCAD V8i
Modeler.
• Load Type—An optional classification that can be used to assign different behav-
iors, multipliers, and patterns in various situations. For example, possible load
types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
contains this data.
• Pattern—The type of pattern assigned to the node. The source database must
include a column that contains this data.

Generating Thiessen Polygons
Step 5: Completing the LoadBuilder Wizard
In this step, the load build template is given a label and the results are exported to an
existing or new load alternative. This step contains the following controls:
• Label—This field allows a unique label to be assigned to the load build template.
• Override an Existing Alternative—Choosing this option will cause the calcu-
lated loads to overwrite the loads contained within the existing load alternative
that is selected.
• Append to an Existing Alternative—Choosing this option will cause the calcu-
lated loads to be appended to the loads contained within the existing load alterna-
tive that is selected. Loads within the existing alternative that are assigned to a
specific node will not be overwritten by newly generated loads assigned to the
same node; the new loads will be added to them.
• New Alternative—Choosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be
applied to a new load alternative. Enter your text into this field. The Parent Alter-
native field will only be active when this option is selected.
LoadBuilder Run Summary
The LoadBuilder Run Summary dialog box details important statistics about the
results of a completed LoadBuilder run, including the number of successfully added
loads, file information, and informational and/or warning messages.

A Thiessen polygon is a Voronoi Diagram that is also referred to as the Dirichlet
Tessellation. Given a set of points, it defines a region around each point. A Thiessen
polygon divides a plane such that each point is enclosed within a polygon and assigns
the area to a point in the point set. Any location within a particular Thiessen polygon
is nearer to that polygon’s point than to any other point. Mathematically, a Thiessen is
constructed by intersecting perpendicular bisector lines between all points.
Thiessen polygon has many applications in different location-related disciplines such

as business planning, community services, transportation and hydraulic/hydrological
modeling. For water distribution modeling, the Thiessen Polygon Creator was devel-
oped to quickly and easily define the service areas of load nodes. Since each customer
within a Thiessen polygon for a junction is nearer to that node than any others, it is
assumed that the customers within a particular Thiessen polygon are supplied by the
same load node.

Loading
The following diagrams illustrate how Thiessen polygons would be generated manu-
ally. The Thiessen Polygon Creator does not use this method, although the results
produced by the generator are consistent with those that would be obtained using this
method.
The first diagram shows a pipe and junction network.
In the second diagram, the circles are drawn around each junction.

In the third diagram, bisector lines are added by drawing a line where the circles inter-
join.

Loading
In the final diagram, the network is overlaid with the polygons that are created by
connecting the bisector lines.
Thiessen Polygon Creator Dialog Box
The Thiessen Polygon Creator allows you to quickly create polygon layers for use
with the LoadBuilder load allocation module. This utility creates polygon layers that
can be used as service area layers for the following LoadBuilder loading strategies:
• Billing Meter Aggregation

• Proportional Distribution By Area
• Proportional Distribution By Population
• Projection by Land Use
• Load Estimation by Population.

The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following controls:
The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following controls:
• Node Data Source—Select the data source to use.

– Node Layer—This lists the valid point feature classes and shapefiles that
Thiessen Polygon Creator can use.
– Current Selection—Click if the current feature data set contains a previously
created selection set.
– Include active elements only—Click to activate.
– Selection—This option allows you to create a selection on the fly for use with
the Thiessen Polygon Creator. To use this option, use the ArcMap Select
Features tool to select the point features that you want before opening the
Thiessen Polygon Creator.
• Buffering Percentage—This percentage value is used for calculating the
boundary for a collection of points. In order to make the buffer boundary big
enough to cover all the points, the boundary is enlarged based upon the value
entered in this field as it relates to the percentage of the area enclosed by drawing
a polygon that connects the outermost nodes of the model.
• Polygon Boundary Layer—Select the boundary polygon feature class or shape-
file, if one has already been created. A boundary is specified so that the outermost
polygons do not extend to infinity.
• Output File—Specify the name of the shapefile that will be created.

Loading
Note: The Thiessen Polygon Creator is flexible enough to generate

Thiessen polygons for unusual boundary shapes, such as
borders with cutouts or holes that Thiessen polygons should not
be created inside. To accomplish this, the boundary polygon
must be created as one complex (multi-part) polygon. For more
information about creating boundary polygon feature classes,
see your ArcGIS documentation.
Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes
The Thiessen Polygon Creator requires a boundary to be specified around the area in
which Thiessen Polygons will be created. This is to prevent the outside edge of the
polygons along the perimeter of this area from extending to infinity. The generator can
automatically create a boundary using the Buffering Percentage value, or it can use a
previously created polygon feature class as the boundary.
A border polygon feature class can be created in ArcCatalog and edited in ArcMap.
To create a border feature class, you will need a Bentley SewerCAD V8i model that
has had at least one scenario published as an ESRI feature data set. Then, follow these
steps:
1. In the directory structure pane of ArcCatalog, right-click the Bentley SewerCAD

V8i feature data set and select New > Feature Class.
2. A dialog box will open, prompting you to name the new feature class. Enter a
name and click Next.
3. In the second step, you are prompted to select the database storage configuration.
Do so, and click Next.
4. In the third step, click the Shape cell under the Field Name column, and ensure
that the Geometry Type is Polygon. Click Finish.
5. In ArcMap, click the Add Data button and select your Bentley
SewerCAD V8i feature dataset.
6. Click the Editor button and select Start Editing. Ensure that the border
feature class is selected in the Target drop-down list.
7. Draw a polygon around the point features (generally junctions) that you wish to be
used to generate the polygons. When you are finished drawing the polygon, click
Editor...Stop Editing. Choose Yes when prompted to save your edits.
The polygon feature class you just created can now be used as the boundary during
Thiessen polygon generation. For more information about creating and editing feature
classes, see your ArcGIS documentation.

Pipeline Infiltration
Pipeline Infiltration
To model infiltration along a pipeline, it is possible to specify infiltration as:
• Pipe length
• Pipe area
• Pipe diameter-length
• Count
• Hydrograph
• Pattern load
The first four types of infiltration are constant rates while the last two are time varying
inflows. For more information on entering data for each type of infiltration, see
“Conduit—Infiltration” on page 15-1040.
Note: Conduit infiltration flow is added after the upstream section of

the conduit by the calculation engine. Therefore, when viewing
flow results,you will see the infiltration flow in the middle section
and the downstream section of the conduit.
Hydrograph Curve Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to enter Hydrograph Time vs. Flow data to create Hydro-
graphs for use with the Hydrograph Infiltration Load type.
The dialog box contains the Hydrograph Time vs. Flow table along with the following
controls:
New This button creates a new row in the time-

flow table.

row from the time-flow table.

dialog box.
Graph Opens a graph window plotting the

hydrograph curve defined by the points in the
table

Loading
Column Description
Hydrograph Time This field allows you to define time of the

hydrograph curve point.
Flow This field allows you to define flow at the

specified time for the hydrograph curve point.
Extreme Flows
Extreme flow factors are generally used for computing peak discharges, and therefore
are typically referred to as peaking factors or peaking equations. However, since they
can also be used to compute minimum discharges, the term extreme flow factor is
more accurate and will be used throughout the program and documentation.
SewerCAD V8i defines tabular and equation extreme flow factor methods in the edit-
able Engineering Libraries, thus allowing you to edit predefined methods and insert
new ones. The extreme flow factor can be user-defined with either of the following:
• Equation extreme flow factor method
• Table extreme flow factor method
In both cases, the extreme flow factor method can be a function of either of the
following:
• Contributing population
• Base Load
Discharge based extreme flow methods can be used with any unit dry load. Population
based extreme flow methods can be used only with population-based unit sanitary and
non-population based unit sanitary loads that have population equivalents specified.
Note: For tabular extreme flow factors, values above the maximum
specified value and below the minimum specified value are
linearly extrapolated by the software.
Extreme Flows Dialog
This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view extreme flow factors.The dialog
box contains a toolbar, an Extreme Flows list pane, and two tabs. The toolbar contains
the following buttons:

Extreme Flows
New Creates a new entry in the Extreme

Flows List Pane.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the currently

highlighted entry in the Extreme Flows
List Pane.

Loading

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List
Pane.

currently highlighted in the Extreme
Flows List Pane.

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List
Pane.
Synchronize Clicking this button opens a submenu

• Browse Engineering Library—This
command opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to browse
the Extreme Flow Factor Methods
Library.
• Synchronize From Library—This
command allows you to update a
Extreme Flow Factor Method that was
previously imported from a Extreme Flow
Factor Methods Engineering Library to
reflect changes that have been made to
the library since it was imported.
• Synchronize To Library—This
command allows you to update an
existing Extreme Flow Factor Methods
Engineering Library using current
Extreme Flow Factor Method entries that
were initially imported but have since
been modified.
• Import From Library—This command
allows you to import catalog entries from
an existing Extreme Flow Factor
Methods Engineering Library.
• Export To Library—This command
allows you to export the current catalog
entries to an existing Extreme Flow
Factor Methods Engineering Library.
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Extreme Flows dialog box.

Extreme Flows
Extreme Flows List Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays
Pane a list of all of the extreme flow factors that have
been defined in the current project. Highlighting an
extreme flow factor in this list causes the Table or
Equation sections to display the data associated
with the highlighted extreme flow factor.
Table Section When a Table-based Extreme Flow factor is

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List Pane, this
section contains the following controls. Extreme
flow factor values that fall outside of the range of
boundary values will be assigned the closest in-
range value, either the first (lowest) or last
(highest) value.
New button Adds a new row to the table.
Delete button Removes the currently highlighted row from the

table.
Contributing Thecontributing population for theassociated

Population column extreme flow factor value. This column is only
available for population-based extreme flow
factors.
Base Load column The base load for the associated extreme flow
factor value. This column is only available for load-
based extreme flow factors.
Extreme Flow Factor The extreme flow factor value associated with the
column base load or population value.
Equation Section When an Equation-based Extreme Flow factor is

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List Pane, this
section contains the following controls.
Population Unit in The unit in which population is defined. The

Equation coefficients in the equation are based on this unit.
This column is only available for population-based
extreme flow factors.
Flow Unit The unit in which flow is defined. The coefficients

in the equation are based on this unit. This column
is only available for load-based extreme flow
factors.

Loading
Cutoff Value The maximum possible extreme flow factor for

peaking methods. This is used to
prevent unrealistically high values for small
populations or land areas.
c1 Equation coefficient.
e1 Equation coefficient.
e2 Equation coefficient.
m1 Equation coefficient.
m2 Equation coefficient.
Library Tab Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
• ID
• Label
• Modified Date
• Library Source
• Library Modified Date
• Synchronization Status
SewerCAD V8i uses a generic exponential equation to define any extreme flow factor
method. For population based extreme flow factor methods, the generic equation is:
e1
c2 +  m1 P 
EFF = c 1 + --------------------------------
e2
c3 +  m2 P 
where P is population and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
For discharge-based extreme flow factor methods the generic equation is:

Extreme Flows
e1
c2 +  m1 Q 
EFF = c 1 + --------------------------------
e2
c3 +  m2 Q 
where Q is total sanitary (base) load and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
Extreme Flow Setups Dialog
The Extreme Flow Setup dialog lets you define a list of Extreme Flow Setups. An
Extreme Flow Setup allows you to match unit sanitary loads with appropriate extreme
flow factor methods.
Each scenario can use a different Extreme Flow Setup, thus allowing you to model
different load alternatives (average, minimum daily, maximum daily, etc).
The dialog box contains a toolbar, an Extreme Flow Setups list pane, and a table
where the setup data is edited. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New Creates a new entry in the Extreme Flow

Setups List Pane.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the currently

highlighted entry in the Extreme Flow
Setups List Pane.

highlighted in the Extreme Flow Setups
List Pane.

currently highlighted in the Extreme
Flow Setups List Pane.

highlighted in the Extreme Flow Setups
List Pane.
The table on the right contains the following columns:

Loading
Use When the box is checked the associated unit

sanitary loads will be used during calculations. If
the box is not checked the associated loads will be
ignored.
Unit Load The sanitary load to be associated with an

Extreme Flow Method.
Extreme Flow Method Lists the currently defined Extreme Flow factors.
Click the ellipsis button to open the Extreme Flows
dialog. You can also select a Constant method, in
which the unit load is multiplied by the user-
defined Constant value.
Constant Available only for the Constant Extreme Flow

Method, it simply multiplies the unit load
by that constant.
Adjustment Multiplier Used to adjust an existing Extreme Flow Method.

The following formula is used:
EFF (new) = EFF (original) x AM
The Adjustment Multiplier does not change the
Extreme Flow Method, but changes the extreme
flow factor for the selected unit sanitary load.
None and Constant Extreme Flow Methods
cannot be adjusted.
Base Load Table Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the base load table for extreme flow factor collec-
tions. It consists of the Base Load vs. Extreme Flow Factor table and the following
controls:
New Adds a new row to the Base Load table.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted row in

the Base Load table.
The table consists of the following columns:
Base Load: Enter the base load value for the corresponding extreme flow factor.
Extreme Flow Factor: Enter the extreme flow factor for the corresponding base load
value.

Extreme Flows

Chapter
Calculating Your Model 8

Steady State/Extended Period Simulation
Bentley SewerCAD V8i gives the choice between performing a steady-state analysis
of the system or performing an extended-period simulation over any time period.
Steady State Simulation
Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific

point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain
constant over time). This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and
flow rates under minimum, average, and peak flows.
For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with wet
wells being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this
type of analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the
values of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.
Extended Period Simulation
When the variation of the system attributes over time is important, an extended period
simulation is appropriate. This type of analysis allows you to model wet wells filling
and draining, regulating valves opening and closing, and pressures and flow rates
changing throughout the system in response to varying load conditions and automatic
control strategies formulated by the SewerCAD V8i.
While a steady-state model may tell whether the system has the capability to route
calculated loads, an extended period simulation indicates whether the system has the
ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes, hours, or days.
Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady-state
runs. In addition to the information required by a steady-state model, you also need to
determine load patterns and operational rules for pumps and valves.

Steady State/Extended Period Simulation
The following additional information is required only when performing Extended

Period Simulation, and therefore is not enabled when Steady-State Analysis has been
specified.
• Start Time—Select the clock time at which the simulation begins.

• Duration—Specify the total duration of an extended period simulation.
• Hydraulic Time Step—Select the length of the calculation time step.
• Override Reporting Time Step?—Set to true if you want the Reporting Time
Step to differ from the Hydraulic Time Step.
• Reporting Time Step—Data will be presented at every reporting time step. The
reporting time step should be a multiple of the hydraulic time step.
Note: If you run an Extended Period Simulation, you can generate

graphs of the domain elements in the results by right-clicking an
element and selecting Graph.
Note: Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis

has a default value. You will most likely want to change the
values to suit your particular analysis.
Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an

extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls
(typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically
pressure regulating valves) toggling between two operational
modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls,
active/closed for valves). When this occurs, try adjusting the
hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the
differences in boundary conditions between time steps, and may
allow for convergence.
EPS Results Browser

The dialog box contains the following controls:
Time Display Shows the current time step that is displayed

Time Slider Lets you manually move the slider

representing the currently displayed time step
along the bar, which represents the full length
of time that the scenario encompasses.
Go to Start Sets the currently displayed time step to the

beginning of the simulation.

Calculating Your Model
Play Backward Sets the currently displayed time step from the
end to the beginning.
Step Backward Returns the currently displayed time step to

the previous time step.
Pause/Stop Stops the animation. Restarts it again with

another click.
Step Advances the currently displayed time step to

the following time step.
Play Advances the currently displayed time step

from beginning to end.
Got to End Sets the currently displayed time step to the

end of the simulation.
Options Opens the Time Browser Options dialog box.
Help Opens Bentley SewerCAD V8i online help.
Speed Slider Lets you control the length of the delay

between time steps during animations.
Increment Allows you to set the increment between

steps.
Time Browser Options Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define the animation settings that are applied when the
drawing pane is animated. It contains the following controls:
Frame Options
Increment Controls the smoothness of the animation.

Each time step in a scenario counts as one
animation frame. This slider allows you to
specify the number of frames that are skipped
for each step in the animation. For example, if
there are time steps every 3 minutes in the
scenario and the slider is set at 3 frames, each
step in the animation represents 9 minutes of
scenario time when you click the Play button.
Looping Options

Calculation Options Manager
No Loop Stops the animation at the end of the

simulation, if selected.
Loop Animation Restarts the animation automatically, if

selected. When this option is selected, the
animation reaches the end of the simulation
and then restarts from the beginning.
Rocker Animation Restarts the animation automatically in

reverse. When this option is selected, the
animation reaches the end of the simulation
and then plays the simulation in reverse.
When the beginning of the simulation is
reached, the animation advances towards the
end again, and so on.
Calculation Options Manager

You create calculation profiles in the Calculation Options Manager. The Calculation
Options Manager consists of a list pane that displays all of the calculation profiles
associated with the current project, and a toolbar that contains some common
commands.
To display the Calculation Options Manager, select View > Calculation Options.
The Calculation Options manager allows you to create option profiles that contain
various calculation settings. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the
option profiles currently contained in the project, along with a toolbar.
New Creates a new calculation profile. Define

the attributes for the profile in the
Property Editor.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted option

profile.
Rename Lets you rename the currently

highlighted calculation profile.
Help Displays online help for the Calculation

Options manager.

If the Property Editor is open, highlighting a option profile in the list causes the
settings that make up the profile appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you
can display the settings that make up the profile by highlighting the desired profile and
clicking the Properties button in the Calculation Options Manager.
Creating Calculation Options

Calculation options contain attributes that define how your model is calculated in
Bentley SewerCAD V8i. You create calculation options in the Calculation Options
Manager. You can create several calculation options with different attributes
depending on the requirements of your project.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i contains a default calculation option called “Base Calculation
Options.” If you do not create additional calculation options, Bentley SewerCAD V8i
will use this default option whenever you calculate your model.
Creating a Calculation Option
To create a calculation option:
1. Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting View > Calculation

Options.
2. Click the New button. A new option appears in the list with a default name.
3. Type a new name for the option.
4. Double-click the new option to display its attributes in the Property Editor. Edit
the attributes as required.
Editing a Calculation Option
You edit the attributes of a calculation option in the Property Editor.
If you select a calculation option while the Property Editor is open, the attributes for
that option appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the
attributes of the calculation option by double-clicking the option in the Calculation
Options Manager.
Deleting a Calculation Option

To delete a calculation option:

Options.
2. Select the option you want to delete.
3. Press the Delete key, click the Delete button in the Calculation Options Manager,
or right-click the option and select Delete from the shortcut menu.

Renaming a Calculation Option
To rename a calculation option:

Options.
2. Select the option you want to rename.
3. Click the Rename button or right-click and select Rename from the shortcut
menu.
4. Type a new name for the option, then press Enter.
Calculation Option Attributes
A Calculation Option contains the information described in the following table.
Table 8-1: Calculation Option Attributes
General
Label Lets you specify a name for the options option.
Notes Lets you enter descriptive text to be associated with the

current calculation option.
Time Analysis Type Select whether the analysis is extended period or steady-
state.
Calculation Type Select whether to perform an analysis of the current model

or to perform an automatic design calculation. This field is
only available when the Steady State Time Analysis Type is
chosen.
Start Time Displays the clock time at which the simulation begins.
This field is not editable. This field is only displayed when
the EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Base Date Select the calendar date on which the simulation begins.
This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.
Duration Lets you specify the duration of the simulation. This field is
only available when the EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.

Hydraulic Time Lets you specify the computational time step in hydraulic
Step calculations. This field is only available when the EPS
Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Hydrologic Time Lets you specify the computational time step in hydrology
Step runoff calculations. This field is only available when the
EPS State Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Reporting Time Output data will be presented at every reporting time step.
Step This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.
Reporting Time Edit this collection to specify a custom definition for results
Steps ouput, including periods where you want all time steps
saved (<All>), a constant reporting period (Constant), or no
results at all (None). This field is only available when the
Reporting Time Step value is set to Variable.
Tractive Stress The global minimum allowable tractive stress in a conduit.

(Global Minimum)
Report Hydrologic If True, hydrographs will be reported in the hydrologic

Time Step? increment.
Convex Routing
Peak Flow Ratio Used when selecting a representative flow rate from the
hydrograph to be routed when calculating the C parameter
used to perform the routing calculations.
Gravity Hydraulics
Maximum Network This is the maximum number of iterations that will be

Transversals performed to achieve the closest approximation of the
desired network results.
Flow Convergence This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

Test discharge occurring at the system outfall between two
successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics
through the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until
the system balances, or a maximum number of trials has
occurred.

Flow Profile Allows you to choose between a backwater and capacity

Method analysis flow option method.
Number of Flow The gradually varied flow option divides each pipe into
Profile Steps internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic
grade. The default value of option steps is five, and it is
recommended that the value entered here be at least five for
accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy
of the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the
calculation time.
Hydraulic Grade The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute
Convergence Test change between two successive iterations of hydraulic
grade at any junction or inlet in the system. For a given
discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through
pipes will continue until two successive calculations
change by an absolute difference of less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm.
The calculations is assumed to converge to the solution
when the two successive depth iterations are within this
absolute test value.
Minimum Structure This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

Headloss headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that
is lower then this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except
for the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in
this option.
Average Velocity This section allows you to pick the method used to
Method calculate the average travel time velocity. The following
four options are available:
• Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
• Full Flow Velocity
• Simple Average Velocity
• Weighted Average Velocity

Structure Loss Choose either Hydraulic Grade or Energy Grade as the

Mode basis for the hydraulic calculations.
Save Detailed If True, the detailed headloss data will be saved after
Headloss Data? computation. If False, the detailed headloss data (the
AASHTO results for manholes) used in the computations
will not be saved, resulting in a smaller results file.
Gravity Pressure Interface Options
Extreme Flow Setup Select an Extreme Flow Setup for the current calculation.
Pattern Setup Select the Pattern Setup for the current calculation.
Pressure Hydraulics
Use Controls When this box is checked, controls will be active during
During Steady Steady State analyses.
State?
Wet Well Increment Unless a wet well is set to Fixed Level, this is the increment
that is used to attempt to balance the wet well level such
that the total flow out is greater than the total flow in.
Use Pumped Flows? In a steady state run, in pressure subnetworks, the flow
from the network is calculated using pressure equations, the
characteristics of the system and number of pumps running.
For that flow rate to be passed to the downstream gravity
system, the user should set this property to "True".
In some cases, the user will not want to use that flow but
would rather pass a loading to the downstream system
based on upstream loads and appropriate extreme flow
factors similar to the way flows are handled in the gravity
system. To pass those flows on to the downstream gravity
system, the user sets this property to "False".
In general, using pumped flows (True) is used when the

user wants to look at the peak flows when the pumps are
running, while using the loadings (False) gives more of a
true picture as one moves far downstream from the pressure
system and the effects of pump cycling become diminished.

Accuracy Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for

the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations.
When the sum of the absolute flow changes between
successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy
value, the solution is said to have converged. The default
value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value is 1.0e-5.
Trials Unitless number that defines the maximum number of

iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution.
Use Linear If set to true, the engine will use linear interpolation to
Interpolation for interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic
Multipoint Pumps? interpolation.
Steady State Specify how the program should handle hydrographs

Hydrograph during a steady state analysis.
Equivalent
Headloss Options (AASHTO)
Bend Angle vs. Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog,
Bend Loss Curve allowing you to modify the default curve.
Expansion, Ke Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to

account for expansion of the flow on the exit from
incoming pipe.
Contraction, Kc Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the
outfall pipe.
Shaping Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

Adjustment, Cs junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If
inlet shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this
factor (50% default).

Non-Piped Flow If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total
Adjustment, Cn structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total
loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a
factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but
can be changed by the user.
Headloss Options (HEC-22)
Elevations The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

Considered Equal can be separated by and still be considered to be at the same
Within elevation.
Consider Non-Piped If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for
Plunging Flow non-piped flow will be applied during the calculation.
Flat Submerged Benching correction coefficient used for a flat submerged

transition structure.
Flat Unsubmerged Benching correction coefficient used for a flat

unsubmerged transition structure.
Depressed Benching correction coefficient used for a depressed

Submerged submerged transition structure.

Unsubmerged unsubmerged transition structure.
Half Bench Benching correction coefficient used for a half bench



Full Bench Benching correction coefficient used for a full bench


Headloss Options (Generic)
Governing Select the method for selecting the upstream pipe when
Upstream Pipe computing the headloss for a structure using the Generic
Selection Method Headloss Method.
Flow Profile Method

There are two methods used in SewerCAD V8i for converting flows into hydraulic
profiles (i.e. determining water surface and hydraulic grade). The Backwater Analysis
method is the more theoretically correct gradually varied flow backwater curve but is
somewhat slower (“Backwater Analysis” on page 13-696) while the Capacity Anal-
ysis method uses a somewhat simpler method since flow in most sewers approaches
normal depth (except where flows back up from downstream). The run time for
capacity analysis is slightly faster and the results are virtually the same in most cases.
Controlling Results Output
You can limit the output data that is written to the result file from the SewerCAD V8i
engine. Limiting the reported results in this way will produce a smaller result file,
thereby improving performance when copying results files during open and save oper-
ations. It also conserves hard disk space.
By default, the Reporting Time Step Type calculation option is set to <All>. Under
this setting, all results for all time steps are written to the results file.
To limit the output results to a specific interval (such as every 2 hours, every 4 hours,
etc) set the Reporting Time Step Type calculation option to Constant. The Reporting
Time Step calculation option will become available. Enter the constant interval at
which output results should be written to the results file in this field.
To limit the output results to specific time steps, set the Reporting Time Step Type
calculation option to Variable. The Reporting Time Steps calculation option will
become available. Click the elipsis (...) button in this field to open the Reporting Time
Steps dialog.

Check Data/ Validate
Reporting Time Steps Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to specify whether the output results for different time steps
during an extended period simulaton will or will not be written to the results file.
You do this by specifying ranges of time during which:
All of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
None of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
Time steps that fall within the specificed constant interval are reported on and written
to the results file.
The first row in this dialog will always be 0.00 hours, which is the beginning of the
first time range. To specify the first range of time, enter the end time step in the second
row, for example 24 hours. Specify the type in the first row, for example <All>. In this
example, all time steps between hour 0 (the start of the simulation) and hour 24 will be
written to the results file. To specify further ranges of time, add new rows with the
New button. Remove rows with the Delete button. The last range in the dialog will
start at the time specified in the last row and end at the end of the simulation.
Check Data/ Validate

This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard
to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is
checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be
run at any time by clicking Validate . The process will produce either a dialog
box stating No Problems Found or a Status Log with a list of messages.
The validation process will generate two types of messages. A warning message
means that a particular part of the model (i.e., a pipe’s roughness) does not conform to
the expected value or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning
is useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a
calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or
data entry error and should be corrected. An error message, on the other hand, is a
fatal error, and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected. Typically, error
messages are related to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valve not
being connected on both its intake and discharge sides.

Note: In earlier versions of the software, it was possible to create a

topological situation that was problematic but was not checked
for in the network topology validation. The situation could be
created by morphing a node element such as a junction, tank, or
reservoir into a pump or valve. This situation is now detected
and corrected automatically, but it is strongly recommended that
you verify the flow direction of the pump or valve in question. If
you have further questions or comments related to this, please
contact Bentley Support.
Warning messages related to the value of a particular attribute

being outside the accepted range can often be corrected by
adjusting the allowable range for that attribute.
The check data algorithm performs the following validations:
• Network Topology—Checks that the network contains at least one boundary

node, one pipe, and one junction. These are the minimum network requirements.
It also checks for fully connected pumps and valves and that every node is reach-
able from a boundary node through open links.
• Element Validation—Checks that every element in the network is valid for the
calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have a non-zero
length, a non-zero diameter, a roughness value that is within the expected range,
etc.
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box

The Detailed Calculation Summary dialog box provides a detailed reports of the
calculations performed on your model. You can see this report by clicking Analysis >
Calculation Summary.
Click the tabs in the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog box to review the details of
the report:
• “Executive Summary Tab” on page 8-435

• “Calculation Options Tab” on page 8-436
• “Pressure Summary Tab” on page 8-442
• “Pipe Report Tab” on page 8-443
• “Node Report Tab” on page 8-443
Executive Summary Tab
The Executive Summary tab displays the following information:

• Scenario Label: Displays the name of the currently selected scenario.

• Computation Results: Displays information about the computed results such as
the number of gravity and pressure subnetworks and where they are draining to,
and whether convergence was achieved.
Calculation Options Tab
The Calculation Options tab displays the calculation options as they were set for the
previous calculation. Note that the fields are not editable from this tab. The tab
contains the following information:
General
Label Lets you specify a name for the options option.
Notes Lets you enter descriptive text to be associated with the

current calculation option.
Time Analysis Type Select whether the analysis is extended period or steady-
state.
Calculation Type Select whether to perform an analysis of the current model

or to perform an automatic design calculation. This field is
only available when the EPS Analysis Type is chosen.
Start Time Select the clock time at which the simulation begins. This
field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis Type is
chosen.
Base Date Select the calendar date on which the simulation begins.
This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.
Duration Lets you specify the duration of the simulation. This field is
only available when the EPS Analysis Type is chosen.
Hydraulic Time Lets you specify the computational time step in hydraulic
Step calculations. This field is only available when the EPS
Time Analysis Type is chosen.

Hydrologic Time Lets you specify the computational time step in hydrology
Step runoff calculations. This field is only available when the
EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Reporting Time Output data will be presented at every reporting time step.
Step This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.
Reporting Time Edit this collection to specify a custom definition for results
Steps ouput, including periods where you want all time steps
saved (<All>), a constant reporting period (Constant), or no
results at all (None). This field is only available when the
Reporting Time Step value is set to Variable.
Tractive Stress The global minimum allowable tractive stress in a conduit.

(Global Minimum)
Report Hydrologic If True, hydrographs will be reported in the hydrologic

Time Step? increment.
Convex Routing
Peak Flow Ratio Used when selecting a representative flow rate from the
hydrograph to be routed when calculating the C parameter
used to perform the routing calculations.
Gravity Hydraulics
Maximum Network This is the maximum number of iterations that will be

Transversals performed to achieve the closest approximation of the
desired network results.
Flow Convergence This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

Test discharge occurring at the system outfall between two
successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics
through the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until
the system balances, or a maximum number of trials has
occurred.
Flow Profile Allows you to choose between a backwater and capacity

Method analysis flow option method.

Number of Flow The gradually varied flow option divides each pipe into
Profile Steps internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic
grade. The default value of option steps is five, and it is
recommended that the value entered here be at least five for
accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy
of the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the
calculation time.
Hydraulic Grade The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute
Convergence Test change between two successive iterations of hydraulic
grade at any junction or inlet in the system. For a given
discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through
pipes will continue until two successive calculations
change by an absolute difference of less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm.
The calculations is assumed to converge to the solution
when the two successive depth iterations are within this
absolute test value.
Minimum Structure This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

Headloss headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that
is lower then this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except
for the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in
this option.
Average Velocity This section allows you to pick the method used to
Method calculate the average travel time velocity. The following
four options are available:
• Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
Structure Loss Choose either Hydraulic Grade or Energy Grade as the

Mode basis for the hydraulic calculations.

Save Detailed If True, the detailed headloss data will be saved after
Headloss Data? computation. If False, the detailed headloss data (the
AASHTO results for manholes) used in the computations
will not be saved, resulting in a smaller results file.
Gravity Pressure Interface Options
Extreme Flow Setup Select an Extreme Flow Setup for the current calculation.
Pattern Setup Select the Pattern Setup for the current calculation.
Pressure Hydraulics
Use Controls When this box is checked, controls will be active during
During Steady Steady State analyses.
State?
Wet Well Increment Unless a wet well is set to Fixed Level, this is the increment
that is used to attempt to balance the wet well level such
that the total flow out is greater than the total flow in.
Use Pumped Flows? In a steady state run, in pressure subnetworks, the flow
from the network is calculated using pressure equations, the
characteristics of the system and number of pumps running.
For that flow rate to be passed to the downstream gravity
system, the user should set this property to "True".
In some cases, the user will not want to use that flow but
would rather pass a loading to the downstream system
based on upstream loads and appropriate extreme flow
factors similar to the way flows are handled in the gravity
system. To pass those flows on to the downstream gravity
system, the user sets this property to "False".
In general, using pumped flows (True) is used when the

user wants to look at the peak flows when the pumps are
running, while using the loadings (False) gives more of a
true picture as one moves far downstream from the pressure
system and the effects of pump cycling become diminished.

Accuracy Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for

the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations.
When the sum of the absolute flow changes between
successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy
value, the solution is said to have converged. The default
value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value is 1.0e-5.
Trials Unitless number that defines the maximum number of

iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution.
Use Linear If set to true, the engine will use linear interpolation to
Interpolation for interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic
Multipoint Pumps? interpolation.
Steady State Specify how the program should handle hydrographs

Hydrograph during a steady state analysis.
Equivalent
Headloss Options (AASHTO)
Bend Angle vs. Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog,
Bend Loss Curve allowing you to modify the default curve.
Expansion, Ke Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to

account for expansion of the flow on the exit from
incoming pipe.
Contraction, Kc Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the
outfall pipe.
Shaping Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

Adjustment, Cs junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If
inlet shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this
factor (50% default).

Non-Piped Flow If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total
Adjustment, Cn structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total
loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a
factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but
can be changed by the user.
Headloss Options (HEC-22)
Elevations The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

Considered Equal can be separated by and still be considered to be at the same
Within elevation.
Consider Non-Piped If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for
Plunging Flow non-piped flow will be applied during the calculation.
Flat Submerged Benching correction coefficient used for a flat submerged

transition structure.
Flat Unsubmerged Benching correction coefficient used for a flat

unsubmerged transition structure.







Headloss Options (Generic)
Governing Select the method for selecting the upstream pipe when
Upstream Pipe computing the headloss for a structure using the Generic
Selection Method Headloss Method.
The list of calculation options can be sorted by either of two methods. You can switch
between the two sorting methods by clicking the Categorized or Alphabetical
buttons above the list pane.
Pressure Summary Tab
The Pressure Summary displays a table of data about the pressure subnetworks in the
model. Click the Copy button to copy the Pressure Summary to the clipboard. Click
the Report button to generate a preformatted Pressure Summary report.
The table displays whteher the flow is balanced, the number of trials, and the relative
flow change at a particular time step for the pressure subnetwork that is currently
selected in the Pressure Subnetwork menu:
Click the Highlight button to visually distinguish the pressure subnetwork that is
currently selected.
If you click on a time step in the table more detailed information is displayed in the
tabs at the bottom of the dialog:
• Information tab: This tab displays any element messages for the currently
selected time step.
• Status Messages tab: This tab displays any status messages for the currently
selected time step.
• Trials tab: This tab displays the relative flow change for each of the trials for the
currently selected time step.

Pipe Report Tab
The Pipe Report displays information about selected calculated results of the pipes in
the various subnetworks in the model in a tabular format. The table contains the
following columns:
• Label: The label of the associated pipe.

• Time (Maximum Flow): The time (measured from the start of the simulation)
when the maximum flow occurs in the associated pipe.
• Flow (Maximum): The maximum flow that occurs in the associated pipe over the
course of the simulation.
• Velocity (Maximum Calculated): The maximum velocity that occurs in the asso-
ciated pipe over the course of the simulation.
• Depth (Average End) / Rise (Maximum): The maximum ratio of depth to rise
that occurs in the associated pipe over the course of the simulation.
The pipes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are
part of. To change the currently displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork
from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.
Node Report Tab
The Node Report displays information about selected calculated results of the nodes
in the various subnetworks in the model in a tabular format. The table contains the
following columns:
• Label: The label of the associated node.

• Time (Maximum Hydraulic Grade Line): The time (measured from the start of
the simulation) when the maximum hydraulic grade line occurs in the associated
node.
• Hydraulic Grade Line (Maximum): The maximum hydraulic grade that occurs
in the associated node over the course of the simulation.
• Depth (Maximum): The maximum outgoing depth that occurs in the associated
node over the course of the simulation.
• Pressure (Maximum): The maximum pressure that occurs in the associated node
over the course of the simulation.
The nodes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are
part of. To change the currently displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork
from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.

User Notifications
User Notifications
User notifications are messages about your model. These messages can warn you
about potential issues with your model, such as slopes that might be too steep or
elements that slope in the wrong direction. These messages also point you to errors in
your model that prevent Bentley SewerCAD V8i from solving your model.
To see user notifications:
1. Compute your model.

2. If needed, open the User Notification manager by clicking View > User
Notifications (F8).
3. Or, if the calculation fails to compute because of an input error, when your model
is finished computing, Bentley SewerCAD V8i prompts you to view user notifica-
tions to validate the input data.
You must fix any errors identified by red circles before Bentley SewerCAD V8i
can compute a result.
Errors identified by orange circles are warnings that do not prevent the computa-
tion of the model.
4. In the User Notifications manager, if a notification pertains to a particular
element, you can double-click the notification to magnify and display the element
in the center of the drawing pane.
5. As needed, use the element label to identify the element that generates the error
and use the user notification message to edit the element’s properties to resolve
the error.
User Notifications Manager
The User Notifications Manager displays warnings and error messages that are turned
up by Bentley SewerCAD V8i’s validation routines. If the notification references a
particular element, you can zoom straight to that element by either double-clicking the
notification, or right-clicking it and selecting the Zoom To command.
• Informational messages are denoted by a blue icon and do not prevent the
model from calculating successfully.
• Warnings are denoted by a yellow icon and do not prevent the model from
calculating successfully.
• Errors are denoted by a red icon, and the model will not successfully calcu-
late if errors are found.
The User Notifications Manager consists of a toolbar and a tabular view containing a
list of warnings and error messages. The toolbar consists of the following buttons:

Details Displays the User Notification Details

dialog box, which includes information
about any warning or error messages. For
more information, see “User Notification
Details Dialog Box” on page 8-446.
Save Saves the user notifications as a comma-

delimited .csv file. You can open the .csv
file in Microsoft Excel or Notepad.
Report Displays a User Notification Report.
Copy Copies the currently highlighted warning or

error message to the Windows clipboard.
Zoom To If the warning or error message is related to

a specific element in your model, click this
button to center the element in question in
the drawing pane.
Select In Drawing If the warning or error message is related to

a specific element or error message in your
model, click this button to select he element
Help Displays online help for the User

Notification Manager.
The User Notification Manager displays warnings and error messages in a tabular
view. The table includes the following columns:
Message ID This column displays the message ID associated

with the corresponding message.
Scenario ID This column displays the scenario associated with

the corresponding message. This column will
display “Base” unless you ran a different scenario.
Element Type This column displays the element type associated

Element ID This column displays the element ID associated


User Notifications
Label If the notification is caused by a specific element,

this column displays the label of the element
associated with the corresponding message.
Message This column displays the description associated

Time If the user notification occurred during a specific

time step, this column displays the time step.
Otherwise, this column is left blank.
Source This column displays the validation routine that

triggered the corresponding message.
User Notification Details Dialog Box

This dialog lists the elements that are referred to by a time-sensitive user notification
message. In the User Notification dialog, there is a time column that displays the time-
step during which time-sensitive messages occur. These messages will say “during
this time-step” or “for this time-step”, and do not display information about the refer-
enced element or elements. Double-clicking one of these messages in the User Notifi-
cations dialog opens the User Notification Details dialog, which does provide
information about the referenced element(s).
You can double-click messages in the User Notification Details dialog to zoom the
drawing pane view to the referenced element.

Chapter
Using Scenarios and 9

Alternatives
Scenarios and alternatives let you create, analyze, and recall an unlimited number of
variations of your model. In Bentley SewerCAD V8i powerful two-level design,
scenarios contain alternatives to give you precise control over changes to the model.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using scenarios and alternatives:
• “Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives” on page 9-447

• “Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System” on page 9-457
• “Scenarios” on page 9-462
• “Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)” on page 9-464
• “Alternatives” on page 9-467
• “Calculation Options” on page 9-504
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives

Scenario management in Bentley SewerCAD V8i can dramatically increase your
productivity in the "What If?" areas of modeling, including calibration, operations
analysis, and planning.
If you’ve never used scenarios and alternatives before, we recommend reading all of
the topics in this section to gain a complete understanding of how they work. By
investing a little time now to understand management, you can avoid unnecessary
editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more
out of your model, with much less work and expense.
Topics in this section include:
• “Advantages of Automated Scenario Management” on page 9-448

• “A History of What-If Analyses” on page 9-448
• “The Scenario Cycle” on page 9-450
• “Scenario Attributes and Alternatives” on page 9-452

• “A Familiar Parallel” on page 9-452

• “Inheritance” on page 9-453
• “Local and Inherited Values” on page 9-455
• “Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance” on page 9-455
• “Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance” on page 9-456
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), auto-
mated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What

If?" conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files
and separate results.
• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
• The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a
new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inherit-
ance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and auto-
matically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
A History of What-If Analyses
The history of what-if analyses can be divided into two periods:
• “Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios” on page 9-448

• “With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios” on page 9-450
Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios

Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of
change on a software model:

Using Scenarios and Alternatives
• Change the model, recalculate, and review the results

• Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and error-
prone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Also,
comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be
stored in physically separate data files.
Figure 9-1: Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios

With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios

Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
• Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally).
• Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input
and output data, and direct comparisons.
• Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data
from existing scenarios (data reuse)
• Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions
that have a lot in common
The scenario management feature in Bentley SewerCAD V8i successfully meets all of
these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number of
What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and quickly generate
direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
The Scenario Cycle
The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying
and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome
file management. This process lets you cycle through any number of changes to the
model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information.
Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail of
scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for under-
standing a group of master plan updates.
Figure 9-2: Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios


Scenario Attributes and Alternatives
Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:
• Attribute—An attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a

single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter,
length, and roughness.
• Alternative—An alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data
that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and
editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the
network's elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
• Scenario—A scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the
attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system condi-
tions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily
generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been
previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data—
the referenced alternatives do.
A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has
eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is
comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entrée,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entrée may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
Figure 9-3: A Restaurant Meal Scenario

The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combina-
tion of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entrée 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from
each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of
alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can
have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Figure 9-4: Generic Scenario Anatomy
Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be
duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set
of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.

In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differ-
ences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is
implemented in software:
• “Overriding Inheritance” on page 9-454

• “Dynamic Inheritance” on page 9-454
Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override
inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic.
These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to
the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to
its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only
in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent.
Now the child puts on a pair of green- tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye
color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden
locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye
color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.
Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent's
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown, and the children's eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parent's values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.

Local and Inherited Values
Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and
the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those
children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that
attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level
alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black
text.
Figure 9-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance
Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, "just like x except for
y." Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we
can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions,
with no duplicated effort.
We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited
values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.
Note: Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: "Salad 3 is just

like Salad 2, except for the dressing."
• "Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."

• "Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."

Note: If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to
peas), only Entrée 1 needs to be updated, and the other entrées
will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of "Peas"
instead of "Green Beans."
• "Entrée 2 is just like Entrée 1, except for the meat and the starch."
• "Entrée 3 is just like Entrée 2, except for the meat."
Note: Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it

can be created as a "root" or base alternative. It does not inherit
its attribute data from any other alternative.
• "Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping."
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance
Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can
inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the
phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale.
Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to
dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders
the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally
different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.
The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are
shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):
• "Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entrée alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 1.

• "Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A totally new base or root is created.
• "Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entrée and dessert alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 3.
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution

System
Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies
water by gravity to three junction nodes.
Figure 9-6: Example Water Distribution System
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the
two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: loads and physical properties.
Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline loads and
pipe diameters.

Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions)
During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going
to be considered. This model is built with average load calculations and preliminary
pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives, and
the hierarchies look like the following (showing only the items of interest):
Analyzing Different loads (Maximum Day Conditions)
In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day
loads, so a new load alternative is required. No variation in load is expected at J-2,
which is an industrial site. As a result, the new load alternative can inherit J-2’s load
from Average Day while the other two loads are overridden.
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alter-
native, but overrides the selected load alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:

Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
Another Set of loads (Peak Hour Conditions)
Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day

loads. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour loads, with slightly
lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour loads also share the industrial load
from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average Day. In
this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.
Another scenario is also created to reference these new loads, as shown below:
Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives
remain the same.
Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial
load is not actually 500 gpm—it is 1,500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within the
load alternatives, however, only the Average Day load for J-2 needs to be updated.
The changes ripple through to the children. After the single change is made, the load
hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.

Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System
When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J-
2 is too low under peak hour load conditions.
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions
To counter the headloss from the increased load load, two possible improvements are
suggested:
• A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1’s, which is overridden.
• Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonal-
ities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:
This time, the load alternative hierarchy remains the same since no loads were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Manager) and
comparison Graphs (for extended period simulations, from the element editor dialog
boxes) can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved
pressures.

Finalizing the Project
It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created
to check the results for average day and maximum day loads. Notice that this step does
not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is present
in the alternatives we already have!
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P-
1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak,
Big P-1 (changing the load alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit
from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the load nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run the
last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.
Summary
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), auto-
mated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What

If? conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and
separate results.

Scenarios
• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
• The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a
new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inherit-
ance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and auto-
matically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
To learn more about actually using scenario management in our software, start by
running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the
scenario manager itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the
scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any
time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.
Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation
options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set
up an unlimited number of “What If?” situations for your model, and then modify,
compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit
multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run, switch between scenarios, and
compare scenario results—all with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number
of scenarios that you can create.
Click one of the following links to learn more about creating scenarios:
• “Base and Child Scenarios” on page 9-463

• “Creating Scenarios” on page 9-463
• “Editing Scenarios” on page 9-463
• “Scenario Manager” on page 9-465

Base and Child Scenarios
Note: The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but
are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The
alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a
permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.
There are two types of scenarios:
• Base Scenarios—Contain all of your working data. When you start a new project,
you begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your
model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it
references.
• Child Scenarios—Inherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios.
Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your
system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their
parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in
a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving
you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child
scenarios.
Creating Scenarios
You create new scenarios in the Scenario Manager. A new scenario can be a Base
scenario or a Child scenario. For information about the differences between the two
types of scenarios, see “Base and Child Scenarios” on page 9-463.
To create a new scenario:
1. Select View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the New button and select whether you want to create a Base scenario or a
Child Scenario. When creating a Child scenario, you must first highlight the
scenario from which the child is derived in the Scenario Manager tree view.
By default, a new scenario comprises the Base Alternatives associated with each
alternative type.
3. Double-click the new scenario to edit its properties in the Property Editor.
Editing Scenarios
You edit scenarios in two places in Bentley SewerCAD V8i:

Scenarios
• The Scenario Manager lists all of the project’s scenarios in a hierarchical tree
format, and displays the Base/Child relationship between them.
• The Property Editor displays the alternatives that make up the scenario that is
currently highlighted in the Scenario Manager, along with the scenario label, any
notes associated with the scenario, and the calculation options profile that is used
when the scenario is calculated.
To edit a scenario:
1. Select View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Double-click the scenario you want to edit to display its properties in the Property
Editor.
3. Edit any of the following properties as desired:
– Scenario label - This is the same operation as renaming the scenario in the
Scenario Manager.
– Notes - Add any notes or comments in the Notes field
– Alternatives
– Calculation Options
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)
Performing a batch run lets you set up and run calculations for multiple scenarios at
once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations, or manage a
group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for the batch run
remain with your project until you change it.
To perform a batch run:
1. Selecting View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the Compute Current Scenario button, then select Batch Run from the
shortcut menu.
The Batch Run Editor dialog box appears.
3. Check the scenarios you want to run, then click the Batch button. Each scenario is
calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation. The
selected scenarios run consecutively.

When the batch run is completed, the scenario that was current stays current, even
if it was not calculated.
4. Select a calculated scenario from the Scenario toolbar drop-down list to see the
results throughout the program.
Batch Run Editor Dialog Box

The Batch Run Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Scenario List Displays a list of all current scenarios. Click the

check box next to the scenarios you want to run in
batch mode.
Batch Starts the batch run of the selected scenarios.
Select Displays a drop-down menu containing the

following commands:
• Select All - Selects all scenarios listed.
• Clear Selection - Clears all selected
scenarios.
Close Closes the Batch Run Editor dialog box.
Help Displays context-sensitive help for the Batch Run

Editor dialog box.
Scenario Manager
The Scenario Manager lets you create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one built-
in default scenario—the Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one
scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that
reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your
calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.
Note: When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records
because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records
(alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced
by that scenario exist until you explicitly delete them. By
accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the
referenced alternatives and data records.
The Scenario Manager consists of a hierarchical tree view and a toolbar.

Scenarios
The tree view displays all of the scenarios in the project. If the Property Editor is open,
highlighting a scenario in the list causes the alternatives that make up the scenario
appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the alternatives and
scenario information by highlighting the desired scenario and clicking the Properties
button in the Scenario Manager.
New Scenario Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Child Scenario—Lets you create a new
Child scenario from the currently highlighted
Base scenario.
• Base Scenario—Lets you create a new
Base scenario.
Delete Removes the currently selected scenario.
Rename Lets you rename the currently selected scenario.
Go Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Scenario—Lets you calculate the currently
highlighted scenario.
• Hierarchy—Lets you calculate the entire
currently highlighted branch—the Base
scenario and all Child scenarios currently
associated with it.
• Children—Lets you calculate all of the
Child scenarios associated with the
currently highlighted scenario.
• Batch Run—Lets you run a user-defined
group of scenarios at once.
Make Current Causes the currently selected scenario to

become the active one, and to be displayed in
the drawing pane.
Help Displays online help for the Alternative

Manager.

Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see
“Scenarios” on page 9-462). They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when
placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds
the data for a particular element in your system.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see

“Calculation Options Manager” on page 8-424), allowing you to compute and
compare the results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary indepen-
dently within scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.
Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination
with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each
alternative has. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for your
system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base
alternative if you wish.
When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base
alternative types. If you wish to see how your system behaves, for example, by
increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to
accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters,
and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that
you can create.
Click one of the following links to learn more about creating and editing alternatives:
• “Base and Child Alternatives” on page 9-468

• “Creating Alternatives” on page 9-468
• “Editing Alternatives” on page 9-469
• “Alternative Manager” on page 9-469
Types of Alternatives
The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By
breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix
different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i includes these types of alternatives:
• “Active Topology Alternative” on page 9-471

• “Physical Alternatives” on page 9-474
• “Design Alternative” on page 9-491

Alternatives
• “Headloss Alternative” on page 9-494

• “Boundary Condition Alternatives” on page 9-495
• “Initial Settings Alternative” on page 9-496
• “Sanitary Loading Alternative” on page 9-498
• “Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives” on page 9-500
• “System Flows Alternative” on page 9-502
• “Operational Alternative” on page 9-503
• “User Data Extensions Alternative” on page 9-503
Base and Child Alternatives
There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base
alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives
inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data
for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of
data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data).
Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative are changed when the base
alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative remain unchanged.
Creating Alternatives
New alternatives are created in the Alternative Manager dialog box. A new alternative
can be a Base scenario or a Child scenario. Each alternative type contains a Base alter-
native in the Alternative Manager tree view.
Note: For information regarding the differences between the two types
of alternatives, see “Base and Child Alternatives” on page 9-468.
To create a new Alternative:
1. Select View > Alternatives to open the Alternative Manager, or click the Alterna-
tive Manager tab.
2. To create a new Base alternative, highlight the type of alternative you want to
create, then click the New button.
3. To create a new Child alternative, right-click the Base alternative from which the
child will be derived, then select New > Child Alternative from the submenu.
4. Double-click the new alternative to edit its properties in the Alternative Editor.

Editing Alternatives
You edit the properties of an alternative in its own alternative editor. The first column
in an alternative editor contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have
been changed in this alternative.
• If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
• If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is
changed in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these
rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternative’s parent.
To edit an existing alternative, you can use one of two methods:
• Double-click the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager.

or
• Highlight the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager and click the
Properties button.
In either case, the Alternative Editor dialog box for the specified alternative appears,
allowing you to view and define settings as desired.
Alternative Manager
The Alternative Manager lets you create, view, and edit the alternatives that make up
the project scenarios. The dialog box consists of a pane that displays folders for each
of the alternative types which can be expanded to display all of the alternatives for that
type, and a toolbar.

Alternatives
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:

commands:
• Base Alternative—Creates a new Base
Alternative of the currently highlighted
type.
• Child Alternative—Creates a new
Child Alternative from the currently high-
lighted Base Alternative.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted alternative.
Properties Opens the Alternative Editor dialog box for

the currently highlighted alternative.

alternative.
Report Lets you generate a report of the currently

highlighted alternative.
Help Displays online help for the Alternative

Manager.
Alternative Editor Dialog Box
This dialog box presents in tabular format the data that makes up the alternative being
edited. Depending on the alternative type, the dialog box contains a separate tab for
each element that possesses data contained in the alternative.

Note: Note: As you make changes to records, the check box

automatically becomes checked. If you want to reset a record to
its parent's values, clear the corresponding check box.
Many columns support Global Editing (see Globally Editing

Data), allowing you to change all values in a single column.
Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit option.
The check box column is disabled when you edit a base

alternative.
The Alternative Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These
records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative
is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single
alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.
There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and
allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column
contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alter-
native.
If the check box is selected, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the check box is cleared, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed
in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the
corresponding values in the alternative's parent.
Active Topology Alternative
The Active Topology Alternative lets you temporarily remove areas of the network
from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed
construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the
system.
The Active Topology dialog box is divided into tabs for each element type:
• Conduit
• Manhole
• Transition
• Wet Well
• Outfall
• Pressure Pipe

Alternatives
• Pressure Junction
• Pump
• Variable Speed Pump Battery
• Air Valve
For each tab, the same setup applies—the tables are divided into three columns. The
first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the
element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corre-
sponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Is
Active? field that corresponds to that element’s Label.
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative

When creating an active topology child alternative, you may notice that the elements
added to the child scenario also appear in your model when the base scenario is the
current scenario.
To create an active topology alternative so that the elements added to the child
scenario do not show up as part of the base scenario:
1. Create a new project.

2. Open the Property Editor.
3. Open the Scenario Manager and make sure the Base scenario is current (active).
4. Create your model by adding elements in the drawing pane.
5. Create a new child scenario and a new child active topology alternative as
described in the following steps:
a. In the Scenario Manager, click the New button and select Child Scenario
from the submenu.
b. In the Property Editor, which should now display the properties for the newly
created scenario, select <New...> in the Active Topology field.
c. In the Create New Alternative dialog box, type the name of the new child
active topology alternative name then click OK.
6. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario.
7. Add new elements to your model. These elements will be active only in the new
child alternative.

8. To verify that this worked as expected:

a. In the Scenario Manager, select the base scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the base scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as inactive (they appear grayed out in the drawing
pane).
b. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as active.
Note: If you add new elements in the base scenario, they will show up
in the child scenario. This is normal.
Active Topology Selection Dialog Box

While it is possible to make elements active or inactive by:
1. Checking or unchecking the "Is active?" box in the alternative manager under the
Active Topology Manager,
2. Unchecking the "Is active?" box in a FlexTable, or
3. Picking True of False in property grid next to "Is active?" for individual elements,
another way of making elements active or inactive is the Active Topology Selection
Tool, which is accessed through Tools>Active Topology Selection.
When the user starts Active Topology Selection, a Select tool opens. Clicking
elements in the drawing view while the selection tool is enabled can make them active
or inactive according to the commands below.
Making an element "inactive" means that the element remains in the data file but it is
not included in any hydraulic analysis calculations. Inactive elements will appear in
FlexTables but calculated values will be set to NA.
Changing the active status using this tool only affects the Active Topology Alternative
of the current scenario.
The Select tool consists of the following controls:
• Done: Select Done when you are finished selecting elements. This brings the user
back to the drawing pane.
• Add: When this button is selected, seelcting elements highlights the elements and
makes them Inactive. Clicking on an element that is already inactive causes the
tool to give a beep and the element remains inactive.
• Remove: While in this mode, selecting elements that are inactive deselects them,
making them Active. Clicking on active elements has no effect.

Alternatives
• Select By Polygon: This tool allows you to draw a polygon around one or more
elements. Right-click and select Done when you are finished drawing the
polygon. The elements inside the polygon will be added to or removed from the
selection depending on whether you have the Add or Remove button toggled on.
A node must be fully within the polygon to be affected by this tool; links will be
affected if their adjacent node(s) are contained within the polygon.
• Select by Query: This tool allows you to select elements by previously created
selection sets or by using either custom or predefined queries. To create a custom
query, select Custom Queries and then the element type. To use one of the
predefined queries, choose one of the categories and then select the desired query.
• Find: Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the
Element menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane
centers around the highlighted element.
Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card char-
acter. For example, if you want to find all of the conduits in your model, you type
co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane
centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and
lists all conduits in your model in the Element menu.
• Clear: Clicking on this button causes all elements to become active in the current
scenario.
Right clicking while the Selection tool is open (i.e. opening the right click context
menu) brings up a list which enables the user to switch between Add, Remove or
Done.
Note: Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all
adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is because all pipes
must end at a node.
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu

command Repeat to re-open the Active Topology Selection
dialog box.
Physical Alternatives
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored
in a physical properties alternative, as listed below:
Physical Alternative for Conduits

The physical alternative editor for conduits is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of conduits. The following columns are available:

Column Description
ID Displays the unique identifier for each element in

the alternative.
Label Displays the label for each element in the

alternative.
Tractive Stress (Local This field is only available when Use Local
Minimum) Minimum Tractive Stress? is set to True. The
value defined here will override the Tractive
Stress (Global Minimum) value defined in the
Calculation Options.
Use Local Minimum If set to True the value defined in the Tractive
Tractive Stress? Stress (Local Minimum) field overrides the
Tractive Stress (Global Minimum) value defined
in the Calculation Options.
Has User Defined Lets you specify whether the conduit has a user-
Length? defined or schematic length.
Length (User Defined) Lets you define the length of each channel in the
alternative that has a user—defined length.
Material Lets you enter the name of the material used.

Alternatively, clicking the Ellipsis (...) button
opens the Material Engineering Library, allowing
you to select a pre-defined material. If a pre-
defined material is chosen, the roughness value
will change accordingly.
Manning’s n Lets you define the Manning's roughness value for

the associated conduits. This attribute is only
available when Manning's is chosen as the
Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method on the Project
tab of the project Options (Tools > Options).
Darcy-Weisbach e Lets you define the Darcy-Wesibach roughness

value of each conduit in the alternative. This
attribute is only available when Darcy-Wesibach
is chosen as the Hydraulic Analysis Friction
Method on the Project tab of the project Options
(Tools > Options).

Alternatives
Column Description
Hazen-Williams C Lets you define the Hazen-Williams roughness

value of each conduit in the alternative. This
attribute is only available when Hazen-Williams is
chosen as the Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method
on the Project tab of the project Options (Tools >
Options).
Kutter’s n Lets you define the Kutter's roughness value of

each conduit in the alternative. This attribute is
only available when Kutters is chosen as the
Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method on the Project
tab of the project Options (Tools > Options).
Set Invert to Lets you automatically set the upstream conduit

Upstream? invert to the elevation of the upstream node.
Invert (Upstream) Lets you define the upstream conduit invert.
Set Invert to Lets you automatically set the upstream conduit

Downstream? invert to the elevation of the downstream node.
Invert (Downstream) Lets you define the downstream conduit invert.
Number of Barrels Lets you specify the number of hydraulically

identical conduit barrels that make up the conduit.
Use Local Conduit When this box is checked, you can define your
Description? own conduit description for the associated
conduit. See the Conduit Description Attribute
topic for more details. xxxx
Conduit Description Displays the Conduit Description. The Conduit

Description field is a special field which can
automatically consolidate several conduit
properties into one field. For more information,
see the Conduit Description Attribute topic. xxxx
Has User Defined Bend When this box is checked, you can define a bend
Angle? angle for the conduit in the Bend Angle (User
Defined) field.
Bend Angle (User Lets you specify a bend angle for the associated
Defined) conduit. This field is only available when the Has
User Defined Bend Angle? box is checked.

Column Description
Conduit Type Allows you to specify whether the conduit is a

User Defined or Catalog Conduit. If User Defined
is selected here, any of the conduit shapes will be
available. If Catalog Conduit is selected, only
those shapes defined in the Conduit Catalog will
be available. See Conduit Catalog Dialog Box for
more details. xxxx
Conduit Shape Allows you to select the shape of the conduit. The
options available here will vary depending on the
Conduit Type you have chosen. Your selection
here will determine which dimension attributes
will be available. Click the ellipsis button to
access the Conduit Catalog Dialog Box. xxxx
Rise Lets you define the rise (height) of the associated

conduit.
Span Lets you define the span (width) of the associated

conduit.
Diameter Lets you define the diameter of the associated

conduits. This column is only available for
circular and virtual conduits.
Section Size Allows you to select from the section sizes that are
available for the selected Conduit Shape. This
field is only available for conduits whose Conduit
Type is Catalog Conduit.
Left Bank Station Allows you to select which of the station points
defined in the Irregular Channel Section dialog
should be defined as the Left bank.
Right Bank Station Allows you to select which of the station points
defined in the Irregular Channel Section dialog
should be defined as the Right bank.
Channel Weighting Allows you to select the weighting roughness

Method method used for the associated open irregular
channel conduit.See “Open and Closed Channel
Weighting Methods” on page 13-758 for more
information.

Alternatives
Column Description
Irregular Channel Allows you to access the Irregular Channel dialog,

Section where you can define the cross sectional station
vs. depth points for the associated irregular
channel.
Bottom Width Lets you define the base width of the associated
conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Right Side Slope Lets you define the right side slope of the
associated conduits. This column is only available
for conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Left Side Slope Lets you define the left side slope of the associated
conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Is Diversion Link? When this box is checked, the flow into the
associated conduit is determined based on a rating
curve, which is defined in the Diversion Rating
Curve dialog.
Diversion Rating Opens the Diversion Rating Curve dialog,

Curve allowing you to define the rating curve using
Upstream Flow vs. Diverted Flow points. This
field is only available when Is Diversion Link? has
been checked.
Roughness Type Allows you to select the method by which

roughness data is applied to the conduit.
Left Bank Manning’s n Lets you specify the Manning's roughness value
for the left bank of each conduit in the alternative.
This column is only available for conduits that
have a Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual, or Irregular
Channel Conduit Shape.

Column Description
Channel Manning’s n Lets you specify the Manning's roughness value

for the channel of each conduit in the alternative.
Right Bank Manning’s Manning's n Lets you specify the Manning's

n roughness value for the right bank of each conduit
in the alternative. This column is only available
for conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel,
Virtual, or Irregular Channel Conduit Shape.
Left Bank C Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the left bank of each conduit in the
alternative. This column is only available for
conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual,
or Irregular Channel Conduit Shape.
Channel C Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the channel of each conduit in the
Right Bank C Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the right bank of each conduit in the
Left Bank e Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the left bank of each conduit in the
Channel e Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the channel of each conduit in the

Alternatives
Column Description
Right Bank e Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the right bank of each conduit in the
Left Bank Kutter’s n Lets you specify the Kutter's roughness value for
the left bank of each conduit in the alternative.
Channel Kutter’s n Lets you specify the Kutter's roughness value for
the channel of each conduit in the alternative. This
column is only available for conduits that have a
Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual, or Irregular Channel
Conduit Shape.
Right Bank Kutter’s n Lets you specify the Kutter's roughness value for
the right bank of each conduit in the alternative.

Physical Alternative for Manholes

The physical alternative editor for manholes is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of manholes. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Bolted Cover? Indicates that the associated manhole has a bolted

cover. If the manhole cover is bolted, then the
hydraulic grade line is not reset to the rim
elevation at the downstream end of the upstream
pipes in the case of a flooding situation (the
calculated HGL being higher than the rim
elevation).
Length Displays the length of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Diameter Displays the diameter of each circular manhole in

the alternative.
Structure Type Indicates whether the manhole is circular or box

shaped. Clicking a field displays a list box that
allows you to switch between the two.
Set Rim to Ground Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the

Elevation box is checked, the manhole rim elevation is set
equal to the ground elevation automatically.
Elevation (Rim) Lets you define the top elevation of a manhole

structure. This elevation is typically flush with the
ground surface. However in some cases, the rim
elevation may be slightly below the ground
surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the
ground surface elevation (raised).
Width Displays the width of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Elevation (Invert) Lets you define the elevation at the bottom of the
manhole.

Alternatives
Column Description
Elevation (Ground) Displays the ground elevation for each node in the
alternative.
Physical Alternative for Transitions

The physical alternative editor for transitions is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of transitions. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Set Top to Ground When this box is checked, the Elevation (Top) will
Elevation? be set to the value for the Elevation (Ground).
Transition Length Enter the length of the transition.
Elevation (Top) Lets you set the top elevation of the transition
element.
Elevation (Invert) Lets you set the bottom elevation of the transition
element.
Elevation (Ground) Lets you set the ground elevation of the transition
element.
Physical Alternative for Wet Wells

The physical alternative editor for wet wellsis used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of wet wells. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

Column Description

alternative.
Elevation (Minimum) Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level.

If the wet well drains below this point, it will
automatically be shut off from the system.
Operating Range Type Specify whether the vertical parameters of the

tank are specified as levels measured from the
base elevation or as elevations measured from the
global datum.
Level (Maximum) A reference level to compare the hydraulic grade

in the tank. Does not influence calculations.
Elevation (Maximum) Highest allowable water surface elevation or level.

If the tank fills above this point, it will
Elevation (Base) Elevation of the storage tank base used as a

reference when entering water surface elevations
in the tank in terms of levels.
Use Low Alarm? Specifies whether or not to check low alarm levels
during the calculation and generate messages if
the levels are violated. When this field is set to
true the Elevation (Low Alarm) and Level (Low
Alarm) fields become active.
Use High Alarm? Specifies whether or not to check high alarm

levels during the calculation and generate
messages if the levels are violated. When this field
is set to true the Elevation (High Alarm) and Level
(High Alarm) fields become active.
Level (Low Alarm) The level below which the low level alarm is
generated. Calculation notifications are produced
to advise you of any alarm level violations.
Elevation (Low Alarm) The elevation below which the low level alarm is

Alternatives
Column Description

alternative.
Elevation (Minimum) Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level.

Operating Range Type Specify whether the vertical parameters of the

tank are specified as levels measured from the
base elevation or as elevations measured from the
global datum.
Level (Maximum) A reference level to compare the hydraulic grade

in the tank. Does not influence calculations.
Elevation (Maximum) Highest allowable water surface elevation or level.

If the tank fills above this point, it will
Elevation (Base) Elevation of the storage tank base used as a

reference when entering water surface elevations
in the tank in terms of levels.
Use Low Alarm? Specifies whether or not to check low alarm levels
during the calculation and generate messages if
the levels are violated. When this field is set to
true the Elevation (Low Alarm) and Level (Low
Alarm) fields become active.
Use High Alarm? Specifies whether or not to check high alarm

levels during the calculation and generate
messages if the levels are violated. When this field
is set to true the Elevation (High Alarm) and Level
(High Alarm) fields become active.
Level (Low Alarm) The level below which the low level alarm is
Elevation (Low Alarm) The elevation below which the low level alarm is

Column Description
Level (High Alarm) The level above which the high level alarm is
Elevation (High The elevation above which the high level alarm is
Alarm) generated. Calculation notifications are produced
Level (Minimum) Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level.

Volume (Inactive) Enter the inactive volume for this wet well. This
data is used when performing water quality
analysis. This field becomes active when the
Section field is set to Non-Circular or Variable
Area.
Cross Section Curve Opens the Cross Section Curve dialog which
allows you to defines a curve which specifies the
relationship between depth and volume.
Section Specify how the tank volume is defined.
Volume Full (Input) If this is a Variable Area Wet Well enter the total
storage volume for the tank. If this is a Constant
Area Wet Well, the total active volume will be
computed from the other tank data and this field
will not be editable.
Area (Average) Cross-sectional area of wet well for constant xross

section wet wells.
Diameter Diameter of the wet well with constant circular

cross section.
Elevation (Ground) Elevation of the ground surface at the wet well.
Physical Alternative for Outfalls

The physical alternative editor for outfalls is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of outfalls. The following columns are available:

Alternatives
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Set Rim to Ground Set the rim elevation to be the same as the ground
Elevation? elevation.
Elevation (Rim) Enter the rim elevation for the outfall.
Elevation (Invert) Enter the invert elevation for the outfall.
Elevation (Ground) Displays the ground elevation for each node in the
alternative.
Physical Alternative for Pressure Pipes

The physical alternative editor for pressure pipes is used to create various data sets for
the physical characteristics of pressure pipes. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Specify Local Minor If true then the minor coefficient for the element is
Loss? manually set, otherwise the value is derived from
the minor loss engineering library. When this field
is set to True the Minor Loss Coefficient (Local)
field becomes active.
Minor Loss Coefficient User defined minor loss coefficient. You can either
(Local) type in the value or select a value from the Minor
Loss Engineering Library.
Diameter this value represents the internal diameter of a

circular pipe or four times the hydraulic radius for
non-circular cross sections.

Column Description
Has Check Valve? Defines whether the pipe contains a check valve
that limits flow to a single direction. Direction of
flow is with the direction of the pipe.
Minor Losses Opens the Minor Losses dialog, which lists all the
minor losses associated with the pipe, and can be
used to generate the composite minor loss
coefficient.
Minor Loss Coefficient Displays the composite minor loss value

(Derived) calculated from the data in the Minor Loss
Collection.
Invert (Upstream) Invert at upstream end of conduit.
Set Invert to If True then the upstream invert of the conduit will
Upstream? be set to the invert elevation of the upstream node.
Length (User Defined) A user defined length that is not scaled from the
underlying map dimensions.
Has User Defined Allows the calculated scaled pipe length to be

Length? overidden with a user defined value.
Material Opens the Material Engineering Library, allowing

you to select the construction material of the pipe.
Kutter’s n Roughness coefficient used in the Kutter’s

equation. This field is only available when the
Kutter’s Friction Method is selected from the
Project tab of the Options dialog.
Hazen-Williams C Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen Williams

Hazen Williams Friction Method is selected from
the Project tab of the Options dialog.
Darcy-Weisbach e Roughness coefficient used in the Darcy Weisbach

equation.This field is only available when the
Darcy Weisbach Friction Method is selected from
the Project tab of the Options dialog.

Alternatives
Column Description
Manning’s n Roughness coefficient used in the Manning’s

Manning’s Friction Method is selected from the
Project tab of the Options dialog.
Invert (Downstream) Invert at downstream end of pipe.
Set Invert to If True then the downstream invert of the conduit

Downstream? will be set to the invert elevation of the
downstream node
Physical Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The physical alternative editor for pressure junctions is used to create various data sets
for the physical characteristics of pressure junctions. The following columns are avail-
able:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Elevation Lets you define the elevation of each pressure

junction in the alternative.
Elevation (Ground) Elevation at the ground surface of the node.
Physical Alternative for Pumps

The physical alternative editor for pumps is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of pumps. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.

Column Description
Pattern (Relative Select the pattern by which the relative speed

Speed) factor is adjusted over the course of the
simulation.
Control Node on Specifies if the VSP has a suction side control

Suction Side? node.
Hydraulic Grade The head that the VSP will attempt to maintain at
(Target) the control node.
Relative Speed Factor The highest relative speed factor that the pump
(Maximum) can be set at to meet the target head at the control
node. If the target head cannot be met when the
pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor,
the maximum will be used.
Control Node The node that the VSP checks to determine

whether to increase, maintain, or decrease its
relative speed factor.
Flow (Target) The flow that the VSP will attempt to maintain at
the control node.
VSP Type Specify how the VSP is controlled.
Is Variable Speed If True the pump will act as a variable speed

Pump? pump.
Pump Definition Select the pump definition to apply to the pump,

or click the Edit command to open the Pump
Definitions Manager.
Elevation (Ground) Elevation of the ground surface at the node.
Elevation (Invert) Bottom elevation of the structure.
Physical Alternative for Variable Speed Pump Batteries

The physical alternative editor for variable speed pump batteries (VSPBs) is used to
create various data sets for the physical characteristics of variable speed pump
batteries. The following columns are available:

Alternatives
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
VSPB Type Specify how the VSPB is controlled.
Target Flow The flow that the battery will attempt to maintain
at the control node.
Control Node on Specifies if the VSPB has a suction side control

Suction Side? node.
Lag Pump Count Number of lag pumps (identical to the lead pump)
whose relative speed factor is adjusted to maintain
the target head.
Relative Speed Factor The highest relative speed factor that the pump
(Maximum) can be set at to meet the target head at the control
node. If the target head cannot be met when the
pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor,
the maximum will be used.
Hydraulic Grade The head that the barttery will attempt to maintain
(Target) at the control node.
Control Node The node that the VSP checks to determine

whether to increase, maintain, or decrease its
relative speed factor.
Battery Pump Select the pump definition for the lead and lag
Definition pumps in the battery, or click the Edit command to
open the Pump Definitions Manager.
Elevation (Invert) Bottom elevation of the structure.
Physical Alternative for Air Valves

The physical alternative editor for air valves is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of air valves. The following columns are available:

Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Elevation Elevation setting of the air valve.
Treat Air Valve as Specifies whether or not to treat the air valve as a
Junction? junction element in the computational analysis. if
false, the valve may allow part full flow subject to
the prevailing hydraulic conditions.
Design Alternative
The Design Alternative Editor allows you to edit the pipe and node constraints
governing the design of the system. It also allows you to specify which gravity
elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want
to design the downstream invert elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and
slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format.
The top of the dialog box contains several fields where the design constraints can be
entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to every element in the
table on the bottom of the dialog, except the elements that are specified to contain
local values. This system allows you to rapidly enter the values that govern most of
the elements in the table, and then manually override the constraints for those
elements that are exceptions to the majority. The following attributes are available in
this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, and node structures can be all designed with the
same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values individ-
ully for each pipe or node.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the following tabs:
• Gravity Pipe
• Node

Alternatives
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
• Default Constraints
• Extended Design
Default Constraints Section
In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
• Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:

– Velocity Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
– Velocity (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This
– Velocity (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This
• Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:

– Cover Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Cover (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This
– Cover (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This
• Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:

– Slope Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.

– Slope (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control

– Slope (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control
Extended Design Section
This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
• Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following
controls:
– Is Part Full Design?–When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
– Percent Full Constraint Type–Allows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
– Percentage Full–Specify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only availble when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
• Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
– Allow Multiple Barrels?–When checked, allows the design algorithm to use
more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
– Maximum Number of Barrels–The maximum number of identical sections
allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
• Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
– Limit Section Size?–When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
– Maximum Rise–The maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in
the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.

Alternatives
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can mini-
mize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Headloss Alternative
The headloss alternative editor allows you to define headloss properties for manhole
and transition elements. The following columns are available for both element types:
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Headloss Coefficient (Standard): Enter the headloss coefficient for the structure.
The headloss across the structure will be equal to this number multiplied by the exit
conduit velocity head. This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to
Standard.
Headloss Coefficient (Upstream): This field is only used when the Headloss Method
is set to Generic. The Generic method computes the structure headloss by multiplying
the velocity head of the exit pipe by the user-defined Headloss (Downstream) value
and then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by
thevalue entered in this field.
Headloss Coefficient (Downstream): This field is only used when the Headloss
Method is set to Generic. The Generic method computes the structure headloss by
multiplying the velocity head of the exit pipe by the value entered in this field and
then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the
user-defined Headloss Coefficient (Upstream) value.
HEC-22 Benching Method: Select which correction factor for benching will be used.
This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to HEC-22 Energy.
Absolute Headloss: Enter the desired value for headloss at the structure. This method
ensures that the headloss across the structure will be equal to the value entered here
regardless of the actual flows or geometry of the structure. This field is only used
when the Headloss Method is set to Absolute.

Headloss Method: Select the method to be used to calculate the headlosses through
the associated structure. The option chosen here determines which of the parameter
fields will become available.
Flow-Headloss Curve: Specify the previously defined Flow-Headloss curve to be

applied to the node, or create a new one by choosing the <Select...> option to access
the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.
AASHTO Shaping Method: Select the correction factor for shaping used in the
calculation of headloss using the AASHTO method. This field is only used when the
Headloss Method is set to AASHTO.
Boundary Condition Alternatives
The boundary condition alternative allows you to define boundary condition settings
for outfall elements. The following columns are available:
Column Description
ID Displays the unique identifier for each element in the

alternative.
Label Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Elevation-Flow Curve Displays the label of the Elevation-Flow Curve that

has been assigned to an outfall that is using the
Elevation-Flow curve Boundary Condition Type.
Elevation (Tailwater) Lets you enter the user defined tailwater value. This
column is only available for elements that use the User
Defined Tailwater Boundary Condition Type.

Alternatives
Column Description
Boundary Condition Lets you specify the type of boundary condition to be

Type used at the associated outfall element. The following
choices are available:
• Free Outfall—For a free outfall control, it is
assumed that the downstream discharge condi-
tions do not directly affect the hydraulic response
of the structure. This is equivalent to assuming that
the downstream TW elevation never rises above
the controlling structure outfall invert of the struc-
ture.
• User Defined Tailwater—This type of boundary
condition allows you to directly enter a tailwater
value.
• Elevation Flow Curve—For this type of boundary
condition, an elevation-flow table is specified to
simulate a situation where flow rate varies over
time.
• Crown—This condition should be used when the
pipe discharges to an outfall where the water
surface elevation is equal to the elevation of the
top of the pipe.
Initial Settings Alternative
The Initial Settings Alternative contains the data that set the conditions of certain
types of network elements at the beginning of the simulation. For example, a pipe can
start in an open or closed position and a pump can start in an on or off condition.
Wet Well Tab

The initial settings tab for wet wells allows you to define the initial settings for wet
wells. The following conditions are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.

Column Description
Is Fixed Level In If False in a steady state run, and if a pump cannot

Steady State? keep up with inflow the wet well level will be
increased (by the amount set by "increment" in the
calculation options) until the flow keeps up with
the inflow or the level reaches a maximum. If the
level reaches maximum and the inflowing pipe is a
pressure pipe, that pipe will be closed. This can
lead to disconnected systems or subnetworks with
no flow in some cases.
If True, the initial wet well level will be

maintained.
Level (Initial) The wet well level for a steady run or the level at
time zero for an EPS run.
Elevation (Initial) Lets you define the initial water surface elevation
for each wet well in the alternative that uses the
User Defined Initial Elevation Initial Elevation
Type.
Pressure Pipe Tab

The initial settings tab for pressure pipes allows you to define the initial settings for
pressure pipes. The following conditions are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Status (Initial) Whether the pipe is Open or Closed at time zero

for an EPS run.
Pump Tab
The initial settings tab for pumps allows you to define the initial settings for pumps.
The following conditions are available:

Alternatives
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Status (Initial) Whether the pump is On or Off at time zero for an

EPS run.
Relative Speed Factor The relative speed factor at time zero for an EPS
(Initial) run.
Variable Speed Pump Battery Tab

The initial settings tab for variable speed pump batteries allows you to define the
initial settings for variable speed pump batteries. The following conditions are avail-
able:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Status (Initial) Whether the pump is On or Off at time zero for an

EPS run.
Relative Speed Factor The relative speed factor at time zero for an EPS
(Initial) run.
Sanitary Loading Alternative
The sanitary loading alternative lets you define sanitary loading data for manholes,
wet wells, and pressure junctions, as listed below:
• “Sanitary Loading Alternative for Manholes” on page 9-499

• “Sanitary Loading Alternative for Wet Wells” on page 9-499
• “Sanitary Loading Alternative for Pressure Junctions” on page 9-499

Sanitary Loading Alternative for Manholes

The sanitary loading alternative for manholes allows you to define sanitary loading
data for manhole elements. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Sanitary Loads Clicking the Ellipses (...) button allows you to

enter sanitary loads in the Sanitary Loads dialog
box for the currently highlighted element.
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Wet Wells

The sanitary loading alternative for wet wells allows you to define sanitary loading
data for wet well elements. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.

Sanitary Loading Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The sanitary loading alternative for pressure junctions allows you to define sanitary
loading data for pressure junction elements. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

Alternatives
Column Description

alternative.

Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives
The infiltration and inflow alternative lets you define loading data for elements
capable of accepting an inflow, as listed below:
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Conduits

The infiltration and inflow alternative for conduits allows you to define loading data
for conduits. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Infiltration Load Type Allows you to select the infiltration load method
to use.
Hydrograph If the Infiltration Load Type is set to Hydrograph

(Infiltration) (Infiltration), the user can specify the points that
make up the hydrograph curve.
Infiltration Unit Count If the Infiltration Load Type is set to Count Based,
the user can directly enter a generic count to
calculate the infiltration into the conduit.
Infiltration Pattern If the Infiltration Load Type is set to Infiltration

Pattern, the user can specify an infiltration pattern
to apply to the user defined base flow.

Column Description
Infiltration Base Flow If the Infiltration Load Type is set to Infiltration

Pattern, the user can specify the base flow to
which the infiltration pattern is applied.
Inflitration Rate per The amount of flow entering the conduit per
Loading Unit loading unit (specified by the value in the
Infiltration Unit Count field).
Infiltration Loading Specify the loading unit by which to compute the

Unit infiltration rate into the link. The type of loading
unit is dependent on the Infiltration Load Type.
Flow (Additional If the infiltration flow is known, the value can be

Infiltration) directly applied to the conduit as a Flow
(Additional Infiltration) value.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Manholes

The infiltration and inflow alternative for manholes allows you to define loading data
for manholes. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Inflow Collection Contains an Ellipsis (...) button that allows you to

access the Inflow Collection dialog box for the
associated element.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Wet Wells

The infiltration and inflow alternative for wet well nodes allows you to define loading
data for wet well nodes. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

Alternatives
Column Description

alternative.

associated element.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The infiltration and inflow alternative for pressure junctions allows you to define
loading data for pressure junctions. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.

associated element.
System Flows Alternative
The system flows alternative allows you to specify additional and known flow, along
with other contributing sources of water that are not part of the model. System flows
indicate a final combined result.
System Flow Alternative for Manholes

The system flow alternative for manholes allows you to define known flow loading
data for manholes. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

Column Description

alternative.
Flow (Known)
System Flow Alternative for Wet Wells

The system flow alternative for wet wells allows you to define known flow loading
data for wet wells. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Flow (Known)
Operational Alternative
The Operational Alternative is where you can specify controls on pressure pipes,
pumps, as well as valves. The Controlled field contains a Boolean (true or false) state-
ment that indicates whether the network element is controlled. Clicking in this field
activates a button that allows you to access the Controls dialog box and edit the
controls for this element.
The Operational Controls alternative allows you to create, modify and manage both
logical controls and logical control sets.
User Data Extensions Alternative
The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Exten-
sion command for each of the network element types. The User Data Alternative
editor contains a tab for each type of network element.

Calculation Options
Calculation Options
Each scenario is associated with a set of calculation options. Calculation options are
stored in a discrete Calculation Options Profile.
For more information on Calculation Options Profiles, see “Creating Calculation

Profiles” on page 8-576 and “Calculation Profile Attributes” on page 8-578.
Scenario Comparison
The scenario comparison tool enables you to compare input values between any two
scenarios to identify differences quickly. While Bentley SewerCAD V8i users have
previously had the capability to open a child scenario or alternative and compare it
with its parent, this tool greatly extends that capability in that you can compare any
two scenarios or alternatives (not necessarily parent-child) and very easily detect
differences.
The scenario comparison tool can be started by picking Tools > Scenario Comparison
or by selecting the Scenario Comparison button from the toolbar . If the button is
not visible, it can be added using the "Add or Remove Buttons" drop down from the
Tools toolbar (see “Customizing the Toolbars” on page 2-41).
On first opening the scenario comparison tool, the dialog below opens which gives an
overview of the steps involved in using the tool. Pick the New button (leftmost).

This opens a dialog which allows you to select which two scenarios will be compared.
The scenario manager button next to each selection gives you the ability to see the tree
view of scenarios. Chose OK to begin the scenario comparison tool. This initially
displays a list of alternatives and calculation options, with the ones with identical
properties displayed with a yellow background and those with different properties
displayed with a pink background. The background color can be changed from pink to
any other color by selecting the sixth button from the left and then selecting the
desired color.
The dialog below shows that the Infiltration and Inflow alternative is different
between the scenarios. There is a second tab for Calculation Options which shows if
the calculation options are different between scenarios.
This display can also be copied to the clipboard using the Copy button.

Scenario Comparison
The alternatives that have differences are also shown in the left pane with a red mark
as opposed to the green check indicating that there are no differences.
To obtain more detailed information on differences, highlight one of the alternatives

and select the green and white Compute arrow at the top of pane (fourth button).

This initially returns a summary of the comparison which indicates the time when the
comparison was run, which scenarios were involved and number of elements and
attributes for which there were differences.
By picking "Differences" in the left pane for the alternative of interest, you can view
the differences. In this display, only the elements and properties that are different are
shown with a pink background. In the example below, only 7 pipes had their diameters
changed and only 3 of those had difference C-factors. There are separate tables for
each element type that had differences.
Using the buttons on top of the right pane, when Differences is selected, you can
create a selection set of the elements with differences or highlight those elements in
the drawing. This is very useful for finding elements with differences in a large model.

Scenario Comparison
Scenario Comparison Options Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to select the color used to highlight differences between
the scenarios being compared in the Scenario Comparison tool.
To choose another color, click the ellipsis button, select the new color from the palette,
and click OK.
Scenario Comparison Collection Dialog Box
Some of the Differences types (such as load) may include collections of data (multiple
loads within a single load Collection). By clicking the ellipsis button next to one of
these collections you can open this dialog, which displays a table that breaks down the
collection by the individual pieces of data.

Chapter
Presenting Your 10
Results
Click one of the following links to learn how to present your network and results
computed by Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
• “Using Background Layers” on page 10-509

• “Annotating Your Model” on page 10-518
• “Color Coding Your Model” on page 10-527
• “Using Profiles” on page 10-531
• “Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables” on page 10-545
• “Reporting” on page 10-564
• “Graphing” on page 10-566
• “Chart Options Dialog Box” on page 10-577
• “Print Preview Window” on page 10-644
Using Background Layers

Use background layers to display pictures behind your network. For example, you
might want to display a picture of a neighborhood behind your network, so you can
relate elements in your network to structures and roads depicted in the picture. You
can add, delete, edit and rename background layers in the Background Layers
Manager.
You can add multiple pictures to your project for use as background layers, and turn
off the ones you don't want to show and turn on those you do. Additionally, you can
create groups of pictures in folders, so you can hide or show an entire folder or group
of pictures at once.
To add or delete background layers, open the Background Layers manager: click View
> Background Layers (Ctrl+2).

You can use shapefiles, AutoCAD DXF files, and raster (also called bitmap) pictures
as background images for your model. These raster image formats are supported:
bmp, jpg, jpeg, jpe, jfif, gif, tif, tiff, png, and sid.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using background layers:
• “Background Layer Manager” on page 10-510

• “Working with Background Layer Folders” on page 10-512
• “Adding Background Layers” on page 10-513
• “Deleting Background Layers” on page 10-513
• “Editing Background Layers” on page 10-514
• “Renaming Background Layers” on page 10-514
• “Turning Background Layers On and Off” on page 10-514
• “Working with Background Layer Folders” on page 10-512
• “Shapefile Properties Dialog Box” on page 10-516
• “DXF Properties Dialog Box” on page 10-517
• “Performing ProjectWise Operations” on page 4-185
Background Layer Manager
Note: When multiple background layers are overlaid, priority is given

to the one that appears highest in the list. In other words, a layer
in the first list position is drawn “on top of” all other layers,
since they are all below it on the list.
The Background Layer manager lets you add, edit, and remove and manage the back-
ground layers that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a list pane
that displays each of the layers currently contained within the project, along with a
number of button controls.
When a background layer is added, it appears in the Background Layers list pane,
along with an associated check box that is used to control that layer’s visibility.
Selecting the check box next to a layer causes that layer to become visible in the main
drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. If the layers in the list pane are
contained within one or more folders, clearing the check box next to a folder causes all
of the layers within that folder to become invisible.

Presenting Your Results

commands:
• File—Opens a browse dialog box that
allows you to choose the file to use as a
background layer.
• Folder—Creates a folder in the Back-
ground Layers list pane.

background layer.

layer.
Edit Opens the background layer properties

dialog box that corresponds with the
currently highlighted background layer.
Shift Up Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Expand All Expands all of the branches in the hierarchy

displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All Collapses all of the branches in the

Help Displays online help for the Background

Layer Manager.

Working with Background Layer Folders
You can create folders in the Background Layers Manager to organize your back-
ground layers and create a group of background layers that can be turned off as one
entity. You can also create folders within folders. When you start a new project,
Bentley SewerCAD V8i displays an empty folder in the Background Layers Manager
called Background Layers. New background layer files and folders are added to the
Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer folder:
1. Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers Manager.
2. In the Background Layers Manager, click the New button, then click New Folder
from the shortcut menu.
Or select the default Background Layers folder, then right-click and select New >
Folder from the shortcut menu.
– If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click New > New Folder. Or right-click, then select New > Folder from
the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
4. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a background layer folder:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to delete, then
click the Delete button.
– You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a background layer folder:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to rename, then
click the Rename button.
– You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
– You can also rename a background layer folder by selecting the folder, then
modifying its label in the Properties Editor.

Adding Background Layers
You add background layers to your project using the Background Layers Manager.
When you start a new project, Bentley SewerCAD V8i displays an empty folder in the
Background Layers Manager called Background Layers. New background layer files
and folders are added to the Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, click the New button, then click New File
Or right-click on the default Background Layers folder and select New > File
– To add a new background layer file to an existing folder in the Background
Layer Manager, select the folder, then click New > New File. Or right-click,
then select New > File from the shortcut menu.
3. Navigate to the file you want to add as a background layer and select it.
– If you select a .dxf file, the DXF Properties dialog box opens. For more infor-
mation, see “DXF Properties Dialog Box”.
– If you select a .shp the ShapeFile Properties dialog box opens. For more infor-
mation, see “Shapefile Properties Dialog Box”.
– If you select a .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jfif, .gif, .tif, .tiff, .png, or .sid file, the
Image Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see “Image Proper-
ties Dialog Box”.
4. After you add the background layer, you might have to use the Pan button to move
the layer within the drawing area; Zoom Extents does not center a background
image.
Deleting Background Layers
To delete a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Or, right-click the background layer, then select Delete from the shortcut menu.

Editing Background Layers
You can edit a background layer in two ways: you can edit its properties or its position
in a list of background layers displayed in the Background Layers Manager.
To edit the properties of a background layer:
1. Select the background layer you want to edit.

2. Click the Edit button. A Properties dialog box opens.
– You can also right-click the background layer, then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
To change the position of a background layer in the list of background layers:
The order of a background layer determines its Z level and what displays if you use
more than one background layer. Background layers at the top of the list display on
top of the other background layers in the drawing pane; so, background layers that are
lower than the top one in the list might be hidden or partially hidden by layers above
them in the list.
Select the background layer whose position you want to change in the list of Back-
ground Layers Manager, then click the Shift Up or Shift Down buttons to move the
selected background layer up or down in the list.
Renaming Background Layers
To rename a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Or, right-click the background layer that you want to rename, then select Rename
Turning Background Layers On and Off
You can choose to turn your background layers off by clearing the check box next to
the background layer file or folder than contains it in the Background Layers Manager.
Image Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box opens when you are adding or editing a background-layer image other
than a .dxf or .shp. Use the following controls to define the properties of the back-
ground layer:

Image Filter Lets you more clearly display background images

that you resize. Set this to Point, Bilinear, or
Trilinear. These are methods of displaying your
image on-screen.
• Point works well when you are not changing
the size of the image in the display, for
example, when you are displaying a 500 x 500
pixel image at 100% using 500 x 500 pixels
on-screen.
• Bilinear and Trilinear work well when you
display your image on-screen using more or
fewer pixels than your image contains, such
as displaying a 500 x 500 pixel image at by
stretching it to 800 x 800 pixels on-screen.
Trilinear gives you smoother transitions when
you zoom in and out of the image.
Transparency Lets you set the transparency level of the

background layer. Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets
you add transparency to any image type you use as
a background. Bentley SewerCAD V8i ignores
any transparency that exists in the image before
you use it as a background.
Resolution Lets you select the clarity for MrSID® images that
you use as background images. Because using a
higher level of clarity or resolution increases the
time it takes to display a MrSID image, you can
select the resolution that best meets your needs.
For formats other than MrSID, this drop-down list
contains only one selection.

Use Compression This checkbox lets you compress the image in

memory so that it takes up less RAM while it is
being loaded. When you check this option, you
may see slight color distortion in the image.
Note: The way the image is

compressed depends on your
computer’s video card. Not all
video cards support this
feature. If you check this option
but your computer’s video card
does not support image
compression, the request for
compression will simply be
ignored and the image will be
loaded uncompressed.
Image Position Table Lets you position the background layer with
respect to your drawing.
• X/Y Image displays the size of the image you
are using for a background and sets its posi-
tion with respect to the origin of your drawing.
You cannot change this data.
• X/Y Drawing displays where the corners of the
image your are using will be positioned rela-
tive to your drawing. By default, no scaling is
used. However, you can scale the image you
are using by setting different locations for the
corners of the image you are importing. The
locations you set are relative to the origin of
your Bentley SewerCAD V8i drawing.
You can also use BMP and JPG image files. For more information, see “How Do I
Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it is a File Type without an Inherent Scale?”
on page 16-1135.
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box
The Shapefile Properties dialog box lets you define a shapefile background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename Lists the path and filename of the shapefile to use

as a background layer.

Browse Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label Identifies the background layer.
Unit Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial
data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.
Line Color Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the
Ellipsis (...) button to open a Color palette
containing more color choices.
Line Thickness Sets the thickness of the outline of the layer

elements. Use values beginning at 0, where 0 is
the minimum thickness and larger values are
thicker.
Fill Color Sets the fill color of the layer elements. Click the
Fill Figure Lets you show or hide the selected fill color for the
layer elements. Select this check box to display
the selected background color; clear it to turn off
the background color and only the outline
displays.
To access the Shapefile Properties dialog box, click New File in the Background
Layers manager, then select an .shp file.
Note: Shapefiles can support complex polygons with holes in them. In

stand-alone version, SewerCAD V8i can load these complex
shapefiles as backgrounds, but doesn’t render the holes (the
polygons appear filled in).
DXF Properties Dialog Box
The DXF Properties dialog box lets you define a .dxf file as the background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:

Annotating Your Model
Filename Lists the path and filename of the .dxf file to use
as a background layer.
Browse Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label Identifies the background layer.
Unit Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial
data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.
Line Color Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the
Default Color Lets you use the line color included in the .dxf file
or lets you use a custom color that you select in the
Line Color field. Select this check box to use the
default color included in the .dxf file. cleared this
check box if you want to choose a custom color
from the Line Color field.
Symbol Lets you choose the symbol that is displayed for

each point element in the .dxf.
Size Sets the size of the symbol for each point element
in the .dxf.
To access the .dxf properties, click New File In the Background Layers manager, then
select a .dxf file.

You can annotate any of the element types in Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
To work with annotations, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Click one of the following links to learn more about annotating your model:

• “Element Symbology Manager” on page 10-519

• “Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager” on page 10-521
• “Adding Annotations” on page 10-522
• “Deleting Annotations” on page 10-523
• “Editing Annotations” on page 10-523
• “Renaming Annotations” on page 10-523
• “Annotation Properties Dialog Box” on page 10-524
Element Symbology Manager
The Element Symbology manager allows you to control the way that elements and
their associated labels are displayed. The dialog box contains a pane that lists each
element type along with the following buttons:


commands:
• New Annotation—Opens the Annota-
tion Properties dialog box, allowing you
to define annotation settings for the
• New Color Coding—Opens the Color
Coding Properties dialog box, allowing
you to define annotation settings for the
• Add Folder—Creates a folder under the
currently highlighted element type,
allowing you to manage the various
color coding and annotation settings
that are associated with an element.
You can turn off all of the symbology
settings contained within a folder by
clearing the check box next to the folder.
When a folder is deleted, all of the
symbology settings contained within it
are also deleted.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted Color

Coding or Annotation Definition or folder.

object.
Annotate Opens a shortcut menu containing the

following options:
• Refresh Annotation—If you change an
annotation’s prefix or suffix in the Prop-
erty Editor, or directly in the database,
selecting this command refreshes the
annotation.
• Update Annotation Offset—If you
have adjusted the Initial X or Y offsets,
selecting this command resets all anno-
tation Initial X or Y offsets to their default
location (or new default location).
• Update Annotation Height—If you’ve
adjusted the height multiplier, selecting
this command resets all annotation
height multiplier to their default values.

Shift Up Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Expand All Expands each branch in the tree view pane.
Collapse All Collapses each branch in the tree view pane.
Help Displays online help for the Element

Symbology Manager.
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager
Use folders in the Element Symbology Manager to create a collection of color coding
and/or annotation that can be turned off as one entity.
Adding Folders
Use element symbology folders to control whether related annotations and/or color
coding displays. To create a folder in the Element Symbology Manager:
1. Click View > Element Symbology.

2. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click an element and select New >
Folder.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the folder, click the New button,
then select New Folder.
3. Name the folder.
4. You can drag and drop existing annotations and color coding into the folder you
create, and you can create annotations and color coding within the folder by right-
clicking the folder and selecting New > Annotation or New > Color Coding.
5. Use the folder to collectively turn on and off the annotations and color coding
within the folder.

Note: You can refresh the display of all color-codings/annotations

within a folder by right-clicking the folder and selecting the
Refresh Group command.
In the Microstation version, the Refresh Group command will

override any local modifications made to color or weight
settings applied to individual elements using Microstation
commands. These elements will revert to the SewerCAD V8i
symbology settings after a Refresh Group command is initiated.
Deleting Folders
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click
the theme folder you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the folder you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Folders
the theme folder you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the folder you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Adding Annotations
To add an annotation:

Annotation.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the annotation, click the New
button, and select New Annotation.
3. The Annotation Properties dialog box opens. Select the annotation you want in the
Field drop-down list.
If you don’t find the Field you want to use immediately, look carefully through the
list of available field selections from top to bottom to make sure you didn’t miss
the field you want.
4. If needed, set a Prefix or Suffix. Anything you type as a prefix is added directly to
the beginning of the label, and anything you type as a suffix is added to the end
(so, you may want to include spaces as part of your prefix and suffix).

Note: If you add an annotation that uses units, you can type “%u” in
the prefix or suffix field to display the units in the drawing pane.
5. Select the initial X- and Y- offset for the annotation. Offset is measured from the
center of the node, centroid of the polygon, or midpoint of the polyline.
6. If needed, set an initial height multiplier. Use a number greater than 1 to make the
annotation larger, and a number between 0 and 1 to make the annotation smaller.
If you use a negative number, the annotation is flipped (rotated 180 degrees).
7. If you have created selection sets, you can apply your annotation only to a partic-
ular selection set by selecting that set from the Selection Set drop-down list. If you
have not created any selection sets, then the annotation is applied to all elements
of the type you are using.
8. After you finish defining your annotation, click OK to close the Annotation Prop-
erties dialog box and create your annotation, or Cancel to close the dialog box
without creating an annotation.
Deleting Annotations
an annotation you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the annotation you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Editing Annotations
the annotation you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the annotation you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note: Changes to annotation settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Re-Apply Annotation command from the
submenu that appears.
Renaming Annotations
the annotation you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the annotation you want to rename, then click the Rename button.

Annotation Properties Dialog Box
The Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for
each element type.
This dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for each element type. The
dialog box consists of a list pane on the left and a control section on the right. The
control section in the right side of the dialog allow you to edit the settings for the
annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
The dialog box consists of the following buttons:
New Creates a new annotation in the list pane.
Delete Deletes the annotation that is currently

Rename Lets you rename the annotation that is

and the following controls:
List Pane
Label Displays the name of the current annotation

definition.
Initial X Offset Displays the initial X-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Initial Y Offset Displays the initial Y-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Selected Annotation
Field Name Lets you specify the attribute that is displayed

by the annotation definition.
Free Form This field is only available when <Free Form

Annotation> is selected in the Field Name list.
Click the ellipsis button to open the Free Form
Annotation dialog box.

Prefix Lets you specify a prefix that is displayed before

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Suffix Lets you specify a suffix that is displayed after

Note: If you add an annotation that

uses units, you can type
“%u” in the prefix or suffix
field to display the units in
the drawing pane.
Selection Set Lets you specify a selection set to which the

annotation settings will apply. If the annotation
is to be applied to all elements, select the <All
Elements> option in this field. <All Elements>
is the default setting.
Initial Offset If checked, the values in the X and Y fields will

be applied to all annotations (that are associated
with the current annotation definition) in the
drawing when the Apply button is clicked.
X Sets the initial horizontal offset for an

annotation. Set this at the time you create the
annotation.
Y Sets the initial vertical offset for an annotation.

Set this at the time you create the annotation.
Initial Multiplier If checked, the value in the Height Multiplier

field will be applied to all annotations (that are
associated with the current annotation
definition) in the drawing when the Apply
button is clicked.
Initial Height Multiplier Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set
this at the time you create the annotation.
Free Form Annotation Dialog Box

The Free Form Annotation dialog box allows you to type custom annotations for an
element type.

To create an annotation, type the text as you want it to appear in the drawing. You can
add element attributes to the text string by clicking the Append button and selecting
the attribute from the categorized list.
Symbology Definitions Manager
The Symbology Definitions manager lets you add, edit, and remove and manage the
symbology definitions that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a
list pane that displays each of the definitions currently contained within the project, a
display pane that details the settings for the currently highlighted definition, along
with a toolbar. The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
New Creates a new symbology definition in the

list pane.

symbology definition.


Help Displays online help for the Symbology

Definitions manager.
When you create a new definition, all of the annotation and color settings will be
turned off. To change the settings for a definition, change the current symbology defi-
nition to the one you want to edit in the “Element Symbology Manager” and make the
desired changes there (i.e. turn on/off the desired elements, create new annotations
and color coding and turn them on or off, etc.).
Zoom Dependent Visibility
Available through the Properties dialog box of each layer in the Element Symbology
manager, this feature can be used to cause elements, decorations, and annotations to
only appear in the drawing pane when the view is within the zoom range specified by
the Minimum and Maximum Zoom values.

• Enabled: Set to true to enable and set to false to disable Zoom Dependent Visi-
bility.
• Minimum Zoom (%): The lowest zoom level at which the element will appear in
the drawing pane.
• Maximum Zoom (%) : The highest zoom level at which the element will appear
• Apply to Element: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums to the
symbols in the drawing.
• Apply to Decorations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums
to flow arrows, check valves, and constituent sources in the drawing.
• Apply to Annotations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums
to labels in the drawing.
Color Coding Your Model

Use color coding to help you quickly see what's going on in your Bentley SewerCAD
V8i model. Use color coding to change the color and/or size of elements based on the
value of data that you select, such as flow or element size.
To work with color coding, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Click one of the following links to learn more about color coding your model:
• “Element Symbology Manager” on page 10-519

• “Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager” on page 10-521
• “Adding Color-Coding” on page 10-527
• “Deleting Color-Coding” on page 10-528
• “Editing Color-Coding” on page 10-528
• “Renaming Color-Coding” on page 10-529
• “Adding Color-Coding” on page 10-527
Adding Color-Coding
To add color coding, including element sizing:

Color Coding.

Or, select the element to which you want to add the color coding, click the New
button, and select New Color Coding.
3. The Color Coding Properties dialog box opens. Select the properties for which
you want to color code from the Field and Selection Set drop-down lists.
4. In the Options drop-down list, select whether you want to apply color and/or size
to the elements you are coding.
a. Click Calculate Range. This automatically sets the maximum and minimum
values for your coding. If you want, you can set these values manually.
b. Click Initialize. This automatically creates values and colors in the Color
Map. If you want, you can set these values manually.
5. After you finish defining your color coding, click OK to close the Color Coding
Properties dialog box and create your color coding, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without creating a color coding.
6. Click Compute to compute your network.
7. To see the network color coding and/or sizing change over time:
a. Click View > EPS Results Browser, if needed, to open the EPS Results
Browser dialog box.
b. Click Play to use the EPS Results Browser to review your color coding over
time.
Deleting Color-Coding
the color coding you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the color coding you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Editing Color-Coding
the color coding you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the color coding you want to edit, then click the Edit button.

Note: Changes to color coding settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Refresh Color Coding command from the
submenu that appears.
Renaming Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the color coding you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the color coding you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to define color coding for each element type. The dialog
box consists of the following controls:
Properties
Field Name Lets you select the attribute by which the color
coding is applied.
Selection Set Lets you apply a color coding to a previously

defined selection set.
Calculate Range Automatically finds the minimum and maximum

values for the selected attribute and enters them in
the appropriate Min. and Max fields.
When you click this button a submenu appears,
allowing you to choose between the following
options:
• Full Range: This option gets all values across
all time steps for a particular element type.
• Quick Range: This option only takes values
from a percentage of the time steps (for
example, if there’s 100 time steps, Quick
Range will sample only one in ten). For a large
model with a large number of time steps this
option can significantly increase the perfor-
mance of the color coding tool.

Min Lets you define the minimum value of the attribute

to be color coded.
Max Lets you define the maximum value of the

attribute to be color coded.
Steps Lets you specify how many rows are created in the
color maps table when you click Initialize. When
you click Initialize, a number of values equal to the
number of Steps are created in the color maps
table. The low and high values are set by the Min
and Max values you set.
Color Map
Options Lets you select whether you want to use color

coding, sizing, or both to code and display your
elements.
Color Maps Table Lets you map colors to value ranges for the
attribute being color coded. The following buttons
are found along the top of the table:
• New—Creates a new row in the Color

Maps table.
• Delete—Deletes the currently highlighted

row from the Color Maps table.
• Initialize—Finds the range of values for

the specified attribute, divides it into equal
ranges based on the number of Steps you
have set, and assigns a color to each range.
• Ramp—Generates a gradient range

between two colors that you specify. Pick the
color for the first and last values in the list,
then Bentley SewerCAD V8i automatically
sets intermediate colors for the other values.
For example, picking red as the first color and
blue as the last color produces varying shades
of purple for the other values.
• Invert—Reverse the order of the colors/

sizes used in the Color Map table.

Above Range Color Displays the color that is applied to elements

whose value for the specified attribute fall outside
the range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Color or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Above Range Size Displays the size that is applied to elements whose
value for the specified attribute fall outside the
range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Size or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Using Profiles
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade or pressure.
You define profiles by selecting a series of adjacent elements. Continous reaches of

conduits, prismatic channels, pressure pipes, as well as their connecting nodes can be
plotted in a profile. The profile you create displays the structures you selected, plus
the relative ground and water elevations.
The Profiles manager is a dockable window that lets you add, delete, rename, edit, and
view profiles.
Click one of the following links to learn more about how to use profiles:
• “Profiles Manager” on page 10-532

• “Viewing Profiles” on page 10-532
• “Creating a New Profile” on page 10-533
• “Editing Profiles” on page 10-535
• “Deleting Profiles” on page 10-535
• “Renaming Profiles” on page 10-535
• “Profile Setup Dialog Box” on page 10-536
• “Profile Viewer Dialog Box” on page 10-537

Using Profiles
Profiles Manager
The Profiles Manager allows you to create, view, and edit profile views of elements in
the network. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the profiles
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
New Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to create a new profile.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted profile.

profile.
Edit Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to modify the settings of the
currently highlighted profile.
View Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Profile: Opens the Profile Viewer,
allowing you to view the currently high-
lighted profile.
• Engineering Profile: Opens the Engi-
neering Profile Viewer, allowing you to
view the currently highlighted profile as
an engineering profile.
Help Displays online help for the Profile

Manager.
Viewing Profiles
To view a profile:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.

2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profile manager.

3. In the Profile Manager:

a. Double-click the profile you want to view to open the Profile Viewer;
b. Select the profile you want to view, click the drop-down menu on the View
Profile button, and select Profile to open the profile view;
c. Or select the profile you want to view, click the drop-down menu on the View
Profile button, and select Engineering Profile to open the engineering profile
view.
Note: You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
4. If necessary, you can click Chart Settings to change the look of the profile, and
use Print Preview and Print to print the profile.
Creating a New Profile
To create a new profile:
1. Click View > Profiles or click the Profiles Manager button on the View toolbar to
open the Profiles manager.
2. Right-click in the Profiles manager and select New, or click the New button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. For more information, see “Profile Setup
Dialog Box” on page 10-536.
4. Select the Elements you want to use:
a. Click Select from Drawing. The Select dialog box appears:
You must select one path of contiguous elements; you cannot select diverging
paths. You can select upstream and downstream elements, but if you begin at
an upstream element, select downstream, and then make upstream selections
to finish, your profile will be V-shaped, with higher elevations at the begin-
ning and end of the profile than in the middle. Instead, what you might want
to do is select elements beginning at a high elevation and selecting elements at
increasingly lower elevations towards an outfall.

Using Profiles
b. To add elements to the profile, click elements in the drawing pane. (By
default, the Add button is active in the Select dialog box.) You can only add
elements to either end of your selection—all selected elements must be
contiguous.
When there is a plus sign next to the cursor, you can select elements to add to
the profile; elements that you successfully select are highlighted red.
c. To remove elements from the profile, click the Remove button in the Select
dialog box. Thereafter, elements you select in the drawing pane are removed
from the profile. You can only remove elements from either end of your selec-
tion—all selected elements must be contiguous.
When there is a minus sign next to the cursor, you can remove elements from
the profile; unselected elements are not highlighted.
d. When you are finished adding elements to your profile, click the Done button
in the Select dialog box.
5. The Profile Setup dialog box opens and displays a list of the elements you
selected. If necessary, use the Reverse button to reverse the order of these
elements, and the Select from Drawing or Remove buttons to add or remove
elements from the list.
Note: You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
6. Click Close and Open Profile to close the Profile Setup dialog box and open the
Profile Viewer dialog box.
Creating a Profile from the Drawing Pane

You can quickly create a profile by right-clicking an element in the drawing pane and
selecting the Create Profile command.
• For Manholes: If you right click on a manhole and use the right-click Create
Profile command it will create a profile of the element connecting that manhole to
its subnetwork collection point (usually a wet well or outfall). It will make the
manhole you originally click the most upstream point.
• For Transitions: If you right click on a transition and use the right-click Create
Profile command it will create a profile of the element connecting that transition
to its subnetwork collection point (usually a wet well or outfall). It will make the
transition you originally click the most upstream point.

• For Conduits and Pressure Pipes: If you right click on a conduit or pressure
pipe and use the right-click Create Profile command it will create a profile whose
contents include just that pipe and both of its end nodes.
• For Pressure Nodes: If you right click on a pressure node and use the right-click
Create Profile command the Query Parameters dialog box appears, allowing you
to specify the Start and Stop Nodes.
• For Wet Wells: If you right click on a wet well and use the right-click Create
Profile command the Query Parameters dialog box appears, allowing you to
specify the Start and Stop Nodes.
Editing Profiles
You can edit a profile to change the elements that it uses or the order in which those
elements are used. To edit a profile:
1. Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager.

2. In the Profiles manager, right-click the profile you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the profile you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. Modify the profile as needed and click OK to
save your changes or Cancel to exit without saving your changes.
Deleting Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, right-
click the profile you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the profile you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, right-
click the profile you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the profile you want to rename, then click the Rename button.

Using Profiles
Profile Setup Dialog Box
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the adjacent elements on which the profile
is based. The Profile Setup dialog box includes the following options:
Label Displays the list of elements that define the

profile.
User Defined Station Check a box to enter a user defiined station.
Station This field displays the distance along the

alignment of pipes. The field is automatically
calculated unless you check the corresponding
User Defined Station box; if the box is checked
you can define the station.
Select From Drawing Lets you select and clear elements for the profile.
You can select channels, conduits, and ponds for
inclusion in your profile.
Note: In AutoCAD mode, you cannot

use the shortcut menu, you
must re-open the Profile Setup
dialog box.
Reverse Lets you reverse the profile, so the first node in the
list becomes the last, and the last node becomes
the first.
Remove All Removes all elements from the profile.
Remove All Previous Removes all elements that appear before the
selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Remove All Following Removes all elements that appear after the
selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Open Engineering Closes the Profile Setup dialog and opens the
Profile Engineering Profile Viewer dialog box.
Open Profile Closes the Profile Setup dialog box and opens the
Profile Viewer dialog box.
After everything is set up to your satisfaction, click OK to generate the plot of the
profile.

Note: Results for gravity elements are available only for hydraulic time
steps. Therefore some results will not be displayed in the profile
view for gravity elements, such as HGL.
Profile Viewer Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls::
Zoom Window Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

section of the graph. To zoom or magnify an area,
select the Zoom Window tool, click to the left of
the area you want to magnify, then drag the mouse
to the right, across the area you want to magnify,
so that the area you want to magnify is contained
within the marquee that the Zoom Window tool
draws. After you have selected the area you want
to magnify, release the mouse button to stop
dragging.
To zoom out, or reduce the magnification, drag the
mouse from right to left across the magnified
image.
Zoom Extents Magnifies the profile so that the entire graph is

displayed.
Chart Settings Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Options: Opens the Chart Options dialog box,
letting you view and modify the display
settings for the current profile plot. For more
information, see “Chart Options Dialog Box”
on page 10-577.
Warning! Never delete or rename any

of the series entries on the
Series Tab of the Chart
Options dialog box. These
series were specifically
designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
• Ground Profile Options: Opens the ground

profile options dialog.
• Export to DXF: Exports the profile view as a
dxf file.

Using Profiles
Print Prints the current view of the profile to your

default printer. If you want to use a printer other
than your default, use Print Preview to change the
printer and print the profile.
Print Preview Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note: Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
Copy Copies the contents of the Profile Viewer dialog

box as an image to the Windows clipboard, from
where you can paste it into another application,
such as Microsoft® Word® or Adobe®
Photoshop®.

displayed.
Zoom Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

dragging.
image.

EPS Results Browsers The following EPS Results Browsers are found to
the right of the Refresh button:
• Rewind (Full)—Sets the currently displayed
time step to the beginning of the simulation.
• Pause—Stops the animation. Restarts it again
with another click.
• Play—Advances the currently displayed time
step from beginning to end.
• Time Display—Shows the current time step
that is displayed in the drawing pane.
• Time Slider—Lets you manually move the
slider representing the currently displayed
time step along the bar, which represents the
full length of time that the scenario encom-
passes
Note: Results for gravity elements are available only for hydraulic time
steps. Therefore some results will not be displayed in the profile
view for gravity elements, such as HGL.
Axis Options Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the scale of the profile plot. Specify a unit, enter a
value for the Horizontal and vertical axes, and specify whether the direction is
measured from Left to Right or Right to Left.
Engineering Profile Viewer Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls:
Tools Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Options: Opens the Profile Options dialog.
• Ground Profile Options: Opens the Ground
Profile Options dialog.
• Export to DXF: Exports the profile view as a
dxf file.
• Save Annotation Definition Settings as
Default: Saves the current profile annotation
settings as the default setting that will be used
by all other engineering profiles.

Using Profiles
Print Preview Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note: Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
Undo Cancels the last data input action on the currently

active dialog box. Clicking Undo again cancels the
second-to-last data input action, and so on.
Redo Cancels the last undo command.

displayed.
Zoom In/Out Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

dragging.
image.
Zoom Window Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

dragging.
image.

Zoom Previous Resets the zoom level to the last setting.
Zoom Next Resets the zoom level to the setting that was active
before a Zoom Previous command was executed.
drawing.
Engineering Profile Options

This dialog allows you to change various display options for engineering profiles. It is
divided into the following tabs:
Axis Tab
• Scale: Allows you to define the horizontal and vertical scale of the engineering
profile view.
• Direction: Allows you to choose the direction in which elements are displayed in
the engineering profile view.
• Axis Labeling: Allows you to choose where to place the labels along the axis of
the engineering profile view.
• Automatic Scaling: When this box is checked the scaling is handled automati-
cally and the Minimum and Maximum fields are not editable. When this box is
not checked you can define the Minimum and Maximum fields.
• Minimum: The left-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field is
not editable.
• Maximum: The right-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field
is not editable.
• Increment: The length between intermediate values.
Drawing Tab

Using Profiles
• Text Height Multiplier: Increases or decreases the size of the text by the factor
indicated.
• Ground Elevation Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the
ground elevation line in the engineering profile view.
• Structure Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of structure lines
in the engineering profile view.
• HGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the hydraulic
grade line in the engineering profile view.
• EGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the energy grade
line in the engineering profile view.
Layers Tab
This tab allows you to select the color and/or change the visibility of the various
elements of the profile view. Uncheck the Is Visible box to turn the corresponding
element off in the engineering profile view. Click the Layer Color to access the color
menu to change the color of the corresponding element in the engineering profile
view.
Ground Profile Options

This dialog allows you to define the line representing ground elevation in the engi-
neering profile view.
By default, the Elevation Data Type is set to Automatic. If you change it to Ground
Elevation/Depth Curve, you can use the Station vs. Elevation table to define the
ground elevation. Click the New button to add a row to the table or Delete to remove
the currently highlighted row. Click the Import button to import ground elevation data
from a Tab-delimited text file.

This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for nodes. The
following controls are available:
• Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-to-
right) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
• Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-and-
down) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
• Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation
over an annotated element.

• Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the anno-
tation and the associated element.
• Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to
the associated element.
Link Annotation Properties Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for links. The
following controls are available:
• Align Text With Pipes: When this box is checked the annotation will align with
the angle of the corresponding pipe.
right) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
down) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
• Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation
over an annotated element.
• Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the anno-
tation and the associated element.
• Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to
the associated element.
Text Properties
This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for the axis
labels. The following controls are available:
• Text: This field displays the text of the label. This field is not editable.
right) placement of the label annotation.
down) placement of the label annotation.
• Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the label anno-
tation .

Using Profiles

The Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for
each element type.
This dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for each element type. The
dialog box consists of a list pane on the left and a control section on the right. The
control section in the right side of the dialog allow you to edit the settings for the
annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
The dialog box consists of the following buttons:
New Creates a new annotation in the list pane.
Delete Deletes the annotation that is currently

Rename Lets you rename the annotation that is

and the following controls:
List Pane
Label Displays the name of the current annotation

definition.
Initial X Offset Displays the initial X-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Initial Y Offset Displays the initial Y-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Selected Annotation
Field Name Lets you specify the attribute that is displayed

by the annotation definition.
Free Form This field is only available when <Free Form

Annotation> is selected in the Field Name list.
Click the ellipsis button to open the Free Form
Annotation dialog box.

Prefix Lets you specify a prefix that is displayed before

Suffix Lets you specify a suffix that is displayed after

Note: If you add an annotation that

uses units, you can type
“%u” in the prefix or suffix
field to display the units in
the drawing pane.
Selection Set Lets you specify a selection set to which the

annotation settings will apply. If the annotation
is to be applied to all elements, select the <All
Elements> option in this field. <All Elements>
is the default setting.
Initial Offset If checked, the values in the X and Y fields will

be applied to all annotations (that are associated
with the current annotation definition) in the
drawing when the Apply button is clicked.
X Sets the initial horizontal offset for an

annotation. Set this at the time you create the
annotation.
Y Sets the initial vertical offset for an annotation.

Set this at the time you create the annotation.
Initial Multiplier If checked, the value in the Height Multiplier

field will be applied to all annotations (that are
associated with the current annotation
definition) in the drawing when the Apply
button is clicked.
Initial Height Multiplier Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set
this at the time you create the annotation.
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables

FlexTables lets you view input data and results for all elements of a specific type in a
tabular format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or create customized
FlexTables to compare data and create reports.

FlexTables lets you view all elements in the project, all elements of a specific type, or
any subset of elements. Additionally, to ease data input and present output data for
specific elements, FlexTables can be:
• Filtered (see “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 10-555)

• Globally edited (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 10-554)
• Sorted (see “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 10-555)
If you need to edit a set of properties for all elements of a certain type in your network,
you might consider creating a FlexTable and making your changes there, rather than
editing each element one at a time, in sequence.
FlexTables can also be used to create results reports that you can print, save as a file,
or copy to the Windows clipboard for copying into word processing or spreadsheet
software.
To work with FlexTables, select the FlexTables manager or use View > FlexTables
(Ctrl+7) to open the FlexTables manager if it is closed.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using FlexTables:
• “FlexTables Manager” on page 10-546

• “Working with FlexTable Folders” on page 10-548
• “Opening FlexTables” on page 10-551
• “Creating a New FlexTable” on page 10-552
• “Deleting FlexTables” on page 10-552
• “Naming and Renaming FlexTables” on page 10-552
• “Editing FlexTables” on page 10-553
• “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 10-555
• “Customizing Your FlexTable” on page 10-558
• “FlexTable Setup Dialog Box” on page 10-559
• “Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data” on page 10-562
• “Using Predefined Tables” on page 10-564
FlexTables Manager
The FlexTables Manager allows you to create, manage, and delete custom tabular
reports. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the custom FlexTables
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.


commands:
• FlexTable—Creates a new tabular
report and opens the FlexTable Setup
dialog box, allowing you to define the
element type that the FlexTable
displays, and the columns that are
contained in the table.
• Folder—Creates a folder in the list
pane, allowing you to group custom
FlexTables.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted FlexTable.

FlexTable.
Edit Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
Open Lets you open the currently highlighted

FlexTable. Click the dropdown arrow to
open a submenu containing the following
options:
• Open: Opens the currently highlighted
table.
• Open on Selection: Opens the
currently highlighted table, however the
table will contain only elements that are
selected in the drawing pane. This
command is unavailable unless one or
more elements of the highlighted table
type are selected.
Help Displays online help for the FlexTable

Manager.

Working with FlexTable Folders
You can add, delete, and rename folders in the FlexTable Manager to organize your
FlexTables into groups of that can be turned off as one entity. You can also create
folders within folders. When you start a new project, Bentley SewerCAD V8i displays
two items in the FlexTable Manager: Tables - Project (for project-level FlexTables)
and Tables - Shared (for FlexTables shared by more than one Bentley SewerCAD V8i
project). You can add new FlexTables and FlexTable folders to either item or to
existing folders.
To add a FlexTable folder:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager.

2. In the FlexTable Manager, select either Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
click the New button.
– If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click the New button.
3. Click New Folder from the shortcut menu.
4. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
5. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a FlexTable folder:

2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to delete, then click the
Delete button.
– You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a FlexTable folder:

2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to rename, then click the
Rename button.
– You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
– You can also rename a FlexTable folder by selecting the folder, then modi-
fying its label in the Properties Editor.

FlexTable Dialog Box
FlexTables are displayed in the FlexTable dialog box. The dialog box contains a
toolbar, the rows and columns of data in the FlexTable, and a status bar.
Export to File Export to a Shapefile .shp, a Tab Delimited

file .txt, or a Comma Delimited File .csv.
Copy Lets you copy the contents of the selected

table cell, rows, and/or columns for the
purpose of pasting into a different row or
column or into a text editing program such
as Notepad.
Paste Lets you paste the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the selected table cell, row, or
column. Use this with the Copy button.
Edit Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table

Zoom To Lets you zoom into and center the drawing

pane on the currently selected element in the
FlexTable.
Report Lets you create and view a report of your

FlexTable for either the current time step or
all time steps.
Options Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Create Selection Set—Lets you create
a new static selection set ( a selection
set based on selection) containing the
currently selected elements in the
FlexTable.
• Add to Selection Set—Lets you add
the currently selected elements in the
FlexTable to an existing selection set.
• Remove from Selection Set—
Removes the currently selected
elements from an existing selection set.
• Relabel—Opens an Element Relabeling
box where you can Replace, Append, or
Renumber
Select In Drawing Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Select In Drawing—Selects the
currently highlighted element(s) in the
drawing pane.
• Add to Selection—Adds the currently
highlighted element(s) to the group that
is currently highlighted in the drawing
pane.
• Remove From Selection—Removes
the currently highlighted element(s) from
the group that is currently highlighted in
the drawing pane.
The status bar at the bottom of the FlexTable dialog box contains the following items:
• x of x elements displayed—Number of elements displayed in the FlexTable of

the total possible number of that type of element.

• FILTERED—If you have applied a filter to the FlexTable, this appears in the
status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool tip, which lists a
summary of active filters.
• SORTED—If you have sorted the order of any items in the FlexTable, this
appears in the status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool
tip, which lists a summary of active sorting.
Statistics Dialog Box

The Statistics dialog box displays statistics for the elements in a FlexTable. You can
right-click any unitized input or output column and choose the Statistics command to
view the count, maximum value, mean value, minimum value, standard deviation, and
sum for that column.
Opening FlexTables
You open FlexTables from within the FlexTable Manager.
To open FlexTables:
1. Click View > FlexTables or click the FlexTables button on the View toolbar to
open the FlexTables Manager.
– Right-click the FlexTable you want to open, then select Open.
– Select the FlexTable you want to open, then click the Open button.
– Double-click the FlexTable you want to open.

Creating a New FlexTable
You can create project-level or shared FlexTables.
• Project-level FlexTables are available only for the project in which you create
them.
• Shared tables are available in all Bentley SewerCAD V8i projects.
To create a new FlexTable:
Project-level and shared FlexTables are created the same way:
2. In the FlexTables Manager, right-click Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
select New > FlexTable.
Or, select Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, click the New button, then select
FlexTable.
3. The Table Setup dialog box opens.
4. Select the Table Type you want to create. This lets you filter your table by element
type.
5. Select the items you want in the FlexTable by moving them to the Selected
Columns pane.
6. Click OK.
7. The table displays in the FlexTables Manager; you can type to rename the table or
accept the default name.
Deleting FlexTables
Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager. In the FlexTables manager,
right-click the FlexTable you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the FlexTable you want to delete, then click the Delete button. You cannot
delete predefined FlexTables.
Note: You cannot delete predefined FlexTables.
Naming and Renaming FlexTables
You name and rename FlexTables in the FlexTable Manager.

To rename FlexTables:
– Right-click the FlexTable you want to rename, then select Rename.
– Select the FlexTable you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
– Click the FlexTable you want to rename, to select it, then click the name of
the FlexTable.
Note: You cannot rename predefined FlexTables.
Editing FlexTables
You can edit a FlexTable to change the columns of data it contains or the values in
some of those columns.
Editable columns: Columns that contain data you can edit are displayed
with a white background. You can change these
columns directly in the FlexTable and your changes
are applied to your model when you click OK.
The content in the FlexTable columns can be
changed in other areas of Bentley SewerCAD V8i,
such as in a Property Editor or managers; but, it
might be more efficient to make changes to
numerous elements in a FlexTable rather than the
Property Editor or a manager.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
Non-editable columns: Columns that contain data you cannot edit are
displayed with a yellow background, and correspond
to model results calculated by the program and
composite values.
The content in these columns can be changed in other
areas of Bentley SewerCAD V8i, such as in a
Property Editor and by running a computation.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.

To edit a FlexTable:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager, then you can:
– Right-click the FlexTable, then select Edit.
– Double-click the FlexTable to open it, then click Edit.
– Click the FlexTable, to select it, then click the Edit button.
2. The Table dialog box opens. .

3. Use the Table dialog box to include and exclude columns and change the order in
which the columns appear in the table.
4. Click OK after you finish making changes, to save your changes and close the
dialog box; or, click Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Editing Column-Heading Text
To change the text of a column heading:

2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Edit Column Label.
4. Type the new name for the label and click OK to save those changes and close the
dialog box or Cancel to exit without making any changes.
Changing Units, Format, and Precision in FlexTables
To change the units, format, or precision in a column of a FlexTable:

1. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
2. Right-click the column heading and select Units.
3. Make the changes you want and click OK to save those changes or Cancel to exit
without making any changes.
Navigating in Tables
The arrow keys, Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+arrow keys navigate to
different cells in a table.
Globally Editing Data

Using FlexTables, you can globally edit all of the values in an entire editable column.
Globally editing a FlexTable column can be more efficient for editing properties of an
element than using the Properties Editor or managers to edit each element in your
model individually.
To globally edit the values in a FlexTable column:

2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit and find the
column of data you want to change.
If necessary, you might need to first create a FlexTable or edit an existing one to
make sure it contains the column you want to change.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Global Edit.
4. In the Operation field, select what you want to do to data in the column: Add,
Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.
Note: The Operation field is only available for numeric data.
5. In the Global Edit field, type or select the value you want—for numeric data, you
typically type a new value, for other data you might select from a drop-down list
or select a check box.
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data
You can sort and filter your FlexTables to focus on specific data or present your data
in one of the following ways:
To sort the order of columns in a FlexTable:
You can sort the order of columns in a FlexTable in two ways:
• Edit the FlexTable (see “Editing FlexTables”), to open the Table dialog box and
change the order of the selected tables using the up and down arrow buttons.
The top-most item in the Selected Columns pane appears furthest to the left in the
resulting FlexTable.
• Open the FlexTable, click the heading of the column you want to move, then click
again and drag the column to the new position. You can only move one column at
a time.
To sort the contents of a FlexTable:
1. Open the FlexTable you want to edit

2. Right-click a column heading to rank the contents of the column.

3. Select Sort Ascending Sort Descending, or Custom.

– Sort Ascending—Sorts alphabetically from A to Z, from top to bottom. Sorts
numerically from negative to positive, from top to bottom. Sorts selected
check boxes to the top and cleared ones to the bottom.
– Sort Descending—Sorts alphabetically from Z to A, from top to bottom.
Sorts numerically from positive to negative, from top to bottom. Sorts cleared
check boxes to the top and selected ones to the bottom.
– Custom—Opens the Custom Sort dialog box, which allows you to choose an
attribute to sort by in ascending or descending order.
To filter a FlexTable by creating a query:
1. Open the FlexTable you want to filter.

2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, and select Filter > Custom.
The “Query Builder Dialog Box” opens.
3. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. The Refresh button is becomes
disabled after you use it for a particular field.
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
e. Check the Validate checkbox above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression when the Apply button is clicked. If the expression is valid, the
word “VALIDATED” is displayed in the lower right corner of the dialog box.
f. Click the OK button to execute the query. If you didn’t validate the expres-
sion, the Apply button validates it before executing it.

Double-click the Click the desired operator Click the Refresh

desired field to add it or keyword button to add it button to display the
to the preview pane to the SQL expression in list of available
the preview pane unique values
Double-click
the desired
unique value
to add it to
the SQL
expression
in the
preview
pane
Apply
button
Preview
Validate
checkbox
The FlexTable displays columns of data for all elements returned by the query and
the word “FILTERED” is displayed in the FlexTable status bar.
To filter a FlexTable by using an existing query:
1. Open the FlexTable you want to filter.

2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, and select Filter > By Query.
3. In the Queries - Select a Query dialog that appears, choose the Query Type, then
choose the Selected Query.
4. Click OK.

Note: The query you select should be for the same type of element as
the FlexTable.
To reset a filter:
1. Right-click the column heading you want to filter.

2. Select Filter.
3. Click Reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message is highlighted.
Note: Table filtering lets you perform global editing (see “Editing
FlexTables”) on any subset of elements. Only the elements that
appear in the filtered table can be edited.
Custom Sort Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to choose an attribute to sort by, and whether to sort in
asending or descending order. You can choose multiple attributes to sort by. When
multiple sort attributes are specified, the first attribute specified will take precedence,
then the second, and so on.
Customizing Your FlexTable
There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements:
• Changing the Report Title—When you print a table, the table name is used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your
printed report by renaming the table. For more information, see “Naming and
Renaming FlexTables” on page 10-552.

• Adding/Removing Columns—You can add, remove, and change the order of

columns from the Table Setup dialog box. For more information, see “Editing
FlexTables” on page 10-553 and “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on
page 10-555.
• Drag/Drop Column Placement—With the Table window open, select the
column heading of the column that you would like to move and drag the column
to its new location. For more information, see “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable
Data” on page 10-555.
• Resizing Columns—With the Table open, click the vertical separator line
between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that
you can resize the column. Drag the column separator to the left or right to stretch
the column to its new size.
• Changing Column Headings—With the Table window open, right-click the
column heading that you wish to change and select Edit Column Label.
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box
The Table Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the following
options:
Table Type Lets you specify the type of elements that appear
in the table. It also provides a filter for the
attributes that appear in the Available Columns
list. When you choose a table type, the available
list only contains attributes that can be used for
that table type. For example, only manhole
attributes are available for a manhole table.
Available Columns Contains all the attributes that are available for
your table design. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog
box. This list contains all of the attributes that are
available for the type of table you are creating.
The attributes displayed in yellow represent non-
editable attributes, while those displayed in white
represent editable attributes.

Selected Columns Contains attributes that appear in your custom

designed FlexTable. When you open the table, the
selected attributes appear as columns in the table
in the same order that they appear in the list. You
can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons
to change the order of the attributes in the table.
The Selected Columns list is located on the right-
hand side of the Table Setup dialog box. To add
columns to the Selected Columns list, select one
or more attributes in the Available Columns list,
then click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the
highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.
Column Manipulation Lets you select or clear columns to be used in the

Buttons table, as well as to arrange the order in which the
columns appear.
The Add and Remove buttons are located in the
center of the Table Setup dialog box.
• [ > ] Adds the selected items from the Avail-
able Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
• [ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available
Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
• [ < ] Removes the selected items from the
Selected Columns list.
• [ << ] Removes all items from the Selected
Columns list.
To rearrange the order of the attributes in the
Selected Columns list, highlight the item to be
moved, then move it up or down in the list by
dragging or clicking the up or down button located
below the Selected Columns list.

Element Relabeling Dialog Box
This dialog is where you perform global element relabeling operations for the Label
column of the FlexTable.
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of
element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is
chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements
dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active
relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list
presents a description of the available element relabel operations.
• Replace—This operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or

series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For
instance, if you selected elements with labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5, you
could replace all the COs with the word Conduit by entering CO in the Find field,
Conduit in the Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting
labels are Conduit-1, Conduit-2, Conduit-12, and Conduit-5. You can also use this
operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the
original labels. You can enter Conduit in the Find field and leave the Replace With
field blank to reproduce the labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5. There is also
the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to
replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case
field.
• Renumber—This operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix,
prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the
labels CO-1, CO-4, CO-10, and Conduit-12, you could use this feature to
renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum
number of two digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix CO- and
a suffix -Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are
appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The

value of the new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next
field. The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is in
increments, 5, is entered in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in
the ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID
number is less then this value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply
button to produce the following labels: CO-05-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1, and
CO-20-Z1.
• Append—This operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the
selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and
20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually conduits in Zone 1 of
your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and
suffix, such as CO- and -Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix
fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels
CO-5-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1 and CO-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or
suffix by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be
valid, one of the entry fields must be filled in.
The Preview field displays an example of the new label using the currently defined
settings.
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data
You can output your FlexTable several ways:
• Copy FlexTable data via the clipboard

• Export FlexTable data as a text file
• Create a FlexTable report
To copy FlexTable data via the clipboard:
You can copy your FlexTable data via the clipboard and paste it into another Windows
application, such as a word-processing application as tab-delimited text.
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables manager.

2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to use.
3. Click Copy. The contents of the FlexTable are copied to the Windows clipboard.

Caution: Make sure you paste the data you copied before you copy
anything else to the Windows clipboard. If you copy
something else to the clipboard before you paste your
FlexTable data, your FlexTable data will be lost from the
clipboard.
4. Paste (Ctrl+v) the data into other Windows software, such as your word-
processing application.
To export FlexTable data as a text file:
You can export the data in a FlexTable as tab- or comma-delimited ASCII text, for use
in other applications, such as Notepad, spreadsheet, or word processing software.

3. Click File > Export data.
4. Select either Tab Delimited or Comma Delimited.
5. When prompted, set the path and name of the .txt file you want to create.
To create a FlexTable report:
Create a FlexTable Report if you want to print a copy of your FlexTable and its values.

Note: Instead of Print Preview, you can click Print to print the report
without previewing it.
3. Click Report. A print preview of the report displays to show what your report will
look like if printed using your default printer.
Note: You cannot edit the format of the report.
4. Click Print to open the Print dialog box and print the report to a printer that you
select.
• “Using Predefined Tables” on page 10-564

Reporting
Using Predefined Tables
Element tables are read-only, predefined FlexTables. There is one predefined table for
every element available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i. You can access the element tables
by clicking Report > Element Tables or from the FlexTable manager. Use these
tables to review data about the elements in your model.
Reporting
Use reporting to create printable content based on some aspect of your model, such as
element properties or results.
You need to compute your model before you can create reports about results, such as
the movement of water in your network. But, you can create reports about input data
without computing your model, such as conduit diameters. (To compute your model,
after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute button.)
You can access reports by:
• Clicking the Report menu

• Right-clicking any element, then selecting Report
Reporting includes:
• “Using Standard Reports” on page 10-564

• “Reporting on Element Data” on page 10-565
Using Standard Reports
There are several standard reports available. To access the standard reports, click the
Report menu, then select the report you want.
You can use these standard reports:
• “Creating a Project Inventory Report” on page 10-564

• “Creating a Scenario Summary Report” on page 10-565
• “Creating a Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory” on page 10-565
Creating a Project Inventory Report

To create a report that provides an overview of your network, click Report > Project
Inventory. The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format
the report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button.

Creating a Scenario Summary Report

To create a report that summarizes your scenario, click Report > Scenario Summary.
The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format the report,
but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Creating a Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory

To create a report that lists the conduits and pressure pipes in the model, click Report
> Pressure Pipe Inventory. The Conduit Inventory tab lists the total lengths of conduit
by description, count, and material type. The Pressure Pipe Inventory tab lists the total
lengths of pressure pipe by diameter, material type, and volume. The report dialog
opens and displays the Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory report. You can copy
rows, columns, or the entire table to the clipboard by highlighting the desired rows
and/or columns and clicking Ctrl+C.
Reporting on Element Data
You can create reports for specific elements in your network by computing the
network, right-clicking the element, then selecting Report. You cannot format the
report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button. You can also create a report
for multiple elements by lcicking the Report menu and selecting the Element Details
command. Select the elements you wish to create a report for by using the tools in the
Select toolbar. In the Element Details dialog that appears, you can preview and/or
print the element detail report. To remove an item from the list, highlight it and click
the Remove button.
Report Options
The Report Options dialog box offers control over how a report is displayed.

Graphing
Load factory default Changes the display settings

settings to current view used by the current repor to
the factory default.
Load global settings to Changes the display settings

current view used by the current report to
the previously saved global
settings.
Save current view settings Saves the display settings

to global settings used by the current report as
the new global settings.
The header and footer can be fully customized and you can edit text to be displayed in
the cells or select a pre-defined dynamic variable from the cell's menu.
• %(Company) - The name specified in the project properties.

• % (DateTime) - The current system date and time.
• % (BentleyInfo) - The standard Bentley company information.
• % (BentleyName) - The standard Bentley company name information.
• % (Pagination) - The report page out of the maximum pages.
• % (ProductInfo) - The current product and its build number.
• % (ProjDirectory) - The directory path where the project file is stored.
• % (ProjEngineer) - The engineer specified in the project properties.
• % (ProjFileName) - The full file path of the current project.
• % (ProjStoreFileName) - The full file path of the project.
• % (ProjTitle) - The name of the project specified in the project properties.
• % (ReportTitle) - The name of the report.
• % (Image) - Opens up the Select Image file window.
You can also select fonts, text sizes, and customize spacing.
Graphing
Use graphing to visualize some aspect of your model, such as element properties or
results. You need to compute your model before you can create graphs. To compute
your model, after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute
button.

Click one of the following links to learn more about using graphs in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i:
• “Graph Manager” on page 10-567

• “Creating a Graph” on page 10-568
• “Printing a Graph” on page 10-569
• “Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying” on page 10-569
• “Graph Dialog Box” on page 10-569
• “Chart Options Dialog Box” on page 10-577
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager lets you recall a graph you have created and saved in the current
session or in a previous session of Bentley SewerCAD V8i. Graphs listed in the Graph
Manager retain any customizations you have applied.
To use the Graph Manager:
1. Compute your model and resolve any errors. (Press F9 or click Analysis >
Compute.)
2. Open the Graph Manager, click View > Graphs.
3. Create your graph. (For more information, see “Creating a Graph” on page 10-
568.)
4. After you create a graph, it is available in the Graph Manager. You can select it by
double-clicking it. Also, you can right-click a graph listed in Graph Manager to:
– Delete it
– Rename the graph’s label
– Open it, by selecting View
Graphs are not saved in Graph Manager after you close Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager contains a toolbar with the following buttons:

Graphing
New Inserts a new graph of the currently selected

elements in your model. If no elements are
selected, you are prompted to select one or
more elements to graph.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted graph.

graph.
View Opens the Graph dialog box, allowing you

to view the currently highlighted graph.
Help Displays online help for the Graph Manager.
Add to Graph Dialog Box
This dialog appears after you initiate an Add to Graph command and allows you to
choose a previously defined graph to add the element to.
Select the desired graph from the Add to: menu, then click OK. To cancel the
command, click the Cancel button.
Creating a Graph
You can graph computed values, such as flow and velocity. To create a graph:
1. Compute your Bentley SewerCAD V8i network.

2. If necessary, use Shift+click to select multiple elements.
3. Right-click an element and select Graph. The Graph dialog box opens (see
“Graph Dialog Box” on page 10-569).
4. If needed, use the Scenarios drop-down list (for more information, see “Scenario
Manager” on page 9-630) to select check boxes to include different or multiple
scenarios in the graph. Click Refresh after you make any changes, so the graph
displays your changes.
5. If needed, use the Elements drop-down list to select check boxes to include
different or multiple element properties in the graph. Click Refresh after you
make any changes, so the graph displays your changes.

Note: Bentley SewerCAD V8i assumes initial flow—flow at time 0—in

all networks to be 0; thus, graphs of flow begin at 0 for time 0.
6. If needed, click Chart Settings to change the display of the graph. For more
information, see “Graph Manager” on page 10-567.
Tip: If you want your graph to display over more time (for example, it
displays a 24-hour time period and you want to display a 72-hour
period), click View > Calculation Options and change Total
Simulation Time in the Property Editor (for more information,
see “Editing Attributes in the Property Editor” on page 15-1033).
Printing a Graph
To print a graph, click the Print button to open the print dialog box or click the Print
Preview button to see what your graph looks like before clicking Print.
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying
Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets you view the data that your graphs are based on. To view
your data, create a graph, then, after the Graph dialog box opens, click the Data tab.
You can copy this data to the Windows clipboard for use in other applications, such as
word-processing software. To copy this data:
1. Click in the top-most cell of the left-most column to select the entire table, click a
column heading to select an entire column, or click a row heading to select an
entire row.
2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the selected data to the clipboard.
3. As needed, press Ctrl+V to paste the data as tab-delimited text into other soft-
ware.
Tip: To print out the data for a graph, copy and paste it into another
application, such as word-processing software or Notepad, and
print the pasted content.
Graph Dialog Box
The Graph dialog box allows you to view graphs and modify graph settings as desired.
After you create a graph, you view it in the Graph dialog box.
The following controls are available:

Graphing
Graph Tab
Add to Graph Manager Lets you save the Graph to the graph
manager. When you click this button,
the graph options (i.e., attributes to
graph for a specific scenario) and the
graph settings (i.e., line color, font
size) are saved with the graph. If you
want to view a different set of data
(for example, a different scenario),
you must change the scenario in the
Graph Series Options dialog box.
Simply switching the active scenario
will not change the graph. Graphs
that you add to the Graph manager
are saved when you save your model,
so that you can use the graph after
you close and reopen Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Graph Series Options Lets you control what your graph

displays. For more information, see
“Graph Series Options Dialog Box”
on page 10-573.
Chart Settings Opens the Chart Options dialog box,

allowing you to change graph
display settings.
Print Prints the current view in the graph

display pane.
Print Preview Opens the “Print Preview Window”,

displaying the graph exactly as it will
be printed.
Copy Copies the current view in the graph

display pane to the Windows
Clipboard.
Zoom Extents Zooms out so that the entire graph is

displayed

Zoom Window Zooms in on a section of the graph.

When the tool is toggled on, you can
zoom in on any area of the graph by
clicking on the chart to the left of the
area to be zoomed, holding the
mouse button, then dragging the
mouse to the right (or, the opposite
extent of the area to be magnified)
and releasing the mouse button when
the area to be zoomed has been
defined.
To zoom back out, click and hold the
mouse button, drag the mouse in the
opposite direction (right to left), and
release the mouse button.

Graphing
Time (VCR) Controls Lets you evaluate plots over time.

• If you click Restart, the Time
resets to zero and the vertical
line that marks time resets to the
left edge of the Graph display.
• If you click Pause, the vertical
line that moves across the graph
to mark time pauses, as does the
Time field.
• If you click Play, a vertical line
moves across the graph and the
Time field increments.
The following controls are also
available:
• Time—Displays the time loca-
tion of the vertical black bar in
the graph display. This is a read-
only field, to set a specific time,
use the slider button.
• Slider—Lets you set a specific
time for the graph. A vertical line
moves in the graph display and
intersects your plots to show the
value of the plot at a specific
time. Use the slider to set a
specific time value.
Graph Display Pane Displays the graph.
Data Tab

Data Table The Data tab displays the data that

comprise your graphs. If there is
more than one item plotted, the data
for each plot is provided.
You can copy and paste the data from
this tab to the clipboard for use in
other applications, such as Microsoft
Excel.
To select an entire column or row,
click the column or row heading. To
select the entire contents of the Data
tab, click the heading cell in the top-
left corner of the tab. Use Ctrl+C and
Ctrl+V to paste your data. The
column and row headings are not
copied.
The Data tab is shown below.
Graph Series Options Dialog Box

Click the Graph Series Options button in the Graph dialog box (“Graph Dialog Box”
on page 10-569) to use the Graph Series Options dialog box to customize your graph.

Graphing
This dialog box lets you choose which scenarios, elements, and fields you want to plot
(this affects both the Graph and Data tabs). Click to select the check boxes next to
those items you want to plot and clear the check boxes for those items you do not want
to plot. Click Close after you have made your selections and the graph is updated to
display the items you chose.
Note: In the Series Label Format field in the case of Scatter type
graphs, $(Element) is the first element and $(Scenario) is the
first scenario selected. These are not appliable with this type of
chart format. When you use the $(Field) option, you get
"<fieldXaxis> - <fieldYaxis>".
Filter Dialog Box

The Filter dialog box lets you specify your filtering criteria. Each filter criterion is
made up of three items:
• Attribute—The attribute to filter.

• Operator—The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >).
• Value—The comparison value.
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly
joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only
rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active
for the associated table until the filter is reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
Observed Data Dialog Box

Use this feature to display user-supplied time variant data values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. Model competency can sometimes be determined
by a quick side by side visual comparison of calculated results with those observed
and collection in the field.
• Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph.

• Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection

of points in a table. In this case, the time series data can simply be copied to the
clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed data input
table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value
must have an associated time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or
comma delimited text files; these two import options are available as well. See the
“Sample Observed Data Source” topic for an example of the observed data source
file format.
• Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must
be defined:
– Time from Start - An offset of the start time for an EPS scenario.
– Y Dimension - Unit class for the observed data point(s).
– Numeric Formatter - Group of units that correspond to the selected value.
– Y Unit - A preview of the current displayed unit for the selected format.
Note: Go to Tools > Options > Units for a complete list of formats.
Caution: Observed data can only be saved if the graph is saved.
To create Observed Data
1. Click New .
2. Set hours, dimension, and formatter.
3. Add hours and Y information (or import a .txt or .csv file ).
4. Click Graph to view the Observed data.

5. Click Close.

Graphing
Sample Observed Data Source
Below is an example of an Observed Data source for import and graph comparison.
The following table contains a flow meter data collection retreived in the field for a
given pipe. We will bring this observed data into the model for a quick visual inspec-
tion against our model's calculated pipe flows.
Table 10-1: Observed Flow Meter Data (Time in Hours)
Time (hrs) Flow (gpm)
0.00 125
0.60 120
3.00 110
9.00 130
13.75 100
18.20 125
21.85 110
With data tabulated as in the table above, we could simply copy and paste these rows
directly into the table in the Observed Data dialog. However if we had too many
points to manage, natively exporting our data to a comma delimited text file may be a
better import option. Text file import is also a better option when our time values are
not formatted in units of time such as hours, as in the table below.
Table 10-2: Observed Flow Meter Data (24-Hr Clock)
Time (24-hr Flow (gpm)

clock)
00:00 125
00:36 120
03:00 110

Table 10-2: Observed Flow Meter Data (24-Hr Clock)
Time (24-hr Flow (gpm)

clock)
09:00 130
13:45 100
18:12 125
21:51 110
Below is a sample of what a comma-delimited (*.csv) file would look like:
0:00,125
0:36,120
3:00,110
9:00,130
13:45,100
18:12,125
21:51,110
Note: Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample described above is
intended only to illustrate the importance of using expected data
formats.
To import the comma delimited data points:
1. Click the Import toolbar button from the Observed Data dialog.
2. Pick the source .csv file.
3. Choose the Time Format that applies, in this case, HH:mm:ss, and click OK.
Chart Options Dialog Box

Use the Chart Options dialog box to format a graph.

Note: Changes you make to graph settings are not retained for use
with other graphs.
To open Chart Options dialog box:
1. Open your project and click Compute.

2. Select one or more elements, right-click, then select Graph.
3. Click the Chart Settings button.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Chart Options dialog
box:
• “Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab” on page 10-578

• “Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab” on page 10-604
• “Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab” on page 10-612
• “Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab” on page 10-613
• “Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab” on page 10-615
• “Border Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-616
• “Gradient Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-617
• “Color Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-618
• “Color Dialog Box” on page 10-618
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-619
• “Pointer Dialog Box” on page 10-622
• “Change Series Title Dialog Box” on page 10-623
• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box” on page 10-623
• “TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box” on page 10-635
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab
The Chart tab lets you define overall chart display parameters. This tab is subdivided
into second-level sub-tabs:
• “Series Tab”
• “Panel Tab”
• “Axes Tab”
• “General Tab”
• “Titles Tab”

• “Walls Tab”
• “Paging Tab”
• “Legend Tab”
• “3D Tab”
Series Tab
Use the Series tab to display the series that are associated with the current graph. To
show a series, select the check box next to the series’ name. To hide a series, clear its
check box. The Series tab contains the following controls:
Up/Down arrows Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Add Adds a new series to the current graph. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see “TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box”.
Delete Lets you remove the currently selected series.
Title Lets you rename the currently selected series.
Clone Creates a duplicate of the currently selected series.
Change Lets you edit the currently selected series. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see “TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box”.
Panel Tab
Use the Panel tab to set how your graph appears in the Graph dialog box. The Panel
tab includes the following sub-tabs:
Borders Tab
Use the Borders tab to set up a border around your graph. The Borders tab contains the
following controls:
Border Lets you set the border of the graph. The Border
Editor opens, see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Bevel Outer Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no

bevel effect, for the outside of the chart border.

Color Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no

bevel effect, for the inside of the chart border.
Size Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that
you use; inner and outer bevels use the same size
value.
Background Tab
Use the Background tab to set a color or image background for your graph. The Back-
ground tab contains the following controls:
Color Lets you set a color for the background of your

graph. The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor
Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the background of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box”.
Transparent Makes the background of the graph transparent.
Background Image Lets you set an existing image as the background

of the graph. Click Browse, then select the image
(including .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .png,. and .gif). After
you have set a background image, you can remove
the image from the graph by clicking Clear.
You can control the Style of the background
image:
• Stretch—Resizes the background image to fill
the entire background of the graph.
• Tile—Repeats the background image as
many times as needed to fill the entire back-
ground of the graph.
• Center—Puts the background image in the
horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
• Normal—Puts the background image in the
top-left corner of the graph.
Gradient Tab

Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your graph. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible Determines whether a gradient displays or not.

Select this check box to display a gradient you
have set up, clear this check box to hide the
gradient.
Direction Sets the direction of the gradient. Vertical causes

the gradient to display from top to bottom,
Horizontal displays a gradient from right to left,
and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients
from the left and right bottom corners to the
opposite corner.
Angle Lets you customize the direction of the gradient

beyond the Direction selections.
Colors Tab
Start Lets you set the starting color for your gradient.
Opens the Color Editor dialog box.
Middle Lets you select a middle color for your gradient.

The Color Editor opens. Select the No Middle
Color check box if you want a two-color gradient.
End Lets you select the final color for your gradient.
Gamma Correction Lets you control the brightness with which the
background displays to your screen; select or clear
this check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect printed
output.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your gradient, where

100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma Lets you set the location on the chart background

of the gradient’s end color.

Sigma Focus Lets you use the options controls. Select this
check box to use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Scale Lets you control how much of the gradient’s end
color is used by the gradient background.
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for your graph. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible Lets you display a shadow for your graph. Select

this check box to display the shadow, clear this
check box to turn off the shadow effect.
Size Set the size of the shadow by increasing or

decreasing the numbers for Horizontal and/or
Vertical Size.
Color Lets you set a color for the shadow of your graph.
You might set this to gray but can set it to any
other color.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the shadow of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your shadow, where

opaque.
Axes Tab
Use the Axes tab set how your axes display. It includes the following controls and
subtabs:
Visible When checked, displays all of your graph’s axes;

clear it to hide all of the graph’s axes.
Behind When checked, displays all of your graph’s axes

behind the series display; clear it to display the
axes in front of the series display.

Axes Select the axis you want to edit. The Scales,

Labels, Ticks, Title, Minor, and Position tabs and
their controls pertain only to the selected axis.
Caution: Do not delete the axes called Custom 0 and Custom 1, as

these are reserved axes that are needed by Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Scales Tab
Use the Scales tab to define your axes scales. The Scales tab contains the following
controls:
Automatic Lets you automatically or manually set the

minimum and maximum axis values. Select this
check box if you want TeeChart to automatically
set both minimum and maximum, or clear this
check box if you want to manually set either or
both.
Visible Displays the axis if selected, hides the axis if

cleared.
Inverted Reverses the order in which the axis scale

increments. If the minimum value is at the origin,
then selecting Inverted puts the maximum value at
the origin.
Change Lets you change the increment of the axis.
Increment Displays the increment value you set for the axis.
Logarithmic Lets you use a logarithmic scale for the axis.
Log Base If you select a logarithmic scale, set the base you
want to use in the text box.
Minimum Tab
Auto Lets you automatically or manually set the

minimum axis value.
Change Lets you enter a value for the axis minimum.

Offset Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Maximum Tab
Auto Lets you automatically or manually set the

maximum axis value.
Change Lets you enter a value for the axis maximum.
Offset Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Labels Tab
Use the Labels tab to define your axes text. The Labels tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
Visible Lets you show or hide the axis text.
Multi-line Lets you split labels or values into more than one
line if the text contains a space. Select this check
box to enable multi-line text.
Round first Controls whether axis labels are automatically

rounded to the nearest magnitude.
Label on axis Controls whether Labels just at Axis Minimum

and Maximum positions are shown. This applies
only if the maximum value for the axis matches
the label for extreme value on the chart.
Size Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Angle Sets the angle of the axis labels. In addition to

using the up and down arrows to set the angle in
90° increments, you can type an angle you want to
use.
Min. Separation % Sets the minimum distance between axis labels.

Style Lets you set the label style.

• Auto—Lets TeeChart automatically set the
label style.
• Value—Sets axis labeling based on minimum
and maximum axis values.
• Text—Uses text for labels. Since Bentley
SewerCAD V8i uses numeric values, this is
not implemented; don’t use it.
• None—Turns off axis labels.
• Mark—Uses SeriesMarks style for labels.
Since Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses numeric
values, this is not implemented; don’t use it.
Format Tab
Exponential Displays the axis label using an exponent, if

appropriate.
Values Format Lets you set the numbering format for the axis
labels.
Default Alignment Lets you select and clear the default TeeChart
alignment for the right or left axes only.
Text Tab
Font Lets you set the font properties for axis labels.
This opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color Lets you select the color for the axis label font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
“Color Editor Dialog Box”).
Fill Lets you set a pattern the axis label font. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush
Editor Dialog Box”.

Shadow —Lets you set a shadow for the axis labels.

• Visible—Lets you display a shadow for the
axis labels. Select this check box to display
the axis label shadow.
• Size—Lets you set the location of the shadow.
Use larger numbers to offset the shadow by a
large amount.
• Color—Lets you set a color for the shadow.
other color. The Color Editor opens.
• Pattern—Lets you set a pattern for the
shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor opens.
• Transparency—Lets you set transparency for
your shadow, where 100 is completely trans-
parent and 0 is completely opaque.
Ticks Tab
Use the Ticks tab to define the major ticks and their grid lines. The Ticks tab contains
Axis Lets you set the properties of the selected axis.

Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Grid Lets you set the properties of the graph’s grid lines
that intersect the selected axis. Opens the Border
Editor dialog box.
Ticks Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that
are next to the labels on the label-side of the
selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Len Sets the length of the Ticks or Inner ticks.
Inner Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that
are next to the labels on the graph-side of the
selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Centered Lets you align between the grid labels the graph’s
grid lines that intersect the selected axis.
At Labels Only Sets the axis ticks and axis grid to be drawn at
labels only. Otherwise, they are drawn at all axis
increment positions.

Title Tab
Use the Title tab to set the axis titles. The Title tab contains the following subtabs and
controls:
Style Tab
Title Lets you type a new axis title.
Angle Sets the angle of the axis title. In addition to using

the up and down arrows to set the angle in 90°
increments, you can type an angle you want to use.
Size Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Visible Check box that lets you display or hide the axis
title.
Text Tab
Font Lets you set the font properties for axis title. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color Lets you select the color for the axis title font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
“Color Editor Dialog Box”).
Fill Lets you set a pattern the axis title font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box”

Shadow Lets you set a shadow for the axis title.

axis title. Select this check box to display the
axis label shadow.
large amount.
Minor Tab
Use the Minor tab to define those graph ticks that are neither major ticks. The Minor
tab contains the following controls and tabs:
Ticks Lets you set the properties of the minor tick

marks. The Border Editor opens, see “Border
Length Sets the length of the minor tick marks.
Grid Lets you set the properties of grid lines that align
with the minor ticks. The Border Editor opens, see
“Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Count Sets the number of minor tick marks.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the axes position for your graph. The Position tab contains
Position % Sets the position of the axis on the graph in pixels

or as a percentage of the graph’s dimensions.

Start % Sets the start of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
End % Sets the end of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
Units Lets you select pixels or percentage as the unit for

the axis position.
Z% Sets the Z dimension as a percentage of the

graph’s dimensions. This is unused by Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
General Tab
Use the General tab to preview a graph before you print it and set up scrolling and
zooming for a graph. It includes the following controls:
Print Preview Lets you see the current view of the document as it
will be printed and lets you define the print
settings, such as selecting a printer to use. Opens
the Print Preview dialog box.
Margins Lets you specify margins for your graph. There are
four boxes, each corresponding with the top,
bottom, left, and right margins, into which you
enter a value that you want to use for a margin.
Units Lets you set pixels or percentage as the units for

your margins. Percentage is a percentage of the
original graph size.
Cursor Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.
Zoom Tab

Use the Zoom tab to set up zooming on, magnifying, and reducing the display of a
graph. The Zoom tab contains the following controls:
Allow Lets you magnify the graph by clicking and

dragging with the mouse.
Animated Lets you set a stepped series of zooms.
Steps Lets you set the number of steps used for

successive zooms if you selected the Animated
check box.
Pen Lets you set the thickness of the border for the
zoom window that surrounds the magnified area
when you click and drag. The Border Editor
opens, see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Pattern The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush

Minimum pixels Lets you set the number of pixels that you have to
click and drag before the zoom feature is
activated.
Direction Lets you zoom in the vertical or horizontal planes

only, as well as both planes.
Mouse Button Lets you set the mouse button that you use to click
and drag when activating the zoom feature.
Scroll Tab
Use the Scroll tab to set up scrolling and panning across a graph. The Scroll tab
Allow Scroll Lets you scroll and pan over the graph. Select this
check box to turn on scrolling, clear the check box
to turn it off.
Mouse Button Lets you set the mouse button that you click to use
the scroll feature.
Titles Tab
The Titles tab lets you define titles to use for your graph. It includes the following
controls and tabs:

Title Lets you set the location of the titles you want to
use. The Titles sub tabs apply to the Title that is
currently selected in the Title drop-down list.
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to display and create a selected title. Type the text of the title in the
text box on the Style tab. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display the selected title.
Adjust Frame Lets you wrap the frame behind the selected title
to the size of the title text.
Each title can have a frame behind it (see “Format
Tab”). By default, this frame is transparent. If you
turn off transparency to see the frame, the frame
can be sized to the width of the graph or set to
snap to the width of the title text.
Select the Adjust Frame check box to set the
width of the frame to the width of the title text;
clear this check box to set the width of the frame
to the width of the graph.
Alignment Lets you set the alignment of the selected title.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the placement of the selected title. The Position tab contains
Custom Lets you set a custom position for the selected

title. Select this check box to set a custom
position.
Left/Top Lets you set the location of the selected title

relative to the left and top of the graph. If you
select the Custom check box, use these settings to
position the selected title.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format a background shape behind the selected title. The
Format tab contains the following controls:

Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Color Editor
opens, see “Color Editor Dialog Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the shape you create
behind the selected title. The Border Editor opens,
see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog
Box”.
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the rectangular

shape you create behind the selected title. Select
this check box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the shape you create behind
the selected title as transparent. If the shape is
completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear
this check box if you cannot see a shape that you
expect to see.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the shape, where 100
is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the selected title. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font Lets you set the font properties for the text. This
Color Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click
the colored square between Font and Fill to open
the Color Editor dialog box (see “Color Editor
Dialog Box”).
Fill Lets you set a pattern for the text. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.

Shadow Lets you set a shadow for the text.

text. Select this check box to display the axis
label shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Note: To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your axis title. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible Sets whether a gradient displays or not. Select this

check box to display a gradient you have set up,
clear this check box to hide the gradient.

opposite corner.

Colors Tab


output.

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma Lets you use the options controls. Select this

Sigma Focus Lets you set the location on the chart background
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the background for the selected title. The
Shadow tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display a shadow. Select this check box

to display the shadow, clear this check box to turn
off the shadow effect.

Vertical Size.
Color Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.

Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Note: To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Bevels tab to create rounded effects for the background for the selected title.
The Bevels tab contains the following controls:

bevel effect, for the background for the selected
title.
values.

bevel effect, for the inside of the background for
the selected title.
value.
Walls Tab
Use the Walls tab to set and format the edges of your graph. The Walls tab contains the
following subtabs:
Left/Right/Back/Bottom Tabs
Use the Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs to select the walls that you want to edit.
You might have to turn off the axes lines to see the effects (see “Axes Tab” on
page 10-582) for the back wall and turn on 3D display to see the effects for the left,
right, and bottom walls (see “3D Tab” on page 10-603).
The Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs contain the following controls:

Color The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor Dialog

Box”.
Border The Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor

Dialog Box”.
Pattern The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush

Gradient Lets you set a color gradient for your walls. The
Gradient Editor opens, see “Gradient Editor
Dialog Box”.
Visible Lets you display the walls you set up.
Dark 3D Lets you automatically darken the depth

dimension for visual effect. Select a Size 3D larger
than 0 to enable this check box.
Size 3D Lets you increase the size of the wall in the

direction perpendicular to it’s length (the graph
resizes automatically as a result).
Transparent Lets you set transparency for your background,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Paging Tab
Use the Paging tab to display your graph over several pages. The Paging tab contains
Points per Page Lets you scale the graph to fit on one or many
pages. Set the number of points you want to
display on a single page of the graph, up to a
maximum of 100.
Scale Last Page Scales the end of the graph to fit the last page.
Current Page Legend Shows only the current page items when the chart
is divided into multiple pages.
Show Page Number Lets you display the current page number on the
graph.

Arrows Lets you navigate through a multi-page graph.

Click the single arrows to navigate one page at a
time. Click the double arrows to navigate directly
to the last or first pages of the graph.
Legend Tab
Use the Legend tab to display and format a legend for your graph. The Legend tab
includes the following controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set up and display a legend for your graph. The Style tab contains
Visible Lets you show or hide the legend for your graph.
Inverted Lets you draw legend items in the reverse

direction. Legend strings are displayed starting at
top for Left and Right Alignment and starting at
left for Top and Bottom Legend orientations.
Check boxes Activates/deactivates check boxes associated with

each series in the Legend. When these boxes are
unchecked in the legend, the associated series are
invisible.
Font Series Color Sets text in the legend to the same color as the
graph element to which it applies.
Legend Style Lets you select what appears in the legend.
Text Style Lets you select how the text in the legend is
aligned and what data it contains.
Vert. Spacing Controls the space between rows in the legend.
Dividing Lines Lets you use and define lines that separate
columns in the legend. The Border Editor opens,
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to control the placement of the legend. The Position tab contains

Position Lets you place the legend on the left, top, right, or
bottom of the chart.
Resize Chart Lets you resize your graph to accommodate the

legend. If you do not select this check box, the
graph and legend might overlap.
Margin Lets you set the amount of space between the

graph and the legend.
Position Offset % Determines the vertical size of the Legend. Lower

values place the Legend higher up in the display
Custom Lets you use the Left and Top settings to control
the placement of the legend.
Left/Top Lets you enter a value for custom placement of the

legend.
Symbols Tab
Use the Symbols tab to add to the legend symbols that represent the series in the
graph. The Symbols tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display the series symbol next to the text
in the legend.
Width Lets you resize the symbol that displays in the

legend. You must clear Squared to use this
control.
Width Units Lets you set the units that are used to size the
width of the symbol.
Default border Lets you use the default TeeChart format for the
symbol. If you clear this check box, you can set a
custom border using the Border button.
Border Lets you set a custom border for the symbols. You
must clear Default Border to use this option. The
Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor Dialog
Box”.
Position Lets you put the symbol to the left or right of its
text.

Continuous Lets you attach or detach legend symbols. If you

select this check box, the color rectangles of the
different items are attached to each other with no
vertical spacing. If you clear this check box, the
legend symbols are drawn as separate rectangles.
Squared Lets you override the width of the symbol, so you

can make the symbol square shaped.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the box that contains the legend. The Format tab
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the legend’s box.
The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the legend’s box.

The Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor
Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the legend’s
box. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the legend’s box.
Select this check box to round the corners of the
shape.
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the legend’s box as

transparent. If the shape is completely transparent,
you cannot see it, so clear this check box if you
cannot see a shape that you expect to see.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the legend’s box,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Text Tab

Use the Text tab to format the text used in the legend. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Dialog Box”).
Dialog Box”.

label shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your legend. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab



opposite corner.

Colors Tab

output.

opaque.
Options Tab

Shadow Tab

Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the legend. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:


Vertical Size.
Box”.
Dialog Box”.

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for the legend. The Bevels tab contains

title.
values.

the selected title.
value.

3D Tab
Use the 3D tab to add a three-dimensional effect to your graph. The 3D tab contains
3 Dimensions Lets you display the chart in three dimensions.

Select this check box to turn on three-dimensional
display.
3D % Lets you increase or decrease the three-

dimensional effect. Set a larger percentage for
more three-dimensional effect, or a smaller
percentage for less effect.
Orthogonal Lets you fix the graph in the two-dimensional

work plane or, if you clear this check box, lets you
use the Rotation and Elevation controls to rotate
the graph freely.
Zoom Text Lets you magnify and reduce the size of the text in
a graph when using the zoom tool. clear this check
box if you want text, such as labels, to remain the
same size when you use the zoom tool.
Quality Lets you select how the graph displays as you

manipulate and zoom on it.
Clip Points Trims the view of a series to the walls of your

graph’s boundaries, to enhance the three-
dimensional effect. Turn this on to trim the graph.
You only see this effect when the graph is in
certain rotated positions.
Zoom Lets you magnify and reduce the display of the

graph in the Graph dialog box.
Rotation Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Orthogonal to use this control.
Elevation Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Horiz. Offset Lets you adjust the left-right position of the graph.
Vert. Offset Lets you adjust the up-down position of the graph.

Perspective Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab
Use the Series tab to set up how the series in your graph display. Select the series you
want to edit from the drop-down list at the top of the Series tab.
The Series tab is organized into second-level sub-tabs:
• “Format Tab”
• “Point Tab”
• “General Tab”
• “Data Source Tab”
• “Marks Tab”
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set up how the selected series appears. The Format tab contains
Border Lets you format the graph of the selected series.

The Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor
Dialog Box”.
Color Lets you set a color for the graph of the selected
series. The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor
Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the graph of the selected
series. This might only be visible on a three-
dimensional graph (see “3D Tab”). The Hatch
Dialog Box”.

dimension for visual effect.
Color Each Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Clickable This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.

Color Each line Lets you enable or disable the coloring of

connecting lines in a series. This is unused by
Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Height 3D Lets you set a thickness for the three-dimensional

effect in three-dimensional graphs.
Stack Lets you control how multiple series display in the

Graph dialog box.
• None—Draws the series one behind the
other.
• Overlap—Arranges multiple series with the
same origin using the same space on the
graph such that they might overlap several
times.
• Stack—Lets you arrange multiple series so
that they are additive.
• Stack 100%—Lets you review the area under
the graph curves.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your series, where

opaque.
Stairs Lets you display a step effect between points on

your graph.
Inverted Inverts the direction of the stairs effect
Outline Displays an outline around the selected series. The

Border Editor opens.
Point Tab
Use the Point tab to set up how the points that make up the selected series appear. The
Point tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display the points used to create your

graph.
3D Lets you display the points in three dimensions.


Inflate Margins Adjusts the margins of the points to display points

that are close to the edge of the graph. If you clear
this option, points near the edge of the graph
might only partly display.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the points in your series.
The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush
Editor Dialog Box”. You must clear Default to use
this option.
Default Lets you select the default format for the points in
your series. This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Style Lets you select the shape used to represent the

points in the selected series.
Width/Height Lets you set a size for the points in the selected
series.
Border Lets you set the outline of the shapes that

represent the points in the selected series. The
Box”.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the points in the

selected series, where 100 is completely
transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
General Tab
Use the General tab to modify basic formatting and relationships with axes for series
in a graph. The General tab contains the following controls:
Show in Legend Lets you show the series title in the legend. To use
this feature, the legend style has to be Series or
LastValues (see “Style Tab”).
Cursor Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.

Depth Lets you set the depth of the three-dimensional

effect (see “3D Tab”).
Auto Lets you automatically size the three-dimensional

effect. clear and then select this check box to reset
the depth of the three-dimensional effect.
Values Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values
Percents Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values.
Horizontal Axis Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Vertical Axis Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Date Time This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Sort Sorts the points in the series using the labels list.
Data Source Tab

Use this tab to connect a TeeChart series to another chart, table, query, dataset, or
Delphi database dataset.
This lets you set the number of random points to generate and overrides the points
passed by Bentley SewerCAD V8i to the chart control. The Data Source feature can
be useful in letting you set its sources as functions and do calculations between the
series created by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
• Random—xxxx not sure

• Number of sample values—xxxx not sure
• Default—xxxx not sure
• Apply—xxxx not sure

Marks Tab
Use the Marks tab to display labels for points in the selected series. Series-point labels
are called marks. The Marks tab contains the following tabs and controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set how the marks display. The Style tab contains the following
controls:
Visible Lets you display marks.
Clipped Lets you display marks outside the graph border.

clear this check box to let marks display outside
the graph border, or select it to clip the marks to
the graph border.
Multi-line Lets you display marks on more than one line.

Select this check box to enable multi-line marks.
All Series Visible Lets you display marks for all series.
Style Lets you set the content of the marks.
Draw every Sets the interval of the marks that are displayed.
Selecting 2 would display every second mark, and
3 would display every third, etc.
Angle Lets you rotate the marks for the selected series.
Arrow Tab
Use the Arrow tab to display a leader line on the series graph to indicate where the
mark applies. The Arrow tab contains the following controls:
Border Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor
Pointer Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
“Pointer Dialog Box”.
Arrow head Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to
add to the leader line.
Size Lets you set the size of the arrow head.

Length Lets you set the size of the leader line and arrow
head, or just the leader line if there is no arrow
head.
Distance Lets you set the distance between the leader line
and the graph of the selected series.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the boxes that contains the marks. The Format
tab contains the following controls:
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the boxes as transparent. If

the shape is completely transparent, you cannot
see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a
shape that you expect to see.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the marks. The Text tab contains the
following controls:

Dialog Box”).
Dialog Box”.

label shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your marks. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab


opposite corner.


Colors Tab

output.

opaque.
Options Tab

Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the marks. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:


Vertical Size.

Box”.
Dialog Box”.

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for your marks. The Bevels tab contains

title.
values.

the selected title.
value.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab
Use the Tools tab to add special figures in order to highlight particular facts on a given
chart. For more information, see “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box” on page 10-623.
The Tools tab contains the following controls:
Add Lets you add a tool from the Chart Tools Gallery.
To be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to
be added and set to Active.

Delete Deletes the selected tool from the list of those

available in the current graph.
Active Activates a selected tool for the current graph. To

be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to be
added and set to Active.
Up/Down arrow These are unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Note: Each tool has its own parameters, see “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog
Box”.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab
Use the Export tab to save your graph for use in another application. The Export tab
Copy Lets you copy the contents of the graph to the

Windows clipboard, so you can paste it into
another application. You must consider the type of
data you have copied when choosing where to
paste it. For example, if you copy a picture, you
cannot paste it into a text editor, you must paste it
into a photo editor or a word processor that
accepts pictures. Similarly, if you copy data, you
cannot paste it into an image editor, you must
paste it into a text editor or word processor.
Save Lets you create a new file from the contents of the
graph.
Picture Tab
Use the Picture tab to save your graph as a raster image or to copy the graph as an
image to the clipboard. The Picture tab contains the following controls and subtabs:
Format Lets you select the format of the picture you want
to save. GIF, PNG, and JPEG are supported by the
Worldwide Web, a metafile is a more easily
scalable format. A Bitmap is a Microsoft BMP file
that is widely supported on Windows operating
systems, whereas TIFF pictures are supported on a
variety of Microsoft and non-Microsoft operating
systems.

Options Tab
Colors Lets you use the default colors used by your graph
or to convert the picture to use grayscale. This
feature is used when you save the picture as a file,
not by the copy option.
Size Tab
Width/Height Lets you change the width and height of the

picture. These values are measured in pixels and
are used by both the Save and Copy options
Keep aspect ratio Lets you keep the relationship between the height
and width of the picture the same when you
change the image size. If you clear this check box,
you can distort the picture by setting height or
width sizes that are not proportional to the original
graph.
Note: Changing the size of a graph using these controls might cause
some loss of quality in the image. Instead, try saving the graph
as a metafile and resizing the metafile after you paste or insert it
into its destination.
Native Tab
The Native tab contains the following controls:
Include Series Data This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
File Size Displays the size of an ASCII file containing the

data from the current graph.
Data Tab
The Data tab contains the following controls:
Series Lets you select the series from which you copy
data.
Format Lets you select a file type to which you can save
the data. This is not used by the Copy function.
Include Select the data you want to copy.

Text separator Lets you specify how you want rows of data
separated. This is supported by the Save function
and only by the Copy function if you first saved
using the text separator you have selected, before
you copy.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab
Use the Print tab to preview and print your graph. The Print tab contains the following
controls and subtabs:
Printer Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Setup Lets you configure the printer you want to use. For
example, if the selected printer supports printing
on both sides of a page, you might want to turn on
this feature.
Print Prints the displayed graph to the selected printer.
Page Tab
Orientation Lets you set up the horizontal and vertical axes of

the graph. Many graphs print better in Landscape
orientation because of their width:height ratio.
Zoom Lets you magnify the graph as displayed in the

print preview window. Use the scrollbars to
inspect the graph if it doesn’t fit within the
preview window after you zoom. Changing the
zoom does not affect the size of the printed output.
Margins Lets you set up top, bottom, left, and right margins
that are used when you print.
Margin Units Lets you set the units used by the Margins
controls: percent or hundredths of an inch.
Format Tab
Print Background When checked, prints the background of the

graph.

Quality You do not need to change this setting. The box is

cleared by default.
Proportional Lets you change the graph from proportional to

non-proportional. When you change this setting,
the preview pane is automatically updated to
reflect the change. This box is checked by default.
Grayscale Prints the graph in grayscale, converting colors

into shades of gray.
Detail Resolution Lets you adjust the detail resolution of the

printout. Move the slider to adjust the resolution.
Preview Pane Displays a small preview of the graph printout.
Border Editor Dialog Box
The Border Editor dialog box lets you define border properties for your graph. The
Border Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible Displays or hides the border. Select this check box

to display the border.
Color Lets you select a color for the border. The Color
Editor dialog box opens, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
Ending Lets you set the ending style of the border.
Dash Lets you select the dash style, if you have a

selection other than Solid set for the border style.
Width Lets you set the width of the border.
Style Lets you set the style for the border. Solid is an
uninterrupted line.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your border, where

opaque.

Gradient Editor Dialog Box
Use the Gradient Editor dialog box to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill.
Click OK to apply the selection. The Gradient Editor contains the following controls
and tabs:
Format Tab


opposite corner.

Colors Tab

output.

opaque.
Options Tab


To access the Gradient Editor dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box,
then click the Tools tab. Select the Axis tab and Color Band tool, then click the
Gradient button.
Color Editor Dialog Box
Use the Color Editor dialog box to select a color. Click the basic color you want to use
then click OK to apply the selection. The Color Editor dialog box contains the
following controls:
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your color, where

opaque.
Custom Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see “Color Dialog Box”.
OK/Cancel Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.
To access the Color Editor dialog box, click a Color button in the Chart Options dialog
box.
Color Dialog Box
Use the Color dialog box to select a basic color or to define a custom color. After you
select the color you want to use, click OK to apply the selection.
Basic colors Lets you click a color to select it.
Custom colors Displays colors you have created and selected for
use.
Color matrix Lets you use the mouse to select a color from a
range of colors displayed.
Color|Solid Displays the currently defined custom color.

Hue/Sat/Lum Lets you define a color by entering values for hue,

saturation, and luminosity.
Red/Green/Blue Lets you define a color by entering values of red,

green, and blue colors.
Add to Custom Colors Adds the current custom color to the Custom
colors area.
To access the Color dialog box, click the Custom button in the Color Editor dialog
box.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box
Use the Hatch Brush Editor dialog box to set a fill. The Hatch Brush Editor dialog box
contains the following controls and tabs:
Visible Displays or hides the pattern. Select this check

box to display the selected pattern.
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab”

• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab”
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab”
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab”
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab

Use the Solid tab to set a solid color as the fill. The Solid tab contains the following
controls:

opaque.
Custom Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see “Color Dialog Box”.
OK/Cancel Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab

Use the Hatch tab to set a pattern as the fill. Click OK to apply the selection. The
Hatch tab contains the following controls:
Hatch Style Select the pattern you want to use. These display
using the currently selected background and
foreground colors.
Background/ Select the color you want to use for the

Foreground background and foreground of the pattern. This
opens the Color Editor, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
% Lets you set transparency for your color, where

opaque.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab

Use the Gradient tab to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill. Click OK to apply
the selection. The Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab


opposite corner.

Colors Tab


output.

opaque.
Options Tab

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab

Use the Image tab to select an existing graphic file or picture to use as the fill. Click
OK to apply the selection. The Image tab contains the following controls:
Browse Lets you navigate to then select the graphic file

you want to use. When selected, the graphic
displays in the tab.
Style Lets you define how the graphic is used in the fill.
• Stretch—Resizes the image to fill the usable
space.
• Tile—Repeats the image to fill the usable
space.
• Center—Puts the image in the horizontal and
vertical center.
• Normal—Puts the image in the top-left corner

Pointer Dialog Box
Use the Pointer dialog box to set up a pointers for use with leader lines. The Pointer
dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible Sets whether a pointer displays or not.
3D Lets you display the pointer in three dimensions.

Inflate Margins Adjusts the margins of the pointers to display

pointers that are close to the edge of the graph. If
you clear this option, pointers near the edge of the
graph might only partly display.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the pointers. The Hatch
Dialog Box”. You must clear Default to use this
option.
Default Lets you select the default format for the pointers.
This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each Assigns a different color to each pointer.
Style Lets you select the shape used to represent the

pointers.
Width/Height Lets you set a size for the pointers.
Border Lets you set the outline of the shapes that

represent the pointers. The Border Editor opens,
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the pointers, where

opaque.
To access the Pointer dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then
click Series > Marks > Arrow.

Change Series Title Dialog Box
Use the Change Series Title dialog box to change the title of a selected series. Type the
new series title, then click OK to apply the new name or Cancel to close the dialog
box without making a change.
To access the Change Series title dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog
box, then click the Series tab, then the Title button.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box
Use the Chart Tools Gallery dialog box to add tools to your graph. For more informa-
tion, see “Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab” on page 10-612.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Chart Tools Gallery dialog
box:
• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab”

• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab”
• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab”
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab

Use the Series tab to add tools related to the series in your chart. The Series tab
contains the following tools:
Cursor
Displays a draggable cursor line on top of the series. After you have added the Cursor
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series Lets you select the series to which you want to

apply the tool.
Style Lets you select a horizontal line, vertical line, or

both as the format of the tool.
Snap Causes the cursor tool to adhere to the selected

series.
Follow Mouse Causes the cursor tool to follow your movements

of the mouse.

Pen Lets you define the cursor tool. The Border Editor
Drag Marks
Lets you drag series marks. To use this tool, you must display the marks for a selected
series, see “Marks Tab”. After you have added the Drag Marks tool to your graph, you
can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Reset Positions Moves any marks you have dragged back to their
original position.
Drag Point
Lets you drag a series point. After you have added the Drag Point tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Style Lets you constrain the movement of the series

point to one axis or both (no constraint).
Mouse Button Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.
Cursor Lets you select the appearance of the cursor when

using the tool.
Draw Line
Lets you draw a line on the graph by dragging. After you have added the Draw Line
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Pen Lets you define the line. The Border Editor opens,
Button Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.

Enable Draw Enables the Draw Line tool. Select this check box
to let you draw lines, clear it to prevent you from
drawing lines.
Enable Select Lets you select and move lines that you have
drawn. Select this check box, then click and drag
the line you want to move. clear this check box if
you want to prevent lines from being moved.
Remove All Removes all lines you have drawn.
Gantt Drag
Lets you move and resize Gantt bars by dragging. This is unused by Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Image
Displays a picture using the selected series axes as boundaries. After you have added
the Image tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Browse Lets you navigate to and select the image you

want to use. Browse is unavailable when there is a
selected image. To select a new image, first clear
the existing one.
Clear Lets you remove a selected image. Clear is

unavailable when there is no selected image.
Mode Lets you set up the image you select.

• Normal—Puts the background image in the
top-left corner of the graph.
• Stretch—Resizes the background image to fill
the entire background of the graph. The image
you select conforms to the series to which you
apply it.
• Center—Puts the background image in the
horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
• Tile—Repeats the background image as
many times as needed to fill the entire back-
ground of the graph.

Mark Tips
Displays data in tooltips when you move the cursor over the graph. After you have
added the Mark Tips tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool
Style Lets you select what data the tooltips display.
Action Sets when the tooltips display. Select Click if you

want the tooltips to display when you click, or
select Move if you want the tooltips to display
when you move the mouse.
Delay Lets you delay how quickly the tooltip displays.
Nearest Point
Lets you define and display an indicator when you are near a point in the selected
series. After you have added the Nearest Point tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:

apply the tool.
Fill Lets you set the fill for the nearest-point indicator.
The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush
Border Lets you set the outline of the nearest-point

indicator. The Border Editor opens, see “Border
Draw Line Creates a line from the tip of the cursor to the
series point.
Style Sets the shape for the indicator
Size Sizes the indicator.
Pie Slices
Outlines or expands slices of pie charts when you move the cursor or click them. This
is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.

Series Animation
Animates series points. After you have added the Series Animation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:xxxx seems broken.

apply the tool.
Steps Lets you select the steps used in the animation. Set
this control towards 100 for smoother animation
and away from 100 for quicker, but less smooth
animation.
Start at min. value Lets you start the animation at the series’
minimum value. clear this check box to set your
own start value.
Start value Sets the value at which the animation starts. To use
this control, you must clear Start at min. value.
Execute! Starts the animation.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab

Use the Axis tab to add tools related to the axes in your chart. The Axis tab contains
the following tools:
Axis Arrows
Lets you add arrows to the axes. The arrows permit you to scroll along the axes. After
you have added the Axis Arrows tool to your graph, you can modify the following
settings:
Axis Select the axis to which you want to add arrows.
Border Lets you set the outline of the arrows. The Border
Editor opens, see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Fill Lets you set the fill for the arrows. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.
Length Lets you set the length of the arrows.
Inverted Scroll Lets you change the direction in which the arrows
let you scroll.

Scroll Changes the magnitude of the scroll. Set a smaller

percentage to reduce the amount of scroll caused
by one click of an axis arrow, or set a larger
percentage to increase the amount of scroll caused
by a click.
Position Lets you set an axis arrow at the start, end, or both
positions of the axis.
Color Band
Lets you apply a color band to your graph for a range of values you select from an
axis. After you have added the Color Band tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Axis Select the axis that you want to use to define the
range for the color band.
Border Lets you set the outline of the color band. The
Box”.
Pattern Lets you set the fill of the color band. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.
Gradient Lets you set a gradient for the color band. A

gradient overrides any solid color fill you might
have set. The Gradient Editor opens, see “Gradient
Color Lets you set a solid color for the color band. The
Box”.
Start Value Sets where the color band begins. Specify a value
on the selected axis.
End Value Sets where the color band ends. Specify a vale on
the selected axis.

opaque.

Draw Behind Lets you position the color band behind the
graphs. If you clear this check box, the color band
appears in front of your graphs and hides them,
unless you have transparency set.
Color Line
Lets you apply a color line, or plane in three dimensions, at a point you set at a value
on an axis. After you have added the Color Line tool to your graph, you can modify
the following settings:
Axis Select the axis that you want to use to define the
location for the line.
Border Lets you set the outline of the color line. The
Box”.
Value Sets where the color line is. Specify a value on the
selected axis.
Allow Drag Lets you drag the line or lock the line in place.
Select this check box if you want to permit
dragging. clear this check box if you want the line
to be fixed in one location.
Drag Repaint Lets you smooth the appearance of the line as you
drag it.
No Limit Drag Lets you drag the line beyond the axes of the
graph, or constrain the line to boundaries defined
by those axes. Select this check box to permit
unconstrained dragging.
Draw Behind Lets you position the color line behind the graphs.
If you clear this check box, the color band appears
in front of your graphs. This is more noticeable in
3D graphs.
Draw 3D Lets you display the line as a 2D image in a 3D

chart. If you have a 3D chart (see “3D Tab”), clear
this check box to display the line as a line rather
than a plane.

Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab

Use the Other tab to add tools to your chart, including annotations. The Other tab
contains the following tools:
3D Grid Transpose
Swaps the X and Z coordinates to rotate the series through 90 degrees. This is unused
by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Annotation
Lets you add text to the chart. After you have added the Annotation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Options Tab
Text Lets you enter the text you want for your
annotation.
Text alignment Sets the alignment of the text inside the annotation
box.
Cursor Lets you set the style of the cursor when you move
it over the annotation.
Position Tab
Auto Lets you select a standard annotation position.
Custom Lets you select a custom position for the

annotation. Select this check box to override the
Auto setting and enable the Left and Top controls.
Left/Top Lets you set a position from the Left and Top
edges of the graph tab for the annotation.
Callout Tab
Border Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor
Pointer Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
“Pointer Dialog Box”.
Position Sets the position of the callout.

Distance Lets you set the distance between the leader line
and the graph of the selected series.
Arrow head Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to
add to the leader line.
Size Lets you set the size of the arrow head.
Format Tab
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Border Editor opens.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the boxes as transparent. If

the shape is completely transparent, you cannot
see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a
shape that you expect to see
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100
opaque.
Text Tab
Font Lets you set the font properties for text. This
Color Lets you select the color for the text font. Double-
click the colored square between Font and Fill to
open the Color Editor dialog box.
Fill Lets you set a pattern for the text font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens.


text. Select this check box to display the
shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Format Format—Lets you set up the gradient’s

properties.
• Visible—Sets whether a gradient displays or
not. Select this check box to display a gradient
you have set up, clear this check box to hide
the gradient.
• Direction—Sets the direction of the gradient.
Vertical causes the gradient to display from
top to bottom, Horizontal displays a gradient
from right to left, and Backward/Forward diag-
onal display gradients from the left and right
bottom corners to the opposite corner.
• Angle—Lets you customize the direction of
the gradient beyond the Direction selections.

Colors Lets you set the colors used for your gradients.
The Start, Middle, and End selections open the
Color Editor, see “Color Editor Dialog Box”.
• Start—Lets you set the starting color for your
gradient.
• Middle—Lets you select a middle color for
your gradient. The Color Editor opens. Select
the No Middle Color check box if you want a
two-color gradient.
• End—Lets you select the final color for your
gradient.
• Gamma Correction—Lets you control the
brightness with which the background
displays to your screen; select or clear this
check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect
printed output.
your gradient, where 100 is completely trans-
Options Lets you control the affect of the start and end
colors on the gradient, the middle color is not
used.
• Sigma—Lets you use the options controls.
Select this check box to use the controls in the
Options tab.
• Sigma Focus—Lets you set the location on
the chart background of the gradient’s end
color.
• Sigma Scale—Lets you control how much of
the gradient’s end color is used by the
gradient background.
Shadow Tab


Vertical Size.

Color Editor opens.
Brush Editor opens.

opaque.
Bevels Tab

bevel effect, for the outside of the legend.
values.

bevel effect, for the inside of the legend.
value.
Page Number
Lets you add a page number annotation. For more information, see “Annotation”.
Rotate
Lets you rotate the chart by dragging. After you have added the Rotate tool to your
graph, you can modify the following settings:
Inverted Reverses the direction of the rotation with respect

to the direction you move the mouse.
Style Lets you rotate horizontally, vertically, or both.

Rotation is horizontal rotation about a vertical
axis, whereas elevation is vertical rotation about a
horizontal axis.
Outline Lets you set the outline. The Border Editor opens,

TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box
Use the TeeChart Gallery dialog box to change the appearance of a series.
Series
The available series chart designs include:
• Standard
• Stats
• Financial
• Extended
• 3D
• Other
• View 3D—Lets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
• Smooth—Smooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Functions
The available function chart designs include:
• Standard
• Financial
• Stats
• Extended
• View 3D—Lets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
• Smooth—Smooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.

Customizing a Graph
To customize a graph:
1. If you do not have your own model, open Sample-1.swc, one of the sample
models that is included with Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
2. Create a graph.
a. Click Compute.
b. Close the Calculation Executive Summary.
c. Save your model.
d. Right click an element, in Sample-1.swc, shift+click CO-11, CO-3, and CO-7
to select them, then right-click one of them and select Graph.
e. Click Save in the Graph dialog box, to add the graph to the Graph manager.
3. Move the legend.

a. Click Chart Settings, to open the Chart Options dialog box.
b. Click the Chart button, Legend tab, and Position subtab.
c. Click the Right button in the Position area to set the legend to the right side of
the graph. You can use other controls on this subtab to move the legend.

4. Change the line colors and weights.

a. Click Chart Settings, to open the Chart Options dialog box.
b. In the Chart, Series tab click the series that you want to edit, to select and
highlight it. You can select more than one series by Ctrl+ or Shift+clicking
them.
c. Click Series and select the Format tab.

d. Click the Color button and select a new color, to change the color of the line.
The Color Editor dialog box opens (for more information, see “Color Editor
Dialog Box” on page 10-618).
e. Click OK after you click the color you want to use. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart, Series tab.
f. Click Outline to change the thickness of a line. The Border Editor dialog box
open (for more information, see “Border Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-616).
g. Select Visible.
h. Change the Width.
i. Make sure the Transparency is set to 0 if you want the line to appear opaque.
j. Click OK after you define the line width and attributes. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart, Series tab.
5. Change the interval between labels, grid, and ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Scales > Change to change the interval between labels
on the axes.
b. Select the Axis you want to change from the list of axes in the Axes area.

c. In the Increment dialog box, type the new value and click OK. This also
changes the distance between major and minor ticks.
d. If needed, change the axis you have selected for changes.

e. Click Chart > Axes > Minor and change the Count to change the interval
between minor ticks on the axes.

6. You can show and hide a grid associated with the major ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Ticks and click Grid.
b. Select the axis on which you want to change the grid.
c. In the Border Editor dialog box, select or clear Visible to show or hide the
grid. (For more information, see “Border Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-
616.)
7. You can show and hide a grid associated with the minor ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Minor and click Grid.
c. In the Border Editor dialog box, select or clear Visible to show or hide the
grid.
8. You can set the minimum and maximum range for an axis.
a. Click Chart > Axes > and select Scales.
c. Use the Minimum tab to change the minimum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
d. Click Change.
e. Set the minimum value for the axis.
f. Use the Maximum tab to change the maximum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
g. Click Change.
h. Set the maximum value for the axis.

9. Change the background colors.

a. Click Chart > Panel > and select Background.
b. Use the Color and Pattern buttons to set a background color and/or pattern
for the graph (see “Color Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-618 and “Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box” on page 10-619).
10. Change the number of decimal places used in axis labels.

a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels and select Format.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Change the number of decimal places by making a selection from the Values
Format drop-down list.
11. Change the fonts used by the axes and titles.

a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels and select Text.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Click Font to open the Font dialog box and change the format of the fonts
used by the axis labels.
d. Click Chart > Axes > Title and select Text.

e. Select the axis you want to change.

f. Click Font to open the Font dialog box and change the format of the fonts
used by the axis title.
12. Add a text box to the graph.

a. Click Tools > Add > Other > Annotation.
b. In the Text pane, type the text you want in your annotation.
13. Plot rainfall and flow on the same graph for a catchment.
a. Open Sample-1.swc.
b. Click Compute.
c. Right-click CM-5 and select Graph.
d. In the Graph dialog box, click Graph Series Options.
e. In the Graph Series Options dialog box, select Precipitation (Cumulative)

and Total Outflow, then click Close. The Graph dialog box displays two
graphs, one for total outflow and the other for cumulative precipitation.
f. Click Chart Settings. The Graph Options dialog box opens.
g. Click the Precipitation (Cumulative) series to select it.

h. Click Change.
i. Click the Bar graph type, to select it, then click OK.
j. Change the axis used by the bar graph.
k. Click Series, then select Precipitation (Cumulative) in the drop-down list.
l. Click the General subtab, then change Vertical Axis from Left to Custom 0.
m. To disable marks, click the Series > Marks > Style subtab, and clear the
Visible check box.
n. If you want to invert the Y-axis for the Precipitation (Cumulative) series, click
Chart > Axis, select the Custom 0 axis from the Axes list, and select the
Inverted check box.
o. Close the Chart Options dialog box when you finish.

Print Preview Window
Print Preview Window

The Print Preview window can be used to print documents from Bentley SewerCAD
V8i, such as reports and graphs. This window lets you see the current view of the
document as it will be printed and lets you define the print settings, such as selecting a
printer to use.
The following controls are available in the Print Preview window:
Contents Displays a table of contents for the document, if

one is created.
Print Opens the Print dialog box and lets you print the
document as it appears in the preview pane. You
can change printers in the Print dialog box, if you
want.
Copy Copies the document to the Windows clipboard,

so you can paste it into other applications.

Find Lets you search for words in the document. To

find a word, click Find, in the Find dialog box,
type the word you want to find, then click Find
Next. Words that are found are highlighted in the
print preview; click Find Next to continue
searching the document.
Single/Multiple Page Displays the document as a single page or multiple

View pages in the preview pane.
Zoom In/Out Enlarges or reduces the display of the document in

the print preview.
Note: Changing the zoom only affects

how the document displays on-
screen, it does not affect how
the document prints.
Zoom Combo Lets you select or type the amount of zoom used to
display the document, where 100% is full size.
Previous Page Displays to the previous page in the document.
Next Page Displays the next page in the document.
Page Displays the current page number and the total

pages in the current chart. You can type the page
number you want to display, and press Enter to
display it.
Backward/Forward Displays the page that was previously displayed.

Backward and Forward are based on your
navigation in the document and not on the page
order of the document. For example, if you
navigated from page 2 directly to page 6, clicking
Backward would display page 2 again; if you
then clicked Forward, page 6 would display
again.
Contours
Using SewerCAD V8i you can visually display calculated results for many attributes
using contour plots.
The Contours dialog box is where all of the contour definitions associated with a
project are stored. Choose View > Contours to open the Contours dialog box.

Contours
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the contours currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar.
New Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

allowing you to create a new contour.
Delete Deletes the currently selected contour.
Rename Renames the currently selected contour.
Edit Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

where you can modify the settings of the
currently selected contour.
Export Clicking this button opens a submenu

• Export to Shapefile - Exports the
contour to a shapefile, opening the
Export to File Manager to select the
shapefile.
• Export to DXF - Exports the contour as
a .dxf drawing.
• Export to Native Format - Opens the
Shapefile Properties dialog box,
allowing you to add it to the Background
Layers Manager.
View Opens the Contour Browser dialog,

Contour allowing you to display detailed contour
Browser results for points in the drawing view.
Refresh Regenerates the contour.
Shift Up Moves the currently selected contour up in

the list pane.
Shift Moves the currently selected contour down

Down in the list pane.
Help Displays online help for the Contours.

Contour Definition
The Contour Definition dialog box contains the information required to generate
contours for a calculated network.
Contour
Field Select the attribute to apply the contour.
Selection Set Apply an attribute to a previously defined

selection set or to one of the following predefined
options:
• All Elements - Calculates the contour based
on all elements in the model, including spot
elevations.
• All Elements Without Spots - Calculates the
contour based on all elements in the model,
except for spot elevations.
Minimum Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It

may be desirable to use a minimum that is above
the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid
creating excessive lines near a pump or other high-
differential portions of the system.
Maximum Highest value for which contours will be

generated.
Increment Step by which the contours increase. The contours

created will be evenly divisible by the increment
and are not directly related to the minimum and
maximum values. For example, a contour set with
10 minimum, 20 maximum, and an increment of 3
would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not
[ 10, 13, 16, 19 ].
Index Increment Value for which contours will be highlighted and

labeled. The index increment should be an even
multiple of the standard increment.
Smooth Contours The Contour Smoothing option displays the results

of a contour map specification as smooth, curved
contours.

Contours
Line Weight The thickness of contour lines in the drawing view.
Color by Range Contours are colored based on attribute ranges.

Use the Initialize button to create five evenly
spaced ranges and associated colors.
Initialize—This button, located to the right of the

Contour section, will initialize the Minimum,
Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values
based on the actual values observed for the
elements in the selection set.
Tip: Initialization can be

accomplished by clicking the
Initialize button to automatically
generate values for the
minimum, maximum,
increment, and index increment
to create an evenly spaced
contour set.
Ramp—Automatically generate a gradient range

between two colors that you specify. Pick the color
for the first and last values in the list and the
program will select colors for the other values.
Color by Index The standard contours and index contours have

separately controlled colors that you can make the
contours more apparent.
Contour Plot
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accu-
rate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using the animation feature.
Choose Analysis > EPS Results Browser and click the Play button to automatically
advance through the time step increments selected in the Increment bar.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file. Choose File > Export > DXF to
export the plot.

Tip: Although the straight-line contours generated by this program

are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for
presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking
Options and selecting Smooth Contours.
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this

view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
Contour Browser Dialog Box
The Contour Browser dialog box displays the X and Y coordinates and the calculated
value for the contour attribute at the location of the mouse cursor in the drawing view.
Using Named Views

The Named View dialog box is where you can store the current views X and Y coordi-
nates. When you set a view in the drawing pane and add a named view, the current
view is saved as the named view. You can then center the drawing pane on the named
view with the Go To View command.
Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.

• Named View—Opens a Named View
Properties box to create a new named
view.
• Folder—Opens a Named Views Folder
Properties box to enter a label for the
new folder.
Delete Deletes the named view or folder that is

currently selected.
Rename Rename the currently selected named view

or folder.

Using Named Views
Go to View Centers the drawing pane on the named

view.
Shift Up and Shift Moves the selected named view or folder up

Down or down.
Expand All or Expands or collapses the named views and

Help Displays online help for Named Views.
Using Aerial View
The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of
your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting
View > Aerial View to open the Aerial View window.
A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation

Rectangle provides a you-are-here indicator showing you current zoom location
respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navi-
gation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.
You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan,
click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere
in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again
to specify the second corner.
In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for a detailed explanation.
In Stand-Alone mode, with Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View >
Aerial View), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view. The
area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alternately, any
zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size
and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.
The Aerial View window contains the following buttons:
Zoom Extents—Display the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
Zoom In—Decrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
Zoom Out—Increase the area displayed in the Aerial View window.

Help—Opens the online help.
To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, click to define the new
rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor
over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.
Time Series Field Data

The Time Series Field Data dialog allows you to enter your observed field data and
compare it to the calculated results from the model in graph format. This is especially
useful in comparing time series data for model calibration.
Use this feature to display user-supplied time variant data values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. Model competency can sometimes be determined
by a quick side by side visual comparison of calculated results with those observed in
the field.
• Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph. Each property should be in a separate column in your data source
file.

Time Series Field Data
• Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection

of points in a table. In this case, the time series data can simply be copied to the
clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed data input
table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value
must have an associated time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or
comma delimited text files; these two import options are available as well.
• Starting time series data entry - To create a time series data set, click the
Component menu and select Time Series Field Data. Pick the element type (e.g.
Pipe, Junction) and select the New button on the top row of the dialog. (You may
also right click on the Element Type Name and click the Add button) You will
then see the Select Associated Modeling Attribute dialog where you select the
property (attribute) to be imported. Choose the attribute and click OK. You may
import any number of data sets for any Property and Element. The data set will
have the default name of Property-N (e.g. Flow - 1). To change the name, click
the Rename button (third button along the top of the table).
• Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must
be defined:
– Start Date Time - Specify the date and time the field data was collected.
– Element - Choose the element that represents the field data measurement
location. Click the ellipsis button to select the element from the drawing.
– Time From Start - Specify an offset of the start time and date for an EPS
scenario.
– Attribute Value - Enter the value for the specified attribute at the specified
Time from Start.
You can perform a quick graphical check on the data import by clicking the Graph
button at the top of the data table.
If the number of observations is large, it is best to use the Copy/Paste commands.

Copy the data from the original source to the clipboard, then go to the top of the Time
from Start or Property (e.g. Flow) column and hit CTRL-V to paste the values into the
appropriate column.
Click the Close button when done.
The data is saved with the model file. If you modify the source data file, the changes
will not appear until time series data is imported again.
To add the time series field data to a graph, first create the graph of the property from
an EPS model run (e.g. right click on element and pick Graph). In the Graph options
dialog, select Time Series Field Data and then the name of the time series (in the Field
pane (right pane). The field data will appear in the graph as points (by default) while
the model results will appear as a continuous line. This can be changed using the Chart
Settings button at the top of the graph (third from left).

Select Associated Modeling Attribute Dialog Box
This dialog appears when you create a new field data set in the Time Series Field Data
dialog. Choose the attribute represented in the time series data source. The available
attributes will vary depending on the element type chosen.
ESRI Shapefile Field Name Editor

It is possible to export model elements and data to create a shapefile. Unlike the other
export features in Bentley PondPack V8i , the export to shapefile operation occurs in a
FlexTable as opposed to the File > Export menu. Shapefiles must be created one
element type at a time. That means there will be a separate shapefile for junctions,
conduits, catchments, etc.
To create a shapefile, open the FlexTable for the type of element. Use selection sets or
filtering to reduce the size of the FlexTable to what is desired in the shapefile. Use the
table edit feature to eliminate any columns that are not desired.

ESRI Shapefile Field Name Editor
When the FlexTable is in the desired form, pick the first button at the top left of the
table which is the Export button. A drop down list will appear, pick Export to Shape-
file. The user is asked for the name of shapefile and path. When the user names the file
and hits Save, the dialog below appears.
It is important to insure that any shapefile field names are less than or equal to 10
characters. The default name for shapefile field is the name of the column in the
FlexTable. (If the user changes the name to something different from the FlexTable
column name, the editor remembers it when other shapefiles are created from this
table.) Once the names are acceptable, hit OK to create the shapefile. A shapefile
consisting of .dbf, .shx and .shp files are created.

Results Table Dialog Box

You can quickly view a results summary for any element by right-clicking it and
selecting the Results Table command.
Click the Report button to generate a preformatted report containing the data from the
results table.

Results Table Dialog Box

Chapter
Features of the 11
MicroStation Version
Bentley SewerCAD V8i features support for MicroStation integration. You run
Bentley SewerCAD V8i in both MicroStation and stand-alone mode.
The MicroStation functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone
mode, you will not have any difficulty using the product in MicroStation mode.
In MicroStation mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available
in the MicroStation design and drafting environment. The standard environment is
extended and enhanced by using MicroStation’s MDL (MicroStation Development
Language) client layer that lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley
SewerCAD V8i network model while in MicroStation.
MDL is a complete development environment that lets applications take full advan-
tage of the power of MicroStation and MicroStation-based vertical applications. MDL
can be used to develop simple utilities, customized commands or sophisticated
commercial applications for vertical markets.
Some of the advantages of working in MicroStation mode include:
• Lay out network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans.
• You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use,
along with any custom MDL applications.
• Use native MicroStation insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerCAD
V8i elements with respect to other entities in the MicroStation drawing.
• Use native MicroStation commands on Bentley SewerCAD V8i model entities
with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
• Control destination levels for model elements and associated label text and anno-
tation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note: Bentley SewerCAD V8i supports MicroStation version 8.11 only.
Additional features of the MicroStation version includes:

MicroStation Environment
• “MicroStation Environment” on page 11-658

• “MicroStation Project Files” on page 11-659
• “Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties” on page 11-659
• “Working with Elements” on page 11-661
• “MicroStation Commands” on page 11-663
• “Special Considerations” on page 11-664
MicroStation Environment
The MicroStation environment includes:
• “MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout” on page 11-658
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout
In MicroStation mode, our products provide a set of extended options and function-
ality beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality
provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends
the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
MicroStation.
Key differences between MicroStation and stand-alone mode include:
• Full element symbol editing functionality is available through the use of custom
cells. All elements and graphical decorations (flow arrows, control indicators,
etc.) are contained within a SewerCAD V8i .cel file.
You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the
Element Levels command under the View menu. For example, you can assign a
specific level for all outfalls, as well as assign the label and annotation text style to be
applied.

Features of the MicroStation Version
Note: Any Microstation tool that deletes the target element (such as
Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to SewerCAD V8i. After the SewerCAD V8i connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid link and will not show
properties on the property grid.
MicroStation Project Files

When using Bentley SewerCAD V8i in MicroStation mode, there are three files that
fundamentally define a Bentley SewerCAD V8i model project:
• Drawing File (.DGN)—The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that
define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
• Model File (.swc)—The model file contains model data specific to SewerCAD
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model may not
bave the same filename as the model’s .swc file.
• Database File (.MDB)—The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a
particular model may not bave the same filename as the model’s .mdb file.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to repro-
duce the model. You must also preserve the associated .swc and .MDB files.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties

Bentley SewerCAD V8i element properties includes:
• “Element Properties” on page 11-660

• “Levels” on page 11-660
• “Text Styles” on page 11-661

Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties
Element Properties
When working in the MicroStation mode, this feature will display a dialog box
containing fields for the currently selected element’s associated properties. To modify
an attribute, click each associated grid cell.
You can also review or modify MicroStation drawing information about an

element(s), such as its type, attributes, and geometry, by using the Element Informa-
tion dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element Information
button or click the Element menu and select the Information command.
Levels
To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box.
To access the Level Display dialog, click the Settings menu and select the Level >
Display command.
If you want to freeze elements in levels, select Global Freeze from the View Display
menu in the Level Display dialog.
You can create new Levels in the Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click
the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
To control the display of levels, use level filters. Within MicroStation, you can also
create, edit, and save layer filters to DWG files in the Level Manager. To access the
Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written back
when the file is saved. To create and edit Level Filters,
Element Levels Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign newly created elements and their associated annota-
tions to specific MicroStation levels.
To assign a level, use the pulldown menu next to an element type (under the Element
Level column heading) to choose the desired level for that element. You can choose a
seperate level for each element and for each element’s associated annotation.
You cannot create new levels from this dialog; to create new levels use the MicroSta-
tion Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select
the Level > Manager command.

Text Styles
You can view, edit, and create Text Style settings in MicroStation mode by clicking
the Element menu and selecting the Text Styles command to open the Text Styles
dialog.
Working with Elements

Working with elements includes:
• “Edit Elements” on page 11-662

• “Deleting Elements” on page 11-662
• “Modifying Elements” on page 11-662
Edit Elements
Elements can be edited in one of two ways in MicroStation mode:
Element Properties Dialog: To access the Element Properties dialog, click the
SewerCAD V8i View menu and select the Properties command.
FlexTables: To access the FlexTables dialog, click the SewerCAD V8i View menu
and select the FlexTables command.

Working with Elements
Deleting Elements
In MicroStation mode, you can delete elements by clicking on them using the Delete
Element tool, or by highlighting the element to be deleted and clicking your
keyboard’s Delete key.
Note: Any Microstation tool that deletes the target element (such as
Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to SewerCAD V8i. After the SewerCAD V8i connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid swc link and will not
show properties on the property grid.
Modifying Elements
In MicroStation mode, these commands are selected from the shift-right-click shortcut
menu (hold down the Shift key while right-clicking). They are used for scaling and
rotating model entities.
Change Pipe Widths

In MicroStation mode, you can change the line width through the Element Informa-
tion dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element menu and
select the Information command. To change the width of a pipe, select it and open the
Element Information dialog. Then change the value in the Weight pulldown menu
Edit Elements
In MicroStation mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable
editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select
figures on which to build a table.
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands
Working with elements using MicroStation commands includes:
“Bentley SewerCAD V8i Custom MicroStation Entities” on page 11-663
“MicroStation Commands” on page 11-663
“Moving Elements” on page 11-663
“Moving Element Labels” on page 11-663
“Snap Menu” on page 11-664

Bentley SewerCAD V8i Custom MicroStation Entities

The primary MicroStation-based Bentley SewerCAD V8i element entities are all
implemented using native MicroStation elements. These elements have feature link-
ages to define them as SewerCAD V8i objects.
This means that you can perform standard MicroStation commands (see “MicroSta-
tion Commands” on page 11-663) as you normally would, and the model database will
be updated automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using MDL technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during
Undo and Redo transactions.
See “MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout” on page 658.
MicroStation Commands
When running in MicroStation mode, Bentley Systems products make use of all the
advantages that MicroStation has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features.
Additionally, MicroStation commands can be used as you would with any design
project. For example, our products’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common MicroStation commands.
Moving Elements
When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the MicroStation command by either typing it at the

command prompt or selecting it. Follow the MicroStation prompts, and the node and
its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch
depending on the new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels

When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the MicroStation command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the MicroStation prompt, and the label
will be moved without the element.

Special Considerations
Snap Menu
When using MicroStation mode, you can enable the Snaps button bar by clicking the
Settings menu and selecting the Snaps > Button Bar command. See the MicroStation
documentation for more information about using snaps.
Special considerations include:
• “Import Bentley SewerCAD V8i” on page 11-664

• “Annotation Display” on page 11-664
• “Use SewerCAD V8i Z Order Command” on page 11-664
Import Bentley SewerCAD V8i
When running SewerCAD V8i in MicroStation mode, this command imports a

selected SewerCAD V8i data (.swc) file for use in the current drawing. The new
project file will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawing-
Name.swc. Whenever you save changes to the network model through SewerCAD
V8i, the associated .swc data file is updated and can be loaded into SewerCAD V8i.
Warning! A SewerCAD V8i Project can only be imported to a new,

empty MicroStation design model.
Annotation Display
Some fonts do not correctly display the full range of characters used by SewerCAD
V8i’s annotation feature because of a limited character set. If you are having problems
with certain characters displaying improperly or not at all, try using another font.
Use SewerCAD V8i Z Order Command
When this control is toggled on, SewerCAD V8i will parse the elements when the
screen is redrawn. It takes significant time to do this parsing, so for larger models
performance can be improved by toggling this control off

Chapter
Working in AutoCAD 12
Mode
Caution: If you previously installed Bentley ProjectWise and turned

on AutoCAD integration, you must add the following key to
your system registry using the Windows Registry Editor.
Before you edit the registry, make a backup copy.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Bentley\ProjectWise
iDesktop Integration\XX.XX\Configuration\AutoCAD"
String value name: DoNotChangeCommands
Value: 'On'
To access the Registry Editor, click Start > Run, then type
regedit. Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause
serious, system-wide problems that may require you to re-
install Windows to correct them. Always make a backup
copy of the system registry before modifying it.
SewerCAD V8i features support for AutoCAD integration.
The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
SewerCAD V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone mode,
you will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode.
Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:
• Layout network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will
have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with
any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
• Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerCAD
V8i elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.

The AutoCAD Workspace
• Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on

Bentley SewerCAD V8i model entities with automatic update and synchroniza-
tion with the model database.
• Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and anno-
tation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
• “Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands” on page 12-671

• “Special Considerations” on page 12-673

In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in
the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended
and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX Bentley SewerCAD V8i client layer that
lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley SewerCAD V8i network model
while in AutoCAD.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Bentley SewerCAD V8i
AutoCAD environment:
• “AutoCAD Integration with SewerCAD V8i” on page 12-666

•
• “AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout” on page 12-667
• “Menus” on page 12-667
• “Toolbars” on page 12-667
• “Drawing Setup” on page 12-668
• “Symbol Visibility” on page 12-668
AutoCAD Integration with SewerCAD V8i
When you install SewerCAD V8i after you install AutoCAD, integration between the
two is automatically configured.
If you install AutoCAD after you install SewerCAD V8i, you must manually integrate
the two by selecting Start > All Programs > Bentley > SewerGEMS V8i > Inte-
grate SewerCAD V8i with AutoCAD-Microstation. The integration utility runs
automatically. You can then run SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode.

Working in AutoCAD Mode
The Integrate SewerCAD V8i with AutoCAD-MicroStation command can also be

used to fix problems with the AutoCAD configuration file. For example, if you have
SewerCAD V8i installed on the same system as Bentley SewerCAD V8i and you
uninstall or reinstall SewerCAD V8i, the AutoCAD configuration file becomes unus-
able. To fix this problem, you can delete the configuration file then run the Integrate
SewerCAD V8i with AutoCAD-MicroStation command.
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout
In AutoCAD mode, our products provide a set of extended options and functionality
beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality provides
enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends the
command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
AutoCAD.
Note: In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the
submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Menus
In AutoCAD mode, all of the SewerCAD V8i commands are contained within a single
SewerCAD V8i menu.
The Bentley SewerCAD V8i menu commands work the same way in AutoCAD and
the Stand-Alone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley SewerCAD V8i menu
commands, see “Menus” on page 2-13.
Toolbars
In AutoCAD mode, in addition to AutoCAD’s toolbars, the following Bentley

SewerCAD V8i toolbars are available:
• Layout
• View
• Compute
• Scenarios
• Analysis
• Links

The Bentley SewerCAD V8i toolbars work the same way in AutoCAD and the Stand-
Alone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley SewerCAD V8i toolbars, see
“Toolbars” on page 2-31.
Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with our products in many
different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Bentley Systems product elements
can only be created and edited in model space.
Symbol Visibility
Note: In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the

ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control
visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a
selected group of element labels, you should move them to
another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in
the Drawing Options dialog box.
Layout Options Dialog
The Layout Options are associated with the Entity command layout support. You can
choose Entity, pick an existing polyline, and if there are no existing nodes at the end
of the pline, you will be prompted for the type of node to put at each endpoint.
The Allowable Entity Types toggles allow you to disallow certain line types from
being available for use with the Entity command.

AutoCAD Project Files

When using Bentley SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode, there are three files that
fundamentally define a Bentley SewerCAD V8i model project:
• Drawing File (.dwg)—The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
• Model File (.swc)—The native Bentley SewerCAD V8i model database file that
contains all the element properties, along with other important project data.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i .swc files can be loaded and run using the Stand-Alone
Editor. These files may be copied and sent to other Bentley SewerCAD V8i users
who are interested in running your project. This is the most important file for the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i model.
• SewerCAD V8i Database (.swc.mdb)—This file contains the model data.
The three files have the same base name. It is important to understand that archiving
the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the
associated .swc and swc.mdb file.
Since the .swc file can be run and modified separately from the .dwg file using the
Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in the Stand-Alone Editor and then later load the AutoCAD
.dwg file, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i program compares file dates, and automatically
use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
• “Drawing Synchronization” on page 12-670

When using SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode, there are three files that fundamen-
tally define a SewerCAD V8i model project:
• Drawing File (.DWG)—The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
• Model File (.SWC)—The model file contains model data specific to SewerCAD
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
• Database File (.MDB)—The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model.

To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that
archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also
preserve the associated .SWC and .MDB files.
Since the .SWC file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using
Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in Stand-Alone Editor mode and then later load the AutoCAD
.DWG file, the SewerCAD V8i program will compare file dates, and automatically
use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
SewerCAD V8i:
• “Drawing Synchronization” on page 12-670
Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a Bentley SewerCAD V8i-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i model server will start. The first thing that the application
will do is load the associated Bentley SewerCAD V8i model (.swc) file. If the time
stamps of the drawing and model file are different, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will auto-
matically perform a synchronization. This protects against corruption that might
otherwise occur from separately editing the Bentley SewerCAD V8i model file in
stand-alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i application is not loaded.
The synchronization check will occur in two stages:
• First, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will compare the drawing model elements with
those in the server model. Any differences will be listed. Bentley SewerCAD V8i
enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing
state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .swc file during a
SewerCAD V8i session, or if proxy elements have been deleted, Bentley
SewerCAD V8i will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by
restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.
• After network topology has been synchronized, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will
compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow direc-
tions.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the following command:
SWRCSYNCHRONIZE
swcWSYNCSERVER

Or by selecting Tools > Database Utilities > Synchronize Drawing.
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands

This section describes how to work with elements using AutoCAD commands,
including:
• SewerCAD V8i custom AutoCAD entities

• AutoCAD commands
• Explode entities
• Move entities
• Move element labels
• Use the Snap menu
This section includes the following topics about working with elements using
AutoCAD commands:
• “AutoCAD Commands” on page 12-672

• “Explode Elements” on page 12-672
• “Moving Elements” on page 12-673
• “Moving Element Labels” on page 12-673
• “Snap Menu” on page 12-673
SewerCAD V8i Custom AutoCAD Entities
The primary AutoCAD-based SewerCAD V8i element entities are all implemented
using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested with a specialized model
awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform will result in an appro-
priate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see “AutoCAD
Commands” on page 12-672) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a manhole, its connecting pipes will
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
Custom AutoCAD Entities
The primary AutoCAD-based SewerCAD V8i element entities—pipes, channels,

gutter links, manholes, catch basins, outfalls, pond outfall structures, and cross section
nodes—are all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested
with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform
will result in an appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see “AutoCAD
Commands” on page 12-672) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Bentley Systems products make use of all the
advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Addi-
tionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For
example, our products’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using common
AutoCAD commands.
Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all
custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a custom entity is
exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the exploded
drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see
“Working with Proxies” on page 12-674.

Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will
be moved without the element.
Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that
provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
There are special considerations to remember when you perform the following tasks
in AutoCAD mode:
• “Importing SewerCAD V8i Data” on page 12-674

• “Importing SewerCAD V8i Data” on page 12-617
• “Working with Proxies” on page 12-674

Importing SewerCAD V8i Data
When running SewerCAD V8i AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected
SewerCAD V8i data (.swc) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file
will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.swc. When-
ever you save changes to the network model through SewerCAD V8i, the associated
.swc data file is updated and can be loaded into SewerCAD V8i.
Warning! A SewerCAD V8i Project can only be imported to a new,

empty AutoCAD drawing.
Working with Proxies
If you open a Bentley SewerCAD V8i drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that
does not have the Bentley SewerCAD V8i application installed, you will get an
AutoCAD Proxy Information message box. This is because the executable logic for
managing the AutoCAD entities is not available, and the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
modeling elements are not associated with the Bentley SewerCAD V8i native data-
base.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so
will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved
with its original name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an
AutoCAD station that is running a Bentley SewerCAD V8i application, the applica-
tion will automatically load and will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by
automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine. (For more information,
see “Drawing Synchronization” on page 12-670).

Chapter
Theory 13
This appendix provides an overview of the methods that SewerCAD V8i uses to
compute flows and hydraulic grades throughout the system, including both gravity
and pressure computations.
Some of the basic concepts underlying the calculations are as follows:
• SewerCAD V8i can run both Steady State and Extended Period Analyses. Steady
State Analyses model a single instant in time and are generally used to model a
network under peak loading conditions. Extended Period Simulations model a
network over a specified duration of time and can be used to model hydrograph
loading, wet well capacities, and automated pump behavior.
• Loads are the sources of flow in the sanitary sewer system, and are categorized as
sanitary (dry weather) loads, wet weather loads, and known loads. The total load
at any given point may be a combination of these basic load types.
• Loads can be adjusted through the use of fixed or variable peaking factors during
a Steady State analysis in order to analyze the system under a variety of condi-
tions, such as daily average, minimum, and maximum scenarios. Common pre-
defined variable peaking methods are included, but you may also specify your
own as tables or equations.
• Loads can also be varied over time using loading patterns and hydrographs during
an Extended Period Simulation.
• Gravity pipe headlosses are computed based on gradually varied flow profiles or
approximate profiles. Either of these profile methods allows for free-surface
(open channel) flow, full flow (as for a pipe that is submerged), and mixed condi-
tions. Pressure pipe headlosses are based strictly on full-flow hydraulics.
• Gravity structure losses may be based on several common methodologies. Where
appropriate, these calculations may account for pipe bend angles, structure
benching, and other influential factors.

Loading
• During an Extended Period Simulation hydrographs are routed through the gravity
pipes to account for translation and other effects.
• All or portions of gravity systems may be selected for automatic design. This
preliminary design can be used to set pipe and structure elevations, as well as to
size the pipes.
Loading
SewerCAD V8i classifies loads as sanitary (dry weather) loads, wet weather loads,
and known loads.
Sanitary loads correspond to loads that result from human activity, and are not
weather-dependent. Common sources of sanitary loads are various residential,
commercial, recreational, and industrial usage. Wet weather loads are related to rain-
fall activity, such as groundwater infiltration (water leaking into a pipe through cracks,
joints, and other defects) and structure inflow (surface water entering a structure
through the cover).
Known loads are typically used to model flows that have already been gathered from
some other source, such as external calculations or field measurements.
Common Load Types
There are two different loading types that can be applied as both wet weather and sani-
tary loads. The behavior of each loading type is the same regardless of how it is
applied. The two common loads are:
• Hydrographs
• Pattern Loads
Hydrographs
In SewerCAD V8i you can enter time vs. flow data directly as a load. The hydro-
graphs will then be directly added to any other loads coming to that point and then
routed downstream
During a Steady State analysis a hydrograph loaded can be converted into a single
load, based on one of the following selected Steady State Loading options.
• Peak - The peak of the hydrograph will be used as the Steady State load.
• Average - The average of the hydrograph flows will be used as the Steady State
load.

Theory
• Minimum - The minimum flow of the hydrograph will be used as the Steady
State load.
• Zero - The hydrograph is disregarded during the Steady State run.
Note: When the length of the hydrograph is shorter than the duration
of an EPS run, The final flow value of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the duration of the simulation.
Pattern Loads
A pattern load is comprised of a base load and an associated loading pattern. The
pattern is a series of multipliers, which describes how the base load varies over time.
During a Steady State Analysis the entered base load is used as the load regardless of
the applied loading pattern.
Extreme Flow Factors are not applied to entered base loads.
Hydrographs vs. Pattern Loads

Hydrographs and Pattern loads are two distinct ways to describe how flow varies over
time. Ultimately, you can attain the same results using either method but there are
some behavioral and semantic differences that should be noted.
Pattern loads consists of a single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over time. A hydrograph, simply, is
a time-discharge series.
Hydrographs are usually applied as wet weather loads, and are generated using hydro-
logic methods, while patterns are more typically applied to sanitary loads. Patterns
are developed based on predetermined variations in loading over the course of a day.
The patterns are then assumed to represent templates for how the loads of a similar
type vary over time. These statements represent typical usage of both loading types;
they do not represent hard and fast rules.
During an Extended Period Simulation if the duration of the simulation exceeds the
duration of a pattern then the pattern will repeat itself. If the duration of the simula-
tion exceeds the duration of a hydrograph the last point of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the extent of the remaining time.
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loading
The total sanitary load may be comprised of an unlimited number of individual sani-
tary loads. For example, the local load for a given manhole may be a combination of
loads from an apartment building, a gas station, and a film development store, each
with different loading characteristics. They can either be entered as:

Loading
• Unit Sanitary Loads

• Pattern Loads
• Hydrographs
Unit sanitary loads and pattern loads are calculated or entered as a base load, which
represent the average loading on the system at that point. During a Steady State anal-
ysis the unit sanitary loads can be adjusted to represent peak or minimum loads using
the Extreme Flow Factor methods. During an Extended Period Simulation a loading
pattern can be applied to both the unit sanitary loads and pattern loads to described
how the base load varies over time.
Hydrographs can also be applied as sanitary loads. They are meant to represent actual
measured flow or hydrographs generated from other programs, and SewerCAD V8i
does not apply peaking factors or patterns to them.
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

Unit sanitary (dry weather) loads are entered based on a number of contributing units,
with a specified average load per unit, such as X-amount of flow per apartment resi-
dent. With each load type, you can then associate a peaking factor method or a
loading pattern, allowing you to account for the knowledge that peaking factors and
patterns are most likely different for residential and commercial areas.
Peaking factors are applied only during the Steady State analyses. During Extended
Period Simulations loading patterns can be applied to the base loads generated from
the unit sanitary loads to account for variations in sanitary inflow over time.
Extreme Flow Factor

Sewer design and analysis generally considers a variety of loading conditions, such as
minimum, average, and peak conditions. Base (average) sanitary loads are trans-
formed into minimum or peak loads using an Extreme Flow Factor.
The most common type of Extreme Flow Factor (EFF) is the Variable Peaking Factor
(PF).
Qpeaked = Qbase * EFF
Where:
• Qpeaked = Transformed flow (l/s, gpm)

• Qbase = Base flow (l/s, gpm)
• EFF = Extreme Flow Factor (unitless)

Theory
Note: Extreme Flow Factor methods are only used during Steady State
analyses. During Extended Period Simulations loading patterns
can be applied to the Unit Dry Weather base loads.
Common Variable Peaking Factors

Some of the most common variable peaking factor (PF) calculation methods are:
Babbitt
5.0
PF = --------------------------
P  0.20
 ------------
 1000
Where: P = Contributing population (number of capita)
Harmon
14.0
PF = 1.0 + ----------------------------------------
P 0.50
4.0 +  ------------
 1000
Ten States Standard (Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board)
P
18 + ------------
1000
PF = ----------------------------
P
4 + ------------
1000
Federov
2.69
PF = ----------------
0.121
Q
Where: Q = Base dry weather load (l/s)

Loading
Note: The Babbit peaking method does not converge to 1. For

populations larger than 3,125,000 the peaking factor will become
smaller than 1.
Wet Weather Loading
The Wet Weather Load represents the intrusion of rainfall water into the sewer system.
Wet weather loads consist of groundwater infiltration, rainfall inflow, and illegal
invert pump connections. Groundwater infiltration occurs in gravity pipes, while
inflow occurs at manholes, pressure junctions, and wet wells. Infiltration loads refer to
wet weather loads entering pipes, where water leaks into the system through joints,
cracks, and other defects. Inflow loads refer to wet weather loads entering structures,
typically surface water entering through a structure's cover.
Infiltration
Infiltration resulting from the presence of groundwater can be modeled for gravity
pipes. Infiltration enters the system at conduit elements. It is combined with the loads
at the upstream end of the pipe to determine the pipe's Flow.
There are several common methods of determining infiltration based on pipe charac-
teristics, which is why
SewerCAD V8i allows infiltration to be defined with any of the following methods:
• Proportional to Pipe Length - The infiltration is specified as an Infiltration Rate

per Unit of Pipe Length.
• Proportional to Pipe Diameter-Length - The infiltration is specified by an Infil-
tration Rate per Unit of Pipe Diameter times Pipe Length. The amount of infiltra-
tion is proportional to the pipe length and to the pipe diameter.
• Proportional to Pipe Surface Area - The infiltration is specified by an Infiltra-
tion Rate per Unit of Pipe Surface Area, where the pipe's surface area is calculated
as its length multiplied by its full perimeter. The amount of infiltration is propor-
tional to the pipe length and the pipe diameter.
• Proportional to Count - The infiltration is specified by count value, which may
be the number of defects in the pipe, and the Infiltration Rate per Unit of Count.
• Additional Infiltration - Fixed amount of infiltration that is added to the total wet
weather load. This value is constant regardless of the pipe's characteristics.
• Hydrographs - The infiltration is specified as a table of flow vs. time.
• Pattern Loads - The infiltration is specified as an average base load and a loading
pattern.

Theory
During an Extended Period Simulation the five non-time-based methods will generate
a single straight-line hydrograph producing a constant load for the duration of the
simulation.
Inflow
Inflow loads refer to wet weather loads entering structures, which are typically from
surface water entering through a structure's cover, or pumped illegally into a force
main system. Inflows can be entered as the following loading types:
• Hydrographs
• Pattern Loads
During Steady State analysis these loads can be modeled, and are combined with
upstream wet weather loads to determine the Total Wet Weather Flow.
During Extended Period Simulations the loads are not classified once they enter the
system they are added to together as a single lump hydrograph.
Inflows can be applied to manholes, wet wells, and pressure junctions.
Known Flow
Known flows are a special type of fixed flow. As with other fixed flows, known flows
remain constant as they progress downstream and combine directly as a simple sum.
The special behavior of known flows occurs during a Steady State Analysis when
another known flow is specified at a downstream location. While most fixed flows
combine directly under any circumstances, a non-zero known flow at any location
replaces all upstream known flows. Known flows do not override hydrograph or
pattern loads from upstream. Therefore it is not advisable to mix known flows with
these other types of node.
For this reason, known flows may be desirable for modeling flows that originate from
external calculations or field measured data (flows that do not require SewerCAD V8i
to generate or sum them in any way).
During Extended Period Simulations, Known Flows are modeled as a single constant
flow hydrograph over the duration of the simulation. They are added directly to the
existing flows coming from upstream sources and are all lumped together as a single
hydrograph for routing. The Known Flows are additive and do not replace each other
during Extended Period Simulations, much like a fixed pattern load.

Gravity Pipe Hydraulics

This documentation is intended to familiarize you with some of the methods used in
this program's calculations. However, there is not a great deal of time spent on
common hydraulic terms and equations, such as determination of wetted perimeter,
hydraulic radius, hydraulic depth, and Reynolds number.
The Energy Principle
The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy
is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done
by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.
The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus
the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as
electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disre-
garded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.
In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,

resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:
Pressure Head: p/
Elevation Head: z
Velocity Head: V2/2g
Where: p = Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)

 = Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)
z = Elevation (m, ft.)
V = Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec.2)
These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two loca-
tions using the energy equation (for more information, see “The Energy Equation” on
page 13-683).

Theory
The Energy Equation

In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head
added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due
to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respec-
tively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, you then obtain the
energy equation:
p1 V2 p V 2
 z1  1  h p  2  z 2  2  hL
γ 2g γ 2g
Where: p = Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)

g = Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)
z = Elevation at the centroid (m, ft.)
hp = Head gain from a pump (m, ft.)
hL = Combined headloss (m, ft.)
The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quanti-
ties, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.
Hydraulic and Energy Grades
Hydraulic and energy grades includes:
• “Hydraulic Grade” on page 13-684

• “Energy Grade” on page 13-684

Figure 13-1: EGL and HGL
Hydraulic Grade
The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/g) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezom-
eter. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.
Energy Grade
The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head (V2/2g).
This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a
lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL,
as can be seen in the following figure.
Friction Loss Methods
Friction loss methods include:
• “Chezy’s Equation” on page 13-685

• “Colebrook-White Equation” on page 13-685
• “Hazen-Williams Equation” on page 13-686
• “Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page 13-686
• “Manning’s Equation” on page 13-688

Theory
Chezy’s Equation
Chezy’s equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Manning’s equation. Chezy’s equation is:
Q CA  RS
Where: Q = Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)

C = Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)
A = Flow area (m2, ft.2)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction factor:
Free Surface:
1 k 2.51
= - 2 log +
f Ł12.0 R Re f ł
Full Flow (Closed Conduit):
1 k 2.51
= - 2 log +
f Ł3.7 D Re f ł
Where: f = Friction factor (unitless)

k = Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft.)
Re = Reynolds Number (unitless)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft.)

Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:
Q  k  C  A  R0.63  S0.54
Where: Q = Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)

C = Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
k = Constant (0.85 for SI units, 1.32 for US units).
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:
L V2
hL = f
D 2g
Where: hL = Headloss (m, ft.)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)

L = Pipe length (m, ft.)
V = Flow velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular section’s full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:
D = 4R

Theory
Where: R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)

D = Diameter (m, ft.)
This can then be rearranged to the form:
RS
Q  A  8g 
f
Where: Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor. For
more information, see “Swamee and Jain Equation” on page 13-687.
Swamee and Jain Equation
Note: The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction

coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default
units are initially set by Bentley Systems.
1.325
f =
Ø ø2
Œln e + 5.74 0.9 œ
Œ Ł 3.7 D Re łœ
º ß
Where: f = Friction factor (unitless)

 = Roughness height (m, ft.)
Re = Reynolds Number (unitless)
The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is depen-
dent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.

Manning’s Equation
Note: Manning’s roughness coefficients are the same as the

roughness coefficients used in Kutter’s equation.
Manning’s equation, which is based on Chezy’s equation, is one of the most popular
methods in use today for free surface flow. For Manning’s equation, the roughness
coefficient in Chezy’s equation is calculated as:
R1/ 6
Ck
n
Where: C = Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)

n = Manning’s roughness (s/m1/3)
k = Constant (1.00 m1/3/m1/3, 1.49 ft.1/3/ft.1/3)
Substituting this roughness into Chezy’s equation, you obtain the well-known
Manning’s equation:
k
Q  A  R2 / 3  S1/ 2
n
Where: Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs)

k = Constant (1.00 m1/3/s, 1.49 ft.1/3/sec.)
n = Manning’s roughness (unitless)
Flow Regime
The hydraulic grade in a flow section depends heavily on the tailwater conditions,
pipe slope, discharge, and other conditions. The basic flow regimes that a pipe may
experience include:
• Pressure Flow

Theory
• Uniform (Normal) Flow

• Critical Flow
• Subcritical Flow
• Supercritical Flow
Based on the gradually varied flow analysis, different portions of any given pipe may
be under different flow regimes.
Pressure Flow
When a pipe is surcharged, headlosses are simply based on the full barrel area and
wetted perimeter. Because these characteristics are all functions of the section shape
and size, friction loss calculations are greatly simplified by pressurized conditions.
Uniform Flow and Normal Depth

Uniform flow refers to a hydraulic condition where the discharge and cross-sectional
area, and therefore the velocity, are constant throughout the length of the channel or
pipe. For a pipe flowing full, all that this requires is that the pipe be straight and have
no contractions or expansions. For a non-full section, however, there are a few addi-
tional points of interest:
In order for the cross-sectional area to remain the same, the depth of flow must be
constant throughout the length of the channel. This requires that the friction slope
equal the constructed slope. This depth is called normal depth.
Since the hydraulic grade line parallels the invert of the section and the velocity does
not change, the energy grade line is parallel to both the hydraulic grade line and the
section invert under uniform flow conditions.
In prismatic channels, flow conditions will typically approach normal depth if the
channel is sufficiently long.
Critical Flow, Critical Depth, and Critical Slope

Critical flow occurs when the specific energy of the section is at a minimum. This
condition is defined by the situation where:
A3 Q2

T g
Where:

2 2
• A= Area of flow ( m , ft )
• T = Top width of flow (m, ft)
3 3
• Q = Section Discharge ( m  s , ft  s )
2 2
• g = Gravitational acceleration ( m  s , ft  s )
This is a relatively simple computation for simple geometric shapes, but can require
iterative calculation for more complex shapes (such as arches). Some sections may
even have several valid critical depths, making numerical convergence more difficult.
Critical depth refers to the depth of water in a channel for which the specific energy is
at its minimum. Critical slope refers to the slope at which the critical depth of a pipe
would be equal to the normal depth.
Subcritical Flow
Subcritical flow refers to any flow condition where the Froude number is less than 1.0.
For this condition, the depth is above critical depth, and the velocity is below the crit-
ical depth velocity.
Supercritical Flow
Supercritical flow refers to any condition where the Froude number, or the ratio of
internal forces to gravity forces, is greater than 1.0. For this condition, the depth is
below critical depth, and the velocity is above the critical depth velocity.
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis
For free surface flow, depth rarely remains the same throughout the length of a
channel or pipe. Starting from a boundary control depth, the depth changes gradually,
increasing or decreasing until normal depth is achieved (if the conduit is sufficiently
long). The determination of a boundary control depth depends on both the tailwater
condition and the hydraulic characteristics of the conduit. The areas of classification
for gradually varied flow analysis are:
• Slope Classification
• Zone Classification
• Profile Classification

Theory
Slope Classification
The constructed slope of a conduit is a very important factor in determining the type
of gradually varied flow profile that exists. Slopes fall into one of five types, all of
which are handled by the program:
• Adverse Slope
• Horizontal Slope
• Hydraulically Mild Slope
• Critical Slope
• Hydraulically Steep Slope
Any pipe can qualify as only one of these slope types for a given discharge. For
differing flows, though, a pipe may change between qualifying as a mild, critical, and
steep slope. These slopes do not relate to just the constructed slope, but to the
constructed slope relative to the critical slope for the given discharge.
Adverse Slope
Adverse slope occurs when the upstream invert elevation of a pipe is actually below
the downstream invert elevation. Normal depth is undefined for adverse slopes, since
no amount of positive flow would result in a rising friction slope. Most flow condi-
tions for adverse sloping pipes are subcritical.
Pipes are typically not designed to be adverse, so most situations with adverse slopes
are due to construction errors or other unusual circumstances. Adverse pipes may
cause some concern beyond the hydraulic capacity of the system, because stagnant
water, excessive clogging, and other non-desirable conditions may result.
Horizontal Slope
As the name suggests, a horizontal slope results when a pipe's upstream and down-
stream invert elevations are the same. Normal depth for a horizontal pipe is theoreti-
cally infinite, although critical depth may still be computed. Like adverse slopes,
most flow conditions for horizontal pipes are subcritical.
Hydraulically Mild Slope
A hydraulically mild slope is a condition where the constructed slope is less than the
critical slope. For this condition, the section's normal depth is above critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually subcritical.

Critical Slope
A pipe or channel may have exactly the same slope as the critical slope for the
discharge it carries. This is a very uncommon occurrence, but it is possible and the
program does calculate it appropriately. Critical depth is an inherently unstable
surface, so flow is most likely to be subcritical for these slopes.
Hydraulically Steep Slope
A hydraulically steep slope is a condition where the constructed slope is greater than
the critical slope. For this condition, the section's normal depth is below critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually supercritical. However, high tailwater conditions may
cause flow to be subcritical.
Zone Classification
There are three zones that are typically used to classify gradually varied flow:
Zone 1 is where actual flow depth is above both normal depth and critical depth.
Zone 2 is where actual flow depth is between normal depth and critical depth.
Zone 3 is where actual flow depth is below both normal depth and critical depth.

Theory
Profile Classification
The gradually varied flow profile classification is simply a combination of the slope
classification and the zone classification. For example, a pipe with a hydraulically
mild slope and flow in zone 1 would be considered a Mild-1 profile (M1 for short).
The program will analyze most profile types, but will not analyze certain flow profile
types that occur rarely in conventional sewer system such as H3, M3, and S3.

Energy Balance
Even for gradually varied flow, the solution is still a matter of balancing the energy
between the two ends of a pipe segment. The energy equation as it relates to each end
of a segment is as follows (note that the pressures for both ends are zero, since it is
free surface flow):
V12 V22
Z1   Z2   HL
2g 2g
Where:
• Z 1 = Hydraulic grade at upstream end of the segment (m, ft)

V 1 = Velocity at the upstream end (m/s, ft/s)
• Z 2 = Hydraulic grade at the downstream end of the segment (m, ft)
• V 2 = Velocity at the downstream end (m/s, ft/s)
• H 1 = Loss due to friction - other losses assumed to be zero (m, ft)

2 2
• g = Gravitational acceleration constant ( m  s , ft   s )
The friction loss is computed based on the average rate of friction loss along the
segment and the length of the segment. This relationship is as follows:
S1  S 2
H L  S Avg  x  x
2
Where:
HL =Loss across the segment (m, ft)
Savg = Average friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
S1 = Friction slope at the upstream end of the segment (m/m, ft/ft)
S2 = Friction slope at the downstream end of the segment (m/m, ft/ft)
?x = Length of the segment being analyzed (m, ft)

Theory
The conditions at one end of the segment are known through asinverttion or from a
previous calculation step. Since the friction slope is a function of velocity, which is a
function of depth, the depth at the other end of the segment can be found through iter-
ation. There are two primary methods for this iterative solution, the Standard Step
method and the Direct Step method.
Note: Because it generates better resolution within the changing part

of the profile, the gravity flow algorithm of StormCAD and
SewerCAD V8i primarily use the direct step method to compute
gradually varied flow profiles.
Standard Step Method

The standard step method of gradually varied flow energy balance involves dividing
the channel into segments of known length and solving for the unknown depth at one
end of the segment, starting with a known or assumed depth at the other end. The
standard step method is the most popular method of determining the flow profile
because it can be applied to any channel, not just prismatic channels.

SewerCAD V8i primarily use the direct step method to compute
gradually varied flow profiles.
Direct Step Method

The direct step method is based on the same basic energy principles as the standard
step method, but takes a slightly different approach towards the solution. Instead of
assuming a segment length and solving for the depth at the end of the segment, the
direct step method assumes a depth and then solves for the segment length.

SewerCAD V8i use the direct step method to compute gradually
varied flow profiles.
Mixed Flow Profiles
Although the hydraulic slope of a pipe will be the same throughout its length, a pipe
may contain several different profile types. The transitions that may be encountered
include:
• Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions

• Rapidly Varied Flow (Hydraulic Jumps)

Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions

There may be conditions such that part of the section is flowing full, while part of the
flow remains open. These conditions are called sealing conditions, and the sections
are analyzed in separate parts. For sealing conditions, the portion of the section
flowing full is analyzed as pressure flow, and the remaining portion is analyzed with
gradually varied flow techniques.
Rapidly Varied Flow

Rapidly varied flow is turbulent flow resulting from the abrupt and pronounced curva-
ture of flow streamlines into or out of a hydraulic control structure. Examples of
rapidly varied flow include hydraulic jumps, bends, and bridge contractions.
The hydraulic phenomenon that occurs when the flow passes rapidly from supercrit-
ical to subcritical flow is called a hydraulic jump. The most common occurrence of
this within a gravity flow network occurs when there is a steep pipe discharging into a
particularly high tailwater, as shown in the following figure.
There are significant losses associated with hydraulic jumps, due to the amount of
mixing and hydraulic turbulence that occurs. These forces are also highly erosive, so
engineers typically try to prevent jumps from occurring in gravity flow systems, or at
least try to predict the location of these jumps in order to provide adequate channel,
pipe, or structure protection. The program does not perform any specific force anal-
yses that seek to precisely locate the hydraulic jump, nor does it identify the occur-
rence of jumps that might happen as flows leave a steep pipe and enter a mild pipe.
Rather it performs analyses sufficient to compute grades at structures.
Backwater Analysis
The classic solution of gravity flow hydraulics is via a backwater analysis. This type
of analysis starts at the network outfall under free discharge, submerged, or tailwater
control, and proceeds in an upstream direction.

Theory
Steep pipes tend to "interrupt" the backwater analysis, and reset the hydraulic control
to critical depth at the upstream end of the steep pipe. A frontwater analysis may be
needed for a steep profile (such as an S2), with the backwater analysis recommencing
from the upstream structure.
Free Outfall
This program lets you define the tailwater condition at the outfall as either Free
Outfall, Crown Elevation or User-Specified.
For a pipe with a hydraulically steep slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a
starting depth equal to normal depth in the pipe. For a pipe with a hydraulically mild
slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a starting depth equal to critical depth.
When an outfall has multiple incoming pipes, the Free Outfall condition yields a
starting elevation equal to the lowest of the individual computed elevations.
The Crown condition should be used when the pipe discharges to an outfall where the
water surface elevation is equal to the elevation of the top of the pipe.
Structure Flooding
Flooding at manholes in SewerCAD V8i and inlets in StormCAD occurs whenever the
elevation of water is above the structure rim elevation. When this occurs, the back-
water analysis will continue by resetting the hydraulic grade to the structure rim eleva-
tion or ground elevation, whichever is higher. However, if a structure is defined with
a bolted cover, the hydraulic grade is not reset to the rim elevation.
In actual flooding situations, flows may be diverted away from the junction structure
and out of the system, or attenuated due to surcharged storage. In this program, even
though the governing downstream boundary for the next conduit is artificially lowered
to prevent the propagation of an incorrect backwater, the peak discharges at the struc-
ture are conserved and are not reduced by the occurrence of flooding at a junction.
Frontwater Analysis
The program will perform a frontwater analysis in a steep pipe operating under super-
critical flow, since these pipes are typically entrance controlled. The hydraulic control
is at the upstream end of the conduit, and the gradually varied flow analysis will
proceed in a downstream direction until either the normal depth is achieved, a
hydraulic jump occurs, or the end of the pipe is encountered.
The program's algorithm is fundamentally based on backwater analysis. As a result, a

continuous frontwater analysis is not performed through two or more consecutive
steep pipes.

Note: This is a performance trade-off that has little impact in

evaluating performance of the collection system in most
situations. The asinverttion of critical depth at the upstream end
results in a conservative depth in all cases, and is exactly
correct at the point of the steep run furthest upstream.
Pipe Average Velocity
Several common methods for computing a pipe's average velocity are available:
• Uniform Flow Velocity

Uniform Flow Velocity

The uniform flow velocity of a pipe is obtained by calculating the velocity in the pipe
at normal depth. If the normal depth corresponds to a surcharged condition, the full
flow velocity is used instead.
Full Flow Velocity

The full flow velocity corresponds to the velocity when the pipe is flowing full. The
flow area is equal to the entire cross-sectional area of the pipe.
Simple Average Velocity

The simple average velocity is computed by:
Vu  Vd
Va 
2
The Simple Average Velocity method does not account for any depth changes between
the two ends of the pipe as the weighted average velocity method does.

Theory
Weighted Average Velocity

To compute the weighted average velocity, the simple average velocity of each profile
segment is considered and given a weight based on its length:
n V  V   Li 
Va    ui di
   

i 1  2   Lt 
• Va =Average velocity for the pipe (m/s, ft/s)

• Vui =Upstream velocity for segment i (m/s, ft/s)
• Vdi =Downstream velocity for segment i (m/s, ft/s)
• Li =Length of the profile segment i (m, ft)
• Lt =Total length of the pipe (m, ft)
Pipe Average Velocity and Travel Time

The travel time though each pipe is computed as:
t=L/V
Where:
• t = Time of travel through the pipe (s)

• V = Average velocity though the pipe (m/s, ft/s)
• L = Length of the pipe (m, ft)
Capacity Analysis (Approximate Profiles)
Traditionally, gravity pipe analyses and designs have not included the calculation-
intense process of estimating a gradually varied flow profile. With this program, you
have the option of determining discharge using gradually varied flow, or using the
more traditional Capacity Analysis option. Capacity analysis still uses a backwater
approach, with the profile type for a pipe being primarily dependent on the pipe's full
flow capacity and downstream hydraulic grade.
The capacity analysis is advantageous over the gradually varied flow analysis in terms
of processing time. If you are dealing with a relatively large network and you wish to
arrive quickly at reasonable approximation then the capacity analysis is the way to go.
The gradually varied flow algorithms are more rigorous and generate solutions that
more closely reflect reality.

There are two basic approximate profile cases: the Full Capacity Profile and the
Excess Capacity Profile.
Full Capacity Profiles

Full capacity profiles occur when the pipe's actual discharge is greater than or equal to
the pipe's full flow capacity. In these cases, the downstream depth is taken as the
greater of the actual downstream hydraulic grade or the free discharge tailwater eleva-
tion. The free discharge tailwater depth is commonly approximated as halfway
between the crown of the pipe and the pipe's critical depth (in accordance with the
U.S. Federal Highway Administration's HDS-5).
Starting from the tailwater elevation, the pipe's full flow friction slope is used to deter-
mine the hydraulic grade at the upstream end of the profile.
Excess Capacity Profiles

Excess capacity profiles occur when the full flow capacity of the pipe is greater than
the actual flow in the pipe. For these profiles, there are three basic tailwater condi-
tions:
• Case 1 - Hydraulic grade downstream less than or equal to normal depth.

• Case 2 - Hydraulic grade downstream greater than normal depth, and less than or
equal to pipe crown.
• Case 3 - Hydraulic grade downstream greater than or equal to pipe crown.
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 1 (Hydraulic Grade <= Normal Depth):
If the downstream depth in the pipe is at or below the pipe's normal depth, normal
depth is assumed for the pipe's entire length.

Theory
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 2 (Normal Depth < Hydraulic Grade <=
Pipe Crown)
When the hydraulic grade is above the pipe's normal depth but below the top of the
pipe, a friction slope of zero is assumed until it either intersects the pipe's normal
depth or reaches the end of the pipe.
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 3 (Hydraulic Grade >= Pipe Crown)
If the hydraulic grade is above the pipe crown, the hydraulic grade continues upstream
following the pipe's full flow friction slope. This slope will continue until it either
intersects the pipe crown or reaches the end of the pipe.

Junction Headlosses and Minor Losses
Note: If the full friction slope intersects the crown of the pipe, the
profile will continue with a Case 2 profile analysis.
Composite Excess Capacity Profiles

An excess capacity profile may actually be a composite of two more simple profiles.
Consider the case below, where the tailwater is above the crown of the pipe. In this
case, the profile begins as a Case 3 profile. Where the full flow friction slope inter-
sects the crown of the pipe, the profile changes to a Case 2 profile, following a flat
slope until it reaches normal depth. Where normal depth is intersected, a Case 1
profile begins, extending all the way to the upstream end of the pipe.

Junction headlosses and minor losses are discussed in the following topics:
“Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview)” on page 13-703
“Junction Headlosses” on page 13-703
“Junction Headlosses” on page 13-703
“Minor Losses” on page 13-714

Theory
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview)
The ‘HEC-22’ headloss method used in SewerCAD V8i is based on the FHWA’s
Urban Drainage Design Manual, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22 (HEC-22)
energy-loss methodology. This method computes an adjusted headloss coefficient by
multiplying the initial headloss coefficient by correction factors for diameter, flow
depth, relative flow, plunging flow and benching (“Headloss-HEC-22 Energy
Method” on page 13-705). This adjusted headloss coefficient is then multiplied by the
velocity head in the outfall pipe to determine the total junction headloss. This is the
method outlined in the current edition of the HEC-22 document (HEC-22, Second
Edition, August 2001).
The ‘AASHTO’ headloss method used in SewerCAD V8i was originally implemented
based on the 1991 version of the AASHTO Model Drainage Manual. This method
determines the total junction headloss by adding the contraction, bend and expansion
losses at a junction, then applying correction factors for non-piped flow and shaping if
applicable (“Headloss - AASHTO Method” on page 13-710). More recently, the
AASHTO Model Drainage Manual has dropped this method in favor of the method
described in HEC-22, Second Edition (August 2001). However for compatibility with
earlier versions of SewerCAD V8i, and also with the various state and regional
drainage authorities who continue to use the original AASHTO headloss method, the
‘AASHTO’ headloss method in SewerCAD V8i is still based on the 1991 version of
the AASHTO Model Drainage Manual.
Junction Headlosses
Junction headlosses includes the following:
“Structure Headloss” on page 13-703
“Special Assumptions” on page 13-706
Structure Headloss
When water flows through a junction structure, there are headlosses associated with
mixing, change of direction, and so forth. This section deals with the computation of
these losses based on the following popular methods:
• Absolute
• Standard
• HEC-22 Energy
• Generic
• Flow-Headloss Curve

Structure headlosses are used to determine the hydraulic grade to use as the tailwater
condition for upstream pipes during the backwater analysis. With the exception of the
HEC-22 Energy method, the headloss through the structure is assumed to be the same
for each incoming pipe.
Headloss - Absolute Method
The absolute method is the simplest of the headloss methods. The structure headloss
becomes an editable value, which is then used during calculations. No computations
relating to velocity, confluence angle, or other factors are needed.
Headloss - Standard Method
The standard method calculates structure headloss based on the exit pipe's velocity.
The exit velocity head is multiplied by a user-entered coefficient to determine the loss:
Vo2
hs  K 
2g
Where:
• hS = Structure headloss (ft, m)

• VO = Exit pipe velocity (ft/s, m/s)
• g = Gravitational acceleration constant (ft/s2, m/s2)
• K = Headloss coefficient (unitless)
For suggested coefficient values for various structure configurations, see the Typical
Headloss Coefficient table at the end of this chapter.
Headloss - Generic Method
The generic method computes the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity head
of the exit pipe by the user-entered downstream coefficient and then subtracting the
velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the user-entered upstream
coefficient.
Vo2 V12
hs  K0   K1 
2g 2g
Where:
• hS = Structure headloss (ft, m)

Theory
• VO = Exit pipe velocity (ft/s, m/s)

• KO = Downstream coefficient (unitless)
• V1 = Governing upstream pipe velocity (ft/s, m/s)
• K1 = Upstream coefficient (unitless)
• g = Gravitational acceleration constant (ft/s2, m/s2)
If there are multiple upstream pipes entering the junction then the program must
choose one of the pipes to use in the calculation. The pipe that is chosen is considered
the governing upstream pipe. The governing upstream pipe is selected based on one of
the following methodologies:
• The upstream pipe with the maximum flow times velocity

• The upstream pipe with the maximum velocity head
• The upstream pipe with the minimum bend angle
The default method for selecting the governing upstream pipe is to choose the pipe
with the maximum flow times velocity. However, the user can select one of the other
options through the generic structure loss options.
Headloss-HEC-22 Energy Method
Similar to the standard method, the HEC-22 Energy method (from the FHWA's Urban
Drainage Design Manual, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22) correlates structure
headloss to the velocity head in the outfall pipe using a coefficient. Experimental
studies have determined that this coefficient can be approximated by:
K  K o CD C dC Q Cp CB
Where:
• K = Adjusted headloss coefficient

• KO= Initial headloss coefficient based on relative junction size
• CD = Correction factor for the pipe diameter
• Cd = Correction factor for flow depth
• CQ= Correction for relative flow
• CP = Correction for plunging flow
• CB = Correction factor for benching

Headloss - Flow-Headloss Curve Method
In this method, the user defines a curve where a given flow rate causes a resultant
headloss.
Special Assumptions
The HEC-22 Energy method documentation is written with a limited range of applica-
bility. Many of the equations are written on the basis of pipe diameter, structure diam-
eter, and so on. Since StormCAD and SewerCAD V8i offer non-circular pipes and
non-circular structures, this creates the need for some interpretation of the term "diam-
eter."
In some cases, the intent of the methodology is to compare the size of one pipe to
another pipe, or to the size of a structure. In these cases an equivalent diameter is
used, which is computed from the full area of the pipe or structure. Equivalent diam-
eter is the diameter of a circle with the area equal to the area of the examined pipe or
structure.
In other cases, the intent of the methodology is to compare depths within the structure.
For these cases, the rise (height) of the pipes is used in place of "diameter."
Pressure Flow, Free Surface Flow, and Transitional Flow
Throughout the documentation for HEC-22 Energy losses, you will see references to
"pressure flow", "free surface flow", and "transitional flow".
Pressure flow (submerged flow) is assumed to be any condition for which the depth of
water above the outfall pipe invert is greater than 3.2 times the height of the outfall
pipe.
Free surface flow (unsubmerged flow) is assumed to be any condition for which the
depth of water above the outfall pipe invert is less than the height of the pipe.
Transitional flow is any condition between pressure flow and free surface flow.
Initial Headloss Coefficient
The initial headloss coefficient, which is based on relative junction size, is calculated
as:
0.15
 b   b 
K o  0.1 1  sin   1.4  sin 
 D 
 De   e 
Where:

Theory
• ? Deflection angle between inflow and outflow pipes

• b = Equivalent diameter of the structure (m, ft)
• De = Equivalent diameter of the outfall pipe (m, ft)
Note: The angle used in this equation is a deflection angle, so a

straight run has a deflection angle of 180°. The bend angle in
this case is 0°.
Correction for Pipe Diameter
The correction factor due to differences in pipe size is calculated only for pressure
flow situations. For non-pressure situations, a value of 1.0 is used.
3
D 
C D   o 
 Di 
Where:
• DO = outfall pipe rise (m, ft)

• Di = Inflow pipe rise (m, ft)
Correction for Flow Depth
The correction factor for flow depth is used only in cases of free surface flow or tran-
sitional flow. For pressure flow, a value of 1.0 is used.
0.6
d 
C d  .5 aho 
 De 
Where
• daho = Water depth in the structure (m, ft)

• De = outfall pipe rise (m, ft)

Correction for Relative Flow
The correction factor for relative flow is calculated only when the invert elevation for
the pipe in question is approximately equal to the invert elevation of the outfall pipe
and at least one other pipe. Otherwise, a value of 1.0 is used.
0.75
 Q 
C Q  1  2 sin 1  i 
 1
 Qo 
Where:
• ? = Deflection angle between inflow and outflow pipes

• iQ = Flow in the inflow pipe (m³/s, cfs)
• oQ =Flow in the outflow pipe (m³/s, cfs)
Note: The term "approximately equal" is quite a vague definition for

when to use relative flow corrections. StormCAD and
SewerCAD V8i enable you to change the tolerance for
"approximately equal" elevations so that you can use your
judgment to fine-tune the HEC-22 methodology.
Correction for Plunging Flow
The correction factor for plunging flow accounts for the effect that flow plunging into
a junction from another inflow pipe has on the inflow pipe for which the headloss is
calculated. It is calculated only when vertical distance from the invert of the plunge
pipe to the center of the outflow pipe is greater than the depth in the structure relative
to the outfall pipe invert. Otherwise a value of 1.0 is used.
 h  h  d aho 
C p  1  0.2 
 D


 Do  o 
Where:
• h = Vertical distance from invert of the plunge pipe to the center of the outflow
pipe (m, ft)
• De = Outflow pipe rise (m, ft)
• daho = Water depth in the junction relative to the outflow pipe invert (m, ft)

Theory
Correction for Benching
The correction factor for structure benching is similar to the shaping correction factor
used in the AASHTO structure loss method. The correction accounts for smoother
transitions from the inflow pipe to the outflow pipe based on the presence (or lack) of
shaping in the bottom of the structure.
The following figure represents the four types of benching:
By default, the program uses the values documented in HEC-22 (and presented in the
following table) for pressure and free surface flow, but the user can change these
values. For transitional flow, the program interpolates from the table linearly, based
on the actual ratio of depth in the access hole to the height of the outflow pipe.

Table 13-1: Correction for Benching
Bench Type Correction factor, CB
Pressure* Free Surface**
Flat Floor 1.00 1.00
Depressed Floor 1.00 1.00
Half Bench 0.95 0.15
Full Bench 0.75 0.07
d aho
* pressure flow --------------------
D e  3.2
d aho
** free surface flow --------------------
D e  1.0
d aho is the water depth in the structure above an outfall pipe invert and D e is the
outfall pipe diameter.
Headloss - AASHTO Method
The AASHTO method (as defined in the AASHTO Model Drainage Manual) for
structure headloss is based on power-loss methodologies. This method can be summa-
rized by the following equation:
h s  h c  h b  h e   C n  C s
Where:
• hS = Structure headloss (m, ft)

• hC = Contraction loss (m, ft)
• hb = Bend loss (m, ft)
• he = Expansion loss (m, ft)
• Cn = Correction factor for non-piped flow (unitless)
• CS =Correction factor for shaping (unitless)

Theory
AASHTO Contraction Loss
The contraction loss is due to flow transitioning from large-area, low-velocity flow to
small-area, high- velocity flow, such as flow exiting a structure and entering a down-
stream pipe. This loss is calculated based on the exit pipe's velocity and a contraction
coefficient, as follows:
Vo2
hc  Kc
2g
Where:
• hc =Contraction loss (m, ft)

• Kc = Contraction coefficient (unitless)
• VO = Exit pipe velocity (m/s, ft/s)
• g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s², ft/s²)
The contraction coefficient defaults to the AASHTO documented value of 0.25, but
can be changed by the user in the Calculation Options.
AASHTO Bend Loss
2 2
Vo  1 – K i Q i V i
h b = --------- –  ------------------------- --------
2g Qo 2g
Where:

• VO =Outflow pipe velocity (m/s, ft/s)
• QO = Outflow pipe velocity (m3/s, cfs)
• Vi = Inflow pipe velocity (m/s, ft/s)
• Qi = Inflow pipe flow (m³/s, cfs)
• Ki = Bend factor

Note: The previous equation is a generalized version of the equation

as it appears in the AASHTO manual.
The program automatically computes a bend factor based on the angles at which the
pipes come together. The program's default bend factors are based on Figure 13-12 of
the AASHTO manual, but these values, as with other AASHTO coefficients and
corrections, can be changed by the user.
See “Headloss Coefficients for Junctions” on page 13-766.
AASHTO Bend Loss Original Equation
The structure bend loss is computed for each incoming pipe using the following equa-
tion from the AASHTO manual. Losses are computed for each incoming pipe, and the
greatest value is used.
2
V
h b  Ki  0
2g
Where:

• Ki = Bend loss coefficient (unitless)
• Vo = Incoming pipe's velocity (m/s, ft/s)
The AASHTO manual also documents another bend loss method shown in the
following equation. The authors of the AASHTO manual agree that either equation is
acceptable. Because of the following equation's tendency to compute negative bend
losses in certain cases, we decided to use the above equation exclusively within this
program.
Q 4 V42  Q 1 V12  Q 2 V22  KQ q V12

Hi  2
2gQ 4

Theory
AASHTO Expansion Loss
Expansion losses are encountered when small-area, high-velocity flow meets a large-
area, low-velocity flow, such as a pipe discharging into a structure. To compute this
loss, the following equation is used:
Vs2
he  K e 
2g
Where:
• he = Expansion loss (m, ft)

• Ke = Expansion coefficient (unitless)
• Vs = Most significant incoming pipe's velocity (m/s, ft/s)
The most significant pipe is the pipe that has the greatest product of velocity and
discharge, omitting any pipes that have a discharge less than 10% of the structure's
outflow. The expansion coefficient defaults to the AASHTO documented value of
0.35, but can be changed by the user.

AASHTO Correction For Non-Piped Flow
If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total structure outflow, a correction
factor is applied to the total loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss
(a factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but can be changed by the
user in the Calculation Options.
AASHTO Correction for Shaping
If the bottom of the structure is shaped to facilitate smoother transitions from inflow
pipes to the discharge pipe, a correction factor can be applied to the total loss. By
default, this value is a 50% reduction (a factor of 0.5) as documented in the AASHTO
manual, but can be changed by the user in the Calculation Options.
Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence
that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The
magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which
directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
Figure 13-2: Flow Lines at Entrance
The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter,
or other localized component is:
V2
hm  K
2g

Theory
Where: hm = Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft.)
K = Loss coefficient for the specific fitting

g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec. 2)
Typical values for fitting loss coefficients are included in “Fitting Loss Coefficients”
on page 13-715.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller
headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of entrance configuration
on typical pipe entrance flow lines.
Fitting Loss Coefficients

For similar fittings, the K-value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and
contraction ratios.
Table 13-2: Typical Fitting K Coefficients
Fitting K Value Fitting K Value
Pipe Entrance 90° Smooth Bend
Bellmouth 0.03-0.05 Bend Radius / D = 4 0.16-0.18
Rounded 0.12-0.25 Bend Radius / D = 2 0.19-0.25
Sharp-Edged 0.50 Bend Radius / D = 1 0.35-0.40
Projecting 0.80 Mitered Bend
Contraction—Sudden  = 15° 0.05
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.18  = 30° 0.10
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.37  = 45° 0.20
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.49  = 60° 0.35
Contraction—Conical  = 90° 0.80
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.05 Tee
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.07 Line Flow 0.30-0.40
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.08 Branch Flow 0.75-1.80
Expansion—Sudden Cross

Pump Theory
Table 13-2: Typical Fitting K Coefficients (Cont’d)
Fitting K Value Fitting K Value
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.16 Line Flow 0.50
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.57 Branch Flow 0.75
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.92 45° Wye
Expansion—Conical Line Flow 0.30
D2/D1 = 0.80 0.03 Branch Flow 0.50
D2/D1 = 0.50 0.08
D2/D1 = 0.20 0.13
Pump Theory
Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head
gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differences within the
system.
A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the
head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the
pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, addi-
tional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be
operating.
The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the
system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor
losses. When these curves are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found.
This is shown in the figure below.

Theory
Figure 13-3: System Operating Point
As water surface elevations and loads throughout the system change, the static head
(Hs) and headlosses (HL) vary. This changes the location of the system curve, while
the pump characteristic curve remains constant. These shifts in the system curve result
in a shifting operating point over time.
Variable Speed Pumps
Variable speed pumps are not a separate type of element but are simply pump
elements for which the property "Is variable speed pump?" is set to True. The pressure
solver uses the pump affinity laws to adjust the pump performance. When multiple
variable speed pumps are run in parallel at the same speed, it may be better to use the
Variable Speed Pump Battery element (“Variable Speed Pump Batteries” on page 6-
230).
A pump’s characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter,
but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the affinity laws.
For variable speed pumps, these affinity laws are presented as:
Q1 n
 1
Q2 n2
and
2
h 1  n1 
 
h 2  n 2 

Pump Theory
Where: Q = Pump flow rate (m3/s, cfs)

h = Pump head (m, ft.)
n = Pump speed (rpm)
Figure 13-4: Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve
The model assumes that the pump curve specified in the pump definition corresponds
to a relative speed of 1.0. Any adjustments are made relative to that pump curve and
are reported in terms of relative speed, not absolute speed (i.e. 0.95 rather than 1150
rpm).
The user can set the Relative speed maximum to the maximum value that the pump
will reach. If a higher speed is called for in the model, the speed is limited to this
value. The default value is 1.0.
There are several types of variable speed pump behavior supported by the model:
1. Pattern Based (default) treats the relative speed as a function of time as specified
by the user in Components > Patterns > Pump. Once the VSP Type is set to
Pattern, these patterns are assigned to a given pump in the Pattern (Relative
Speed) property. Note that once a pattern has been assigned to control pump speed
settings they will override any control based settings including attempting to turn
the pump off or on.
2. Fixed head treats the pump as trying to maintain a fixed head at some target node.
The user specifies the target node and the maximum relative speed the pump can
attain.
There is a slightly different algorithm for suction side or discharge side target
nodes which the user identifies by setting Control Node on Suction Side? to True
or False.

Theory
When the user selects a junction as a control node they must also specify the target
head that the pump is trying to maintain by increasing or decreasing speed,
however, when the user selects a storage node as a control node the target head is
the initial level of the storage node.
In general, wastewater pumps are controlled on the suction side while water distri-
bution pumps are controlled on the discharge side.
Control statements can be used to turn variable speed pumps on and off but pump
speeds specified in control statements cannot override speeds determined by the
model. While the pumps are on or off, the hydraulic grade at the target node may
deviate from the target grade. If that node is a tank/wet well, the variable speed
pump algorithm keeps track of the volume that must be pumped to bring the level
back to the target. For nodes with no storage, the grade instantly reaches the target
when the pump comes back on.
The variable speed pump continues to operate in the model even when the target
tank reaches min or max level. Warning messages are issued to identify this condi-
tion.
3. Fixed Flow treats the pump output as a constant and adjusts the speed to produce
that flow as long as the speed does not exceed the maximum. Note that fixed flow
pumps do not support being controlled with simple or logical controls and they do
not turn on automatically at any time after being closed by the hydraulic engine
(e.g., if a water source becomes unavailable).
4. The speed of a variable speed pump can also be adjusted using a series of control
statements. This requires more work on data entry but can be used to handle
complex controls. If you want the variable speed pump to be controlled by a set of
control statements, the pump should be a Pattern type variable speed pump with a
pattern of <None>. That is: Is variable speed? = True, VSP Type = Pattern Based,
Pattern = <None>. Then the controls specified in the Operational alternative will
be used.
Because of its discrete nature, this type of control can display oscillations in
speed. For example with the controls below:
IF (Level <5 and Level =>3) Speed = 0.8
IF (Level <7 and Level =>5) Speed = 0.7
when the level is very close to 5, the speed can oscillate between 0.7 and 0.8
rather than ramp smoothly between the two settings.

Pump Theory
Constant Horsepower Pumps
During preliminary studies, the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump
may not be known. In these cases, the asinverttion is often made that the pump is
adding energy to the water at a constant rate. Based on power-head-flow rate relation-
ships for pumps, the operating point of the pump can then be determined. Although
this asinverttion is useful for some applications, a constant horsepower pump should
only be used for preliminary studies.
This software currently models six different types of pumps:
Tip: Whenever possible, avoid using constant power or design point

pumps. They are often enticing because they require less work
on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a
pump curve based on several representative points.
• Constant Power—These pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and esti-
mating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accu-
rate results are desired.
• Design Point (One-Point)—A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd
@ Qd). From this point, the curve’s interception with the head and discharge axes
is computed as Ho = 1.33•Hd and Qo = 2.00•Qd. This type of pump is useful for
preliminary designs, but should not be used for final analysis.
• Standard (Three-Point)—This pump curve is defined by three points—the
shutoff head (pump head at zero discharge), the design point (as with the single-
point pump), and the maximum operating point (the highest discharge at which
the pump performs predictably).
• Standard Extended—The same as the standard three-point pump, but with an
extended point at the zero pump head point. This is automatically calculated by
the program.
• Custom Extended—The custom extended pump is similar to the standard
extended pump, but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head.
• Multiple Point—This option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a
pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various
heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the
pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are
used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:
Y  A  (B  Q C )

Theory
Where: Y = Head (m, ft.)

Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs)
A,B,C = Pump curve coefficients
The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given
multiple-point rating curve.
Conservation of Mass and Energy
Conservation of Mass
At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid, the total volumetric or mass
flows in must equal the flows out, less the change in storage. Separating these into
flows from connecting pipes, loads, and storage, you obtain:
 QIN t   Q OUT t  VS

Where: QIN = Total flow into the node (m3/s, cfs)
QOUT = Total load at the node (m3/s, cfs)
VS = Change in storage volume (m3, ft.3)
t = Change in time (s)

Pump Theory
Conservation of Energy
The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system
must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss
between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is
taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed
flow direction (i.e., gain head when proceeding opposite the flow direction and lose
head when proceeding in the flow direction).
The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points. As shown in
the figure above, the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to
achieve the same hydraulic grade as at the beginning.
The Gradient Algorithm
The gradient algorithm for the solution of pressure pipe networks is formulated upon
the full set of system equations that model both heads and flows. It is applied one pres-
sure subnetwork at a time. Since both continuity and energy are balanced and solved
with each iteration, the method is theoretically guaranteed to deliver the same level of
accuracy observed and expected in other well-known algorithms such as the Simulta-
neous Path Adjustment Method (Fowler) and the Linear Theory Method (Wood).
In addition, there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other
algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems:
• The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This
gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as
Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equiva-
lent looped networks or pseudo-loops.
• Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition,
which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.

Theory
• The method is numerically stable when the system becomes disconnected by

check valves, pressure regulating valves, or modeler’s error. The loop and path
methods fail in these situations.
• The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely
fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.
The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a
working system of equations (for more information, see “Derivation of the Gradient
Algorithm” on page 13-723).
Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm
Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes, P links of unknown flow, and B
boundary or fixed head nodes, the network topology can be expressed in two inci-
dence matrices:
A12 = A21T (P x N) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
and
A10 = A01T (P x B) Fixed head nodes incidence matrix
The following convention is used to assign matrix values:
A12(i,j) = 1, 0, or -1 (PxN) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
Assigned nodal loads are given by:
qT = [q1, q2,…, qN] (1 x N) Nodal load vector
Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by:
HfT = [Hf1, Hf2,…, HfB ] (1 x B) Fixed nodal head vector
The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix:

Pump Theory
(1 x P) Non-linear laws expressing headlosses in

FT(Q) = [f1, f2…, fp ]
links
fi  fi (Qi )
These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to
compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for
unknown flow and unknown nodal head.
Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:
QT = [Q1,Q2…, Qp ] (1 x P) Unknown link flow rate vector
Unknown nodal heads are defined by:
HT = [H1, H2 …, HN ] (1 x N) Unknown nodal head vector
These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix
expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation:
A 12H  F(Q)   A 10H f
A 12 Q  q
A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is
introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:
R Q n1 1 
 1 1 
 n 1 
R2 Q2 2
 
A 11   ... 
 ... 
 nP 1

 R P QP 
This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form:
 A 11 A 12  Q  A 10H f 
  
 A 21 0  H   q



Theory
To solve the system of non-linear equations, the Newton-Raphson iterative scheme

can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H
to get:
NA 11 A 12  dQ  dE

  
 A 21 0   dH  dq 
with
n1 
 
n2
N 
 ... 
 
 nP 
The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after
matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented
here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by:
1
 1

H k 1  (A 21 N 1 A 11 A 12 ) 1 A 21 N 1 (Q k  A 11 A 10 H f )  (q  A 21Q k )
1
Q k 1  (1  N 1 )Q k  N 1 A 11 (A12 H k 1  A 10 H f )
The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally
intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver
(see “The Linear System Equation Solver” on page 13-725) that is specifically
tailored to the structure of this matrix system of equations.
Sources:
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, “A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,”
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1—Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. By Bryan Callback and Chin-Hour Or, Research Studies Press LTD, Watchword,
Hertfordshire, England.
The Linear System Equation Solver
The Conjugate Gradient method (see “The Gradient Algorithm” on page 13-722) is
one method that, in theory, converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps.
The Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of
equations as:
Ax  b
where:

Pump Theory
x  Hk  1
 1

b   A 21 N 1 (Q k  A 11 A 10 H f )  (q  A 21Q k )
The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is:
A  A 21(NA 11 ) 1 A 12  A 21DA 12
and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total
working matrix A that is:
• Symmetric
• Positive definite
• Stieltjes type
Because of the symmetry, the number of non-zero elements to be retained in the

matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links. This results in a low
density, highly sparse matrix form. It follows that an iterative solution scheme would
be preferred over direct matrix inversion, in order to avoid matrix fill-in, which serves
to increase the computational effort.
Because the system is symmetric and positive definite, a Cholesky factorization can
be performed to give:
A  LLT
where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky
factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:
y  L1b
x  (LT ) 1 y
The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement
traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is
preferred, since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this
software solves the system of equations using a variant of Cholesky’s method which
has been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing
storage and reducing overall computational effort.

Theory
Extended Period Simulations
Extended Period Simulations Overview
The Extended Period Simulation (EPS) models how a sewer network will behave over
time. This type of analysis allows the user to model wet wells filling and draining,
how pumps toggle on and off, and how pressures, hydraulic grades, and flow rates
change throughout the system in response to varying loading conditions and in
response to automatic control strategies formulated by the modeler. In SewerCAD
V8i the algorithm proceeds in a general downstream direction proceeding towards the
outfall and occurs in the following steps:
The analysis begins in the gravity portion of the network. All hydrographs are gener-
ated entering into the gravity system and successively routed and summed as the flows
approach the bounding wet well. Ultimately, the total inflow hydrograph to the wet
well is determined.
Knowing the inflow to the wet well, the pressure calculations for the force main
system bounded by the wet well are performed. In addition to flow velocities and
pressures, the levels in the wet well are determined over time.
SewerCAD V8i then returns to the gravity portion of the network discussed in step 1.
The hydraulics and HGL profiles are calculated throughout the gravity system for
each time step using the known level of the wet well as the boundary condition for the
backwater analysis.
The process then repeats, continuing to the systems downstream of the pressure
network until an outfall is reached.
Routing Overview
As a hydrograph flows through a conduit it undergoes changes in shape and temporal

distribution caused by translation and storage effects.
SewerCAD V8i uses two methods to determine the shape and distribution of a
hydrograph routed through a gravity pipe.
• Convex Routing
• Weighted Translation Routing

Extended Period Simulations
Note: Fixed and Known flows are not routed. Fixed Unit loads and
Time-variant loads are routed.
Convex Routing
The underlying asinverttion of the convex routing method is that the routed outflow
for a time step is based on the inflow and outflow for the previous time step. Each
outflow ordinate is calculated as:
Ot  t  cI t  1  c Ot
Where:
• Ot +  = Outflow at time t +  t
•  = Current time (s, min)

•  t = Hydrologic time step (s, min)
• c = Convex routing coefficient
• It = Inflow at time t (l/s, gpm)
• Ot = Outflow at time t (l/s, gpm)
The convex routing coefficient is essentially a ratio of the hydrologic time step and
representative flow travel time through the pipe and is calculated as follows:
V t
c  t 
L tt
Where:
•  t = Hydrologic time step (s)

• tt = Travel time (s)
• V = Velocity established for representative flow. (m/s, ft/s)
• L = Length of pipe (m, ft)
The velocity used to calculate the coefficient is either the normal velocity or full flow
velocity generated for a user-specified percentage of the peak of the inflow
hydrograph. In other words, if the percentage of the peak flow is greater than the
capacity of the pipe then the full-flow velocity is used. If the percentage of the peak
flow is less than the capacity the flow velocity for normal depth is used.

Theory
Note: You can specify the percentage of the peak flow, which is used
to calculate the Convex Routing coefficient for each pipe, by
clicking the Go button and then clicking the Options button.
Then click the Convex tab of the Calculation Options dialog. The
values typically range between 50% and 75%.
The higher the percentage of flow the faster the velocity used to calculate the convex
routing coefficient, hence the closer the routed hydrograph will be to a pure translation
of the inflow hydrograph.
The user-specified percentage can be modified in the calculation options. A typical

value is around 75 % but can be modified for oddly shaped hydrographs with sharp
uncharacteristic peaks or for calibration purposes.
Note: Known Flows are not routed. Known Flows override other
known flows, and are not cumulative going downstream.
Weighted Translation Routing
The Convex Routing method is only valid when the Convex Routing coefficient, c is
less than 1 or when the hydrologic time step is less than the calculated travel time. In
certain cases where the travel time exceeds the hydrologic time step, SewerCAD V8i
automatically uses an alternate method of routing.
Each ordinate of the outflow hydrograph is derived from a weighted average of the
ordinates for the current and previous time steps of the inflow hydrograph. The
weights are calculated based on the Convex Routing coefficient.
Each ordinate of the outflow hydrograph is calculated as follows:
1  1
Ot  I t  t  1   I t
c  c
Where:
• Ot = Outflow at current time step (l/s, gpm)

• c = Convex Routing coefficient
• It -  = Inflow at previous time step (l/s, gpm)
• It = Inflow at current time step (l/s, gpm)

Transitioning Between Gravity and Pressure Networks
Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps
SewerCAD V8i uses two distinct time steps when running an Extended Period Simu-
lation.
• Hydrologic Time Step - This time step is used to calculate the routed hydrographs
and represents the time increment of all hydrographs generated during the anal-
ysis. The hydrologic time step is also used as the calculation increment for the
pressure calculations.
• Hydraulic Time Step - This time step represents how often the hydraulic calcula-
tions are performed. Flows are interpolated off the previously generated hydro-
graphs using the hydraulic time step and are used to perform the gradually varied
flow analyses for that time step.
The hydrologic time step should be less than or equal to the hydraulic time step. The
hydraulic time step should be a multiple of the hydrologic time step.
Note: The Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps can be modified in the
Calculation Options.
Transitioning Between Gravity and Pressure

Networks
This section describes the major distinctions between gravity pipes and force mains in
SewerCAD V8i. It also describes how flow and the hydraulic grade transition
between force mains and gravity pipes and vice versa.
Identifying Gravity Pipes and Force Mains
By default, SewerCAD V8i depicts a pressure pipe as a single black line, and a gravity
pipe as a thicker red line, although this symbology may be changed by the user.
Gravity pipes are referred to as "conduits" and force mains are referred to as "pressure
pipes" in SewerCAD V8i. Pressure pipes also refer to pipes in a pressure sewer
(grinder pump) system.
Gravity pipes hydraulics are solved using gradually varied flow equations and can
become surcharged. Pressure pipes are pipes solved with the Bentley pressure engine
(similar to WaterCAD/GEMS) and are generally assumed to be flowing full, with the
exception of a pipe immediately downstream of an open air valve. Pipes which regu-
larly transition between full and partly full flow are generally better treated as
conduits.

Theory
The difference can also be recognized by the pipe's context in the network. The pipes
in a gravity system must all converge on a single termination point in a classic tree
structure. Multiple pipes can enter into a single gravity node, but only one may exit.
The gravity subnetwork can either terminate on a wet well, or an outfall.
The force mains can be much more complex with loops and multiple outfall points.
The pressure subnetwork can terminate on an outfall or a manhole.
See “Subnetworks” on page 13-736 for more information.
Direction of Flow in Gravity and Pressure Systems
In gravity pipes flow will always travel towards the termination point of the gravity
network.
The terminology Start and Stop nodes for a link refer to the direction which the
element was entered into SewerCAD V8i. These may be reversed by the user. The
terminology Upstream/Downstream is determined by the program based on the direc-
tion of flow to the outfall
Pressure systems are usually designed such that flow will travel from the wet well to
an outfall point at either an outfall or a gravity system. If the elevation is too high at
that point, SewerCAD V8i will allow flow to travel backwards from the gravity
system to the pressure network. There are no programmatic limitations as to the direc-
tion of flow in the force main system.
Transitioning From Gravity Pipes to Force Mains
The only way to transition between a gravity pipe and a force main in SewerCAD V8i
is through an intermediate wet well. This establishes a boundary condition for both
the connecting systems. During a Steady State analysis the wet well level can be
calculated based on generating the required HGL for the outflow to either match or
exceed the inflow, or the wet well level can be fixed to a user-specified level. During
an Extended Period Simulation the wet well level is determined for a time step by
calculating the change in storage over time.
The inflow into the wet well is determined by summing all loads flowing to that wet
well.
Hydraulic (HGL) Transition from Gravity to Pressure Network

Gravity hydraulic calculations upstream of a wet well are based on the wet well
hydraulic grade, just as they are for standard calculations within gravity systems.

During a Steady State analysis there is a difference, however, in determining the

hydraulic grade within the wet well itself. The wet well level may be set by the user to
either be fixed or not fixed.
Fixed Wet Well Level during Steady State Analysis
If the wet well level is fixed, the wet well's starting hydraulic grade is used for pres-
sure calculations. No adjustments are made, and this grade is used as the tailwater
grade for the upstream gravity systems.
Non-Fixed Wet Well Level during Steady State Analysis
If the wet well level is not fixed, the pressure calculations will attempt to balance the
wet well level such that the total flow out of the wet well is equal to or greater than the
total flow into the wet well.
The wet well's starting grade is used for the first iteration. If the calculated flows out
of each wet well are greater than or equal to each wet well's incoming flow, the itera-
tions stop there. If not, the wet well levels are increased by the increment specified in
the calculation options, and the pressure subnetwork is recalculated. When the wet
well level is increased, it changes the static heads and increases the discharge for
connected pumps, and may also trigger additional pumps to turn on.
This process continues until the level in each non-fixed wet well either meets the flow
criteria, or is prevented by rising to the maximum elevation of the wet well.
Wet Well Level During Extended Period Simulations
During an Extended Period Simulation the fixed wet well level options are not avail-
able. The wet well level for a time step is actually determined by the change in
storage due to inflows and outflows over a single time step.
Hydrologic (Flow) Transition from Gravity to Pressure Network

The hydrologic transition from a gravity system into a pressure system is quite simple.
Gravity loads upstream from the wet well are accumulated and combined with the wet
well's local load to determine the total load entering the pressure system at that loca-
tion. This can be imagined as the total load "dumping into" the wet well.
Transitioning From Force Mains to Gravity Elements
Force mains can empty directly into the gravity system via a manhole, or a transition,
or they can terminate at an outfall. During a Steady State analysis the flow entering
the gravity system can either be only the specified sanitary and wet weather loads, or
the load generated based on the pumps, the wet well level and the hydraulic character-
istics of the force main system.

Theory
During an Extended Period Simulation flows to the gravity system are solely deter-
mined based on the hydraulic characteristics of the force main system.
If the force main empties into an outfall the HGL boundary is determined by the
elevation of the user specified-tailwater. The HGL boundary between the force main
and gravity system is determined by the elevation of the force main at the boundary
point.
Hydraulic (HGL) Transition from Pressure to Gravity Network

If the force main empties into and outfall element, then the hydraulic grade will be the
higher of the set tailwater elevation or the crown of the pressure pipe.
The hydraulic grade at a manhole or a transition downstream from a discharging force

main is not considered when performing pressure calculations. Instead, the boundary
hydraulic grade is assumed to be equal to the crown elevation of the discharge pipe.
For example, if a 150 mm pipe discharges at an invert elevation of 10.000 m, the

hydraulic grade that is used as the boundary condition for the pressure system is
10.150 m.
This asinverttion is absolutely valid and conservative when the hydraulic grade line in
the gravity element is below the crown of the pipe.
This is generally a valid asinverttion when the hydraulic grade line is above the crown
of the pipe as the head at the entrance of the gravity network is often insignificant
compared to the friction losses incurred through the force mains.
Hydrologic (Flow) Transition from Pressure to Gravity Network

The hydrologic transition from a pressure system into a gravity system during a
Steady State analysis is somewhat complicated, with different desired behaviors for
different analysis purposes. If the model is built for direct analysis of flows in the
system, it is most likely that instantaneous pumped flows are important, and the down-
stream gravity loads should include the pumped discharge from the pressure system.
If the analysis is for large-scale planning purposes, however, it is more likely that
instantaneous pumping rates are not as important. In these cases, the downstream
gravity system should be analyzed based on the total contributing population, area, or
other factors for determining peak flows.

Hydrologic Transition from Pressure to Gravity During Steady

State Analysis
Conserving Pumped Flow
When instantaneous pumped flows are a concern in the downstream gravity system,
the calculation option to conserve pumped flow should be used. This is found on the
Pressure Hydraulics Options tab of the Calculation Options dialog. When this option
is used, the contributing load components from the pressure system are ignored, and a
load of type "Pumped" is added to the gravity system with the magnitude of the flow
in the discharging pressure pipe. If the flow in the pressure pipe is such that the
gravity system would be draining into the pressure system, no load is transferred to
that gravity node.
Conserving Load Components
When instantaneous pumped flows are not a concern in the downstream gravity
system, the calculation option to conserve load components (not pumped flow) should
be used. When conserving load components, the total contributing components to the
pressure system (population, area, and so forth) are considered. The total contributing
load is distributed to the downstream gravity systems proportionally to the pressure
pipe discharge rates. If the flow in a pressure pipe is such that the gravity system
would be draining into the pressure system, no load is transferred to that gravity node.
Comparison of Pressure Load Routing
Consider the system below with the following load equivalents:
300 people = 100 l/s
200 people = 70 l/s

Theory
100 people = 50 l/s
The total load population contributing to the load entering the pressure system is 300
people, equivalent to a flow of 100 liters per second. The operating points of each
pump are such that the discharges into the downstream gravity systems are 200 liters
per second and 400 liters per second. This is more than the rate of flow entering the
wet well.
When conserving pumped flow, the flows in each discharging force main are trans-
ferred directly to the downstream gravity system, resulting in a pumped load of 200 l/
s at O-1 and a pumped load of 400 l/s at O-2.
When conserving load components, the 300 people contributing to the load at the wet
well are split proportionally to the downstream gravity systems (1/3 and 2/3). This
results in a load of 100 people (50 l/s) at O-1, and 200 people (70 l/s) at O-2.
The differences can also be seen for the following system, with the same load equiva-
lents as above.
When conserving pumped loads, the downstream gravity load is computed as:

400 l/s + 100 people = 400 l/s + 50 l/s = 450 l/s
When conserving load components, the downstream gravity load is computed as:
200 people + 100 people = 300 people = 100 l/s
Note that for this piping configuration (one source of loading for the pressure system,
one possible discharge point for the pressure system), the downstream load will
always be 100 l/s (300 people) regardless of the actual pump operating point.
Hydrologic Transition from Pressure to Gravity During Extended Period

Simulations
Since the wet well level will vary over time, based on the inflow and outflow, no
distinction is made between standard loads and pumped loads during an Extended
Period Simulation. The loads will be transferred through the force main system based
on the hydraulic characteristics of the pumps and the system headlosses.
If the elevation of the force main emptying into the gravity system is high enough that
flow goes backward from the gravity element during an Extended Period Simulation,
the negative portion of the hydrograph going through the gravity system at that point
will be truncated. Only positive flows are analyzed in the gravity system. Negative
flows are assumed to be 0. (See the Hydraulic Transition from Pressure to Gravity
Network for more information).
Subnetworks
The SewerCAD V8i solver works efficiently on complex gravity/pressure collection

systems because it breaks the system into individual gravity and pressure subnetworks
which it solves quickly with the most efficient and appropriate equations. At the start
of each run, the system is parsed into subnetworks each of which is given its own ID
which is the label for the outfall of that subnetwork (which may be a wet well in some
cases) for gravity subnetworks or a number (starting at 1) for pressure subnetworks.
The name of the subnetwork in which an element is located can be found in the prop-
erty grid under "Results (Engine parsing)".
A gravity subnetwork consists of all the gravity conduits (and associated nodes)
connected upstream from the outfall/wet well. A pressure subnetwork consists of all
the pressure pipes (and associated nodes) connected to the outfall or manhole that
transitions back to a gravity subnetwork.
Each pressure subnetwork can be highlighted in the drawing from the Calculation
Detailed Summary > Pressure Summary tab by clicking the Highlight button next to
the Pressure Subnetwork name.

Theory
Conduit Shapes
The supported conduit shapes are shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-21. Each shape is
parameterized by one, two, or more characteristic dimensions as shown in the refer-
ence figure. In this model, a conduit is taken to be a prismatic (constant-shaped)
conveyance segment that is defined by a single shape. Conduits do not have to be
closed sections, so prismatic design channels can be modeled using conduit elements.
The allowable conduit shapes include:
• “Circular Channel” on page 13-738

• “Trapezoidal Channel” on page 13-738
• “Basket Handle” on page 13-739
• “Ellipse” on page 13-740
• “Horseshoe” on page 13-740
• “Egg” on page 13-741
• “Semi-ellipse” on page 13-742
• “Pipe-Arch” on page 13-743
• “Semi-Circle” on page 13-744
• “Catenary” on page 13-745
• “Gothic” on page 13-745
• “Modified Basket Handle” on page 13-746
• “Triangle” on page 13-746
• “Rectangular Channel” on page 13-747
• “Irregular Open Channel” on page 13-747
• “Irregular Closed Section” on page 13-748
• “Rectangular-Rounded” on page 13-748
• “Rectangular-Triangular” on page 13-749
• “Power” on page 13-749
• “Parabola” on page 13-750

Conduit Shapes
Circular Channel
Figure 13-5: Circular Channel Shape
A circular pipe or channel is simply defined by its Diameter (D). Optimal conveyance
is achieved when the flow depth is about 0.938*D.
Trapezoidal Channel
Figure 13-6: Trapezoidal Channel Shape
A trapezoidal channel requires the input of the height (H) and its bottom width (W).
Additionally, the left (SL)and right (SR) side slopes should be provided.

Theory
Basket Handle
Figure 13-7: Basket-Handle Shape
The required input to define the size of a Basket-Handle Arch is simply its Height or
Rise (H). Unique to basket-Handle shape is the ratio of the bottom width (W) of the
Arch to be .99135 of the Height (H). The remaining shape characteristics are derived
based upon internal look up tables to the SWMM implementation. These auxiliary
attributes include:

Conduit Shapes
Ellipse
Figure 13-8: Ellipse Shape
An Elliptical shaped pipe is defined by its Height or Rise (H). The elliptical coeffi-
cients of A and B respectively correspond to H/2 and W/2.
Horseshoe
Figure 13-9: Horseshoe Shape

Theory
The required input to define the size of a Horseshoe Arch is simply its Height or Rise
(H). The remaining attributes are derived based upon tables internal to the SWMM
implementation. Sometimes referred to as "Boston Horseshoe Arch", the unique cross
sectional characteristics are based upon a top radius equal to half of its height. The
definition of the bottom half of the arch is more complex and based upon internal
angles ., , and .
Egg
Figure 13-10: Egg Shape
The only user input to define a Egg Shaped Arch is its Height or Rise (H). The
remaining attributes are derived based upon tables internal to the SWMM implemen-
tation. Its unique cross sectional characteristics are based upon a top radius equal to
one-third of its height. The definition of the bottom portion of the arch is more
complex and based upon internal angles and .

Conduit Shapes
Semi-ellipse
Figure 13-11: Semi-Ellipse Shape
The required input to define the size of a Semi-Elliptical Arch is simply its Height or
Rise (H). Unique to this arch shape is that characteristic that at its widest dimension,
at its base, the width is equal to its height (H). The shape is geometrically defined
with the function of an ellipsis, where the traditional elliptical coefficients of A and B
respectively correspond to H/2 and H.

Theory
Pipe-Arch
RB
RT
Rise
RC
Span
Figure 13-12: Pipe-Arch Shape

Conduit Shapes
The cross sectional shape of a Pipe-Arch link is loosely defined by its Span and Rise.
When computing using the Implicit or Explicit (SWMM) engine in CivilStorm or
SewerGEMS only these two parameters are required. The remaining attributes are
derived based upon internal look up tables to the SWMM implementation. In
StormCAD and SewerCAD, the calculations directly reference the following
secondary attributes:
Rc = Corner Radius
Rb = Bottom Radius
Rt = Top Radius
B = Bottom Distance
Full Area = cross sectional full flow area of the pipe
Semi-Circle
Figure 13-13: Semi-Circular Shape
A Semi-Circular Arch is sized only by its Rise or Height (H). The semi-circular shape
has a radius (R) equal to its Height (H). At its largest, at its base, its width is twice the
Height (H).

Theory
Catenary
Figure 13-14: Catenary Shape
The only user input to define a Catenary Arch is its Height or Rise (H). The shape is
principally defined with the cosine function, where the coefficients a and b are deter-
mined within SWMM computations.
Gothic
Figure 13-15: Gothic Shape
A Gothic Arch is well defined based upon its Height or Rise (H). At its greatest width
(W) the unique proportion of W to H is 1.115. Also unique to this arch type is the
existence of the equilateral triangle with side lengths of W.

Conduit Shapes
Modified Basket Handle
Figure 13-16: Modified Basket-Handle Shape
The Modified Basket Handle Arch is only defined by its Rise or Height (H) and its
Width (W). The top portion is a semi-circular in shape with a radius equal in size to
half its Width (W).
Triangle
Figure 13-17: Triangle Shape
A triangular shaped channel varies in its input requirements. When based solely upon
its height (H) and its width (W) the channels left (SL) and right (SR) side slopes are
assumed equivalent. Otherwise the channel could be defined based upon user
provided height (H) and left (SL) and right (SR) side slopes.

Theory
Rectangular Channel
Figure 13-18: Rectangular Channel Shape
Irregular Open Channel
Figure 13-19: Irregular Open Channel Shape
An irregular open channel is defined by a series of Station and Elevation points.

Referenced when using a Bank Channel Roughness type, the Left and Right over-
banks are highlighted in the above example.

Conduit Shapes
Irregular Closed Section
Figure 13-20: Irregular Closed Section Shape
Rectangular-Rounded
Figure 13-21: Rectangular-Rounded Shape
A Rectangular-Rounded shape is completely defined by three attributes:
H = Height
W = Width

Theory
D = Radius of the rounded portion of the channel
Rectangular-Triangular
Figure 13-22: Rectangular-Triangular Shape
A Rectangular-Triangular shape is completely defined by three attributes:
H1 = Height of the entire cross section
H2 = Height of the triangular shaped section of the channel
W = Width of the entire cross section
Power
Figure 13-23: Power Shape

Constraint Based Automatic Design
A channel defined with the power function requires the input of the exponent (n) to
the following general form equation: y = xn
Parabola
Figure 13-24: Parabola Shape
A channel defined with a general form parabolic function requires the input of the
Height (H), Width (W) and the quadratic coefficient (a) to the following equation:
y = ax2
Gravity Pipes and Structures Design
This program allows you to automatically design gravity piping and structures. The
design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the elements to be designed, from a
single pipe size to the entire system, or anything in between.
The design algorithm adjusts invert elevations and the section size of the pipe to meet
several constraints, such as allowable ranges of slope, velocity and cover. In general,
the design algorithm attempts to minimize pipe size and excavation, which is typically
the most expensive part of installing sewer piping and structures.
Some of the other things that are considered include:
• Pipe Matching
• Offset Matching

Theory
• Drop Structures
• Structure invert Elevations
The designed pipe will be the smallest available section size from the Engineering
Library that meets the constraints and has a capacity greater than its discharge. In a
situation where there are no pipe sizes with adequate capacity, the largest available
size will be used.
Part Full Design
Pipes are designed such that the capacity is greater than the calculated discharge. For
standard designs, this capacity is based on full pipe, normal depth - that is, the flow in
the pipe when the depth is 100% of the pipe rise.
With partially full design, the designed capacity of the pipe is for a design depth that is
only a portion of the pipe rise. In other words, a pipe that is designed for 50% full will
be selected based on a depth of half of the pipe's rise.
For example, consider a circular pipe with the following characteristics: Slope = 0.01
m/m
Roughness n = 0.013
Required flow = 100 l/s
The following table presents several typical section sizes, with their capacities at
various depths.
Table 13-3: Part Full Design
Circular 100% Full 80% Full 50% Full

Section
Size
Nominal Depth Capacity Depth Capacity Depth Capacity

Diameter (mm) (l/s) (mm) (l/s) (mm) (l/s)
300 mm 300 101 240 99 150 50
375 mm 375 183 300 179 188 91
450 mm 450 297 360 291 225 149

Depending on the selected percent-full, the smallest available pipe could be for any of
the bold values above. Obviously, if the design percentage were something different,
an even larger section may be required.
Hydraulically, the capacity at a percentage of pipe rise is generally not equal to that
percentage of the full pipe capacity. As can be seen in the table above, 80%-full
capacity does not equal 80% of the 100%-full capacity.
For sections that are vertically symmetrical, 50% full is a special case where the
wetted perimeter and area are both half that of full flow. This means that the hydraulic
radius and velocity are the same for half-full and full flow, resulting in a highly special
condition where the 50%-full capacity is actually equal to one half of the 100%-full
capacity.
Allow Multiple Sections
Situations may be encountered where the desired capacity cannot be met with a single
pipe, due to a limiting maximum section rise, a lack of larger available pipes, or other
restrictions. For these situations, the pipe can be designed with multiple barrels. All
barrels will have the same physical characteristics. Multiple barrels will only be used
if the design cannot be met by a single available section size, and the pipe allows
multiple sections for design. In these cases, the design will increase the number of
barrels and attempt to find a section size that meets the capacity, continuing until the
capacity is met or the maximum number of barrels is reached.
For example, consider a circular pipe with the following characteristics:
• Slope = 0.01 m/m

• Roughness n = 0.013
• Required flow = 750 l/s
• Maximum Design Section Rise = 700 mm
Assume that the design is for 100% full capacity, allowing up to three barrels of the
following section sizes:

Theory
Table 13-4: Alow Multiple Sections
Circular 1 Barrel 2 Barrels 3 Barrels

Section
Size
Nominal Capacity Meets Capacity Meets Capacity Meets

Diameter (l/s) Flow? (l/s) Flow? (l/s) Flow?
300 mm 101 No 202 No 203 No
375 mm 183 No 366 No 549 No
450 mm 297 No 595 No 892 Yes
525 mm 449 No 897 Yes 1346 Yes
600 mm 641 No 1281 Yes 1922 Yes
For these conditions, the selected design would use two 525 mm barrels - the smallest
section size within the least number of barrels to meet the capacity criteria.
Limit Section Size
There may be situations in design where it is desired to limit the size of the designed
pipe. This may be done to avoid conflicts with obstructions or other utilities, for
example. For these situations, The program enables you to limit the maximum section
rise that will be selected. A smaller size will be used if possible. If none of the avail-
able design sections have a small enough rise, the smallest one will be used.
Pipe Matching
When pipes meet at a structure, it is often desirable to have the pipes at approximately
the same elevation. To do this, the program allows you to design your pipes to match
inverts or crowns. This means that when the design is done (if a valid design was
found), all of the designed pipes entering a structure will have the same invert eleva-
tion or crown elevation.
Offset Matching
If an offset value is specified, it represents the desired drop across the structure. The
design incorporates this offset, resulting in upstream pipes that are higher than the
downstream pipe by the specified offset. Note that all designed upstream pipes will
have the same invert or crown elevation.

For example, an offset of 0.1 meter could result in a downstream pipe with an invert of
100.0 meters, and several upstream pipes with invert elevations at 100.1 meters.
Drop Structures
Drop structures are structures at which the incoming pipes are not all at the same
elevation, nor do any of them necessarily match the downstream pipe. Including these
structures may help to reduce excavation, since the entire upstream system does not
need to be as deep.
The program will only use drop structures if you have chosen to allow them, and if a
pipe's maximum slope constraint cannot be met. Otherwise, the upstream system will
be designed as needed to maintain the desired slope and velocity constraints, which
may require significantly lower pipe elevations.
Structure invert Elevations
The program can adjust structure invert elevations to account for the invert elevations
of newly designed pipes, and any desired additional invert depth.
For example, if a structure is to be adjusted with a invert depth of 0.5 meters and the
lowest pipe invert is 100.0 meters, the structure invert elevation would be set to 99.5
meters.
Design Priorities
Unfortunately, it is not always possible to automate a design that meets all desired
constraints. With this in mind, there are certain priorities that are considered when the
automated design is performed. These priorities are in place to try to minimize the
effect on existing portions of the system while providing appropriate capacity in the
designed pipes.
While this sequence does not go into complete detail regarding the design process, it
does indicate the general priorities for the automated design. The priorities, of course,
only deal with elements that are being designed. If a pipe has fixed inverts or is not to
be designed at all, some or all of these criteria obviously do not apply.

Theory
A Designed Pipe Should Fit within Adjacent Existing Structures

If a pipe connects to an existing structure, the pipe rise should be completely within
the existing structure. The only time this may be violated is if there are no available
section sizes that would not violate that condition (i.e., the existing structure height is
so small that all available pipes have rises too big). In this very unlikely condition, the
smallest available section size will be selected, with the invert elevation placed at the
bottom of the structure.
A Designed Pipe Should Not Have a Crown Above an Adjacent

Designed Structure
Where pipe inverts are fixed, it is possible that the required section size would cause
the pipe crown to be higher than the top elevation of an adjacent designed structure. If
all available pipe section rises are greater than the depth of the pipe invert, the smallest
pipe size will be chosen.
Note: This situation will only be encountered in situations where the

structure's top elevation is set equal to the ground elevation -
otherwise, the structure will be designed with a higher top
elevation.
Pipe Capacity Should Be Greater Than the Discharge

If the pipe is not limited by adjacent structures, the pipe should be sized such that the
design capacity is greater than the calculated discharge in the pipe. The design
capacity may be based on one or more pipes, flowing full or part-full, depending on
user-set design options. If site restrictions or available section limitations result in a
situation where no sections meet the required capacity, the largest available size and
number of barrels will be chosen.

Downstream Pipes Should Be at Least as Large as Upstream

Pipes
Designs typically avoid sizing downstream pipes smaller than upstream pipes, regard-
less of differing slope and velocity requirements. One of the primary reasons for this
is debris that passes through the upstream pipe could become caught in the connecting
structure, clogging the sewer.
Pipe Matching Criteria Downstream Should Be Met

Whenever possible, the designed pipe should have its downstream invert set such that
the pipe meets the matching criteria, such as matching inverts or crowns. Note that
because of higher design priorities, such as the pipe fitting within existing structures,
the matching criteria may not always be met.

Theory
Minimum Cover Constraint Should Be Met

Pipe inverts should be set such that the upstream and downstream crowns of the pipe
are below the ground elevation by at least the amount of the minimum cover. Note
that higher design priorities, such as existing structure locations and matching criteria,
may prevent the minimum cover constraint from being met.
Pipe Matching Criteria Upstream Should Be Met

The upstream invert of the designed pipe should be set to meet the matching criteria of
the upstream structure. Higher design priorities, such as minimum cover constraints,
may result in a pipe that does not match upstream as desired.
Maximum Slope Constraint Should Be Met

Wherever possible, the designed pipe should not exceed the desired maximum slope.
In some situations, elevation differences across the system may result in a case where
a drop structure can be used to offset pipes. This is used instead of a pipe that is too
steep, or instead of upstream piping that would require much more excavation. Note
that the maximum slope constraint may be violated if higher priority design consider-
ations, such as existing structure location or pipe matching criteria, governs.
Other Constraints and Considerations

There are many degrees of freedom when designing a piping system. Several
constraints that are not mentioned above, such as minimum velocity constraints and
minimum slope constraints, may also result in adjustments to the designed pipe.
Other constraints may be too limiting, such as maximum cover constraint and
maximum velocity, resulting in designed pipes that could violate too many other
constraints.
This wide range of choices and priorities emphasizes the need for careful review of
any automated design by a professional. It is not always possible to meet every
desired condition, so it is very much the responsibility of the engineer to make final
judgments and decisions regarding the best design for the client.
Automatic Design with Hydrograph and Pattern Loads
Automatic designs are run only during a Steady State analysis, which examines only a
single instant in time. There are some key behaviors attributed to time-based loads
that you may wish to take into account when designing the system.

Open and Closed Channel Weighting Methods
As described in the Common Load Types section of the help, hydrographs can be
applied as stead state loads in four different ways (Peak, Average, Minimum, and
Zero). If you have hydrograph loading applied to the gravity model, the selected
steady state loading option could have a dramatic effect on the ultimate design. For
example, when running a design, you may get larger pipes when the inflow loads are
based on the peak flows of the hydrographs vs. if they are based on the minimum
flows of the hydrographs.
Pattern Loads generally consist of an average base load and a diurnal pattern. During
a Steady State Analysis, and hence the Design, the pattern is disregarded and the base
load is used as the load.
Constraint Based Warning Messages
The calculated properties of the pipe such as flow velocity, slope, and cover are
always being checked against the design constraints regardless of the type of simula-
tion being run.
During a design, you will get warning messages associated with a particular pipe if the
algorithm could not attain a solution where all the constraints are met.
If you are running a regular Steady State analysis or an Extended Period Simulation,
however, and the constraints are violated (i.e. a velocity in a pipe is higher than the
maximum velocity constraint), then, like in Design mode, a warning message will also
be generated stating a violation as occurred.
These types of warning messages are generated based entirely on the on the user-spec-
ified design constraints, and have no affect on the results or the analysis. These
constraints are setup as either default design constraints through the Analysis menu, or
as local constraints through the element editor or the Design Alternative. The local
design constraints have precedence over the default design constraints.

Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses the following weighting methods:
• Pavlovskii’s Method—The Pavlovskii method may be used for open channel as

well as closed top irregular channels.
N
(PN nN2 ) Pn 2 2 2
1 1 1 + P2 n2 + .... + PN nN
n= =
P P (13.1)

Theory
Where n = Roughness coefficient

P = Weighted perimeter
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section
• Horton’s Method—The Horton composite roughness equation is normally used

for solving closed top irregular channels such as custom arches or cunnette
conduit sections. This equation is also applied in certain specific situations to
open channels where steep banks or wide flat floodplains are encountered.
2
N 3
PN n1N.5
( ) 1.5 1.5 1.5 3
2
n= 1
=
(Pn
1 1 + P2 n2 + .... + PN nN )
2
P P 3
Ł ł
(13.2)

P = Wetted perimeter
section
• Colebatch Method—The Colebatch equation is normally used for open, irregular

channels such as natural floodplains.
2
N 3
AN n1N.5
( ) 2
(A1n11.5 + A2 n12.5 + .... + AN n1N.5 ) 3
1
n= = 2
A A 3
Ł ł
(13.3)

A = Flow area
section

• Cox Method—The Cox equation is normally used for open, irregular channels
such as natural floodplains.
N
(AN nN )
1 A1n1 + A2 n2 + .... + AN nN
n= =
A A (13.4)

A = Flow area
section
• Lotter Method—The Lotter equation is normally used for open, irregular chan-
nels such as natural floodplains.
5 5
PR 3 PR 3
n= 5
= 5 5 5
N
PN RN 3 P1R1 3 P2 R2 3 P R 3
+ + .....+ N N
n1 n2 nN
1 Ł nN ł
(13.5)

P = Wetted perimeter
R = Hydraulic radius
section
• Improved Lotter Method—This method uses a combination of the Horton and

Lotter equations. Because both methods are based on Manning’s conveyance
equations, it is recommended that you use Manning’s friction method for irregular
channels. For more information, see “Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO
Users” on page 13-761.

Theory
Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO Users
Improved Lotter Method uses a weighted roughness method for solving uniform flow
equations unlike most standard step backwater programs (HEC-2, WSP-2, and
WSPRO), which use a segmented conveyance method. Improved Lotter weighted
roughness method is more general and, unlike the step backwater programs, can be
used for both open channel sections and closed sections. Improved Lotter Method will
produce results similar to the segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-2,
WSPRO) except for the following two cases:
Sections containing steep vertical segments or flat shallow submerged overbanks

intersected by water surface. The segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-2,
and WSPRO) tends to underestimate effective roughness, and in many instances the
effective weighted roughness will be actually lower than any of the input segment
roughnesses. Bentley SewerCAD V8i's weighted roughness method avoids underesti-
mating effective roughness by combining adjacent segments using Horton's equation
in a manner similar to the method applied for subdivided main channels with banks
steeper than 5H:1V as documented in Section 2.3 of the HEC-2 User's Manual
(September, 1990). Unlike HEC-2, Improved Lotter Method does not confine this
correction to the main channel, but will make this adjustment at any location in the
section. Improved Lotter Method also dynamically adjusts its flatness and steepness
checks ensuring that computed roughness values will always be higher than the
minimum input value encountered over the wetter flow area. For these situations,
Improved Lotter Method yields a higher effective weighted roughness for the total
section than the segmented conveyance method.
There are a few special considerations that should be realized when analyzing a sewer
system. These are conditions where special asinverttions need to be made, or where
calculations may seem counter-intuitive at first glance. These considerations include:
• Energy Discontinuity
• Structure Energy Grade
• Design Considerations
• Reporting Flow Attributes
• Negative Pressures

Energy Discontinuity
The program by default uses hydraulic grade as the basis for its hydraulic computa-
tions. Energy grade at any given point is then computed by adding the velocity head
to the hydraulic grade. Because of this standard practice, energy discontinuities may
occasionally occur, such as when pipe size decreases in the downstream direction, or
pipe slope increases.
If you want the calculations to be based on the energy grade line you can change it
with the Structure Loss Mode Calculation Option.
Flow discontinuities can also be responsible for energy discontinuities. Since a struc-
ture is analyzed based on a different system time than a pipe, a direct comparison of
energy grades is not reasonable.
Structure Energy Grade
The energy grade line (EGL) at the upstream side of a structure is computed based on
the characteristics of the structure and its upstream pipes. The reported EGL is gener-
ally reported as the lowest EGL of all non- plunging upstream pipes, based on normal-
ized flow values. If there are no non-plunging pipes upstream, the structure's
upstream EGL is taken as the higher of the structure's downstream EGL and upstream
hydraulic grade line (HGL).
In situations where the structure's upstream EGL is lower than its downstream EGL or
upstream HGL, the highest value governs. This rare condition may indicate that the
presumed headloss in the structure is not significant enough to produce the expected
energy loss. The modeler may accept this as a minor limitation of the hydraulic
theory, or may choose to use different structure headloss methods or values.
The reported upstream velocity and velocity head for the structure are based on the
difference between the structure's upstream EGL and HGL.
Design Considerations
As with any automated design, the program's design is intended only as a preliminary
step. It will select pipe sizes and pipe invert elevations based on the input provided,
but no computer program can match the skills that an experienced engineer has. The
modeler should always review any automated design, and should make any changes
required to adjust, improve, and otherwise polish the system.

Theory
Reporting Flow Attributes
SewerCAD V8i has many attributes available in the FlexTables, Annotations, Color
Coding, and Database/GIS connections on different aspects of flow in a sanitary sewer
system. During a Steady State analysis the flow is broken down into categories, (I.e.
wet weather, sanitary, known flow and so on). This is done so the program can apply
the correct extreme flow methods. During an Extended Period Simulation essentially
all the different flows are lumped together into a single hydrograph and the initial
categories are disregarded.
In the gravity portion of the system there are two variables that can be used in both
Extended Period Simulations and Steady State analyses. These are valuable to know
if you are switching back and forth between the two analysis modes, and would like to
maintain the same reports, color coding, etc…
• Total Flow - Is available for gravity pipes and gravity nodes. In gravity nodes it
represents the sum of all the flow exiting the node. In gravity pipes during a
Steady State analysis it represents the sum of all the flow entering into the pipe. In
an Extended Period Simulation it represents the flow used during a time step's
hydraulic analysis and represents a flow point on the pre-routed hydrograph.
• Diverted Flow Out - Is available for gravity nodes. Represents the flow exiting
the node via a diversion.
In the pressure portion of the system, the Pressure Flow attribute for the pressure pipes
shows the total amount of flow going through the pipe for a time step, and is available
for both Extended Period Simulations and Steady State analyses.
Negative Pressures
The pressure engine solves for hydraulic grade independent of ground elevation. Once
the network is balanced, the hydraulic grades are converted into pressure based on
elevation. It is possible to have pressures that are negative (and even less than
vacuum) in the solution. It is the user's responsibility to check for these pressures. A
warning about negative pressures is provided in user notifications. Usually an air
release/vacuum breaker valve is installed at high points to avoid these negative pres-
sures (and assist in transient control).

Manning’s n Coefficients
Manning’s n Coefficients
Table 13-5: Manning’s n Coefficient Table
Lined Channels Manning’s n
Concrete, with surfaces as indicated Formed, no finish 0.013 – 0.017
Trowel finish 0.012 – 0.014
Float finish 0.013 – 0.015
Float finish, gravel on bottom 0.015 – 0.017
Gunite, good section 0.016 – 0.019
Gunite, wavy section 0.018 – 0.022
Concrete, bottom float-finished, sides as Dressed stone in mortar

0.015 – 0.017
indicated
Random stone in mortar 0.017 – 0.020
Cement rubble masonry 0.020 – 0.025
Cement rubble masonry, plastered 0.016 – 0.020
Dry rubble (riprap) 0.020 – 0.030
Gravel bottom, sides as indicated Formed concrete 0.017 – 0.020
Random stone in mortar 0.020 – 0.023
Dry rubble (riprap) 0.023 – 0.033
Brick 0.014 – 0.017
Asphalt Smooth 0.013
Rough 0.016
Wood, planed, clean 0.011 – 0.013
Concrete-lined excavated rock Good section 0.017 – 0.020
Irregular section 0.022 – 0.027
Unlined Channels Manning’s n
Earth, uniform section Clean, recently completed 0.016 – 0.018
Clean, after weathering 0.018 – 0.020
With short grass, few weeds 0.022 – 0.027
In gravely soil, uniform section, clean 0.022 – 0.025

Theory
Table 13-5: Manning’s n Coefficient Table (Cont’d)

Earth, fairly uniform section No vegetation 0.022 – 0.025
Grass, some weeds 0.025 – 0.030
Dense weeds or aquatic plants in deep

0.030 – 0.035
channels
Sides clean, gravel bottom 0.025 – 0.030
Sides clean, cobble bottom 0.030 – 0.040
Dragline excavated or dredged No vegetation 0.028 – 0.033
Light brush on banks 0.035 – 0.050
Rock: Based on design section 0.035
Based on actual mean section Smooth and uniform 0.035 – 0.040
Jagged and irregular 0.040 – 0.045
Channels not maintained, weeds and brush Dense weeds, high as flow depth
0.08 – 0.12
uncut
Clean bottom, brush on sides 0.05 – 0.08
Clean bottom, brush on sides, highest stage

0.07 – 0.11
of flow
Dense brush, high stage 0.10 – 0.14
Highway Channels and Swales with Maintained Vegetation Manning’s n
(Values shown are for velocities of 2 and 5 fps)
Depth of flow up to 0.7 ft.
Bermuda grass, Kentucky bluegrass, buffalo Mowed to 2 in.

0.07 – 0.045
grass
Length 4 to 6 in. 0.09 – 0.05
Good Stand, any grass Length about 12 in. 0.18 – 0.09
Length about 24 in. 0.30 – 0.15
Fair stand, any grass Length about 12 in. 0.14 – 0.08
Depth flow 0.7 ft. to 1.5 ft.
Bermuda grass, Kentucky bluegrass, buffalo Mowed to 2 in.

0.05 – 0.035
grass

Headloss Coefficients for Junctions
Table 13-5: Manning’s n Coefficient Table (Cont’d)

Length 4 to 6 in. 0.06 – 0.04
Good Stand, any grass Length about 12 in. 0.12 – 0.07
Fair stand, any grass Length about 12 in. 0.10 – 0.06
Gutters Manning’s n
Concrete gutter Troweled finish 0.012
Asphalt pavement Smooth texture 0.013
Rough texture 0.016
Concrete gutter with asphalt pavement Smooth 0.013
Rough 0.015
Concrete pavement Float finish 0.014
Broom finish 0.016
For gutters with small slope, where sediment may accumulate, increase all above values
0.002
of n by
(Source: Searcy 1973.)
• (Source: U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986.)
1. The n values are a composite of information compiled by Engman (1986).

2. Includes species such as weeping lovegrass, bluegrass, buffalo grass, blue grama
grass, and native grass mixtures.
3. When selecting n, consider cover to a height of about 0.1 ft. This is the only part
of the plant cover that obstructs sheet flow.

These are typical headloss coefficients used in the standard method for estimating
headloss through manholes and junctions.

Theory
Table 13-6: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole Diagram Headloss

Coefficient
Trunkline only with no bend at the

junction
0.5
Trunkline only with 45° bend at the

junction
0.6
Trunkline only with 90° bend at the

junction
0.8

Table 13-6: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole Diagram Headloss

Coefficient
Trunkline with one lateral
Small 0.6
Large 0.7
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle < 90° between lines
0.8
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle > 90° between lines
0.9
Three or more entrance lines
1.0
Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:

Theory
Table 13-7: Manning’s Coefficients n for Closed-Metal Conduits Flowing

Partly Full
Channel Type and Description Min. Normal Max.
a. Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013
b. Steel
1. Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014
2. Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017
c. Cast iron
1. Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014
2. Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016
d. Wrought iron
1. Black 0.012 0.014 0.015
2. Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017
e. Corrugated metal
1. Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021
2. Storm drain 0.021 0.024 0.030
Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
Table 13-8: Darcy-Wesibach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits
Pipe Material k (mm) k (ft)
Glass, drawn brass, copper (new) 0.0015 0.000005
Seamless commercial steel (new) 0.004 0.000013
Commercial steel (enamel coated) 0.0048 0.000016
Commercial steel (new) 0.045 0.00015
Wrought iron (new) 0.045 0.00015

Table 13-8: Darcy-Wesibach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits
Pipe Material k (mm) k (ft)
Asphalted cast iron (new) 0.12 0.0004
Galvanized iron 0.15 0.0005
Cast iron (new) 0.26 0.00085
Concrete (steel forms, smooth) 0.18 0.0006
Concrete (good joints, average) 0.36 0.0012
Concrete (rough, visible, form marks) 0.60 0.002
Riveted steel (new) 0.9~9.0 0.003-0.03
Corrugated metal 45 0.15

Appendix
References 14
Ming Jin, Samuel Coran and Jack Cook (2004), “New One-Dimensional Implicit
Numerical Dynamic Sewer and Storm Model”, Haestad Methods Inc., Waterbury, CT
Ben C. Yen (2001), "Hydraulics of Sewer System", in Stormwater Collection Systems

Design Handbook, ed. Larry W. Mays, McGraw-Hill, New York
Danny L. Fread (1993), "Flow Routing", in Handbook of Hydrology, ed David R.

Maidment, McGraw-Hill, New York
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (2000) "Discussion on the Application of Relaxation
Scheme to Wave-Propagation Simulation in Open-Cannel Networks", Journal of
Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 126(1), 89-91.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1999) "One-dimensional modeling of mud/debris

unsteady flows", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 25(8), 827-834.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1997) "Dynamic flood routing with explicit and
implicit numerical solution schemes", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 123(3), 166-
173.

About Bentley
Systems 15
Bentley Systems, Incorporated provides software for the lifecycle of the world’s infra-
structure. The company’s comprehensive portfolio for the building, plant, civil, and
geospatial vertical markets spans architecture, engineering, construction (AEC) and
operations. Bentley is the leading provider of AEC software to the Engineering News-
Record Design 500 and major owner-operators. For more information, visit the
Bentley Web site at http://docs.bentley.com/.
Bentley Systems, Inc. offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world
for analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems,
from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and
more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output,
Bentley Systems, Inc. is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.
In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, many
of our products can be totally integrated within MicroStation and/or AutoCAD. These
programs also share numerous powerful features, such as scenario management,
unlimited undo/redo, customizable tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS,
database and spreadsheet connection, and annotation.
Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at http://www.haestad.com to find out about
our latest software, books, training, and open houses.
Software
docs.bentley.com
Bentley Services
Bentley Discussion Groups
Bentley on the Web
TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions

Software
BE Magazine
BE Newsletter
Client Server
BE Careers Network
Contact Bentley Systems
Software
Bentley Systems, Inc. software includes:
• CivilStorm
• SewerGEMS
• SewerGEMS
• WaterGEMS
• WaterCAD
• StormCAD
• SewerGEMS
• PondPack
• FlowMaster
• CulvertMaster
• HAMMER
CivilStorm
CivilStorm revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your concern

is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water quality
BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter designs
every day, CivilStorm fits your needs. It is the only commercially available software
package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package. CivilStorm
also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM algorithm or
CivilStorm's own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
CivilStorm provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
and open channel networks, and provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for
visualizing your storm systems in action.
Use CivilStorm For:

About Bentley Systems
• Comprehensive Stormwater Master Plans

• Watershed-Based Master Planning
• Analysis of Open-channel, Closed-conduit and Combination systems
• Floodplain Studies
• Complex Flow Regime Analysis
• Water Quality Assessments
• Integrated Stormwater Quantity and Quality Assessments
• NPDES Permitting
CivilStorm can be run in a MicroStation integrated interface, a Stand-Alone graphical
user interface, or an AutoCAD integrated interface.
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS is the first and only fully-dynamic, multi-platform (GIS, CAD, and
Stand-Alone) sanitary and combined sewer modeling solution. With SewerGEMS,
you will analyze all sanitary and combined sewer system elements in one package and
have the option of performing the analyses with the SWMM algorithm or our own
implicit solution of the full Saint Venant equations.
Simply put, SewerGEMS offers the most comprehensive solution available for opti-
mizing Best Management Practice (BMP) designs and meeting sanitary sewer over-
flow (SSO) and combined sewer overflow (CSO) regulations.
With SewerGEMS, you can:
• Develop system master plans

• Assess the impact of inflow and infiltration on SSOs
• Develop SSO and CSO remediation programs
• Perform system evaluations associated with US EPA CMOM and NPDES
• Optimize lift station and system storage capacities
• Determine developer connection fees
• Implement real-time control strategies
• Model relief sewers, overflow diversions, and inverted siphons
• Accurately simulate operations with variable-speed pumping and logical controls
• Simulate out-of-service or proposed sewers within the same model

Software
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your

concern is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water
quality BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter
designs every day, SewerGEMS fits your needs. It is the only commercially available
software package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package.
SewerGEMS also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM
algorithm or SewerGEMS’s own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
SewerGEMS provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
Use SewerGEMS For:

WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water-distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advan-
tages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.
You can create, display, edit, run, map, and design water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with tradi-
tional Haestad Methods modeling tools. These abilities, in conjunction with the cross-
product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architec-
ture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: ArcView, ArcEdit, ArcInfo,

AutoCAD, or the standalone WaterGEMS Modeler interface.

WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized-pipe networks, such as

municipal water-distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCAD’s abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues,
with extensive water quality features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehen-
sive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data-sharing capabilities.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a stand-alone graphical user interface and/
or an AutoCAD-integrated interface.
StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flex-
ible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm-sewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction-loss methods are the foundation of StormCAD’s robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your

concern is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water
quality BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter
designs every day, SewerGEMS fits your needs. It is the only commercially available
software package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package.
SewerGEMS also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM
algorithm or SewerGEMS's own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
SewerGEMS provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
Use SewerGEMS For:


Software

PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that

analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and post-developed watershed conditions and
estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing,
and also computes outfall rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond
infiltration, and pond-detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, automatically creating

section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an
executive summary for an entire watershed or build an elaborate drainage report
showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rain-
fall curves, and hydrographs, are fully compatible with other Windows software.
FlowMaster
FlowMaster is an efficient program for the design and analysis of a wide variety of
hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets.
FlowMaster’s Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for
any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest
FHWA guidelines, and weighting of irregular section roughness can be based on any
popular techniques.
CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single-barrel crossings to complex multibarrel culverts with roadway
overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies, allowing
you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you do not know, such as culvert size,
peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive
detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.

HAMMER
HAMMER is the premier software in the world for analyzing hydraulic transients,
surge control devices, and water hammer effects. HAMMER models any hydraulic
element, transient source or surge protection devices, including:
• Transients for flow, head, or entrained vapor

• Pressurized pipelines and networks
• Ingress of contaminants into pipe networks
• Surcharged sewers or storage tunnels
• Pump start and shut down scenarios
• Flow shifting via pumps or valves
• Power or pump failure
• Rapid valve closure
• Catastrophic pipe or pump breaks
HAMMER can easily import steady-state model results from industry-standard

models such as WaterCAD, WaterGEMS, EPANET, or EXTRAN (for line filling).
Users can also build their own models using the advanced graphical interface or
robust database connections.
Bentley Institute Press

Bentley Institute Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable,
quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering
theory to hydraulics and hydrology. Bentley Institute Press publications include:
References and Textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Bentley

Institute Press offers a complete line of reference
books for use in both academic and professional
settings.
Independent Papers: Bentley Institute Press also provides funding for
engineers to write case studies of their projects, with
potential publication in a variety of industry journals
and magazines.
Books from Bentley Institute Press:
Advanced Water Distribution Modeling and Management, first edition

Haestad, Walski, Chase, Savic, Grayman, Beckwith, and Koelle

docs.bentley.com
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, fifth edition

Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Durrans, and Meadows
Floodplain Modeling Using HEC-RAS, first edition

Haestad, Dyhouse, Hatchett, and Benn
Proceedings of the First Annual Water Security Summit, first edition

Haestad
Stormwater Conveyance Modeling and Design, first edition

Haestad and Durrans
Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, first edition

Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Merritt, Harold, Walker, and Whitman
Water Distribution Modeling, first edition

Haestad, Walski, Chase, and Savic
To order or to receive additional information on these or any other Bentley Institute

Press titles, please call 800-727-6555 (U.S. and Canada) or +1-203-755-1666 (world-
wide) or visit www.bentley.com/books.
docs.bentley.com
docs.bentley.com is your repository of product help files and books. You can browse
through online help for specific information or download it to ensure you have the
most recent help available on your computer. Also through this site, many product
books are available as free, downloadable PDFs, or can be purchased pre-bound with
a credit card.

Bentley Services
There are a variety of Bentley Services, including Bentley SELECTR priority services,
one-on-one consulting, training programs, MicroStation resellers, as well as your local
technical support provider.
Bentley SELECTR
Bentley SELECTR is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program

that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads and MySELECT CD,
around-the-clock technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training
and consulting services, as well as technical information and support channels. For
more detailed information go online at http://www.bentley.com and click the Support
link.
Bentley Professional Services
Bentley Professional Services is a team of project managers, technical managers,

application specialists, and developers organized regionally and assigned by skill sets.
By adding their extensive knowledge to your project, they provide customized
services on a one-to-one basis to help you maximize your investment in Bentley tech-
nology. For more information visit http://www.bentley.com/Services/ and click the
Bentley Professional Services link.
Bentley Institute
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent,

high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and for varying levels of
application experience.
Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your productivity by using exam-

ples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is developed concurrently
with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest tools and features. Addi-
tionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certification requirements.
To access the Bentley Institute home page directly from SewerCAD V8i, choose Help
> Bentley Institute Training, or visit http://www.bentley.com/Training/.
Bentley Discussion Groups

Bentley on the Web
Meet other users of Bentley products, exchange ideas, and discuss a wide range of
technical subjects in Bentley's discussion groups. They can be accessed via most
common discussion group newsreaders or Web browsers and are a good source of
how-to tips, technical information, and programming techniques from Bentley
employees and professionals who use our products.
A current list of discussion groups as well as helpful information regarding them can
be found at http://communities.bentley.com.
Bentley on the Web

Visit Bentley on the web at http://www.bentley.com/. Here you will find links to prod-
ucts, services, industries, events and training, community information, and the latest
corporate news announcements pertaining to Bentley Systems, Incorporated, your
global provider of collaborative software solutions.
TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions

TechNotes, FAQs and other technical support information are available online at
Bentley's SewerCAD V8i Technical Support page.
BE Magazine
The BE Magazine is a quarterly e-magazine focused on the Bentley community of
users. It serves as a showcase for Bentley users and their work improving the world's
infrastructure.
Each issue is an open forum for the world community of architecture, engineering,
and construction professionals and owner-operators. Visit http://www.be.org and click
the BE Magazine link to subscribe or to view the magazine online.
BE Newsletter
The BE Newsletter is an email newsletter covering industry news, Bentley updates and
events, technical tips, and more. Visit http://www.be.org and click the BE Magazine
link to subscribe or to view the newsletter online.
Client Server
Client Server is an online newsletter for Bentley SELECT subscribers. This online
resource is filled with the latest technical news and information.

Archives of Client Server provide an abundant resource of technical informa-

tion in the form of book excerpts, case studies, commentary and analysis, and
productivity tips. For more detailed information go online to http://
www.bentley.com and click the Support link.
BE Careers Network
The BE (Bentley Empowered) Careers Network is a program dedicated to supporting
accredited academic institutions by providing the latest releases of Bentley products,
as well as world-renowned support, online communities, and the latest engineering
news and information. For details about the BE Careers Network go online at http://
www.becareers.org/.

Contact Bentley Systems if you want product information, to upgrade your software,
or need technical support.
Sales
Bentley Systems’ professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please contact
your sales representative for any questions regarding Bentley Systems’ latest products
and prices.
Toll-free U.S. Phone: 800-727-6555

Worldwide Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Email: sales@bentley.com
Technical Support
We hope that everything runs smoothly and you never have a need for our technical
support staff. However, if you do need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their
services seven days a week and may be contacted by phone, fax, email, and the
Internet. For information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our
sales team today and request information on our Bentley SELECT program, or visit
our Web site.
When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your
problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information
available:
• Your computer’s operating system.

• Name and build number of the Bentley Systems software you are calling about.
The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About Bentley
SewerCAD V8i. The build number is the number in brackets located in the lower-
left corner of the dialog box that opens.
• A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
• Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.
When emailing or faxing for support, please provide the following details, in addition
to the above, to enable us to provide a more timely and accurate response:
• Company name, address, and phone number

• A detailed explanation of your concerns
• If you are emailing us, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i.log files located in the product
directory (e.g., C:\Documents and Settings\<user directory>\Application
Data\Bentley\SewerCAD V8i\8).
:Available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. You can contact our technical support
team at:
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Support: http://selectservices.bentley.com
Addresses
Internet: http://www.haestad.com
Toll-free U.S. Phone: 800-727-6555
Worldwide Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Mail: Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Haestad Methods Solutions Center
Suite 200W
27 Siemon Company Drive
Watertown, CT 06795

Glossary
Alternative: A categorized data set that create scenarios when placed

together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of
records. A record holds the data for a particular element
in your system.
Backflow: The backing up of water through a conduit or channel in
the direction opposite to normal flow.
Batch Run: A set of multiple scenarios that are computed together.
This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of
calculations, or manage a group of smaller calculations as
a set.
bmp: File name extension for bitmap image files, which can be
used as background layers in SewerCAD V8i.
Calculation Options Profile: A set of calculation options associated with a specific
scenario.
Catalog Pipes: User-defined re-usable data sets that define common
physical characteristics of pipes.
Collection: Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses the term Collection to
identify some fields where you enter a set of data instead
of a single value. To use this feature, click the field in
which the word Collection appears, then click the
Ellipsis (…) button to open a dialog box into which you
enter data.
Composite Hydrograph: A graph of the total flow over time from multiple defined
fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads.
Conduit: An open- or closed-section element through which water
moves. A conduit has a constant roughness and cross
section shape along its entire length. In Bentley
SewerCAD V8i, a conduit can refer to any prismatic
channel or pipe that conveys flow. The cross section of a
conduit must remain constant from one end to the next.

Drag: Dragging is an action you perform with the mouse to
select items in the drawing pane. Click in the drawing
pane, hold down the mouse button, and move the mouse
to form a rectangle around the elements you want to
select. After you have formed the rectangle around the
items you want to select, let go of the mouse button.
dwh: File name extension for the binary format file used by the
SewerCAD V8i Stand-Alone mode only. The .dwh file
contains the drawing.
dxf: File name extension for Data Exchange File format
image files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerCAD V8i. Dxf files store vector data for drawings
typically produced in CAD programs.
Dynamic Manager: A dialog box that can be displayed floating above the
workspace or attached (docked) to any one of the sides of
the workspace.
Dynamic selection set: A selection created by running a query.
English: E-Q-TWU.S. customary units, such as inch or acre
Element Symbology: Refers to the way in which elements and their associated
labels are displayed in Bentley SewerCAD V8i You use
the Element Symbology manager to manage element
annotations and color coding.
Element Table: A read-only, predefined FlexTable that you can use to
review data about a specific element type. There is one
predefined table for every element available in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Extended Period Simulation:A calculation type where the model is analyzed over a
specified duration of time.
FlexTable: A customizable table that lets you view input data and
results for all elements of a specific type in a tabular
format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or
create your own FlexTables to compare data and create
reports.
Freeboard: The difference between the top of dam elevation and the
water surface elevation.
gif: File name extension for Graphic Image Format image
files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerCAD V8i.
GIS: Geographic information system
Hydrograph: A graph of discharge versus time.

Hyperlink: In Bentley SewerCAD V8i, a link to an external file, such
as an image or movie file, for the purpose of associating
the file with a specific element.
Infiltration: Water that enters the system from the ground through
defective pipes, pipe joints, connections, or manhole
walls
Inflow: Inflow is specified at a manhole or wet well as the total
amount of wet weather inflow. Together with the
infiltration along the pipes, the inflow forms the wet
weather part of the sewer load.
Inflow Collection: A collection of any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or
pattern inflows for an element.
Inlet flow: Flows added to the manholes and wet wells in your
model, including user input hydrographs and flows from
other sources, such as pumps.
jpg: File name extension for image files produced using the
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) standard.
JPEG files, which can also have the file name extension
jpeg, can be used as background layers in SewerCAD
V8i.
Transition: A structure in which flow can be mixed or split. In
combined sewers systems, flow can be split between that
going to treatment and that going to an overflow.
Manhole: Element that provides access to the system for inspection
and maintenance. Manholes are usually installed where
there is a change in horizontal (plan-view) pipe direction
or pipe slope, where several pipes join, or where the pipe
size changes.
mdb: File name extension for SewerCAD V8i database files.
The .mdb file contains all modeling data, and includes
everything needed to perform a calculation. This file is an
open access database format file and can be viewed and
edited.
MrSID: File name extension for Multi-resolution Seamless Image
Database format raster image files, which can be used as
background layers in SewerCAD V8i.
Outfall: The ultimate termination points in a network.
Overflow: The flow lost when the water surface elevation at a
manhole or other type of node is above the rim elevation
or user-specified overtopping elevation.

Pattern: A series of multipliers which describe how the base load
varies over time.
Pattern Load: A single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over
time.
Pattern Setup: In SewerCAD V8i, a pattern setup allows you to match
unit sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate loading
patterns. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup,
thus allowing you to model different loading alternatives
for different extended period simulations.
png: File name extension for Portable Network Graphic
format image files, which can be used as background
layers in SewerCAD V8i.
Pressure junction: A connection between two or more pressure pipes of
varying characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure
portion of a network through a pressure junction.
Pressure pipe: In SewerCAD V8i, a type of link element used to connect
node elements in pressure portions of a network.
Profile: A graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance,
such as ground elevation along a section of piping. As
well as these side or sectional views of the ground
elevation, profiles can be used to show other
characteristics, such as hydraulic grade, pressure, and
constituent concentration.
Pump: A structure in a wastewater system designed to add the
energy (head) necessary to overcome elevation
differences and head losses.
Q: Flow
Query: A SQL expression you build in Bentley SewerCAD V8i
to filter a FlexTable or create a selection set.
Sanitary Flow Collection: A collection of loads that contains any combination of
hydrograph, unit, or pattern loads.
Sanitary Load: A load that results from human activity and are not
weather-dependent.
Scenario: A set of input data (in the form of alternatives),
calculation options, results, and notes associated with a
set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited
number of "What If?" situations for your model, and then
modify, compute, and review your system under those
conditions.

Selection Sets: User-defined groups of network elements that let you
predefine a group of elements to manipulate together.
shp: File name extension for shapefiles, which you can import
as background layers for your model.
SI: International System of units or metric units.
Static selection set: A selection set created by selecting a group of elements
in your model.
swc: File name extension for SewerCAD V8i project files. The
.swc file contains data such as annotation, color-coding,
and project-level options. This file is an open .xml format
file and can be viewed and edited.
tiff: File name extension for Tagged Image File Format raster
image files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerCAD V8i. The extension .tif is also used for these
types of files.
Unit Hydrograph: A time versus flow curve.
Unit Sanitary Load: Loading unit count representing the local count of
loading units for a specified unit dry weather load.
User data extensions: A set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to
hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions
allow you to add your own data fields to your project.
User Notifications: Messages that appear after you compute your model.
These messages can help you troubleshoot errors in your
model.
Virtual Conduit: Virtual conduits are a special compatibility element
included in Bentley SewerCAD V8i to help modelers
achieve fidelity between the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
model and other storm modeling solutions that model
pumps and control structures such as weirs, orifices, and
rating tables as network links. Virtual conduits are
displayed in your model as dashed lines.
Wet Weather Load: A load that is not related to rainfall activity, such as
groundwater infiltration (water leaking into a pipe
through cracks, joints, and other defects) and structure
inflow (surface water entering a structure through the
cover).
Wet well: A boundary condition between the pressure and gravity
portions of a network. Wet wells serve as a collection
point for gravity systems, and as an HGL boundary node
for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the
sewer network at these locations.

Symbols
Symbols
%u 523
.hlb 285
.pdf 5
AASHTO 703
about CivilStorm 1
about SewerGEMS 1
actions tab 316
active 473
active topology 471, 473
active topology alternative 471
active topology child alternative 472
Active Topology dialog box 471
actual and plan length 243
actual and plan length as a function of slope 244
Add Hyperlinks dialog box 293
Add To Selection Set dialog box 274
adding annotations 522
adding background layers 513
adding color coding 527
adding elements 233
adding fixed loads 353
adding user defined hydrographs 354
address
See contacting Bentley Systems. 784
Addresses 784
affinity laws 717
air valve 231
Allocation strategies 388
Alternative Editor dialog box 470
Alternative Manager 469
alternatives 447, 467, 785
base 468
boundary condition 495
child 468
creating 468
defined 452
editing 469
initial conditions 496
making elements inactive in 472
merge 467
Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Index-791

B
overview 447, 467

physical 474
sanitary loading 498
types of 467
analysis
hydraulic 421, 422
analysis menu 16
Animation Controls 539
Annotation Properties dialog box 524, 544
annotations 518, 519, 524, 544
%u 523
adding 522
deleting 523
displaying units 523
editing 523
renaming 523
Apply Sanitary Load to Selection dialog box 384
attributes
editing 239
scenario 452
attributes for calculation profiles 427
AutoCAD 657, 665, 666
commands 663, 672
drawing synchronization 670
entities 663, 671, 672
importing WaterCAD 664, 674
proxies 674
AutoCAD mode 9, 657, 665, 666
graphical layout 658, 667
project files 669
toolbars 667
Autodesk 657, 665
automated scenario management 448
backflow 785
background layer files
using with ProjectWise 147
Background Layer manager 510
background layers 510
adding 513
deleting 513
dxf files 517
editing 514
image compression 516
Index-792 Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

C
renaming 514
shapefiles 516
supported image types 510
turning on and off 514
working with folders 512
base alternative 467
base alternatives 468
Base Calcuation Options 425
basket handle shape 739
batch run 464, 785
Batch Run Editor dialog box 465
batch runs 464
Batch Update Conduit Descriptions 22
BE Careers Network 783
BE Magazine 782
BE Newsletter 782
Bend command 234
Bentley discussion groups 782
Bentley Institute 781
Bentley Institute Press 779
Bentley Professional Services 781
Bentley SELECT 3, 781
Bentley services 781
Bentley Systems 773
about us 773
addresses 783
contacting 783
email addresses 784
Haestad Methods products 774
program update 3
Web site 784
Bernoulli equation 683
Bifurcated 209
Billing Meter aggregation 390
Border Editor dialog box 616
border properties for graphs 616
border tool 232
boundary condition alternative 495
boundary polygon feature classes 411
buffering point area percentage 410, 411
building a model 235
C coefficient 686
calculation detailed summary 435

C
calculation errors 446

calculation options 446, 504
Calculation Options Manager 424
Calculation Options manager 424
Calculation Options Profile 785
calculation profiles 424
attributes 427
calculation warnings 446
catalog pipes 287, 785
catenary shape 745
change pipe width 662
Change Series Title dialog box 623
changing the drawing view 264
Channel Weighting Methods 758
characteristic curve
pump 717
pumps 716, 717
Chart Options dialog box 577
Chart Tab 578
Export tab 613
Print tab 615
Series Tab 604
Tools tab 612
Chart Tools Gallery dialog box 623
check data 435
Chezy’s equation 685, 688
child alternative
creating active topology 472
child scenarios 463
Cholesky 726
circular channel shape 738
CivilStorm
about 1
CivilStorm 2005 776
CivilStorm database file
importing 149
clearing element selection 236
Client Server 782
Colebatch 759
Colebrook-White
equation 685
collection 785
collections
inflow 374
minor loss 204
sanitary flow 384
color coding 527

C
adding 527
deleting 528
editing 528
renaming 529
Color dialog box 618
Color Editor dialog box 618
Color Map Tables 530
Color-Coding Properties dialog box 529, 645
column headings
editing for FlexTables 554
commands (AutoCAD mode) 663, 672
Compact Database Enabled option 132
Component 185
component 158
components menu 17
Composite Action 319
Composite Condition 315
composite hydrograph 785
composite hydrograph data table window 370
Composite Hydrograph Window 370
composite hydrographs 370, 375
Composite Logical Action 317
Compress Database command 22
compressing large database files 22, 132
Conditions List 317
Conditions tab 310
conditions tab 310
conduit infiltration 351, 412
conduit shapes 737
conduits 785
conjugate gradient method 725
connecting elements 235
connection
synchronization 670
connectivity
explicit 181
implicit 181
conservation
of mass & energy 721
constant horsepower pump 720
constant power pump 720
constructing a query 299, 557
contacting Bentley Systems
email 784
fax 784
hours 784
mail 784

C
technical support 783

telephone 784
continuous patterns 356
contour 647, 648
smoothing 647, 648
Contour Browser 646, 649
contour labels 9
Contour Manager 645
Contour Plot 648
Contours 645
Control Manager 304
Control Sets tab 320
Controlling Results Output 433
controls tab 305
convert 285
copy 59
copying
FlexTables 562
Correct Data Format 183
cox 760
create a new System Head Curve 254
create a new Totalizing Flow Meter 251
create Observed Data 575
Create Selection Set dialog box 271
creating
graph 568
creating a model 235
creating a query 297
creating alternatives 468
creating dynamic 271
creating queries 299, 557
creating reports 564
creating sanitary flow collections 384
creating selection sets 271, 272
cross sectional shapes of link elements 208
CulvertMaster 778
curve
pump 716, 717, 718, 720
curved pipes 234
custom AutoCAD entities 663, 671, 672
custom extended
pump 720
customize
drawing 668
customizing
FlexTables 558
customizing graphs 636

D
Darcy Weisbach
Colebrook-White equation 685
equation 686, 687
data
check 434, 435
organization 467
validation 434
Data Format Needs Editing 183
data source tables 182
data types for user data extensions 326
Database Utilities 22
datasource 158
decimal point 242
default units 138
defining geometry of link elements 206
defining pump settings 221
defining sanitary flow collections 384
defining user data extensions 322
deleting
FlexTables 552
deleting annotations 523
deleting background layers 513
deleting color coding 528
deleting elements 237
deleting groups of elements in a selection set 274
deleting profiles 535
demand
multipliers 358
demand allocation 387
demand projection 393
depth 207
design point 720
direction of flow 731
disconnect 238
display format 243
Display Precision 242
display precision 242
displaying multiple projects 130
diurnal curves 355
dockable managers 45
downstream edge 179
downstream node 235
dragging 786
drawing

E
scale 137
setup (AutoCAD mode) 668
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 670
drawing scale 137
drop manholes 216
dry weather flow collections 384
DWG 669, 670
DXF file
exporting 155
DXF Properties dialog box 271, 274, 517
dynamic inheritance 454
dynamic managers 786
edit elements 662

Edit Hyperlink dialog box 293
edit menu 14
editing
FlexTables 553
numerous elements at once 555
editing alternatives 469
editing annotations 523
editing background layers 514
editing color coding 528
editing column headings
FlexTables 554
editing element attributes 239, 240
editing scenarios 463
editing units
FlexTables 554
egg shape 741
EGL 684
element
deleting 662
modify 662
moving 663, 673
relabel 241
element connectivity 235
element label project files 141
element labeling settings 141
element properties 660
Element Property Inferencing 257, 263, 341, 347
element relabeling 561
element symbology 786
Element Symbology Manager 519

E
using folders in 521

element tables 564, 786
elements 203
adding data to link elements 204
adding in the middle of a pipe 237
adding to your model 233
clearing selection of 236
connecting 204, 235
defining cross sectional shapes of link elements 208
defining geometry of link elements 206
deleting 235
editing attributes 239
globally editing data in numerous elements 555
link 204
manholes 214
moving 235
outfalls 218
overview 203
pressure junctions 220
pumps 221
reporting on 565
selecting 235
selecting all 236
selecting all of the same type 236
viewing in selection sets 270
wet wells 217
elevation vs. flow curves
adding to outfalls 219
Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box 219
ellipse shape 740
email 784
email address 784
energy
conservation 721, 722
equation 683
grade line 684
principle 682
engineering libraries 282, 285
adding unit sanitary loads in 365
overview 281
sharing on a network 285
working with 282
engineering libraries dialog box 285
engineering library file 285
English units 786
entering additional data to link elements 204
entering data 240

F
entities
in AutoCAD 663, 671, 672
enumerated user data extensions 331
Enumeration Editor dialog box 331
EPS 421
analysis 421, 422
EQT curves
adding to outfalls 219
error messages 178, 434
errors 444
Explicit connectivity 179
explicit connectivity 181
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 672
export 154
exporting
FlexTables 563
exporting data 154
to a DXF file 155
exporting FlexTables 562
Extended Period Analysis 359
extended period analysis 421
extended period simulation 786
External Tool Manager 333
F1 5
fax 784
file menu 10
filter
resetting 558
Find 240
Find Logical Action dialog box 317
finding elements 240
fitting loss coefficients 714, 715
fixed loads
adding 353
Fixed Point 243
FlexTable dialog box 549
FlexTable Setup dialog box 559
FlexTables 545, 786
copying 562
copying data 562
creating 552
customizing 558
deleting 552

F
editing 553
editing column headings 554
editing globally 555
editing units 554
exporting 562
exporting data 563
global editing 555
navigating in 554
opening 551
ordering columns 555
printing 562, 563
renaming 553
reports 563
saving as text 563
shortcut keys 554
sorting column order 555
FlexTables Manager 546
folders in 548
FlexTables manager 546
Flow (Diverted In Outside Subnetwork) 372
Flow (Diverted Out) 373
Flow (Downstream Conduit) 374
Flow (In net) 374
Flow (Local Diverted In Same Subnetwork) 372
Flow (Locally Injected) 372
Flow (Non-Diverted Out) 373
Flow (Out net) 374
Flow (System Known) 372
Flow (System Sanitary) 372
Flow (System Total Wet Weather) 373
Flow (System Wet Well Collection) 372
Flow (Total Diverted In) 372
Flow (Total In) 372
Flow (Total Out) 372, 374
flow distribution 391
flow increment 151
FlowMaster 778
folders
in Background Layers Manager 512
in Element Symbology Manager 521
in FlexTables Manager 548
format
unit 242
freeboard 786

G
Gaussian elimination method 726

General 243
general settings 132
Geometric data source 158
geometry
of link elements 206
polyline vertices 206
GIS 786
demand allocation 387
GIS-ID 183, 185
global edit 555
global editing
FlexTables 555
global settings 131
gothic shape 745
grade line
energy 684
hydraulic 684
gradient algorithm 722
derivation 723
Gradient Editor dialog box 617
graph
copying and pasting data 569, 573
data 573
new 568
Graph dialog box 569
Graph Manager 567
Graph Series Options dialog box 573
graph settings 573
graphical layout
AutoCAD 658, 667
graphing 568
changing total time period 569
refresh 568
graphs 566
customizing 636
data 569
printing 569
Haestad Methods
program update 3

I
Haestad Press 779

Haestad.log 784
Hatch Brush Editor dialog box 619
Hazen-Williams equation 686
headloss coefficient
in minor loss collections 206
HEC-22 703
help files and books 780
help menu 23
HGL 684
history of what-if analyses 448
horseshoe shape 740
horton’s 759
hydraulic analysis 421
hydraulic grade line 684
hydrograph 786
Hydrograph Curve dialog box 412
hydrographs
user defined 354
hydrographs vs. pattern loads 353
hyperlinks 291, 787
adding 292
deleting 294
editing 293
Hyperlinks dialog box 291
image compression 516

Image Filter 515
Image Properties dialog box 514
impeller 717
implicit connectivity 181
Import
WaterCAD 664
import 187, 192, 196
WaterCAD 664
importing
CivilStorm data 149
importing data 148
improved Lotter 760
inactive 473
inactive elements in alternatives 472
independent papers 779
individual elements
adding to your model 233

K
inferencing 263, 347

infiltration 412, 787
Infiltration (System Additional) 373
Infiltration (System Non-Additional) 373
Infiltration (System Total) 373
inflow 350, 371, 377, 787
inflow alternatives
for manholes 501, 502
for pressure junctions 502
for wet wells 501
inflow collection 787
Inflow Collection Editor 375, 787
inflow collections
defining 374
inflow control center 377
Inflow Control Center dialog box 377
inflows 371, 377
inheritance 453, 455
dynamic 454
overriding 454
initial conditions alternative 496
initial conditions of networks 569
initial flow equals zero 569
inlet flow 787
Inlet Flow Settings 151
interpolate 263, 347
interpolation 263, 347
introduction 1
irregular channel 207
irregular closed section shape 748
irregular open channel shape 747
Is Reversed? 208
K coefficients 715
knowledgebase 3
known flows 681
laws
affinity 717
conservation of mass and energy 721
layout

M
AutoCAD 658, 667

layout settings 133
layout tool 233
legacy 285
lessons 5
Levenberg-Marquardt method 721
library types 282
Like operator 301
line tool 232
linear system equation solver 725
linear theory method 722
link element
defining geometry of 206
link elements 204
defining cross sectional shapes of 208
entering additional data to 204
Load (Calculated) 374
LoadBuilder 350, 387, 394
manager 394
run summary 406
wizard 395
loading 349
adding fixed loads 353
defining inflow collections 374
hydrographs vs. pattern loads 353
methods for 350
patterns 355
types of loads 351
user defined hydrographs 354
logical control 308
dialog box 306
manager 304
set editor 321
Logical controls 307
logical controls
overview 303
loop-based algorithms 722
losses
friction 686, 724
minor 714, 715, 716
Lotter 760
mail 784
Management controls 357

M
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview) 703

manholes 214, 787
inflow alternatives for 501, 502
physical alternative for 481
sanitary loading alternative for 499
Manning’s equation 688
Manning’s n coefficient table 764
mass conservation 721
maximum flow 151
merge 238
merge
alternatives 467
Merge nodes in close proximity 238
meter aggregation 390
meter assignment 388
methods of entering loads 350
Microstation mode 8
Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box 248
minor loss collection 204
Minor Loss Collection dialog box 205
minor losses 714, 716
fitting 715
model calculations
troubleshooting 446
ModelBuilder 187, 192, 196
errors and warnings 178
supported formats 157
using 157
ModelBuilder Connections manager 160
ModelBuilder wizard 163
modified basket handle shape 746
move
elements 663, 673
labels 663, 673
moving elements 236
moving toolbars 42
multiple
pump curve 720, 721
multiple elements
selecting 236
multiple point pump 720
multiple projects
maximum number of 130
Multipliers 358
Municipal License Administrator 2

N
named view 58
named views 58, 649
navigating in a FlexTables 554
Network Navigator 276
New Logical Action dialog box 317
nodal demand vector 723
non-convergence 421
Number 243
Observed Data 574

online book 5
See also .pdf.
online help 5
opening an existing project 130
opening managers 43
operation 555
Operational Alternative 303
options 131
drawing 137
global 131
labeling 141
project 135
ProjectWise 142
setting 131
units 138
Options Dialog Box
ProjectWise settings 142
Oracle 157
ordering
FlexTable columns 555
organize data 467
outfalls 218
adding elevation vs. flow curves to 219
adding EQT curves to 219
boundary condition alternative 495
output
tables 546
output data 433
overflow 787
overriding inheritance 454

P
Pan tool 264

panning 264
using a mousewheel to 264
parabola shape 750
parent scenario 463
paste 59
pattern 357, 788
demand multipliers 357
extended period analysis 359, 422
pattern editor 357
time steps 357
pattern load 788
pattern loads 355
Pattern Manager 357
pattern setup 788
pattern setups 359
Pattern Setups dialog box 360
patterns 196, 355
continuous 356
stepwise 356
Pavlovskii’s 758
Percent Full (Calculated) 218
physical alternatives 474
for manholes 481
for outfalls 485
Pipe Catalog dialog box 287
pipe infilitration 412
pipe length 243
pipe-arch shape 743
pipeline infiltration 412
pipes
modeling with curves 234
splitting 237
point demand assignment 393
Pointer dialog box 622
polyline vertices 206
Polyline Vertices dialog box 207
Polyline-to-Pipe 159
PondPack
upgrade 3
power shape 749
predefined queries 278, 294
pressure

P
head 683, 684

pressure junctions 220
inflow alternatives for 502
pressure pipes
adding a minor loss collection to 204
print preview
FlexTables 563
Print Preview Window 644
printing
FlexTables 563
printing FlexTables 562
printing graphs 569
proejct queries 294
profile 788
editing 535
Profile Setup dialog box 536
Profile Viewer dialog box 537
profiles 531
creating 533
deleting 535
renaming 535
viewing 532
Profiles manager 532
project
files 659, 669, 670
project inventory 564
project properties 130
Project Properties dialog box 130
projection 393
projects 130
ProjectWise 12, 142
closing projects 144
general guidelines for using 144
guidelines 144
performing operations 145
using background layer files with 147
using with CivilStorm 144
using with SewerGEMS 144
viewing status 145
ProjectWise options 142
properties
editing 239
Properties Editor 46
Property Editor 240
using Find Element 240

Q
prototypes 279
creating 279
prototypes manager 280
proxies 674
publications 779
pump
affinity laws 716
constant horsepower 720
curve 716, 717, 720, 721
custom extended 720
impeller 717
multiple point 720
operating point 716, 717, 720
static head 717
static lift 716
theory 716
three point 720
type 720
variable speed 717
Pump Curve Definitions dialog box 221
pump curves 192
pump definitions 187
pump settings 221
pumps 221
716
defining settings for 221
Q 788
queries 294, 299, 557
creating 297
predefined 294
project 294
shared 294
using Like operator in 301
Queries Manager dialog box 295
Query Builder dialog box 299
ranking
reconnect 238
rectangular channel shape 747

S
rectangular-rounded shape 748

rectangular-triangular shape 749
references and textbooks 779
refresh 568
relabeling elements 241
Remove
Columns 560
removing elements from selection sets 274
renaming
FlexTables 553
renaming annotations 523
renaming background layers 514
report menu 23
report options 565
reporting
on a group of elements in a selection set 274
Reporting Time Step Type 433
reports 564
creating for elements 565
FlexTables 563
scenario 565
standard 564
reset
FlexTable filter 558
Reset Workspace 42
roughness
Chezy’s equation 685
Colebrook-White equation 685
Darcy-Weisbach equation 686
Hazen-Williams equation 686
Manning’s equation 688
roughness height 685, 687
rounding of numbers 242
rule based 304
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor 385

sanitary flow collection 788
sanitary flow collections
defining 384
sanitary load 788
sanitary load control center 384
sanitary loading 350
unit sanitary loads 362
sanitary loading alternative 498

S
for manholes 499

for wet wells 499
saving FlexTables as text 563
scenario example 457
Scenario Management 461
Example 457
Scenario Manager 465
scenario summary 565
scenarios 447, 788
advantages of using 448
attribute inheritance 455
attributes 452
base 463
batch run 464
calculation options for 504
creating new 463
editing 463
inheritance 453
local and inherited values in 455
overview 447, 450, 462
Scientific 243
section hydraulics
conduit shapes 737
select boundary polygon feature class 410
Select in Drawing button
in Query Manager 296
select the point 410
selecting all elements 236
selecting an element 236
selecting elements
all of the same type 236
selecting multiple elements 236
selection 473
Selection by Query dialog box 272
Selection Set Element Removal dialog box 274
selection sets 267, 268, 271, 274, 789
adding a group of elements to 273
adding elements to 273
creating 271, 272
creating from queries 271
group-level operations 274
in FlexTables 550
removing elements from 274
viewing elements in 270, 271
Selection Sets Manager 268
Selection tool 26

S
semi-circular shape 744

semi-ellipse shape 742
Set Field Options dialog box 242
setup 668
SewerGEMS
about 1
features 775
shapefile 181
Shapefile Properties dialog box 516
Shared Field Specification dialog box 330
shared queries 294
sharing engineering libraries on a network 285
shortcut keys
FlexTables 554
SI 242, 789
Simple Logical Action 317
simultaneous path adjustment method 722
smoothing contours 647
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 664, 673
Software 780
software
upgrades 3
sorting
sparse matrix 723, 726
spatial data 181
Split 209
splitting pipes 237
standard extended pump 720
standard reports 564
start node 731
starting a new project 130
static head
pump 717
static lift
pump 716
station 207
station-elevation curves 208
steady state analysis 421
steady-state analyses 421
stepwise patterns 356
Stieltjes 726
stop node 731
Stored Prompt Responses dialog box 135
StormCAD 777
submersible pump 227
support 783

T
addresses 784
hours 784
Swamee and Jain equation 687
SWG file 669
symbol
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 668
Synchronize 159
synchronize 162
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 670
System Head Curve editor 254
System Head Curves 253, 254
System Head Curves manager 253
system operating point 716
Table
Properties 559
Type 559
table
setup 559
tables 59
column headings 554
editing FlexTables 553
Manning’s n coefficients 764
units 554
tabular report 545
Technical Support 783
technical support 782, 783
TeeChart Gallery dialog box 635
text 663, 673
text height 138
multiplier 137
text tool 232
theme folders
renaming 522
theme groups
deleting 522
theory 675
Thiessen polygon generation 406
This 366
three point pump 720
Time Browser Options dialog box 423
time of simulation 569
Time Series Field Data 651
Tolerance 181

U
Toolbar buttons 41
toolbars 24, 41
customizing 41
tools menu 21
topology 179, 434, 435, 723
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor 251
Totalizing Flow Meter editor 251
Totalizing Flow Meter manager 250
Totalizing Flow Meter Manager Dialog 250
trapezoidal channel shape 738
TRex Wizard 335
TRex wizard 335
triangle shape 746
troubleshooting 444, 446
knowledge database 3
turning background layers on and off 514
turning toolbars off 42
turning toolbars on 42
tutorials 5
See also lessons.
types of loads 351
U.S. customary 242

Unit 242
unit hydrograph 789
unit loading 362
unit of measurement 242
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load dialog box 366
unit sanitary load 789
unit sanitary loading 362
unit sanitary loads 362
adding in engineering libraries 365
types of 362
units 138, 140
displaying in annotations 523
editing for FlexTables 554
units and formatting 242
Updates 3
updating PondPack via the Web 3
upgrade
PondPack 3
upstream node 235
user data extensions 321, 789
data types 326

V
enumerated 331
User Data Extensions dialog box 324
user defined hydrographs 354
User Notification Details dialog box 446
user notifications 444, 789
User Notifications Manager 444
validation 434, 435

variable speed pump
curve equations 717
variable speed pump batteries 230, 489
Variable Speed Pump Battery 230
variable speed pumps 717
velocity
head 684
vertices 206
view
tabular 545
view menu 18
viewing elements in a selection set 270, 271
viewing profiles 532
virtual conduits 789
visibility of symbols 668
VSPB 230, 489
warning messages 178

warnings 444
WaterCAD 777
custom AutoCAD entities 663, 671, 672
WaterCAD in AutoCAD 657, 665
WaterGEMS 776
WCD file 659, 670
Web updates 3
Website 784
weighted roughness method 761
weighting 758
welcome dialog 129
wet weather load 789
wet wells 217
inflow alternatives for 501

Y
white
table columns 553
window color settings 133
World Wide Web
See Web. 3
yellow
table cells 553
Z Order 664
zero flow at time 0 569
Zoom 266
Zoom Center 266
Zoom Center dialog box 267
zoom dependent visibility 526
Zoom Extents 265
Zoom Factor 267
Zoom In 264
Zoom Out 264
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next 266
Zoom Realtime 266
Zoom Window 265
zooming 264, 266
element tables
See also predefined FlexTables

Z

SewerCAD V8i User's Guide PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SewerCAD V8i User's Guide PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Chapter

“Getting Started” on page 1-1 “Loading” on page 7-349

“Starting a Project” on page 4-129 “Presenting Your Results” on page 10-509

“Using Modelbuilder” on page 5-157 “Working in AutoCAD Mode” on page 12-665

“Creating Your Model” on page 6-203 “Theory” on page 13-675

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide 1-1

Chapter 1: Getting Started1

Chapter 2: Introducing the Workspace7

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-i

Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons71

Contents-ii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Chapter 4: Starting a Project129

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-iii

Chapter 6: Creating Your Model203

Contents-iv Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Variable Speed Pump Batteries6-230

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-v

Contents-vi Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-vii

Chapter 8: Calculating Your Model421

Chapter 9: Using Scenarios and Alternatives447

Contents-viii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-ix

Chapter 10: Presenting Your Results509

Contents-x Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xi

Contents-xii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Chapter 11: Features of the MicroStation Version

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xiii

Chapter 12: Working in AutoCAD Mode665

Chapter 13: Theory675

Contents-xiv Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xv

Contents-xvi Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Appendix 14: References771

Chapter 15: About Bentley Systems773

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide Contents-xvii

Contents-xviii Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

What is Bentley SewerCAD V8i?

SewerCAD V8i allows you to construct a graphical representation of a pipe network

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide 1-1

Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration

1-2 Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT

Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program

For more information, see “Contact Bentley Systems” on page 15-783.

Because of the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications

1. Shut down and restart your computer.

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide 1-3

Updating Your SentinelLM Licenses if You Move Your License

1. Install the license file on the new server.

Updating Your Bentley SELECT Server Licenses if you Move Your

Checking Your Current Registration Status

To view your registration information

1. Select Help > About Bentley SewerCAD V8i Edition.

1-4 Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

Note: On-screen display of graphics in .pdf files is dependent on the

Quick Start Lessons

Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide 1-5

1-6 Bentley SewerCAD V8i User’s Guide

• “The Workspace” on page 2-7

• “Stand-Alone Editor” on page 2-7